I ?r.- 
 
 ■ r 
 
Glass ) L -THVjn * 
 
 Book A/ -5" 
 
 I <J 1 7 
 

 PORTUGUESE 
 
 GRAMMAR: 
 
 WITH 
 
 THE PORTUGUESE WORDS PROPERLY ACCENTED 
 
 ACCORDING TO THE LATEST AND BEST AUTHORITIES. 
 
 By ANTHONY VIEYRA. 
 
 THE TENTH EDITION, 
 REVISED AND IMPROVED. 
 
 " Necesse est enim inter quos mercaturte et contractuum sint, inter eos 
 quoque sermonis esse commercial— Ubertus Folieta. 
 
 LONDON: 
 PRINTED FOR J. COLLINGWOOD, IN THE STRAND. 
 
 19«7« 
 

 ^PC So & (* 
 
 T. C. HANSARD, Patferno*ter-rovv Press. 
 
THE AUTHOR'S PREFACE, 
 
 j4.S the usefulness of the Portuguese Language is so well 
 known to all English merchants who carry on a general trade 
 ivith the different Parts of the known world, it will be need- 
 less to use any arguments here to prove it ; and I shall refer 
 tvhat I have to say on the copiousness and energy of this 
 language, to the Preface to my English and Portuguese 
 Dictionary. # 
 
 The reader will find in the FIRST PART of this Gram- 
 mar, what is material as a foundation of the whole. 
 
 At the end of the SECOND PART is a full explanation 
 of' the Particles, on which I have bestowed more time and 
 labour, because this subject has been hitherto much neglected, 
 although the principal ornament and elegance not only of 
 the Portuguese, but of every other language, chiefly consist 
 in the proper arrangement and judicious interspersion of 
 the words. 
 
 * '" I m - i i i n r I ■ ■ ii ii i 11 i i n ■ i. i ii i n 1 — — wm» 
 
 * A New Edition of which is now in the Press.— Jan. 1827. 
 
IV 
 
 In the THIRD PART is a larger collection than hitherto 
 published of the termsof T rave, War, Navigation, &c. 
 which the present intercourse between the nations renders 
 •particularly useful. 
 
 Having found a great difficulty in procuring Portuguese 
 books in this Country, I have been commonly obliged to 
 furnish with part of my private collection those Gentlemen 
 whom I have had the honour of assisting in the study of this 
 language, during my residence here; therefore, in the 
 FOURTH PART I have given some passages selected 
 from the best Portuguese Authors, and which will, at the 
 same time, facilitate the reading of their most eminent 
 writers. 
 
ADVERTISEMENT 
 
 TO 
 
 THE NINTH EDITION. 
 
 1 HIS new Edition of Mr. Vieyra's Grammar has been 
 not only accurately marked with the proper accents, to 
 facilitate the Pronunciation and the Intelligence of the 
 Language, but even materially altered in the body of the 
 Work. The accentuation is a matter of so much conse- 
 quence in the Portuguese Language, that one accent used 
 in the room of another often changes entirely the signifi- 
 cation of the word ; as for instance in the words Avo and 
 Av6 ; the former, when marked with an acute, meaning 
 grand-mother, the latter with a circumflex, meaning grand- 
 father. This interesting part, in which all the former 
 Editions have been so deficient (using only the acute) 
 has been scrupulously corrected in the present one. In 
 that part which treats of the Pronunciation, some very 
 necessary corrections have been introduced. The pro- 
 nunciation of the ch, wrongly explained in the other 
 Editions, is in. this brought to its real sound. 
 
VI 
 
 New passages from the best Modern Writers have been 
 substituted for some of the Ancient ones, to enable the 
 learners to form a proper idea of the variations and progress 
 of the Language, down to the present time. A new Vo- 
 cabulary of the Military Words of Command and a fresh 
 Translation of the Commercial Letters have also been 
 inserted in this Edition. # 
 
 Such are the principal alterations made in this Work, 
 which, it is hoped, will meet with the approbation of the 
 public. 
 
 London , May 1813. 
 
 * Various Improvements have been made in the present Edition, 
 (Jan. 1827) particularly in a general correction of the Phraseology 
 of the English part of the Grammar. 
 
CONTENTS. 
 
 PART I. 
 
 Page 
 OF the Portuguese Alphabet, and the manner of pronouncing 
 
 each separate Letter ------ 1 
 
 Of the manner of pronouncing the Portuguese Letters as 
 
 combined in Syllables - - - - » - .3 
 Of the Articles - - ' - - - -*.-8 
 
 Of the Nouns - - - 11 
 
 Of the Pronouns - - - - - - -25 
 
 Of Verbs - 44 
 
 Of the Participles - - - - - - -113 
 
 Of the Adverbs 114 
 
 Of the Prepositions - - • - - - - -117 
 
 Of the Conjunctions - - - - - - -118 
 
 Interjective Particles - - - - - -120 
 
 Some Abbreviations used in the Portuguese Language -121 
 
 PART II. 
 
 Of the Division of Syntax - - - - - - 122 
 
 Of the Syntax of Articles - 126 
 
 Of the Syntax of Nouns, and first, of the Substantives - 131 
 
 Of the Syntax of Adjectives - - 132 
 
 Of the Syntax of the Comparatives and Superlatives - 135 
 
 Of the Syntax of Pronouns - - - - --13(5 
 
 Of the Syntax of Verbs -139 
 
 Of the Syntax of Participles and Gerunds - - » 1 52 
 
 Of Prepositions -. - - - - - « - 154 
 
vm 
 
 Of the Portuguese Orthography « - - « *. 191 
 
 Of the Quantity of Syllables, and their Sound - - 209 
 
 Etymology of the Portuguese Tongue from the Latin - 215 
 
 PART III. 
 
 The most elegant Phrases of the Portuguese Language -218 
 
 A Vocabulary of Words most used in Discourse - - 249 
 
 Of the Portuguese Coin • • ' « - - - - 306 
 
 A Collection of Portuguese Proverbs - - 307 
 
 Familiar Dialogues -----'« - 3l6 
 
 Letters on Mercantile Affairs, &c, » « « - 331 
 
 PART IV. 
 
 Several useful and entertaining Passages, collected from the 
 
 best Portuguese Writers ----- 356 
 
 A NEW 
 
A NEW 
 
 PORTUGUESE 
 
 GRAMMAR, 
 
 PART I. 
 
 CHAP. I. 
 
 OF THE PORTUGUESE ALPHABET, AND THE 
 MANNER OF PRONOUNCING EACH SEPARATE 
 LETTER. 
 
 ^HE Portuguese alphabet contains twenty-four 
 letters, viz. 
 
 A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, L, M, N, O, P, 
 Q, R, S, T 5 U, V, X, Y, Z. 
 
 The A is expressed by a sound like that of a in 
 the English words at, rat, fat, &c. 
 
 B is expressed by a sound like that of the be, in 
 the first syllable of the English word Betty. 
 
 C is expressed by a sound like that of the first 
 syllable of the English word celebrated. 
 
 D is expressed by a sound like that of the first 
 syllable of the English word declare. 
 
 E is expressed by a sound like that which we give 
 to the English a when we pronounce the word care. 
 
 B 
 
2 PO RTUGUE&E 
 
 F is expressed by the same sound as in English. 
 
 G is expressed by a sound like that of the first 
 syllable of s £l^p .English word generation. 
 
 H is expressed by a sound like that of the Eng- 
 lish woi d /tohas't, if you cut off the two last letters 
 st, and ksgpFthe accent on the second a, 
 
 I is expressed by the sound of ce. 
 
 J is gdR&wkjonsodnte, it is expressed by the sound 
 of ee, and hasjj&e same power as the g before e or i. 
 
 L, as in English. 
 
 M, as in English. 
 
 N, as in English. 
 
 O ha* nearly the same sound as in the English 
 worijj&re. 
 
 P is expressed by a sound like that of pe in the 
 English word penny. 
 
 Q is expressed by a sound like that of the Eng- 
 lish k. 
 
 R is expressed by a sound like that of the English . 
 participle erred, if you cut off the last letter d. 
 
 S, "ns in English. 
 
 T is expressed by a sound like that of tha in the 
 English word Thames. 
 
 U is expressed by a sound like that of oo in the 
 English word poop. 
 
 V is expressed by a sound like that of oo ; they 
 call it also oo consoante, i. e. the v consonant. 
 
 X is expressed by a sound like that of our pro- 
 noun personal she, if you add an s to it, or as shees. 
 
 Y is expressed by a sound like that of an tin the 
 English word visible, and is called ypsiion. 
 
 Z is expressed by the sound of our English zed, 
 leaving out the d, or zea. 
 
GRAMMAR. 3 
 
 Of the manner of Pronouncing the Portuguese Letters 
 as combined in Syllables ; and first 
 
 OF THE VOWELS. 
 
 A, 
 
 In Portuguese, is commonly pronounced like a 
 in the following English words adapted, castle, &c. 
 It is sometimes pronounced with less strength, and 
 closely, as in dmbos, where the a is pronounced like 
 a in the English word ambition. 
 
 E. 
 
 The letter e has two different sounds ; the one 
 open like ai in daily : the other close, like that in 
 the English word mellow. Examples of the former, 
 fe, faith, pe, foot, &c. Examples of the latter, rede, 
 a net, parede, a wall, &c. In this consists a great 
 part of the beauty of the Portuguese pronunciation, 
 which, however, cannot be learned but by long use, 
 notwithstanding all the rules that can be^given. 
 
 Is pronounced like ee in the English word steel, 
 aco ; or like i in the English words still, afnda ; 
 visible, visivel. 
 
 O. 
 
 This vowel has two sounds ; one open, as in the 
 word do, pity, where the o is pronounced like our 
 o in the word store ; the other close, as in the Por- 
 tuguese article do, of, and the word redondo, round, 
 where the o is pronounced like our u in turret or 
 stumble. It is likewise in the different pronuncia- 
 tion of this vowel that the greatest part of the beauty 
 of the Portuguese pronunciation consists ; but it 
 can be learned only by long use. 
 
 b 2 
 
P ORTUGUESE 
 
 U. 
 
 The vowel n is pronounced like oo in English. 
 
 Y 
 
 Has the same sound as the Portuguese vowel i. 
 
 OF CONSONANTS. 
 
 B 
 
 Keeps always the same sound as in English. 
 
 C 
 
 Before a, o, w, and the consonants /, r, is properly 
 pronounced as k; but before e and i it takes the 
 hissing sound of s : it takes also the sound of s before 
 a, o, it, when there is a clash under it thus c. 
 
 I could wish the learned in Portugal would follow 
 the resolution of "the Royal Academy of Madrid, by 
 expunging such dash, and placing the sin its stead, 
 since they have in both languages the same hissing 
 sound, which frequently occasions great confusion 
 in the proper use of them. 
 
 C before h is pronounced like sh in the English 
 words shine, shape, &c. 
 
 Double c is sounded only before e and i, the first 
 with the sound of k, and the other with the hissing 
 sound of s; as in accidente, accident, pronounce 
 aksidente. 
 
 D 
 
 Is pronounced in Portuguese as in English. 
 
 F 
 
 Is pronounced always as in English. 
 
 G 
 
 Before the vowels a, o, u, and before consonants, 
 is pronounced as in English : example, gosto, taste ; 
 gaiola, cage ; grito, a cry. 
 
GRAMMAR. 5 
 
 G. before e and i denotes the sound of J conso- 
 nant. 
 
 Gua sounds almost like the English wa : ex- 
 ample, guarda, pronounce gwarda. 
 
 Gue, gui, are pronounced as gue in the word 
 guest, and gui in the word gift ; but in the verbs 
 arguir and redarguir, it is pronounced as if it were 
 written argueer, &c. 
 
 H. 
 
 The letter h is never aspirated nor pronounced 
 at the beginning of words, as libra, an hour ; homem, 
 a man : according to the modern orthography, all 
 those words are written without an h. 
 
 H, when preceded by a c, makes a sound with it 
 like our sh. See the letter C, and also the letters 
 L and N. 
 
 Is pronounced like ourj consonant. 
 
 K. 
 
 The Portuguese have no k. 
 
 L 
 
 Is pronounced in Portuguese as in English, 
 - Lh, is pronounced like g before an / in the Italian 
 words figlio,foglio, &c. 
 
 M 
 
 Is pronounced as in English, when placed before 
 a vowel with which it forms a syllable ; but, when 
 it is at the end of words, and preceded by the letter 
 e, it forms in Portuguese a nasal sound like that of 
 the French words vin 9 wine ; pain, bread ; except 
 soem, idem, from the verbs soar, toar, and some 
 others. 
 
 M at the end of words preceded by an a, o, or 
 i, has a nasal obtuse sound, which can only be 
 earned from the mouth of a mas r* 
 
6 PORTUGUESE 
 
 N 
 
 Before a vowel with which it forms a syllable, 
 is pronounced as in English ; otherwise, it only 
 gives a nasal sound to the vowel that precedes it. 
 
 N before h has the same sound as gn in Italian, 
 or in the French words Espagne, Allemagne. 
 
 P 
 
 And ph are pronounced as in English. 
 
 Q 
 
 Is pronounced like k: example, quero I am wil 
 ling, pronounce hero. 
 
 The vowel u after q in the word qua I, which 
 must be uttered so smoothly as to render it almost 
 imperceptible to the ear, is pronounced as in the 
 English word quantity, in order to distinguish it 
 from the substantive cal, lime. 
 
 R 
 
 And double r are pronounced as in English. 
 
 S ♦ 
 
 And ss are pronounced as in English. 
 
 S between two vowels is pronounced like a z ; 
 particularly in the words ending in oso, and esa, as 
 amordso, cuidaddso, mesa, defesa, &. 
 
 T 
 
 Is pronounced as in English. 
 
 y 
 
 Is pronounced as in English. 
 
 X 
 
 Is pronounced as ah in English ; except in the 
 word axioma, in which, according to Feyjo, the x is 
 to be pronounced like c. 
 
GRAMMAR. 7 
 
 X after the vowel e is pronounced like es, in the 
 words, extencam, extenuddo, expulso> excellent e, and 
 some other words. 
 
 X between two vowels is pronounced like gz in 
 the words exact aniente, exorndr ; except Alexandre, 
 Paixdm, Puxo, bdxo, and some other words, that 
 maybe learned by use. Care must be taken to pro- 
 nounce the g so smoothly as to render it almost im- 
 perceptible to the ear. 
 
 Z 
 
 Is pronounced as in English, but at the end of 
 words it is pronounced like s, asrapdz, boy ; Fran- 
 cez, French ; perdiz, partridge ; voz, voice ; luz, 
 light, &c. 
 
 The little dash which the Portuguese call til, is 
 set by them over some letters instead of m; as be 
 instead of bem ; conve instead of convent; hua instead 
 of huma; and as it is then to be considered as an m, 
 see what we have said about the pronunciation of 
 that letter. 
 
 The til," is also placed over the vowels, ao, aa, 
 in the end of words, thus ao ad. See what we have 
 said above of m at the end of words preceded by 
 an a. 
 
 It may be here observed that the curved mark," 
 is the most perfect, though it is often found neces- 
 sary, in English types, to substitute the plain in- 
 stead of the curved. 
 
 OF DIPHTHONGS. 
 
 The meeting of two vowels in one syllable con- 
 stitute what is called a Diphthong. The following 
 are the Diphthongs of the Portuguese language. 
 
 Aa, as in macda, an apple. 
 
 Ae, as in caes, dogs. 
 
 Ay, as in pay, father. 
 
 Ai, as in mdis, more. 
 
 Ao, as in pao, wood. 
 
 Au, as in causa, a cause. 
 
8 PORTUGUESE 
 
 Eo, as in do, heaven. 
 
 Ey, as in ret/, king. 
 
 Ei, as in amei, I loved. 
 
 Eu, as en, I. 
 
 Jo, as wo, he saw. 
 
 Oe, as in poem, they put ; compoem, they com- 
 pose ; meloes, melons, &c. 
 
 Oj/, as in buy, an ox : /(1y, he was. 
 
 On, as cMm, I give ; sou, I am. 
 
 Ue, as aziies, blue : 
 
 The two vowels in the following words must be 
 plainly and distinctly pronounced : 
 
 Ai, as in paiz, a country, pronounce pa-'iz. 
 
 Ea, as mlamprea, a lamprey, pronounce lampre-a. 
 
 la, as dementia, clemency, pronounce demenci-a. 
 
 lo, as in navio, a ship, pronounce navi-o. 
 
 Iu, as viuva, a widow, pronounce vi-uva. 
 
 Oa, as Lisbon, Lisbon, jt?r<fa, a prow, pronounce 
 Lisbo-a, &c. 
 
 Oe, as J&tw, $<fe7W, from the verbs, toar and wir, 
 pronounce tu-em, &c. 
 
 Of, as roim, bad, pronounce ro-zw. 
 
 O0, as cooperacdm, co-operation, pronounce, co- 
 oper a cao. 
 
 Ui, as ruina, ruin, pronounce ru-ina. 
 
 CHAP. II. 
 
 OF THE ARTICLES. 
 
 THOSE particles called Articles, are properly 
 prepositions, commonly put before nouns, to shew 
 their gender, number, and case. 
 
 These articles are definite or indefinite. 
 
 Of the Definite Article. 
 
 The definite article marks the gender, number,, 
 and case, of the nouns which it precedes^ 
 
GRAMMAR. 9 
 
 The English tongue has but one definitive article, 
 namely the, which serves for both numbers. 
 
 The Portuguese has two, viz. for the masculine 
 and a for the feminine. 
 
 The definite article has five cases, the nominative, 
 genitive, dative, accusative, and ablative ; because 
 the vocative in the nouns is designed and preceded 
 merely by the particle 0. 
 
 The Declension of the Masculine Article o. 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 Nominative, o, the Nominative, os, the 
 
 Genitive, do, of the Genitive, dos, of the 
 
 Dative, ao, or o, to the Dative, aos, or os, to the 
 
 Accusative, ao, or d, the Accusative, aos, or os, the 
 
 Ablative, do. from or by the Ablative, dos, from or by the 
 
 The Declension of the Feminine Article a. 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 Nominative, a, the Nominative, as, the 
 
 Genitive, da, of the Genitive, das, of the 
 
 Dative, a to the Dative, as, to the 
 
 Accusative, a, the Accusative, as, the 
 
 Ablative, da, from the Ablative, das, from or by the 
 
 Observe, that the Portuguese have an article for 
 each gender, both in the singular and the plural. 
 
 Of the Indefinite Article. 
 
 The indefinite article may be put before the mas- 
 culine as well as the feminine gender, before the 
 plural as well as the singular number. 
 
 The indefinite article has but four cases, the 
 genitive, dative, accusative, and ablative. 
 
 De may be put before a noun masculine as well 
 as feminine, as huma cor 6a de rey, a king's crown ; 
 the word rey is masculine ; hum chapeo de pdlha, a 
 hat of straw ; the word pdlha is of the feminine 
 gender. 
 
 The indefinite article de is also put before the 
 plural as well as the singular number ; example. 
 
10 PORTUGUESE 
 
 huma corda de flu res, a crown of flowers ; hum prcito 
 de arrdz, a plate of rice. 
 
 Declension of the Indefinite Article. 
 
 Genitive, de, of Accusative, a 
 
 Dative, a, to, Ablative, de from 
 
 The accusative of tb's article is not expressed in 
 English : example, Eu conheci a she pay, I knew his 
 father, eu conheci a sua may, I knew his mother. 
 
 The indefinite article may also be put before infi- 
 nitives, and then it signifies to ; as he tempo defalldr, 
 dedormir, de ler, &c. it is time to speak, to sleep, 
 to read, &c. eu vou a ver, a foliar, I am going to 
 see, to speak. 
 
 N. B. Whenever we meet with of and to in Eng- 
 lish, followed by the, remember they are the indefi- 
 nite articles, and then we must use the indefinite 
 article de, or a, in Portuguese. 
 
 When the verb is in the infinitive mood, and 
 serves as nominative to the following verb, put the 
 article o before it ; as o comer e o dormir sao as 
 cousas mais necessarias nesta vida, eating and sleep- 
 ing are the greatest necessaries of life. 
 
 When the preposition in is followed by the article 
 the, or by a pronoun possessive, as in the, in my, in 
 thy, in his, we must render it in Portuguese by em 
 o or no, em, os, or nos for the masculine ; and by em 
 a or na, em as or nas, for the feminine : example, in 
 the garden, em o jar dim, or no jar dim; in the street, 
 em a rua or na rua ; in thy book, em o teu or no teu 
 livro ; in his bed, em a sua, or na sua cdma, &c. 
 
 When after the preposition with, which in Portu- 
 guese is expressed by com, we find the article the, 
 or a pronoun possessive, as with the, with my, &c. 
 we may say, com o, or co, com a or coa, com os or 
 cos com as or coas: example, with the prince, com 
 o or co principe ; with the sword, com a or coa espdda ; 
 with the eyes, com os or cos olhos ; with my books, 
 com os or cos me us livros, &c. 
 
GRAMMAR. 11 
 
 When the preposition with is followed by a pro- 
 noun possessive, and this by a noun of quality or 
 kindred, as with your majesty ', with your highness, 
 with your excellency, with his brother, &c. with must 
 then be rendered by the Portuguese word com, as 
 com vossa, majestade com vossa alteza, com seu irmao, 
 without using the article. 
 
 Observe, that sometimes the dative and accusative 
 of the indefinite article are not expressed in English, 
 particularly before pronouns ^personal and proper 
 names ; example, convem a nbs, it behoves us ; 
 Antonio matou a Pedro, Anthony killed Peter. 
 
 CHAP. III. 
 
 OF THE NOUNS. 
 
 THE Portuguese nouns have various termina- 
 tions, as will appear hereafter. 
 
 They have but two genders, the masculine and 
 feminine. 
 
 The Portuguese nouns have no variation of cases, 
 like the Latin, the article only distinguishes the 
 case. 
 
 Of Nouns ending in a ; and of their Declension, 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 Nom. a rainha, the -* Norn, as rainhas, the 
 
 Gen. da rainha, of the J Gen. das rainhas, of the 
 
 Dat. a rainha, to theF ^ Dat. as rainhas, to thej 
 
 Ace. a rainha, the \ 8 Ace. as rainhas, the 
 
 Voc. 6 rainha, Oi g- Voc. 6 rainhas, O 
 
 Abl. da ou pella rainha, \ Abl. das ou pellas rainhas 
 from or by the J from or by the 
 
 We have already observed that the Portuguese 
 nouns have no variation of cases ; therefore there is 
 
12 PORT UGUESE 
 
 no occasion to display more examples of their 
 declensions, as it is only necessary to change the 
 article according to their gender. 
 
 Of the Gender of Nouns ending in a. 
 
 Nouns ending in a are generally of the feminine 
 gender ; as rosa, a rose ; janella, a window, &c. 
 Except dia, a day, planeta a planet ; and other 
 nouns ending in a, belonging to a man ; as mariola, 
 a porter ; jesuita, a Jesuit : those derived from the 
 Greek are likewise masculine ; as dogma, epigrdmma, 
 clima ; except scientific names, as mathematica, 
 theologia, Sec. 
 
 Except also from this general rule some nouns 
 that have the accent upon the last syllable ; as alva- 
 ra, a charter, or a prince's letters patent ; Para, one 
 of the captainships of the Portuguese America, &c. 
 
 Observe, that the plural of nouns ending in a is 
 formed by adding the letter s to the singular; as 
 likewise the plural of all nouns that terminate in 
 vowels. 
 
 Observe also, that nouns ending in aa are of the 
 feminine gender, and form their plural as those 
 ending in a. 
 
 Of the Gender of Nouns ending in e. 
 
 Nouns ending in e are generally of the masculine 
 gender ; as dente, a tooth ; valle, a valley ; ventre 
 the womb, &c. 
 
 The exceptions are ft, faith ; fonte, a fountain ; 
 chdve, a key ; torre, a tower ; ewe, a fowl ; came, 
 flesh or meat ; gente, people ; mbrte, death ; neve 
 snow ; noite, night ; po?ite 9 a bridge; piste, plague ; 
 parte, part ; serpente, a serpent ; lebre a hare. 
 
 Except also ail names of virtues, vices, faculties, 
 and those expressive of the passions of the mind ; as 
 virtude, virtue ; santidade, holiness ; bojidade, good- 
 ness; vaidade > vanity ; ocksidade y idleness* &c* 
 
GRAMMAR. 13 
 
 Thirdly, iddde, age ; velhice, old age ; rusticiddde, 
 rusticity ; capaciddde, capacity ; feliciddde, happi- 
 ness ; sbrte, fortune ; arte, art ; drvore, a tree ; 
 fertiliddde, fertility ; side, thirst ; sibe, a hedge ; couve, 
 cabbage ; herddde, a farm or manor ; diamine, a 
 chimney ; parede, a wall ; saude, health ; rede, a net ; 
 mare, the tide ; fibre, fever ; gale, a gallery, &c. 
 
 Of the Gender of Nouns ending in i. 
 
 Nouns ending in i are masculine; as Lvtasi, a 
 rapture ; nebri, a hawk, &c. 
 
 Of Nouns ending in o. 
 
 Nouns ending in o are of the masculine gender ; 
 as livro, a book ; filho, a son ; brdco, an arm ; vestido, 
 a garment ; espelho, 2l looking glass, &c. Except 
 ndo, a ship ; jilho, a fritter or pancake ; eiro, an 
 eel. 
 
 Of Nouns ending in u. 
 
 All nouns ending in u are masculine ; as peril, a 
 turkey ; grou, a crane. 
 
 Of Nouns ending in y. 
 
 Nouns ending in y are of the masculine gender ; 
 as rey, king ; pay, father ; boy, ox, &c. except ley, 
 a law ; may, a mother. 
 
 Of the other Terminations of Nouns, or of those ter- 
 minating in Consonants. 
 
 1. All nouns ending in at are masculine; as 
 sindl; a sign or token ; sal, salt. Except cal, lime, 
 which is feminine, and has no plural. 
 
 The plural of these nouns is formed by changing 
 the letter / of the singular into es ; as sindes from 
 sindl ; animdes from animal. 
 
 2. Nouns ending in ar are of the masculine gen- 
 der ; as ar air. 
 
 The plural of these nouns is formed by adding es 
 to the singular, as ares from ar. 
 
14 PORTUGUESE 
 
 Some nouns ending in as in the plural are femi 
 nine, and have no singular ; as migas, excquias, 
 &c. 
 
 3. Nouns ending in az are of the masculine gen- 
 der ; as rapaz, a boy ; except paz, peace. The 
 plural is formed by the addition of es to the singular. 
 
 4. Nouns ending in el are masculine; as annel ; 
 a ring ; papel, paper, &c. 
 
 The plural of these nouns is formed by changing 
 the / of the singular into is; a?ineis, from anntl: 
 papas, from papel. 
 
 5. Nouns ending in em are of the masculine 
 gender ; as ho?ne??i, a man ; hem, benefit, &c. 
 Except ordem, order ; viagem, a voyage ; vir- 
 ge??i, a virgin, &c. but salvage??!, a savage, is com- 
 mon. 
 
 The plural of these nouns is formed by changing 
 the m of the singular into ?is ; as homens from ho- 
 mem, Sec. 
 
 6. Nouns ending in er are of the masculine 
 gender ; as pode?\ power ; prazer, pleasure, &c. 
 Except colher, a spoon ; mulher, a woman. 
 
 The plural of these nouns is formed by adding es 
 to the singular, as colheres, from colher. 
 
 7. Nouns ending in ez are of the masculine 
 gender ; as freguez, a parishioner or a customer ; 
 mez, month ; arnez, levez, revez, &c. Except 
 surdez, deafness ; torquez, vez, Sec. 
 
 The plural of these nouns is formed by adding es 
 to the singular, as freguezes, from f?*eguez ; but 
 tez has no plural. 
 
 8. Nouns ending in il are of the masculine gen- 
 der ; asfunil, a funnel ; barril, a barrel. 
 
 The plural of these nouns is formed by changing 
 the / of the singular into s, as funis, from fimil, &c. 
 Except acjuatil, fatil, pe?tsil, &c. which change the 
 il into eis in the plural, asfacies, fromfacil. 
 
 9. Nouns ending in i?n are of the masculine gen- 
 der, as espadim, a little sword. 
 
GRAMMAR. 15 
 
 The plural of these nouns is formed by changing 
 the m of the singular into ns, as espadins from es~ 
 padim. 
 
 10. Nouns ending in ir or yr are of the mas- 
 culine gender ; but mdrtir or martyr, a martyr, is 
 common. * 
 
 The plural of these nouns is formed by adding es 
 to the singular. 
 
 11. All nouns ending in iz are of the mascu- 
 line gender ; as apprendiz, an apprentice ; nariz, 
 uose ; verniz, varnish ; matiz, a shadowing in paint- 
 ing ; chafariz, chamariz, &c. Except abo'iz, perdiz, 
 raiz, codornix, matriz, &c. 
 
 The plural of these nouns is formed by adding es 
 to the singular, as perdizes from perdiz. 
 
 12. Nouns ending in ol are of the masculine gen- 
 der ; as anzbl, a hook ; sdl, the sun, &c. 
 
 The plural of these nouns is formed by changing 
 the / of the singular into es, as anzbes from anzol, 
 &c. 
 
 13. Nouns ending in om are of the masculine gen- 
 der ; as soin, sound ; dom, gift, &c. 
 
 The plural of these nouns is formed by changing 
 the m of the singular into ns, as sons from som, &c. 
 
 14. Nouns ending in or are of the masculine gen- 
 der ; as amor ; love, temor, fear, &c. Except dor, 
 pain ; cor, colour, &c. 
 
 The plural of these nouns is formed by adding es 
 to the singular, as amores from amor. 
 
 Nouns ending in os are of the masculine gender ; 
 as Decs, God. 
 
 The plural of these nouns is formed by changing 
 the s into zes, as De'ozes, from Deos. 
 
 15. Nouns ending in oz are of the masculine gen- 
 der : as albernoz, a Moorish coat ; arroz, rice ; algoz, 
 hangman, &c. Except noz, a walnut ; voz, voice ; 
 fbz the mouth of a river. 
 
 The plural of these nouns is formed by adding es 
 to the singular. 
 
16 PORTUGUESE 
 
 16. Nouns ending in id or um are of the mascu- 
 line gender; as sul, the south ; Saul, Saul, a proper 
 name of a man ; atum, tunny-fish. 
 
 The plural of those ending in ul, according to the 
 learned Bluteau, is formed by changing the /of the 
 singular into es, as sues from sul ; azues, from azul, 
 blue, &c. Except consules from consul, a consul. 
 
 The plural of those ending in um, is formed by 
 changing the m of the singular into ns, as atuns 
 from at urn. 
 
 17. Nouns ending in uz are of the masculine 
 gender ; as arcabuz, an arquebuss. 
 
 The plural of these nouns is formed by adding es 
 to the singular. 
 
 18. Nouns ending in ao are of the feminine gen- 
 der ; as mad, hand ; composigad, composition, ora- 
 cao, oration, &c. Except pad, bread ; anao, a 
 dwarf; ougad, a hand-worm ; trovao, thunder ; es- 
 quadrad, a squadron ; piao, a child's top ; borrad, 
 a blot with Ink ; papelao, paste-board ; chad, the 
 ground, quinhao, a share. 
 
 There is no certain rule for the formation of the 
 plural of the nouns ending in ao ; because some 
 change the ao, of the singular into aes, as Alemdes, 
 from Alemao, a German ; capitdes, from capitad, a 
 captain ; cues, from cad, a dog ; paes, from pad, a 
 loaf, &c. Some change the ad of the singular into 
 aos ; as cidadaos, from cidadad, a citizen ; chris- 
 taos, from christao, a christian ; cortezdos from cor- 
 tezad a courtier ; villdos, from villad, a villain, &c. 
 Some change the ad of the singular into des ; as es- 
 quadrdes, from esquadrad, a squadron ; trovdes, from 
 trovao, thunder ; conclusdes, from conclusao, a con- 
 clusion ; oragdes, from oracad, an oration ; and 
 generally all the Portuguese nouns may be easily 
 made English, by changing their termination gad 
 into the English termination tlon, as declinagad, 
 declension or declination, consider agad, considera- 
 tion, &c. and these are of the feminine gender. 
 
GRAMMAR. 17 
 
 19 All nouns signifying a male must be of the 
 masculine gender ; as duque, duke ; marquez, a 
 marquis ; conde, count ; and those denoting a female 
 are always feminine. 
 
 Two general rules may be formed from what has 
 been said concerning the formation of the plural of 
 nouns, viz. 
 
 I. That all nouns ending in any of the vowels 
 have their plural formed by adding the letter s to 
 the singular. 
 
 II. That the plural of nouns ending in az, ez, iz, 
 oz, nz, is formed by adding es to the singular. 
 
 Of A ugmentatives. 
 
 The Portuguese have their augmentatives formed 
 by the increase of one or two syllables, which 
 they add to the end of their nouns, and which serve 
 either to augment the signification of nouns, or to 
 declare a thing contemptible ; thus, from homem, 
 a man, they form, homemzarro, a great strong 
 man ; tolo, a fool, toleirao, a great fool, &c. and 
 some others that may be learned by use. They have 
 also their augmentatives for the feminine; as 
 molherona, a great stout woman ; toleirona, &c. 
 
 There are a great many nouns that appear, by 
 their termination, to be augmentatives, though they 
 are not ; as, forao, a ferret ; atafona, an ass or a 
 horse-mill, &c. 
 
 Of Diminutives. 
 
 The diminutives lessen the' signification of their 
 primitives. 
 
 The diminutives in the Portuguese language are 
 always formed by changing the last vowel of the 
 primitives into mho ; but they denote either small- 
 ness of things, or kindness and flattery ; as bichinho, 
 a little worm, from b/cho, a worm ; coitadmho, from 
 coitddo, a poor little man ; bonitinho, a little pretty 
 
 c 
 
18 PORTUGUESE 
 
 person or thing-, from bonito, pretty. Sometimes 
 they are tor in eel by adding zinho to the primitives ; 
 as cad zinho, a little dog, from can, a dog, irmaoz'inho, 
 dear little brother, from innao, &c. 
 
 The diminutives that serve for the feminine have 
 their termination in inha, or zinha ; as mabzinha, 
 a little hand, from mad, a hand ; cabecinka, a little 
 head, from cabeca, a head. It may be seen from the 
 last example, that the diminutives serving for the 
 feminine and ending in inha, are formed by chang- 
 ing the last syllable a of the primitive into inha. 
 
 Observe that many nouns appear to be diminu- 
 tives without being so ; as moinho, a mill ; espinha, 
 a fish bone. 
 
 Note, the diminutives in Portuguese convey some- 
 times a bad meaning, and denote contempt. 
 
 Of Nouns Adjective. 
 
 All adjectives ending in o make their feminine by 
 changing o into a; as douta, from douto, learned ; 
 but mdo, bad, makes ma in the feminine. 
 
 Those which end in ao have their feminine in aa ; 
 as, saa, from sao, healthy ; loucaa, from loucao, brisk, 
 gay, beautiful ; meaa, from meao } middling, ordi- 
 nary. 
 
 Those ending in e are common to both genders ; 
 2^,f6rte ) strong, &c. 
 
 Those which end in m make their feminine by 
 adding an a to the masculine ; as, huma, from hum, 
 one ; alguma, from alg/cm, some, &c. and sometimes 
 by changing the m into a ; as, commua, from corn- 
 mum, common ; boa, from bom, good. 
 
 Those ending in u make their feminine by adding 
 an a to the masculine, as nua, from nu, naked ; 
 crua, from cru, raw. 
 
 Those ending in ez are common to both genders ; 
 as cortez, civil, kind ; capaz, capable, &c. except 
 some which make the feminine, by adding a to the 
 
GRAMMAR. 19 
 
 masculine; as, Franceza, from Francez, French; 
 Portugueza, from Portuguez, Portuguese. 
 
 Espanhol, Spanish, makes Espanhola in the femi- 
 nine: but generally those which end in / are com* 
 mon to both genders; as affdvel, affable; cruel, 
 cruel, &c. 
 
 Of the Comparison of Adjectives. 
 
 The comparison of adjectives is the way of in- 
 creasing their signification by certain degrees, which 
 are three, viz. the positive, comparative and super- 
 lative. 
 
 The positive lays down the natural signification 
 of the adjective ; as, nobre, noble ; grande, great* 
 
 The comparative raises it to a higher degree, by 
 comparing it with the positive, which in Portuguese 
 is performed by the adverbs mdis, more ; menos, less ; 
 as, mdis nbbre, more noble ; menos bella, less hand- 
 some. 
 
 There are some adjectives which do not admit of 
 ma is or menos before them ; as celeste, nascido, com- 
 prddo, desterrddo, &c. 
 
 There are four Portuguese comparatives which 
 end in or : they may also be expressed by mdis> 
 more, before their positive ; as, 
 
 Mayor, greater, mdis grande. 
 Menor, less, mdis pequeno. 
 Peor, worse, mdis roim. 
 Melhbr, better, mdis bom. 
 
 To which may be added superior, superior ; in- 
 ferior, inferior ; deterior ; and some others. 
 
 Observe, that there can be no comparison made 
 without the word than ; and that this word is ex- 
 pressed in Portuguese by que. Ex. Mdis cldro que 
 o sol, clearer than the sun ; mdis brdnco que a neve, 
 more white than the snow. The particle que is 
 sometimes preceded by the word do. Ex. isto he 
 mdis do que eu Ihe disse, this is more than I told him ; 
 
 c 2 
 
20 PORTUGUESE 
 
 he mdis prudent e do que par See, he is more wise than 
 it appears. 
 
 N. B. The comparatives superior, inferidr, and 
 some others, do not require que before the second 
 term but the dative of the articles, viz. i, as, do ; 
 aos: Exam p. O dutro he superior a este, the other 
 is superior to this. 
 
 When the Portuguese have a mind to heighten 
 their comparisons, they make use of, mwto mais, a 
 great deal or much more ; as also of, muito menos, a 
 great deal or much less. Ex. Cccsar he muito mdis 
 estimddo que Po??ipeo, Caesar is much more esteemed 
 than Pompey : Pompeo fci muito menos feliz que 
 Ccesar, Pompey was much less happy than Caesar. 
 
 Of the Superlative. 
 
 The Portuguese superlative is formed from the 
 noun adjective, by changing the last letter into 
 issimo for the masculine, and into issima for the 
 feminine : thus, from bello is formed bellissimo and 
 bellissima, most handsome. But sometimes the 
 superlative is formed by adding muito, very, to the 
 positive ; as, mutto alto, very tall. 
 
 Observe that some superlatives are differently 
 formed ; as frigidissimo, from frio, cold ; amicissimo, 
 from amigo, friend ; antiquissimo, from antigo, an- 
 cient : capacissimo, from capdz, capable ; nobilissimo, 
 from nobre, noble ; acerrimo, from here, sharp, or 
 acerb ; riquissimo, from rico, rich ; fertilissimo, from 
 fertil, fruitful ; bonissimo, from bom, good ; jidelis- 
 simo, from jiel, faithful ; sacratissimo, from sagrado, 
 sacred, &c. 
 
 The most is expressed also in Portuguese by o 
 mais and a metis ; as the most fair, or fairest, o mais 
 bello, a mdis bella. But there are some adjectives 
 which do not admit of mwto, very, o mais, or a 
 mais; as mdrto, desterrado, &c. 
 
 Observe, that by changing the last letter of the 
 superlatives into amente, superlative adverbs are 
 
GRAMMAR. 21 
 
 composed ; as, from doutissimo, learned ; doutissima- 
 mente, most learnedly, &c. But the positive adverbs 
 are formed by adding mente to the feminine of the 
 positive ; as doutamente, learnedly, from dduta, the 
 feminine of douto ; prudentemente, prudently, from 
 prudente, prudent. 
 
 Of Numeral Nouns ; and first, of Cardinal. 
 
 The cardinal nouns are such as express the num- 
 ber of things ; as, 
 
 twenty-two 
 twenty- 
 three &c. 
 ... thirty 
 . . . forty 
 ... fifty 
 . . . sixty 
 seventy 
 ... eighty 
 ... ninety 
 a hundred 
 two hundred 
 three thousand 
 a thousand 
 two thousand 
 a million 
 half a score 
 ... a dozen 
 a score 
 ... two score 
 three score 
 
 Observe, that all the cardinals that are adjective 
 nouns are not declined, being of the common 
 gender, except hum huma, one ; doas duas, two ; 
 and those composed of cento, a hundred ; as duzentos, 
 two hundred ; quatro centos, quatro centas, four 
 hundred, &c. and when the feminine huma is 
 preceded by a, and followed by a outra, then huma 
 signifies first, and a outra, secondly. 
 
 The plural, huns, humas, is taken sometimes 
 instead of alguns, algumas, signifying some ; as huns 
 reys, some kings ; humas rainhas, some queens. 
 
 Hum 
 
 . . 
 
 one 
 
 Vinte e dous ... 
 
 Dous 
 
 ... 
 
 two 
 
 Vinte e tres, #c. 
 
 Trte 
 
 ... 
 
 three 
 
 
 Quatro 
 
 ... 
 
 four 
 
 Trinta 
 
 Cinco 
 
 .. . 
 
 five 
 
 Quarenta . . . 
 
 Seis 
 
 .... 
 
 sixty 
 
 Cincoenta ... 
 
 Sete 
 
 ... 
 
 seven 
 
 Sessenta 
 
 O&to or oito 
 
 eight 
 
 Setenta 
 
 Nove 
 
 ... 
 
 nine 
 
 Oitenta 
 
 Dh 
 
 ... 
 
 ten 
 
 Noventa 
 
 O'nze 
 
 ... 
 
 , ... eleven 
 
 Cem 
 
 Doze 
 
 ... 
 
 ... twelve 
 
 Duzentos 
 
 Treze 
 
 ... 
 
 ... thirteen 
 
 Trezentos ... th 
 
 Quatorze 
 
 
 ... fourten 
 
 Mil 
 
 Quinza 
 
 ... 
 
 . . . fifteen 
 
 Dous mil ... i 
 
 Dezaseis 
 
 ... 
 
 ... sixteen 
 
 Milhao or conto 
 
 Dezasele 
 
 ... 
 
 seventeen 
 
 Huma dezena 
 
 Dezouto 
 
 ... 
 
 ...eighteen 
 
 Huma duzia 
 
 Dezanovc 
 
 ... 
 
 ...nineteen 
 
 Huma vintena 
 
 Vinte 
 
 ... 
 
 . . . twenty 
 
 Duas vintenas 
 
 V*inte e hum 
 
 twenty- one 
 
 Trte vintenas 
 
22 PORTUGUESE 
 
 N. B. Cento loses to before a noun, either mascu- 
 line or feminine, and the n is changed into m ; 
 therefore you must say, cent soldddos, not cento 
 soldddos. It only retains to and n when it is followed 
 by another number, as cento e hum, &c. a hundred 
 and one, &c. and when it is substantive. 
 
 N. B. Sometimes cento is made a substantive ; as 
 hum cento de castdnhas, one hundred of chesnuts ; 
 likewise all the cardinal numbers, when preceded 
 by an article, or by another noun of number, as o 
 cinco de pdos, the five of clubs ; hum sete, a seven. 
 
 The cardinal number is rendered into English 
 by the ordinal, when it expresses the day of the 
 month, or the date of any act ; as, chegdu a quatro 
 de Mayo, he arrived the fourth day of May. 
 
 Ordinal Nouns, 
 
 Ordinal nouns are such as express the order of 
 things ; as, 
 
 Primeiro 
 
 first 
 
 Decimo-oitavo eighteenth 
 
 Segundo 
 
 ... second 
 
 Decimo -nono 
 
 nineteenth 
 
 Terceiro 
 
 ... third 
 
 Vigesimo, or 
 
 ventesimo twen- 
 
 Quarto 
 
 . . . fourth 
 
 
 tieth 
 
 Qumto 
 
 ... fifth 
 
 Vigesimo-primeiro one and 
 
 Sexto 
 
 ... sixth 
 
 
 [twentieth 
 
 Setimo 
 
 ... seventh 
 
 Trigesimo 
 
 thirtieth 
 
 Oitavo 
 
 ... eighth 
 
 Quadragesimo, or quarante- 
 
 Nono 
 
 ninth 
 
 simo 
 
 fortieth 
 
 Dicimo 
 
 . . . tenth 
 
 Quinquagesimo fiftieth 
 
 Undecimo, or onzeno, eleventh 
 
 Sexagesimo 
 
 sixtieth 
 
 Duodecimo 
 
 twelfth 
 
 Septuagesimo 
 
 seventieth 
 
 Decimo-tercio 
 
 ... thirteenth 
 
 Octagesimo 
 
 eightieth 
 
 Decimo- quarto 
 
 ... fourteenth 
 
 Nonagesimo 
 
 ninetieth 
 
 Decimo-quinto 
 
 fifteenth 
 
 Centesimo 
 
 the hundredth 
 
 Decimo-sexto 
 
 ... sixteenth 
 
 Millesimo 
 
 the thousandth 
 
 Decimo-septimo 
 
 seventeenth 
 
 U'ltimo 
 
 the las^ 
 
 The proportionable numbers are, simplez, dupli- 
 cddo or dobrado, triplicado or triplice or tresdohrado, 
 quadruplicado or quddruplo, centupio; a single, 
 double, threefold, fourfold, a hundredfold. 
 
GRAMMAR. 23 
 
 The distributive nouns are, hum a hum, one by 
 one ; dous d dous, two by two. 
 
 In English all ordinal numbers may be formed 
 into adverbs : but in Portuguese they have only 
 primeiramente, and secundariamenie, or segunddria- 
 mente, first, secondly ; and to express thirdly, 
 fourthly, &c. they say, em terceiro lugar, em quhrto 
 lugar, in the third place, in the fourth place. 
 
 A Method (for those who understand French) to learn 
 a great many Portuguese words in a short time. 
 
 We must observe, that the French syllable cha is generally 
 expressed in Portuguese by ca, rejecting the h. Examp. 
 Charbon, charite chastete, chapon, chapelle, chapitre, &c. 
 the Portuguese say, carvao cariddde castiddde, capao, 
 capella cap'ttulo, &c. Observe also the following rules. 
 
 French words ending in ance, or ence ; as, Constance, 
 vigilance, clemence, prudence, &c. in Portuguese end in 
 ancia, or incia ; as constancies vigildncia, clemencia, pru- 
 dencia, &c. 
 
 Agne makes anha ; montagne, montdnha ; campagne, 
 
 Ie makes ia; corned ie, comedia. Here the accent is 
 upon the e, and not upon the i, as in French; poesie, 
 poesia. 
 
 Otre makes 6ria; gloire, gloria ; victoire, victSria. 
 Ure makes ura ; imposture, impostura ; figure, figkra* 
 Ison makes zao ; raison, razao ; prison, prizao 
 On makes ao ; charbon, carvao ; baron, barao. 
 Ulier makes uldr : regulier, regular; particulier, par- 
 ticular. 
 
 French Terminations ending in Portuguese in e 
 
 Ant , ante ; vigilant, vigilante ; amant, amdnte. 
 Ent, adjective, ente ; prudent, prudente ; diligent, dili- 
 gente. 
 
24 PORTUGUESE 
 
 T6 makes ddde; purete, puridddc; liberality, libcrali- 
 dcide. 
 
 French Terminations ending in Portuguese in vel. 
 Able, vel ; louable, louvdvel ; aimable, amdvel. 
 
 French Terminations ending in Portuguese in ez. 
 
 Ois, names of nations, ez , Francis, France's ; Anglois, 
 Inglez. 
 
 French Terminations ending in Portuguese in o 
 
 Ain, and ten, names of nations, dno ; Romain, Romdno • 
 Italien, Italidno ; Napolitain, Napolitdno. 
 
 Aire, drio : salaire, saldrio ; temeraire, temerdrio. 
 
 Eau, eo, chapeau ; chapeo. 
 
 Ent, substantive, ento ; sacrement, sacram$nto. 
 
 JEux, oso; genereux ; generoso ; gracieux, gracioso. 
 
 If, ivo ; actif, activo, passif, passivo. 
 
 C, co ; pore, porco ; Turc, Turco. 
 
 French Terminations ending in Portuguese in or. 
 Eur, or ; terreur, terror ; bumeur, humor ; chaleur, color : 
 
 Change of Terminations of the Verbs and Participles. 
 
 Er, in the infinitive mood of the first conjugation, makes 
 dr ; aimer ; amdr ; chanter, canldr. 
 
 Ir makes ir 9 in the infinitive mood ; as, partir, partir -, 
 sentir, sentir. 
 
 Oir makes er in the infinitive mood; as, concevoir 
 conceber. 
 
 The participles in e make ado ; aime, amddo ; parle 
 fallddo. 
 
 The participles in t make ido : dormi, dormido ; menti, 
 mentido. 
 
 The participles in u make do; as, concu, concebido, entendu 
 entendido. 
 
 There are a great many Portuguese words that have no 
 manner of analogy with the French, which prevent these 
 rules from being general. 
 
GRAMMAR. 25 
 
 CHAP. IV. 
 
 OF PRONOUNS. 
 
 THE pronouns are personal, conjunctive, mixed, 
 positive, demonstrative, interrogative, relative, or 
 improper. 
 
 Of Personal Pronouns. 
 
 The pronouns personal are eu and nos for the first 
 person ; they serve for the masculine and the femi- 
 nine. 
 
 Tu and vos for the second : these serve also for 
 the masculine and feminine. 
 
 Mile, for the third person of the masculine gen- 
 der ; and Hies in the plural. 
 
 E'lla, for the third person of the feminine gender, 
 makes in the plural Mas. 
 
 The pronouns personal are declined with the ar- 
 ticle indefinite, de, a., a, da. 
 
 The Declensiom of Personal Pronouns. 
 
 FIRST PERSON. 
 Singular Number. Plural Number. 
 
 Nom. Eu, I 
 Gen. de mini, of me 
 Dat. a mim, to me 
 Ace. a mim, me 
 Abl. de mim, or por mim 
 from or by me 
 
 Nom. n6s, we 
 Gen. de nos, of us 
 Dat. a n6s, or nos, us 
 Ace. a n6s, us 
 
 Abl. de n6s, or por n6s, from 
 or by us 
 
 With me is rendered by comigo ; and sometimes 
 they add the pronoun mesmo to it ; me \s expressed 
 by me in the Portuguese ; as speak to me, fallai-me ; 
 tell me, dizei-me : send me, mandai-me ; write to me, 
 escrevei-me ; elle disse-me, he told me, &c. 
 
 With us is rendered in Portuguese by com nosco. 
 
26 PORTUGUESE 
 
 Us is rendered by ?ws. Examp. tell us, dizei-nos ; 
 give us, ddi-nos ; show us, mostrdi-nos : elle disse-nos 
 he told us, &c. In these examples us is not a pro- 
 noun personal, but conjunctive, as you will see 
 hereafter. 
 
 SECOND PERSON. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Nom. tu 9 thou 
 Gen. de ti, of thee 
 Dat. a ti, or te, to thee 
 Ace. a ti, or te, thee 
 Abl. de ti, or por ti, from or 
 by thee 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Nom. v6s, ye or you 
 Gen. de v6s, or v6s, you 
 Dat. a v6s, or wfe, you 
 Ace. a vos t or do's, you 
 Abl. de vos, or por vos, from 
 or by you 
 
 With thee is rendered by comtigo ; and sometimes 
 they add to it the pronoun mesmo. You, ox yourself, 
 after imperatives are rendered by vos, and not vos ; 
 as, be you contented, contentdi vos ; show yourself, 
 mostrdi-vos : hide yourself, escondei-vos. 
 
 Thee, or thyself, are expressed after imperatives by 
 te; as mostrate, show yourself. 
 
 With you is rendered in Portuguese by com vosco. 
 
 third person. (For the Masculine). 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Nom. elle, he or it 
 Gen. delle, of him or of it. 
 Dat. a elle, to him, or to it 
 Ace. a tile, him, or it 
 Abl. dklle, or por elle, from 
 or by him, or it 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Nom. #/es, they 
 Gen. delles, of them 
 Dat. a elles, to them 
 Ace. a elles, them 
 Abl. delles, or por #/es, from 
 or by them 
 
 The Portuguese have no particular pronoun, as 
 the English it, for things that are inanimate. 
 
 The pronoun him, or to him, when joined to a 
 verb, is always rendered in Portuguese, by Ihe, and 
 them, or to them, by Ihes. 
 
 With him is rendered in Portuguese sometimes by 
 com elle, and sometimes by comsigo, to which they 
 add the pronoun mesmo. 
 
GRAMMAR. 
 
 27 
 
 third person, (Feminine). 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Nora, ilia, she or it 
 Gen. delta, of her or of it 
 Dat. a ella, to her or to it 
 Ace. a ilia, her or it 
 Abl. delta, or por ella, from 
 or by her or it 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Nom. ellas, they 
 Gen. deltas, of them 
 Dat. a e//as, to them 
 Ace. a ellas, them 
 Abl. deltas, or por e7/as, from 
 or by them 
 
 The pronoun herov to her, when joined to a verb, 
 is always rendered in Portuguese by Ihe, and them, 
 qr to them, by Ihes; as will be seen in the pronouns 
 conjunctive. 
 
 With her is rendered in Portuguese by com ilia 
 or comsigo. 
 
 Of the Pronoun si, himself, or one's self. 
 
 There is another pronoun personal that serves 
 indifferently for the masculine and feminine : this 
 is si, one's self. It has no nominative. 
 
 Gen. de si, of one's self, himself, or herself. 
 
 Dat. a si, to one's self, Sfc. 
 
 Ace. a si, one's self, tyc. 
 
 Abl. de si, por si, from or by one's self. 
 
 It is joined with the pronoun mismo or mesma; 
 as de or por si mesmo, by himself; por si mesma, or 
 de si mesma, by herself; o homem nao dma senao a 
 si mesmo, man loves himself only ; quern nao hS bom 
 senao para si, nao he hem que viva, who cares for no- 
 body but himself, does not deserve to live ; o vicio 
 he ahomindvel de si mesmo, vice is in itself hateful ; 
 a terra de si, or de si mesma he fertil, the earth is 
 fruitful of itself. 
 
 Observe that they join also the pronoun mesmo to 
 pronouns personal, as the French do with their pro- 
 noun mime, viz. 
 
28 PORTUGUESE 
 
 Eu mhmo, myself n6s mesmos, ourselves 
 
 Tu mismo, thyself v6s mesmos, yourselves 
 
 Eflle mSsmo, himself elks mesmos \ i . 
 
 E'lla mtema, herself tllasmtsmas ' / themselves 
 
 o h6mem mesmo, man himself; a misma virtude, virtue itself. 
 
 1st. Observe, that mesmo with the article is also 
 an adjective, signifying the same; thus o mesmo, a 
 mesma, os mesmos, as mesmas, the same, relating to 
 some nouns expressed or understood, 
 
 2dly. Note, Also that the adjective outro, other, 
 is joined to the plural of the pronouns personal, / 
 and thou ; thus, nbs outros, we ; vos outros, you. 
 
 3dly. Comsigo may be rendered in English (as we 
 have said above) by with him and with her ; and it 
 may be rendered also by with them in the plural ; 
 and sometimes by about him, about her or about 
 them. Exam p. Elle or el la, nunca traz dinhtiro 
 comsigo, he, or she, never has money about him, or 
 about her. 
 
 Of Conjunctive Pronouns. 
 
 The pronouns conjunctive are so called, because 
 they always come immediately before or after the 
 verb that governs them. 
 
 The pronouns conjunctive bear a great resem- 
 blance to the pronouns personal ; the pronouns per- 
 sonal are, 
 Eu, I ; tu, thou ; elle, he ; n6s, we ; v6s, ye ; elks, they. 
 
 There are seven pronouns conjunctive, viz. me, 
 to me, or me : te, to thee, or thee : se, to himself, 
 or himself, to herself, or herself; Ihe to him, or him, 
 to her, or her ; nos, to us, or us ; vos, to you, or you, 
 Ihes, to them, or them. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 Isto me agrdda, this pleases me ; Ae-me necessdrio, I want. 
 
 Dios te v$, God sees thee. 
 
 Ella se louva, she praises herself. 
 
GRAMMAR. 29 
 
 Eu lhe direi, I will tell him, or I will tell her. 
 Eu Ihes prometti, I promised them : as well for the mas- 
 culine as the feminine. 
 
 The pronoun conjunctive, lhe, is always put after 
 the verb, when it is in the imperative mood ; as 
 dizei-lhe tell him ; cort di-lhe as azas, cut his wings ; 
 but when the verb is in some other mood, it may 
 be put either before or after it ; as elk lhe cortou, or 
 elk cortou-lhe a cabega, he has cut off his head. The 
 same observation applies to the other pronouns con- 
 junctive. 
 
 The pronoun conjunctive, se, is sometimes fol- 
 lowed by me, Ihe, &c. as offerSce-se me, it is offered 
 to me ; representou-se Ihe, it was represented to him, 
 &c. 
 
 1st Note, that the pronouns conjunctive are 
 very often joined to a verb, preceded or followed 
 by the verb havir. Examp. Dar-lhe hei tdnta pan- 
 cada, or eu Ihe hei de dar tdnta pancada, que, &c. I 
 will cudgel him so much, that, &c. 
 
 2dly. Lhe is sometimes rendered in English by 
 you. Examp. Que lhe parece aquillo ? What do you 
 think of that ? assenta no que lhe d'tgo, be persuaded, 
 or believe what I tell you. 
 
 Of Mixed Pronouns, 
 
 There are some pronouns in Portuguese which 
 are composed of the pronouns personal and con- 
 junctive, and which therefore are called mixed. 
 
 These pronouns are formed by changing the letter 
 e of the pronoun conjunctive into o for the mascu- 
 line, and a for the feminine ; thus, to me of it, in- 
 stead of me o, or me a, you must say, mo or ma. In 
 like manner, instead of lhe o or lhe a you must say, 
 Iho or lha, Sec. as you may observe in the following 
 pronouns mixed, or rather contracted, 
 
30 PORTUGUESE 
 
 thee of it 
 mo, m. -^ or -^ or 
 
 or him to thee. 
 
 mos, 
 mas 
 
 {me of it ftr 
 
 or to < 
 
 it or him to me. Lit 
 
 f me of it r tb 
 
 , f. < or ta < 
 
 Lit or her to me. ^it 
 
 {me of them j 
 
 or tos, ra. < 
 
 them to me. tas f. L 
 
 na, t. < or «< or 
 
 or her to thee. 
 
 of it f thee of it 
 
 or ta < or 
 
 r her to me. ^it or her 
 
 me of them f thee of them 
 
 or 
 them to thee. 
 selo, m. "Tit to himself, to herself, or to themselves. 
 sela, f. / it to herself, to himself, or to themselves. 
 selos, m. 1 them to himself, to herself, or to themselves, 
 se/as, f. J them to herself, to himself or to themselves. 
 fto him, or to her of it. 
 Iho, m.< or 
 
 Lto him, or to her 
 fto him, or to her of it 
 Ma, f. < or 
 
 I. it to him, or to her. 
 Mos, m."l to them of it, to him of them, or to her of them. 
 lhas, f. j to them of it, to him of them, or to her of them. 
 nolo m. 1 us of it, or it to us. 
 
 nola f. j us of it, or it to us. 
 
 nolos, m. p. \ them to us. 
 nolas, f. p. j them to us. 
 
 I ' f >you of it, or it of you. 
 
 s, . p. ly 0U f th em? or them to you. 
 
 aofos, f. p. 
 
 EXAMPLES, 
 
 Para dar-lho, to give it to him or to her. 
 
 Dai-mo, give it to me. 
 
 Eu to darei, I'll give it you. 
 
 Entrego-to, I deliver it to you. 
 
 Dize-lho, you tell it him, or her. 
 
 Entrega-lhos, deliver them to him, or to her. 
 
 La selo haja, leave that to himself. " 
 
 Elk nolo disse, he told us of it. 
 
 Eu volos mandarei, I'll send to you. 
 
 If the verbs are in the infinitive, the pronouns 
 mixed may be put either before or after the verbs : 
 as, para dizermo, or para mo dizer, to tell me it ; 
 but if the verbs are in the gerund, the pronouns 
 
GRAMMAR. 31 
 
 mixed must be transposed ; as, dizindowo, and 
 not mo dizendo, in telling me it. 
 
 You mnst make use of these pronouns, both mas- 
 culine and feminine, according to the gender of the 
 thing named, sent or delivered, and not of the per- 
 son to whom the thing is said, sent, given, &c. 
 
 Of Possessive Pronouns. 
 
 Pronouns possessive, so called, because they de- 
 note that the thing spoken of belongs to the person 
 or thing they are connected with, are of two sorts, 
 absolute and relative. See the remarks hereafter. 
 
 The English have no article in the nominative 
 before the pronouns possessive ; but the Portuguese 
 have, as, my, o meu, a minha, fem. Plur. os meus, 
 as minhas, fem. 
 
 The pronouns possessive in Portuguese are the 
 following : 
 
 Sing, meu, m. minha f. ") 
 Plur. mens, ra. minhas, f. J ' 
 Sing, teu, m. tua, f. 1 , 
 Plur. tins, m. tuas. £.J tla *' 
 
 Sing, seu, m. "I,. 
 
 ■di ° a > his or its. 
 
 Jrlur. seus, m. J 
 
 Sing, sua, f. *[, 
 
 Plur. s6as,t.J hel0rltS - 
 
 Sing. n6sso, m. nossa, f. 1 
 
 ' * >our. 
 5 f-J 
 
 Plur. nossos, m. nossas, 
 Sing. vSsso, m. vossa, f 
 Plur. vossos, m. vossas, f. fy onr ' 
 
 The pronouns possessive are declined with the 
 definite article o for the masculine, and a for the 
 feminine. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 Singular. 
 Nora, o meu livro, my book. 
 Gen. do meu livro, of my book. 
 Dat. ao meu livro, to my book. 
 Ace. meu livro, my book. 
 Abl. do ou pello mH livro, from or by my book. 
 
 1 
 
32 PORTUGUESE 
 
 Plural. 
 Nom. os mSus livros, my books. 
 Gen. dos mens livros, of my books. 
 Dat. aos mens livros, to my books. 
 Abl. dos ou pellos mens livros, from or by my books. 
 
 Decline all the other masculines after the same 
 manner, and their femi nines by the article a; as 
 my house ; a minha casa ; of my house, da minha 
 casa, &c. 
 
 Note, you must not use the definite article when 
 the pronouns possessive precede nouns of quality, 
 as well as those of kindred, but the indefinite arti- 
 cle de, a, &c. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 Vossa magestade, your majesty. 
 
 De vossa magestdde, of your majesty, &c. 
 
 M£u pay, my father. 
 
 De men pay, of my father, &c. 
 
 From the above examples it appears that nouns 
 declined by the definite article have no article in 
 the nominative. 
 
 Though the definite article is sometimes used be- 
 fore nouns of kindred, yet we ought not to use it, 
 according to the old proverb : tu vivendo bonos, scri- 
 bendo sequare peritos. 
 
 Seu is sometimes used instead of vosso and vossa, 
 in the polite way of speaking : thus, tenho o seu 
 livro, I have your book ifaliei ao seu criddo, I spoke 
 to your servant ; os seus olhos sao formosos, your 
 eyes are handsome. 
 
 Remarks upon the Possessives. 
 
 The pronouns possessive absolute always come 
 before the noun they belong to. We have ex- 
 pressed them above. 
 
GRAMMAR. 33 
 
 Pronouns possessive relative are so called because 
 they not being joined to their substantive, suppose 
 it either expressed before, or understood, and are 
 related to it. They are the following: 
 
 Maso. Fem. 
 
 Sing. MSu mmha \ m hie 
 
 Plur. Meus minhas J 
 
 piuf: tZ» £L } thine 
 
 Sing. S$u sua, hers 
 
 Plur. Sens suas, theirs 
 
 Sing. NSsso nossa 1 
 
 Plur. Nossos n6ssas J 
 
 Sing. VSsso vossa *5 
 
 Plur. V6ssos vSssas J ? 
 
 To express in Portuguese it is mine, it is thine, 
 &c. we must say he meu, he teu, &c. 
 
 The pronouns possessive absolute do not agree 
 in gender with the noun of the possessor, as in 
 English, but with that of the thing possessed ; as, 
 a may dma a seu filho, the mother loves her son ; 
 o pai dma a sua filha the father loves his daughter. 
 Thus the pronoun masculine seu, in Portuguese, is 
 sometimes rendered by her in English, and the 
 feminine sua by his. 
 
 The same observation is to be made upon the 
 possessives relative, according to the gender of the 
 noun that is understood ; we say of a hat (for in- 
 stancej belonging to a lady, he o seu, it is hers; 
 because the noun understood, viz. chapeo, hat, is of 
 the masculine gender. 
 
 We have already said, that seu and sua, are some- 
 times rendered into English by your, when they 
 are absolute : they are also sometimes rendered into 
 English by yours, .when they are pronouns relative, 
 speaking politely of any thing belonging to a gen- 
 tleman or lady, he o seu, or he a sua, it is yours ; 
 
34 PORTUGUESE 
 
 but if the gentleman or lady is not present, or if 
 they are not directly spoken to, though present, 
 then the pronouns seu and sua must be rendered 
 into English by his or hers. 
 
 Note, That the pronouns possessive absolute, in 
 Portuguese, agree also in number with the noun of 
 the thing possessed ; hence we say a sua histbria, 
 its history, speaking of a kingdom, province, &c. or, 
 his history, speaking of any history composed by a 
 man; or her history, speaking of that written by 
 a woman ; or, their history, speaking of that written 
 by several hands, or of several people. From this 
 example it will be seen, that the Portuguese have 
 no particular pronoun possessive for things that are 
 inanimate, corresponding with the English pronoun 
 its. Hence, finally, it follows, that when the Portu- 
 guese possessives seu and sua are relative, they are 
 rendered into English by his, or hers, or theirs, ac- 
 cording to the gender and number of the noun of 
 the possessor that is understood. 
 
 The third pronoun personal, dtlle, of him, delles 
 of them, delta, of her, deltas, of them are sometimes 
 added, to denote more plainly whose thing it is 
 they speak of; as o seu llvro, delles, their book ; as 
 suas paldvras delta, her words, &c. 
 
 The possessives absolute are left out when they 
 are preceded by a verb, or by a pronoun conjunc- 
 tive, which sufficiently denote whose thing it is 
 they speak of; the article alone being sufficient; 
 as devo-lhe a vida, I owe my life to him, or to it; 
 dbe-me a barriga, my belly aches. 
 
 When the pronouns possessive absolute are before 
 nouns of different genders in the same sentence, and 
 with which they are grammatically construed, they 
 ought to be repeated ; as, seu pai e sua may, his fa- 
 ther and mother : not seu pai e may. 
 
 The pronoun possessive absolute is also used 
 as in the following case, when we use the pos- 
 
GRAMMAR. 35 
 
 sessive relative ; a friend of mine, hum dos meus 
 amigos. 
 
 The possessives minha, tua, sua, nossa, vossa, may 
 be also relative, but with a different meaning. Ex- 
 amples ; LevarSi a minha avdnte, I will insist upon 
 it, I will obtain it ; elle levara a sua avdnte, he will 
 insist upon it, he will do it ; ievdi a vossa avdnte, 
 go on with your resolution ; fazer das stias, to play 
 tricks, to dodge. 
 
 Os meus, os sens, &c. signify my relations, or 
 my friends, thy relations, or thy friends ; as, os seus 
 nao o querent his parents or relations do not like 
 him ; deixa-o hir com os seus, let him go with his 
 people, his countrymen, &c. 
 
 When the pronoun possessive is accompanied 
 by a pronoun demonstrative, we do not put the 
 article in the nominative ; we do not say o este meu 
 livro, but este meu livro, this book of mine. But 
 in all 'other cases the indefinite article is used ; as 
 d'este or deste vosso livro, &c. 
 
 Of the Pronouns Demonstrative. 
 
 They are called pronouns demonstrative, because 
 they serve to point out or demonstrate any thing 
 or person ; as, this book, este livro; that man, aquelle 
 homem. 
 
 There are three principal demonstratives, viz. 
 este, this ; esse, that ; aquelle, that ; este shews the 
 thing or person that is just near or by us ; esse 
 shews the thing that is a little farther, or near the 
 person ; and aquelle shews what is very distant 
 from the person who speaks, or is spoken of, and 
 is expressed in English by that there, or yonder. 
 Esse, essa, are used in writing to any person to ex- 
 press the place or town wherein he dwells ; as tenho 
 fallado nessa cidade com muitosia migos, I have spoken 
 in your city with many friends. 
 
 d2 
 
36 
 
 PORTUGUESE 
 
 These Pronouns are declined thus 
 Masc. Fern. Neut. 
 
 Singular - 
 
 Plural 
 
 Singular 
 
 Plural 
 
 Singular 
 
 Plural 
 
 'Nom. iste 
 
 esta 
 
 isto 
 
 this 
 
 Gen. desta 
 
 desta 
 
 disto 
 
 of this 
 
 Dat. a este 
 
 a Ssta 
 
 a isto 
 
 to this 
 
 Ace. este 
 
 esta 
 
 isto 
 
 this 
 
 . Abl. deste 
 
 desta 
 
 disto 
 
 from this 
 
 ' Nom. estes 
 
 estas 
 
 
 these 
 
 Gen. destes 
 
 destas 
 
 -«-> 
 3 
 
 of these 
 
 Dat. a estes 
 
 a estas 
 
 
 to these 
 
 Ace. estes 
 
 estas 
 
 o 
 
 these 
 
 l Abl. destes 
 
 destas 
 
 fc 
 
 from these 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Fem. 
 
 Neut. 
 
 
 r Nom. esse 
 
 essa 
 
 £sso 
 
 that or it 
 
 Gen. Jesse 
 
 dessa 
 
 disso 
 
 of that, &c. 
 
 Dat. a esse 
 
 a essa 
 
 a isso 
 
 to that 
 
 Ace. &se 
 
 essa 
 
 isso 
 
 that 
 
 .Abl. rfessc 
 
 dessa 
 
 disso 
 
 from that 
 
 'Nom. esses 
 
 essas 
 
 u 
 
 those 
 
 Gen. desses 
 
 dessas 
 
 •4J 
 
 3 
 
 of those 
 
 Dat. a esses 
 
 a essas 
 
 
 to those 
 
 Ace. esse* 
 
 essas 
 
 o 
 
 those 
 
 ,Abl. desse* 
 
 dessas 
 
 fc 
 
 from those 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Fem. 
 
 Neut. 
 
 
 'Nom. aquelle 
 
 aquella 
 
 aquillo 
 
 that 
 
 Gen. daquelle 
 
 daquella 
 
 daquillo 
 
 of that 
 
 i Dat. a aquelle 
 
 a aquella 
 
 a aquillo 
 
 to that 
 
 Ace. aquelle 
 
 aquella 
 
 aquillo 
 daquillo 
 
 that 
 
 . Abl. daquelle 
 
 daquella 
 
 from that 
 
 ' Nom. aquelles 
 
 aquf.llas 
 
 % 
 
 those 
 
 Gen. daqutlles 
 
 daquellas 
 
 ■«-» 
 
 of those 
 
 h Dat. a aquelles a aqutllas £ 
 
 to those 
 
 Ace. aquelles 
 
 aquellas 
 
 o 
 
 those 
 
 .Abl. daquelles 
 
 daquellas 
 
 A 
 
 from those 
 
GRAM M A R. 37 
 
 There is an elision of the vowel of the indefinite 
 article in the genitive and ablative of the pronouns 
 este and esse both in the singular and plural ; as 
 deste, destas, &c. instead of de este, de estas ; so also 
 in the neuter as disso f disto, instead of de isso, de 
 isto. The same observation applies to the pronoun 
 aquelle, wherein you will see another elision besides, 
 in the dative case. 
 
 Both Portuguese and Spaniards have demon- 
 stratives of the neuter gender ; though they do not 
 agree with the substantives, as in Latin ; they do 
 not say isto homem, but este homem, this man. But 
 the word causa, thing, is always understood, though 
 the neuter demonstrative does not agree with it ; 
 so that it is indifferently said isto, or esta causa, 
 this thing ; isso, or essa cdusa, that thing, &c. 
 Example, isso he or essa he a causa de que nos 
 estdmos falldndo, that is the thing we are speaking 
 of; aquillo he or aquella he a cdusa que vbs deveis 
 fazer, that is the thing you must do, &c. 
 
 When the preposition em, in, comes before the 
 pronouns demonstrative, the vowel is cut off, and 
 the consonant m is changed into n; thus, instead 
 of em este, em esta, em, tsto em isso, em aquillo, they 
 write and pronounce neste, nesta, nisto, riisso, &c. 
 in this, in that, &c. 
 
 The words atro, Sutra, are often joined to the 
 pronouns demonstrative, cutting off the final e; as 
 estautro, essoutro, aquellautro. Example ; Estoutro 
 homeyn, this other man ; estoutra mother, this other 
 woman ; essautro homem, that other man. 
 
 The pronoun mesmo, the same, is also frequently 
 joined to the demonstrative ; as este mesmo homem, 
 this very same man ; aquillo mesmo, that very same 
 thing. 
 
 Aqui, alt, and la are sometimes added to the de- 
 monstrative, or to the noun that comes after it, in 
 order to specify and particularize it still more ; as 
 
38 PORTUGUESE 
 
 est& hbmem aqui, this man ; aquella molher la, that 
 woman : aqui, denoting a near, or present object ; 
 and la, a distant and absent one. 
 
 The pronouns aquelle, aquella, aquelles, aqu6llas, 
 when they relate to persons, and are followed by the 
 relative que, are rendered into English by he who, or 
 he that, sheivho, or that, theyivho, or that ; as aquelle 
 que dma a virtude he feliz, he who loves virtue is 
 happy ; jaquelle que desprezao a sciencia nao conhecem 
 o valor della y they who despise learning know not 
 the value of it. Observe, that when aquelle, aquella^ 
 &c. are preceded by este, esta, &c. then este signi- 
 fies the last thing or person spoken of, and aquelle, 
 &c. the first ; as Carlos foi griinde, Frederko ambi- 
 cioso, este valente, aquelle poderoso, Charles was 
 great, Frederic ambitious, the first powerful, the last 
 courageous. 
 
 The pronoun possessive absolute his, her, their, 
 construed in English with a noun followed by the 
 pronoun relative who or that before a verb, is ren- 
 dered in Portuguese by the genitive of the pronouns 
 aquelle, aquella, aquelles, followed by que, and the 
 possessive is left out ; as, all men blame his manners 
 who often says that, which himself does not think, 
 tudo o mundo censura o procedimento daquelle que tern 
 por costume dizSr o que nao tern no pensamento ; Pro- 
 vidence does not prosper their labours that slight 
 their best friends, a Providencia nao abencda o tra- 
 balho daquelles que desprezao os seus melhores amigos. 
 
 The English pronoun such followed by as or that 
 (but not governed of the verb substantive to be), is 
 also rendered into Portuguese by aquelles que, or 
 aquelles taes que, or aquelle que ; as, such as do not 
 love virtue do not know it, aquelles or aquelles taes 
 que nao amao a virtude, nao a conhtcem. 
 
 The pronouns isso, isto, aquillo, before que, are 
 Englished by what ; as elle diz aquillo que sabe^ he 
 says what he knows. 
 
GRAMMAR. 39 
 
 Aquelle is also used to shew contempt ; as que 
 quer aquelle homem ? What does that man desire ? 
 
 Of the Pronouns Interrogative. 
 
 The pronouns interrogative serve to ask ques- 
 tions, and are as follows ; who, what, which, quern, 
 que, quaL 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 Quem he ? 
 
 Quem vos disse tsso ? 
 
 Que quereis ? 
 
 Com que se sustenta ? 
 
 Que estais fazindo V 
 
 De que sefaz isto ? 
 
 Que Iwro he este f 
 
 Que negScios tindes ? 
 
 Que cdsa he ? 
 
 De qualfallais vos 9 
 
 Qual dttles f 
 
 Quem or qual dos dous f 
 
 him- 
 
 who is it ? 
 who told you so ? 
 what will you have ? 
 what does he maintain 
 
 self with ? 
 what are you doing ? 
 from what is this done ? 
 what book is this ? 
 what affairs have you ? * 
 what house is it ? 
 which do you speak of? 
 which of them ? 
 which or whether of the two ? 
 
 These pronouns are thus declined 
 
 Singular and Plural. 
 Masculine and Feminine. 
 Nom, quem who 
 Gen. de quem of whom 
 Dat. a quem to whom 
 Ace. quem whom 
 Abl. de quem from whom. 
 
 Singular and Plural. 
 Masculine and Feminine. 
 
 Nom. que 
 
 what 
 
 Gen. de que 
 
 of what 
 
 Dat. a que 
 
 to what 
 
 Ace. que 
 
 what 
 
 Abl. de que 
 
 from what 
 
 Qual is used in speaking both of persons and 
 things, and is declined thus : 
 
 Singular. 
 Nom. qual 
 Gen. de qual 
 Dat. a qual 
 Ace. qual 
 Abl. da qual 
 
 Masculine and Feminine, 
 which or what 
 of which or what 
 to which or what 
 which or what 
 from which or what 
 
40 PORTUGUESE 
 
 Plural. Masculine and Feminine. 
 
 Nom. quaes which or what 
 
 Gen. de quaes of which or what 
 
 Dat. a quaes to which or what 
 
 Ace. quaes which or what 
 
 Abl. de quaes from which or what 
 
 Observe, that when the word quer is added to 
 quern, or qual, it quite alters the meaning ; quemquer 
 signifying whoever, or any person, and qualquer 
 any one, whether man, woman, or thing; and 
 sometimes they add the participle que to them, as 
 quemquer, que, &c. 
 
 Of the Pronouns Relative. 
 
 Pronouns relative are those which shew the rela- 
 tion, or reference, which a noun has to what follows 
 it. They are the following ; qual, which, que, that 
 or which ; cujo, whose ; quern, who. 
 
 Qual, in a sense of comparison, is followed by tal, 
 and then qual is Englished by as, and tal by of 
 
 N. B. When qual is only a relative, it is declined 
 with the definite articles o or a. 
 
 The pronoun que may be relative both to persons 
 and things, and is common to all numbers, gen- 
 ders, and cases ; as o livro que, the book which ; os 
 livros que, the books which ; a carta que, the letter 
 which ; as cartas que, the letters which ; o mestre 
 que ensina, the master who teacheth ; a molher que 
 tenhoy the wife that I have ; o homem queeu dmo, the 
 man whom 1 love ; it is thus declined : 
 
 Singular and Plural. 
 
 Nom. que which or who 
 
 Gen. de que of which or of whom 
 
 Dat. a que to which or to whom 
 
 Ace. que which or whom 
 
 Abl. de qui from which or from whom 
 
GRAMMAR. 41 
 
 Que is sometimes a conjunction ; as crtyo que 
 hirfi, I believe that I shall go. See the Syntax. 
 
 The relative quern, who, is only relative to per- 
 sons ; but in the nominative case of the singular is 
 rendered into English by he who y or who; as, quern 
 falla deve consider ar, &c. he who speaks ought to 
 consider, &c. eu nab sei quern, I know not who. 
 
 Observe, that quern is common to all numbers, 
 genders, and cases ; but it has no nominative in the 
 plural. 
 
 Quern is declined thus : 
 
 Singular and Plural. 
 Norn, quern he who, or she who, or whoerer. 
 
 Gen. de quern of whom. 
 Dat. a quern to whom. 
 Ace. quern whom. 
 
 Abl. de quern from whom. 
 
 Quern is sometimes a particle disjunctive, and then 
 it signifies some; as, quern canta,e quern ri, some sing, 
 and some laugh ; and sometimes it serves for excla- 
 mation ; as quern me dera estar em casa! how fain 
 would I be at home ! 
 
 Cujo Ctija, is declined thus : 
 
 Masc. Fem. 
 
 /-Norn, cujo cuja whose. 
 
 \ Gen. de cujo de cuja of whose. 
 
 Sing.< Dat. a cujo a cuja to whose. 
 
 I Ace. cujo cuja whose. 
 
 vAbl. de cujo de cuja from whose. 
 
 The plural is formed by adding s to the singular ; 
 as, cujos, cujas, whose, &c. 
 
 Note, that cujo must be followed by the noun or 
 term which it refers to, and with which it agrees in 
 gender, number and case ; as, a pessoa cuja reputa- 
 gao vos admirals, the person whose reputation you 
 wonder at ; o ceo cujo soccorro nunca falta, heaven, 
 whose assistance never fails ; cuja bella cara, whose 
 fair visage : cujas bellezas, whose beauties ; a cujo 
 
42 PORTUGUESE 
 
 phi, to whose father ; de cfgos irmaos tenho recebido, 
 from whose brothers I have received. Observe also 
 that cujo is not to be repeated, though the terms 
 which it refers to be of different number ; as, cuja 
 valia e Sbras, whose value and deeds. 
 
 Note, that, o, a, os, as, lo, la, 8$c. are also pro- 
 nouns relative, when joined to verbs. See the 
 Syntax, chap. iv. 
 
 Of the Improper Pronouns. 
 
 These pronouns are called improper, because in- 
 deed they are not properly pronouns, although they 
 bear a great resemblance to pronouns, as well as to 
 adjectives. . They are the following : 
 
 Hum one. 
 
 Alguem somebody. 
 
 Algum some. 
 
 Ninguem nobody. 
 
 Nenhum none. 
 
 CadaMm every one, each. 
 
 Cdda every. 
 
 Outro, outra other. 
 
 Outrem another, 
 
 Qualquh, any one ; whether man, or woman, or thing. 
 Qualquer dos d6us, either of the two, or whethersoever of 
 
 the two. 
 Quemquer, whoever, or any person. 
 Todo, all, or every. Tal, such &c. 
 
 Hum has two terminations, viz. hum, huma; and 
 in the plural it makes hurts, and hbmas. It is de- 
 clinable with the indefinite article. 
 
 Alguem has only one termination, and is only 
 declinable in the singular with the indefinite article. 
 
 Algum, has two terminations, viz. algum, alguma; 
 and in the plural, alguns, algumas. It is declinable 
 with the indefinite article. 
 
 Ninguem, has only one termination, and is only 
 declinable in the singular with the indefinite article ; 
 ninguem o ere, nobody believes it. 
 
GRAMMAR. 43 
 
 Nenhum has two terminations, viz. nenhumas, nen- 
 humci) and in the plural nenhuns, nenhumas ; and is 
 only declinable with the indefinite article ; nenhum 
 homem, no man ; de nenhum effeito, of no effect. 
 
 Cadahum has two terminations, viz. cadahum, ca- 
 dahuma; but it has no plural, and is only declinable 
 with the indefinite article. 
 
 Cdda has but one termination. It has no plural, 
 and is only declinable with the indefinite article : 
 cdda dia, every day ; cdda mez, every month. 
 
 Outro has two terminations, viz. Sutro, outra; and 
 in the plural, outros, Sutras. It is declinable both 
 with the definite and indefinite articles. 
 
 Outrem has only one termination. It has no 
 plural, and takes the indefinite article. 
 
 Qualquer has but one termination. It makes 
 quaesquer in the plural, and is declined with the 
 indefinite article. Qualquer is said both of persons 
 and things. 
 
 Quemquer has but one termination. It has no 
 plural, and is declined with the indefinite article. 
 It is rendered in English by any body : quemquer vos 
 dird any body will tell you. Quemquer is used in 
 speaking of a person. 
 
 Todo has two terminations, viz. todo, toda ; and 
 in the plural, todos, todas. It is declinable with 
 the indefinite article. It is sometimes taken sub- 
 stantively, and then it signifies the whole ; as o 
 tddo he mayor que a sun. parte, the whole is bigger 
 than its part. 
 
 Tal has only one termination. It makes tdes in 
 the plural, and it is declined with the indefinite 
 article. It is common to the masculine and to the 
 feminine genders ; and sometimes it is joined to 
 qual ; as, tal qual elle he, such as it is. 
 
 Tal supplies sometimes the place of the person 
 whose name is not specified ; as, hum tal velhdco deve 
 sir castigddo, such a rogue ought to be punished. 
 
44 PORTUGUESE 
 
 CHAP. V. 
 
 OF VERBS. 
 
 THE verb is a part of speech which serves to 
 express that which is attributed to the subject in 
 denoting the being or condition of the things and 
 persons spoken of, the actions which they do, or 
 the impressions they receive. 
 
 The first and the most general division of Verbs 
 is into personal and impersonal. 
 
 A verb personal is conjugated by three persons. 
 
 Sing. 
 Plur. 
 
 A verb impersonal is conjugated by the third 
 person of the singular number only ; as chove, it 
 rains, convem, it behoves. 
 
 A verb, considered in regard to syntax, is of four 
 sorts, viz. active, passive, neuter, and reciprocal. 
 
 Some of the verbs are regular, and others irre- 
 gular. 
 
 Some are also called auxiliary verbs. We shall 
 give their definitions in their proper places. 
 
 Before you begin to learn the conjugations, it 
 will be proper to observe, that all the verbs may be 
 conjugated with the pronouns personal, e?/, tu, elie, 
 &c. or without them. 
 
 I 
 
 IXAMPLE. 
 
 Su dmo 
 
 I love 
 
 tu dmas 
 
 thou lovest 
 
 elps. dtfia 
 
 he loves 
 
 nos amdmos 
 
 we love 
 
 v6s amdis 
 
 ye love 
 
 elles dmao 
 
 they love 
 
GRAMMAR. 45 
 
 Of tht Auxiliary Verbs. 
 
 The auxiliary verbs are so called, because they 
 aid the conjugation of other verbs. They are 
 four in Portuguese, viz haver, th\ to have; ser, 
 estar, to be. The auxiliary verb ser, to be, is also 
 called the verb substantive, because it affirms what 
 the subject is, and is always followed by a noun 
 that particularizes what that subject is ; as sir rico, 
 prudente, dduto, to be rich, wise, learned, &c. 
 
 Colligation of the Auxiliary Verb, 
 ter, or haver, to have. 
 
 THE INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 
 ( eu Unho, ou hey 
 Sing.< tu tens, ou has 
 C ille t6m, ou hd 
 
 I have 
 
 
 thou hast 
 
 
 he has or hath 
 
 
 C nos tSmos, ou havimos, ou himos 
 
 we have 
 
 
 Plur.< vos Undes, ou haviis, ou hiis 
 
 you have 
 
 
 I Hies tern, ou had 
 
 they have 
 
 
 Preterimperfect 
 
 
 
 feu tinha, ou hav'ta, ou Ma 
 
 I had 
 
 
 Sing.< tu tinhas, ou havias, ou hias 
 
 thou hadst 
 
 
 [elle tinha, ou havia, ou hia 
 
 he had 
 
 
 Cn6s t'mhamos, ou haviamos, ou hiamoi 
 
 i we had 
 
 
 Plur.< v6s tinhieis, ou havieis, ou hieis 
 
 you had 
 
 
 Relies , tmhad, ou haviao, ou Jiiao 
 
 they had 
 
 
 Preterperfect definite. 
 
 
 
 Ceu tive ou houve 
 
 I had 
 
 
 Sing.< tu tiveste } ou houv&ste 
 
 thou hadst 
 
 
 [ille tSve, ou houve 
 
 he had 
 
 
 Cnos tivemos, ou houvemos, 
 
 we had 
 
 
 Plur.< v6s tivestes, ou houvestes 
 
 you had 
 
 
 littles tiverao ou houverao 
 
 they had 
 
 
46 PORTUGUESE 
 
 {i 
 
 Preterperfect. 
 
 lu tenho tido I have had 
 
 Sing. -} tu tens tido thou hast had 
 
 elle Um tido he has had 
 
 nos temos tido we have had 
 
 Plur.-^ v6s tendes tido you have had 
 
 elles tern tido they have had 
 
 Preterpluperfect. 
 
 he tinha tido I had had 
 
 Sing.^ tu tinhas tido thou had had 
 
 elle tinha tido he had had 
 
 C nos tinhamos tido we had had 
 
 Plur.< vos tinhieis tido you had had 
 
 y^elles tinhao tido they had had 
 
 This tense may also be conjugated thus ; tivera, 
 tiveras, tivera, tiveramos, tivereis, tiverao. 
 
 First Future. 
 
 feu terei, ou haver ei I shall or will have 
 
 Sing.< tu terds, ou haverds thou shait or wilt have 
 
 y.elle terd, ou haverd he shall or wilt have 
 
 f nos teremos, ou haver emos we shall or will have 
 Plur.< vos tereis, ou havereis ye shall or will have 
 
 X^eLles ter do, ou haver do they shall or will have 
 
 Second Future. 
 Sing, eu hei de ter, ou haver, <fec. I must have, fyc. 
 
 Third Future. 
 
 Sing, eu haverii de ter, ou haver, fyc, I shall be obliged 
 to have, <^c. 
 
 Fourth Future. 
 Sing, eu havia de ter, ou haver, fyc. I was to have, 6fc. 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Sino- / ^ m tu \ ou hqf as tu have thou 
 
 °'\tenha elle, ou hdja elle let him have 
 
 i tenhdmos, ou hajdmos nos let us have 
 
 Plur.-< ttnde, ou havei, vos have ye 
 
 t t&nhao, ou /w/ao e#es, let them have 
 
GRAMMAR. 47 
 
 The imperative has no first person, because it is 
 impossible to command one's self. 
 
 OPTATIVE AND SUBJUNCTIVE MOODS, 
 
 I join them together because their tenses are similar. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Cque eu tinha, ou hdja that I have, or that I may have 
 Sing.< que tu tenhas, ou hdjas thou hast, or may est have 
 
 \que elle tenha, ou hdja he has or -may have 
 
 f que nos tenhdmos, ou hajdmos we have, or may have 
 Plur. < que vds tenhdis, ou hajdis ye have, or may have 
 
 (. que illes te'nhad, ou hdjao they have, or may have 
 
 Sing. 
 
 Plur. 
 
 First Preterim perfect. 
 
 [que eu tivira ou tive'sse 
 
 houvera, ou houvesse 
 que tu tiveras ou tivesses 
 
 houveras ou houvesses 
 que elle tivira ou tive'sse 
 
 houvera ou houvesse 
 que nos tivtramos ou tiv6ssemos 
 
 houveramos ou houvessemos 
 que v6s tivereis ou tivisseis 
 
 houvireis on houvesseis 
 que illes tiverao ou tivissem 
 
 houverao ou houvissem 
 
 Second Preterimperfect. 
 
 that I had, or I 
 should, would, 
 c^c. have, fyc. 
 
 that we had, or 
 we should, 
 would, (Sfc. 
 have, fyc. 
 
 I should, would, or 
 could have, (f*c. 
 
 {ew term ou haveria 1 
 
 fe* terms ou haverias > 
 
 e£Ze £eWa ou haveria J 
 
 C nos teriamosow. haver iamos^ i ,1 ,i 
 
 Plur. -j vfe ferfeu ou Wnm I we sho "l d ? wou ?' 
 Ifc^aSoute^o J or could have ' &c - 
 
 Preterperfect. 
 
 f #we ew £e^a i?$Gfo ou havido that I have had 
 Sing, -J ywe £w tenhas tido ou havido thou hast had 
 
 (^we e^e tinha tido ou havido he has had 
 
 T^z/e ftos tenhdmos tido ou havido we have had 
 Plur. -< <7?/e v<5s tenhdis tido ou havido you have had 
 
 ( ?we ^#e$ Unhao tido ou havido they have had 
 
48 PORTUGUESE 
 
 Preterpluperfect. 
 It is compounded of the first preterim perfect 
 subjunctive and the participle. 
 
 {se iu tivfra ou tivesse 
 se tu tiver as ou tivSsses 
 se elle tivera ou tivesse 
 se n6s tiver amos ou tive'ssemos 
 Plur. 4 se vos tivereis ou tivesseis 
 
 se Mies tiver ad ou tivessem . 
 
 Second Preterpluperfect. 
 It is compounded of the second preterim perfect 
 subjunctive and the participle. 
 
 { ; 
 
 tido { if I had had, 
 
 Sing. 
 
 Plur. 
 
 Sing. 
 
 Plur. 
 
 eu teria 
 tu terms 
 elle teria 
 nos teriamos 
 vos terieis 
 Ules teriad 
 
 ' se eu tiver 
 tu tiveres 
 ille tiver 
 
 se nos tiver mos 
 v6s tiverdes 
 
 1 
 
 \-tido* 
 
 I should have had, 6fc. 
 
 First Future. 
 
 if I shall have 
 thou shalt have 
 he shall have 
 f we shall have 
 you shall have 
 
 I tslle tiverem they shall have 
 
 This tense may be conjugated also thus : kouver, 
 houveres, houver ; houvermos, houverdes, houvirem. 
 See Syntax of the auxiliary Verbs. 
 Second Future. 
 It is composed of the first future and the 
 participle. 
 
 Sing. 
 
 Plur. 
 
 se eu tiver 
 
 
 
 ' 
 
 tiveres 
 
 
 
 
 tiver 
 tivermos 
 
 
 - tido « 
 
 if I si 
 
 tiverdes 
 
 
 
 
 tivirem 
 
 J 
 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 
 Present. 
 
 
 tfr 
 
 to he 
 
 ive. 
 
 if I shall have had, tyc* 
 
GRAMMAR. 49 
 
 Preterperfect. 
 tir iido > to have had. 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 
 Preterit. Sing. tido> tida. Plur. tidos tidas, had. 
 
 Future. 
 que hd de ter, that is to have. 
 
 GERUNDS. 
 
 tendo 9 having or in having, tendo, tido 9 having had. 
 
 SUPINE. 
 
 The supine is supplied by the prepositions a or 
 para, and the verb in the infinitive ; as, 
 para ter, to have. 
 
 "In like manner are conjugated its compounds 
 contenho, detenho, mantenho, &c. 
 
 Remarks upon the auxiliary verb, ter, to have. 
 
 The verb ter, to have, is an auxiliary or helping 
 verb, which serves to conjugate other verbs : exam- 
 ple, ter lido, to have read; nos temos,feito, we have 
 done ; elles tern visto, they have seen, &c. 
 
 When ? the verb ter is followed by the particle 
 que, before an infinitive mood, it denotes the duty, 
 inclination, &c. of doing any thing ; as, que tendes 
 quefazer 1 what have you to do ? tenho que fazer 
 huma visita, I must pay a visit ; elle tern muito que 
 dizervos, he has a great many things to tell you. 
 
 Of the auxiliary verb haver. 
 This is one of the most useful verbs in Portuguese, 
 since it is not only auxiliary to itself, as eu hei de 
 havir } I must have ; eu haviade haver, I was to have 
 &c. but also to all sorts of verbs ; as eu hei de can- 
 tar, I will sing, or I must sing, or I am to sing; 
 eu hei de hir, I must go ; eu havta de fallar, I was 
 to speak ; eu hei de escrever, I must write, &c. In 
 which examples you may see that the verb haver, 
 when auxiliary, has generally the particle de and 
 the verb of the infinitive mood after it ; and 
 
 E 
 
50 PORTUGUESE 
 
 that then it denotes a firm resolution, possibility, or 
 necessity of doing any thing, therefore it is noi to 
 be rendered into English by the verb to have ; as 
 you may see by the second, third, and fourth future 
 of the indicative mood. 
 
 The verb haver, with the particle de, and the verb 
 ser, to be, after it, is an auxiliary both to the passive 
 verbs, and sometimes to the verb ser itself; as, hei 
 de ser feliz, I shall be happy ; O principe ha de ser 
 respeitddo, the prince ought to be, or must be, re- 
 spected. 
 
 The same verb haver is also auxiliary without the 
 particle de ; but then it is put after the verb to 
 which it is auxiliary ; thus, ddrvos-hei I will give 
 you ; darlhe-hei, I will give to him, &c. In which 
 examples you may observe, that the auxiliary verb 
 havSr is put after the verb and the pronouns con- 
 junctive, te, the, &c. and sometimes.it is put after 
 the verbs and the pronoun mixed ; as, mandar volo- 
 hei I'll send it to you. In the foregoing examples 
 the verb haver may be put before the other verb ; 
 but then it requires the particle de, and has a dif- 
 ferent meaning ; as, in the first example, you may 
 say, hei de darvos, I must give to you. Observe, 
 also, that when the indicative present of the auxiliary 
 verb haver is auxiliary to other verbs, as in the 
 foregoing examples, you must cut off the last letters 
 ei from the future of the verbs ; and say darlhe-hei, 
 ov-hei de dar-lhe ; but not darei Ihe-Mi, nor hei de 
 darei Ihe. When the preterimperfect havia is to be 
 auxiliary to any verb, and it is to be placed after it, 
 you must make use of hia, hias, hia, hiamos, hieis y 
 luao ; and say, dar-lhe-h/a, hias, &c. but not dar- 
 Ihe-havia, havtas, &c. I should give to him, thou 
 shouldst, &c. 
 
 To express interrogation put the pronoun personal 
 after the verb, as in English thus terei eu? shall I 
 have ? timos ?ws ? have we ? tens tu P hast thou ? 
 
GRAMMAR. 51 
 
 tern elle ? has he ? sometimes the pronouns are 
 omitted ; as, que faremos P what shall we do ? can- 
 taremos? shall we sing ? 
 
 Haver is sometimes Englished by to be ; as que 
 ha de sir de mim ? what is to become of me ? 
 
 When we speak by negation, we must use the 
 word nao before the verb ; as, nao tenho, I have not ; 
 vos nao conheceis, you do not know, &c. 
 
 Conjugation of the Auxiliary Verb s6r, or estar, 
 to be. 
 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD 
 
 
 Present. 
 
 
 feu sou or estou 
 
 I am 
 
 Sing.« 
 
 I tu es or estds 
 
 thou art 
 
 
 [elle he or esld 
 
 he is 
 
 
 rnos somos or estdmos 
 
 we are 
 
 Plur.< 
 
 1 vos sols or estdis 
 
 you are 
 
 
 [elks sa5 or estdo 
 
 they are 
 
 
 Preterpluperfect. 
 
 
 feu era or estdva 
 
 I was 
 
 « 
 
 ! eras or estdvas 
 
 thou wast 
 
 Sing. 
 
 I. ira or estdva 
 
 he was 
 
 
 j" noser amos ovestdvamos 
 
 we were 
 
 Plur.< 
 
 1 ereis or estdveis 
 
 you were 
 
 
 L erao or estdvao 
 
 they were 
 
 Preterperfeet definite. 
 
 fiufui or estive I was 
 
 Sing.< foste or estiveste thou wast 
 
 L foi or esteve he was 
 
 f fomos or estivtmos we were 
 
 Plur.< fostes or estivestes you were 
 
 L forao or cstiverao they were 
 
52 PORTUGUESE 
 
 Preterperfect. 
 
 The preterperfect is composed of the present in- 
 dicative of the auxiliary verb th\ to have, and its 
 own participle, sido, or estado. 
 
 Preterplu per feet. 
 
 This tense is compounded of the preterimperfect 
 indicative, and the participle sido or estado, 
 
 {eu tinha sido or estado I had been 
 
 tinhas sido or estado thou hadst been 
 
 tinha sido or estado be had been 
 
 £ tinhamos sido or estado we had been 
 
 Plur. -< tinheis sido or estado you bad been 
 
 t tinhao sido or estado they had been 
 
 It may also be conjugated thus ; fdra, or estivera ; 
 foras, or estiveras ; fora, or estivera ; foramos, or 
 estiveramos ; foreis, or estivereis ; forao, or estiverao. 
 
 Future. 
 
 eu serei or estarei I shall or will be 
 
 Sing.-^ seras or estards thou shalt be 
 
 sera or estara he shall be 
 
 seremos or estaremos we shall be 
 
 Plur.^ serm or estareis you shall be 
 
 semo or estardo they shall be 
 
 { 
 { 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 ~. J setu or esfcz be thou 
 
 ^ \ s y a or esteja elle let him be 
 
 C sejdmos or estejdmosnos let us be 
 Plur.< s&/e or es£ai i;os be you 
 
 ^se/ao or estejao elles let them be 
 
 OPTATIVE AND SUBJUNCTIVE MOODS. 
 
 Present. 
 
 (que eu seja or esteja that I may be, or that I be 
 sejas or este*'as thou mayst be, or be 
 
 1 
 
 se/a or esteja he may be, &c. 
 
Plur 
 
 { 
 
 GRAMMAR 
 
 53 
 
 que pros sejdmos or estejdmos 
 sefdis, or estejdis 
 sejao or estejao 
 
 that we may be 
 you may be 
 they may be 
 
 First Preterimperfect. 
 that 
 
 Cque eufora or fosse 
 j estivera or estwesse 
 
 Q* 3 foras ox fosses 
 
 & j estiveras or estivesses 
 
 for a or fosse 
 
 i 
 
 I were or might 
 be 
 
 thou wert 
 
 estivera or estivesse 
 (que nos foramos or fossemos 
 
 estweramos or estivessemos 
 
 I 
 I 
 
 foreis or fosseis 
 
 estivereis or estivesseis 
 fordo orfossem 
 
 estiverao or estivessem 
 
 he were 
 
 > that we were 
 
 > you were 
 
 > they 
 
 were 
 
 Sing 
 
 Plur, 
 
 { 
 
 Second Preterimperfect. 
 
 hi seria or estaria 
 serias or estarias 
 seria or estaria 
 seriamos or estariamos 
 serieis or estarieis 
 seriao or estariao 
 
 I should or would be 
 thou shouldest be 
 he should be 
 we should be 
 you should be 
 they should be 
 
 Preterperfect. 
 
 It is compounded of the present conjunctive of 
 the auxiliary verb te?\ and its own participle sfdo, 
 or est ado. 
 
 { 
 { 
 
 que eu tenha sido or estddo 
 tenhas sido or estddo 
 tenha sido, &c. 
 tenhdmos sido, &c. 
 tenhdis sido, &c. 
 tenhao sido &c. 
 
 that I have been 
 thou hast been 
 he has been 
 we have been 
 you have been 
 they have been 
 
 Preterpluperfect. 
 
 It is compounded of the first preterimperfect sub- 
 junctive of the verb ter 9 and its own participle. 
 
51 PORTUGUESE 
 
 { 
 
 ' se eu tivera or tivesse i T , , , 
 
 I had been 
 
 j sido or estddo J 
 
 * tiveras, &c. thou hadst been 
 
 tivera, Sec. he had been 
 
 tiveratnos, &c. we had been 
 
 Plur.^ tivereis, &c you had been 
 
 tiverao, &c. they had been 
 
 Second Preterpluperfect. 
 Compounded of the second preterimperfect sub- 
 junctive of the verb ter, and its own participle sido 
 or est ado. 
 
 eu term sido or estddo I should or would have been 
 
 Sing.-^ terms, &c. thou shouldst have been 
 
 term, &c. he should have been 
 
 teriamos, &c. we should have been 
 
 Plur.^ terieis, &c. you should have been 
 
 tertao, &c. they should have been 
 
 First Future. 
 qudndo iufor or estiver when I shall be 
 
 •^ n &X fores or estiveres thou shalt be 
 
 for or estiver he shall be 
 
 fonnos or estivermos we shall be 
 
 fordes or estiverdes you shall be 
 
 forem or estiverem they shall he 
 
 4' 
 { 
 
 PlurJ 
 
 Second Future. 
 Compounded of the future subjunctive of the 
 verb tei\ and its own participle. 
 
 C qudndo eu tiver sido or estddo when I shall have been 
 Sing. < tiveres sido, &c. thou shalt have been 
 
 ( tivfa sido, &c. he shall have been 
 
 i thermos sido, &c. we shall have been 
 
 Plur. J tiverdes sido, &c. you shall have been 
 
 f tivbrem sido, &c. they shall have been 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 
 ser or estdr to be 
 
 Preterperfect. 
 
 tir sido or estddo to have been 
 
GRAMMAR. 55 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 Pret. 
 
 sido or estddo, been 
 
 Future. 
 
 que hd de ser, or estdr, that is to be 
 
 GERUNDS. 
 
 sendo or estdndo being 
 fewdo sido or esJado having been 
 
 SUPINE. 
 
 para ser or esfar to be 
 
 Remarks upon the verb ser and est dr. 
 
 There is a considerable difference between these 
 verbs, sir and estdr, both in Portuguese and Spanish. 
 In English there is no word to distinguish them, 
 being both rendered into English by to be. Ser 
 signifies the proper and inseparable essence of a 
 thing, its quality or quantity ; ser homem, to be a 
 man ; ser bom, to be good ; ser alto, to be tall ; ser 
 largo, to be wide ; ser branco, to be white, &c. 
 But estdr denotes a place, or any adventitious 
 quality ; as, estdr em Lund-res, to be in London ; 
 estdr de saude, to be in health ; estdr frio, to be 
 cold ; estdr quente, to be warm ; estdr doente, to be 
 sick ; estdr infadddo, to be angry ; estdr allegre, to 
 be merry, &c. • 
 
 Estdr may be used before the gerunds, but not 
 ser; therefore you may say, estou falldndo, lendo, &c, 
 I am speaking, reading, &c. but not sdu falldndo, 
 &c. 
 
 The three Conjugations of regular Active Verbs. 
 
 A regular verb is such as is confined to general 
 rules in its conjugation. 
 
56 PORTUGUESE 
 
 A verb active denotes the action or impression of 
 the subject, and governs a noun which is the object 
 of that action or impression ; as, amar a virtude, to 
 love virtue ; receber cartas, to receive letters. 
 
 The regular Portuguese verbs have three different 
 terminations in the infinitive ; viz. in ar, er, ir ; 
 as, amar, to love ; temer, to fear ; admittir, to admit. 
 
 An easy Method of learning to conjugate the 
 Portuguese Verbs. 
 
 I have reduced all the tenses of the Portuguese 
 verbs to eight ; four of which are general, and 
 have the same terminations in all the verbs ; and 
 the other four may be likewise made general by 
 changing some letters, and all the conjugations 
 reduced to one. 
 
 The general tenses are, the future indicative, 
 the first and second preter imperfect subjunctive, 
 and the first future subjunctive. 
 
 The future indicative is terminated in all the 
 verbs, in 
 
 rii, rds, rd ; remos, reis, rao. 
 
 The imperfect subjunctive, in 
 
 ra or sse, ras or sses, ra or sse ; ramos, or ssemos, 
 reis or sse is, rao or ssem. 
 
 The second imperfect, in 
 ria, rias, rut; riamos, rieis, rtao 
 
 The first future subjunctive, in 
 es, ?nos, des, em. 
 
 I have only given the termination of the second 
 person singular of the future subjunctive, because 
 the first and third of the same number are like 
 their respective infinitives of the three conjugations, 
 which, however, keep both their last consonant 
 
GRAMMAR. 57 
 
 and vowel before the terminations I have marked 
 for the second person singular, and for the whole 
 plural. As to the future indicative, you have only 
 to add ei to the respective present infinitive of the 
 three conjugations, in order to form the first person 
 singular ; and if you add to the same infinitive 
 present as, you will form the second person singu- 
 lar of it, and so of all the rest, by adding to the 
 infinitive present, a, emos, eis, ad. 
 
 The imperfect subjunctive has two terminations 
 for every person, both in the singular and plural ; 
 but if you cut off the last consonant r of the 
 infinitive, and then add to it the terminations 
 above mentioned, you form the imperfect sub- 
 junctive, according to its two different termi- 
 nations. Lastly, if you cut off the last consonant 
 of the infinitive, and add to it the terminations 
 above-mentioned, you will form the second imper- 
 fect subjunctive. 
 
 The present indicative of the three conjugations 
 is formed by changing the last letters of the infini- 
 tive, viz. ar, er, ir, intoo; as, dmo, entendo, admitto, 
 from amar, etitender, admittir. 
 
 The preterim perfect indicative is formed in the 
 first conjugation, by changing the last consonant of 
 the infinitive, viz. r, into va, vas, va, vdmos, veis, 
 vao ; but in the second conjugation it is formed by 
 changing the termination er of the infinitive into ia, 
 ias, ia, iamos,kis, iao ; and in the third by changing 
 the last consonant r of the infinitive into a, as, a; 
 hnos, eis, ad. 
 
 The perfect definite in the first conjugation is 
 formed by changing the termination ar of the infi- 
 nitive into ti, aste 6u, dmos, dstes, drab; and in the 
 second conjugation, it is formed by changing the 
 termination er of the infinitive into t, este, eo, emos, 
 fates y trad. In the third conjugation, the same tense 
 
58 PORTUGUESE 
 
 is formed by changing the termination ir of the in- 
 finitive into /, iste, \o, imos, istes, irao. 
 
 The present subjunctive in the first conjugation 
 is formed by changing the termination ar of the 
 infinitive into e, es, e, emos, eis, em; and in the 
 second conjugation, it is formed by changing the 
 termination er of the infinitive into a, as, a, amos, 
 ais, ao. In the third conjugation, the same tense is 
 formed by changing the termination ir of the infi- 
 nitive into the same terminations, a, as, a, &c. 
 
 As to the imperative mood, you have only to ob- 
 serve, that the second person singular is always the 
 same as the third person singular of the present in- 
 dicative, in all the conjugations. 
 
 The participles of the preterperfect tense in the 
 first conjugation are formed by changing the last 
 consonant r of the infinitive into do for the mascu- 
 line, and da for the feminine; and into dos, das, 
 for the plural ; but when you come to verbs of the 
 second conjugation, you change the termination r 
 of the infinitive into fdo, ida, &c. 
 
 In the third conjugation, the last consonant r of 
 the infinitive must be changed into do for the mas- 
 culine, da for the feminine, &c. 
 
 First Conjugation of the verbs in ar. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD, 
 
 I shall add the pronouns personal, iu, tu, elk, 
 &c. no more. 
 
 Present. 
 
 dmo 
 
 I love 
 
 dmas 
 
 thou lovest 
 
 dma 
 
 he loves 
 
 amdmos 
 
 we love 
 
 amdis 
 
 ye love 
 
 dmad 
 
 they love 
 
GRAMMAR. 
 
 Preterimperfect. 
 
 69 
 
 amava 
 
 amdvas 
 
 amava 
 
 amdcamos 
 
 amdveis 
 
 amdvao 
 
 amei 
 
 amdste 
 
 amou 
 
 amdmos 
 
 amdstes 
 
 amdrao 
 
 I did love 
 thou didst love 
 he did love 
 we did love 
 you did love 
 they did love 
 
 Preterperfeet definite. 
 
 I loved 
 thou lovedst 
 he loved 
 we loved 
 you loved 
 they loved 
 
 Preterperfeet. 
 This tense is composed of the participle amado, 
 and the present indicative auxiliary verb ter. 
 
 tinho amddo I have loved 
 
 tens amddo thou hast loved 
 
 tern amddo he has loved 
 
 timos amddo we have loved 
 
 tfndes amddo you have loved 
 
 tSm amddo they have loved 
 
 Preterpluperfect. 
 This tense is composed of the participle amado 
 and the imperfect of the auxiliary verb tir. 
 
 N. B. It may be conjugated thus, amhra, amhras, 
 amara, amaramos, amareis, amdrao, or, 
 
 t'znha amddo, 
 tinhas amddo 
 tinha amddo 
 tinhamos amddo 
 tinheis amddo 
 tinhao amddo 
 
 amarei 
 amards 
 amard 
 
 I had loved 
 thou hadst loved 
 he had loved 
 we had loved 
 you had loved 
 they had loved 
 
 Future. 
 
 I shall or will love 
 thou shalt love 
 he shall love 
 
60 PORTUGUESE 
 
 amarSmos we shall love 
 
 amariis you shall love 
 
 amardo they shall love 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 dmu tu love thou 
 
 dme ille let him love 
 
 amimos nos let us love 
 
 amai vos love you 
 
 dmem tiles • let them love 
 
 OPTATIVE AND SUBJUNCTIVE MOODS. 
 
 que iu dme that I may love 
 
 dmes thou mayest love 
 
 dme he may love 
 
 amemos we may love 
 
 ameis you may love 
 
 dmem they may love 
 
 First Preterimperfect. 
 
 que eu amdra, or amdsse that I might or could love 
 amdras, or amasses thou mightest love 
 
 amdra, or amdsse he might love 
 
 amdramos, or amdssemos we might love 
 
 amdreis, or amdsseis you might love 
 
 amdrao or amdssem they might love 
 
 When we find the conjunction z/ before the in- 
 dicative imperfect, we must use the imperfect of the 
 subjunctive or optative, when we speak by way of 
 wish or desire; as, If I did love, se $u amasse, or 
 amara, and not se eu amava, if I had loved ; if I 
 had, se eu liver a, tlvesse, and not se eu tin ha ; and 
 so in all the verbs. 
 
 Second Preterimperfect. 
 
 amaria I should love 
 
 amarias thou shouldst love 
 
 amaria he should love 
 
 amariamos we should love 
 
 amarieis you should love 
 
 amariao they should love 
 
GRAMMAR. 61 
 
 Preterperfect. 
 
 It is composed of the participle amddo and the 
 present subjunctive of the auxiliary verb ter. 
 
 que Su tenha amddo that I have loved. 
 
 tenhas amddo thou hast loved. 
 
 tenha amddo he has loved 
 
 tenhdmos amddo we have loved 
 
 tenhdis amddo you have loved 
 
 tenhao amddo they have loved 
 
 Preterpluperfect. 
 
 It is composed of the participle amado and the 
 first preterim perfect subjunctive of the auxiliary 
 verb ter. 
 
 se eu tivera or tivesse amddo if I had loved 
 
 tiveras or tivesses amddo thou hadst loved 
 
 tiv&ra or tivesse amddo he had loved 
 
 tiveramos or tivessemos amddo we had loved 
 tivereis or tivesseis amddo you had loved 
 
 tiverao or tivessem amddo they had loved 
 
 Second Preterpluperfect. 
 
 It is composed of the participle amddo and the 
 second preterimperfect subjunctive of the auxiliary 
 verb ter. 
 
 teria amddo I should have loved 
 
 terias amddo thou shouldst have loved 
 
 term amddo he should have loved 
 
 teriamos amddo we should have loved 
 
 terms amddo ye should have loved 
 
 teriao amddo they should have loved 
 
 Future. 
 
 qudndo iv, amdr when I shall love 
 
 amdres thou shalt love 
 
 amdr he shall love 
 
 amdrmos we shall love 
 
 amdrdes you shall love 
 
 amdrem they shall love 
 
 
fit PORTUGUESE 
 
 Second Future. 
 
 It is composed of the participle amddo, and the 
 future subjunctive of the auxiliary verb ter. 
 
 qudndo in tiver amddo when I shall have loved 
 
 tiveres amddo thou shalt have loved 
 
 tiver amddo he shall have loved 
 
 tivirmos amddo we shall have loved 
 
 tivirdes amddo you shall have loved 
 
 tiverem amddo they shall have loved 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 
 amdr to love 
 
 Preterperfect. 
 
 tSr amddo to have loved 
 
 PARTICIPLE. 
 
 Present. 
 
 que dma, or amdnte that loves 
 
 Pret. 
 
 amddo, masc. amdda, fern. loved 
 
 Future. 
 que hd de amdr, that is to love 
 
 GERUNDS. 
 
 amdndo loving 
 tendo amddo having loved 
 
 SUPINE. 
 para amdr to love 
 Note, the verbs terminating in the infinitive in 
 car take qu in those tenses, where the c would other- 
 wise meet with the vowel e ; and those terminating 
 in the infinitive in gar take an win those tenses, 
 where the g would otherwise meet with the same 
 vowel e; that is to say, in the first person singular 
 of the preterperfect definite, in the third person 
 
GRAMMAR. 63 
 
 singular, in the first and third plural of the impera- 
 tive, and in the whole present subjunctive, which 
 are the tenses I shall give by way of example in the 
 verbs peccdr and pagar. 
 
 Peccdr, to sin. 
 
 Preterperfect definite. 
 
 eu pequii I sinned — instead ofpeccii 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 pique elle, let him sin : pequimos nos, let us sin ; pequem 
 elks, let them sin— and not piece elle, &c. 
 
 Present subjunctive. 
 
 que eu pique, tu piques, that I may sin — 
 and not que eu piece , ptcces, &c. 
 
 Pagar, to pay. 
 
 Preterperfect definite. 
 
 paguei I paid 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 pdgue elle, paguemos nos, pdguem elles, let him pay, &c. 
 
 Present subjunctive. 
 
 que eu pdgue, pdgues, pdgue paguemos, pagueis, pdguem, 
 
 that I may pay, fyc. — and not page, pages, &c. 
 
 The other tenses are conjugated like amdr. 
 
 Regular verbs in ar. 
 
 Abafdr to choke, or to smo- Agarrdr to lay hold of 
 
 ther Alagdr to overflow 
 
 Abaldr to shake Amaldicodr to curse. 
 
 Abandr to fan Annuldr to annul, or to make 
 Abastdr to satiate void. 
 
 Abaxdr to bring or let down Apressdr to press or hasten 
 
 Abencodr to bless. Aquentdr to warm 
 
 Abocanhdr to carp Argumentdr to argue 
 
 Abomindr to abominate Assoprdr to blow 
 
 Abotodr to button Atdr to tie 
 
 Acabdr to finish Avassaldr to subdue, to con- 
 Admoestdr to admonish quer. 
 
 Affrontdr to abuse Azeddr to sour 
 
64 PORTUGUESE 
 
 Of the Verbs Passive. 
 
 Before we proceed to the second conjugation, it 
 is necessary to know that the Verbs passive, which 
 express the suffering of an action, are nothing more 
 than the participles of verbs active, conjugated with 
 the verb ser y to be. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 Present tense. 
 
 Su sou amado I am loved 
 
 tu is amado thou art loved 
 
 Slle he amado he is loved 
 
 nos somos amddos we are loved 
 
 vos sois amddos you are loved 
 
 elks sao amddos they are loved 
 
 and so throughout the other moods and tenses. 
 Second Conjugation of the verbs in er. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 
 Present. 
 
 vendo 
 
 I sell 
 
 vendes 
 
 thou sellest 
 
 vende 
 
 he sells 
 
 vendemos 
 
 we sell 
 
 vendeis 
 
 you sell 
 
 vendem 
 
 they sell 
 
 
 Preterimperfect. 
 
 vendia 
 
 I did sell 
 
 vendias 
 
 thou didst sell 
 
 vendia 
 
 he did sell 
 
 vendiamos 
 
 we did sell 
 
 vendteis 
 
 you did sell 
 
 vendiao 
 
 they did sell 
 
 
 Preterperfect definite. 
 
 vendi 
 
 Isold 
 
 vendeste 
 
 thou soldest 
 
 vendeo 
 
 he sold 
 
GRAMMAR. 
 
 65 
 
 vendemos 
 vendestes 
 venderao 
 
 we sold 
 you sold 
 they sold 
 
 tenho 
 
 tens 
 
 tern 
 
 temos 
 
 tendes 
 
 tern 
 
 Preterperfect. 
 
 r 
 
 »vendido i I have sold, fyc. 
 
 1 
 
 Preterpluperfect. 
 
 f 
 
 ■vendido 
 
 tinha 
 
 tinhas 
 
 tinha 
 
 ttnharhos j 
 
 tinheis 
 
 tinhao ,j ^ 
 
 This tense may also be conjugated thus : vendera, venderas, 
 vendera, venderamos, vendereis, venderao. 
 
 -( I have sold, fyc. 
 
 venderei 
 
 venderds 
 
 venderd 
 
 venderemos 
 
 vendereis 
 
 venderao 
 
 Future. 
 
 ■I shall or will sell, #c. 
 
 J 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 vende tu sell thou 
 
 venda elle let him sell 
 
 venddmos nos let us sell 
 
 vendei vos sell ye 
 
 vendao elles 
 
 let them sell 
 
 OPTATIVE AND SUBJUNCTIVE MOODS. 
 
 1 
 
 que &u venda 
 vendas 
 venda 
 venddmos 
 venddis 
 vtndao 
 
 that I may sell, fyc. 
 
 F 
 
66 
 
 ' PORTUGUESE 
 
 Preterimperfect. 
 
 que eu vendera or vendesse 
 
 venderas or vendesses, 
 vendera or vendesse 
 vendtramos or vendessemos 
 vendereis, or vendesseis 
 venderao or vcndessem 
 
 that I might or could sell, 
 
 <Sfc. 
 
 Second Preterimperfect. 
 
 vender m 
 
 venderias 
 
 vendcria 
 
 vender'iamos 
 
 venderieis 
 
 venderiao 
 
 I should sell, fyc. 
 
 que eu tenha 
 tenhas 
 
 Preterperfect. 
 f 
 
 lentdmos Y ™ M °> \ that l have sold > **> 
 
 tenhdis 
 
 tenhao 
 
 Preterpluperfect. 
 
 se eu tivtra or tivesse 
 tiveras or tivesses 
 tivera or tivesse 
 tiveramos or tivessemos 
 tivereis or tivesseis 
 tivSrao or tivessem 
 
 - vendido - 
 
 if I had sold, #< 
 
 Second Preterpluperfect. 
 
 term 1 
 
 term 
 
 teriamos t 
 terieis 
 teriao 
 
 vendido, 
 
 I should have sold, $c. 
 
GRAMMAR. 67 
 
 Future. 
 
 quando iu vender when I shall sell, §c. 
 
 venderes 
 vender 
 vendermos 
 venderdes 
 venderem 
 
 Second Future. 
 
 quando <!u tiver ~\ 
 tiver es 
 
 i l . ver y vendido -\ when I shall have sold, cjc. 
 
 tivermos 
 
 tiver des 
 
 tivirem 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOT). 
 
 Present. 
 
 vender to sell 
 
 Preterperfect. 
 
 ter vendido to have sold 
 
 PARTICIPLE. 
 
 Present. 
 
 que vende that sell, that sells 
 
 Preterite. 
 
 vendido, masc. vendida, fem. Plur. vendidos, vendidas, sold. 
 
 Future. 
 que ha de vender that is to sell 
 
 GERUNDS. 
 
 vendendo selling 
 tindo vendido having sold 
 
 SUPINE. 
 
 «. para vender to sell 
 
 After the same manner as the verb vender, are 
 conjugated all the other regular verbs of the second 
 conjugation ending in er : as the following : 
 
 f2 
 
GS 
 
 PORTUGUESE 
 
 yJcomctcr, to attack 
 Bcber, to drink 
 Comer, to cat 
 Comprehender, to perceive, or 
 
 apprehend 
 Cometer, to commit 
 Conceder, to grant 
 Correr, to run 
 Dever, to owe 
 
 Esconder, to hide 
 Emprender, to undertake 
 Meter, to put in 
 Offender, to offend 
 Provider, to promise 
 Responder, to answer 
 Reprehender, to reprove 
 Temer, to fear 
 Varrer, to sweep, &c. 
 
 Third Conjugation, of the Verbs e?7ding in ir. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 Present. 
 
 admitto 
 
 adnuttes 
 admitte 
 
 admittia 
 
 admittias 
 
 admittia 
 
 admitti 
 
 admittiste 
 
 admittio 
 
 I admit, &c. 
 
 admit ttmos 
 admit tis 
 admit tern 
 
 Preterimperfect. 
 
 I did admit, &c. admittiamos 
 admittieis 
 admittido 
 
 Preterperfect definite. 
 
 I admitted. admittimos 
 
 admittistes 
 admittirao 
 
 Preterperfect. 
 This tense is composed of the participle admittido, 
 and the present indicative of the auxiliary verb, ter. 
 
 terho admittido, I have admitted. 
 
 tens admittido, &c. thou hast, &c. 
 
 Preterpluperfect. 
 Composed of the participle admittido, and the 
 imperfect of the auxiliary verb ter. 
 
 tinha admittido, &c. 
 tinhas admittido, &c. 
 
 I had admitted 
 thou hadst, &c. 
 
 It may also be conjugated thus ; admittira, admittiras, 
 admittira, admittiramos, admittireis, admittirao. 
 
GRAMMAR. 69 
 
 Future. 
 
 admittirei I shall or will admit 
 
 admittiras 
 
 admittira 
 
 admittiremos 
 
 admittireis 
 
 admittirdo 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 admitte tu admit thou 
 
 admitta elle let him admit 
 
 admittdmos nos let us admit 
 
 admitti vos admit ye 
 
 admittao elks let them admit 
 
 OPTATIVE AND SUBJUNCTIVE MOODS. 
 
 Present. 
 
 que eu admitta that I may admit, &c. 
 admittas 
 admitta 
 admittdmos 
 admittdis 
 admittao 
 
 First Preterimperfect. 
 
 que eu admittira or admittisse that I might admit, &c. 
 
 admittiras or admitiisses 
 admittira or admittisse 
 admittiramos or admittissemos 
 admittireis or admittisseis 
 admittirao or admittissem 
 
 Second Preterimperfect. 
 admittiria I should or would admit, &c. 
 admittirias 
 admittira 
 admittiriamos 
 admititrieis 
 admit tiriao 
 
 Preterperfect. 
 Composed of the participle, admittzdo, and the 
 present subjunctive of the verb ter. 
 
 que eu tenha admittido that I have admitted 
 
 tenhas admittido, &c. thou hast admitted, &c. 
 
 
70 PORTUGUESE 
 
 Preterpluperfect. 
 It is composed of the first preterim perfect sub- 
 junctive of the verb ter and the participle admit Odd. 
 
 se eu tivera admittido If I had admitted 
 
 tiveras, &c. thou hadst admitted, &c. 
 
 Second Preterpluperfect. 
 It is composed of the second pre terim perfect sub- 
 junctive of the verb ter and the participle admittido. 
 
 eu teria admittido I should have admitted 
 
 terias, &c. thou shouldst, &c. 
 
 First Future. 
 
 se eu admittir If I shall admit, &c. 
 
 admittir es 
 admittir 
 admittirmos 
 admittirdes 
 admittirem 
 
 Second Future. 
 It is composed of the first future subjunctive of 
 the verb ter and the participle admittido. 
 
 se eu tiver admittido If I shall have admitted 
 
 tiveres, &c. thou shalt, <&c. 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 admittir to admit 
 
 Preterperfect. 
 ter admittido to have admitted 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 
 Present. 
 admittido, for the masc. admittida, for the fern, admitted 
 
 Future. 
 que ha de admittir that is to admit 
 
 GERUNDS. 
 
 admittindo admitting 
 teuho admittido having admitted 
 
 SUPINES. 
 
 para admittir to admit 
 
GRAMMAR. 71 
 
 Conjugate after the same manner the following 
 verbs : 
 
 Abrir, to open 
 Conduzir, to conduce 
 Introduzir, to introduce 
 Induzir, to induce 
 Produzir, to produce 
 
 Luzir, to shine 
 Nutrir, to nourish 
 Reduzir, to reduce, to bring to 
 Traduzir, to translate 
 JJeduzir, to deduct, &c. 
 
 we give 
 you give 
 they give 
 
 Of the Irregular Verbs in ar. 
 
 There are in each conjugation some verbs which 
 do not conform to the common rule, and on that 
 account are called irregulars. 
 
 There are but two of the first conjugation, which 
 in some of their tenses depart from the rule of the 
 verb amdr, viz. estar and dar* We have already 
 conjugated the first, and the second is conjugated 
 in the following manner. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 Present. 
 
 dou I give ddmos 
 
 das thou givest dais 
 
 da he gives dao 
 
 Preterimperfect. 
 I did give, &c. (as in regular verbs of the first 
 
 conjugation) 
 Preterperfect definite. 
 I gave demos we gave 
 
 thou gavest destes you gave 
 
 he gave derao they gave 
 
 Preterperfect. 
 This tense is composed of the participle dado and 
 the present indicative of the auxiliary verb ter; as 
 tenho dado, &c. I have given, &c. 
 Preterpluperfect . 
 Composed of the participle dado and the imperfect 
 of the auxiliary verb ter ; as eu tinha dado> &c. I 
 had given, &c. 
 
 ddva 
 ddvas, &c. 
 
 dei 
 
 deste 
 
 deu 
 
72 PORTUGUESE 
 
 Future. 
 
 darii I shall or will give, &c. (as in the verb amdr) 
 
 dards, &c. 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 demos nos, let us give 
 da tu, give thou dai vos, give thou 
 
 di ilk, let him give dim elks, let them give 
 
 OPTATIVE AND SUBJUNCTIVE MOODS. 
 Present. 
 que iu de that I may give, &c. 
 des 
 de 
 
 demos 
 deis 
 dim 
 
 Preterimperfect. 
 
 que eu dira or desse that I might give, &c. 
 
 deras, or desses 
 dira or desse 
 dtiramos or dessemos 
 dereis or desseis 
 derao or dessem 
 
 Second Imperfect. 
 
 daria I should give, &c. dariamos 
 
 darias darieis 
 
 daria dariao 
 
 The preterperfect, preterpluperfect, and the se- 
 cond preterplu perfect, are composed of the participle 
 dado, and the auxiliary verb tSr, as in the regular 
 verbs. 
 
 Future. 
 quando eu der when I shall give, &c. 
 deres 
 der 
 
 dirmos 
 derdes 
 derem 
 
 Second Future. 
 Is composed of the participle dado, &c. as the 
 regular verbs. 
 
GRAMMA R. 73 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 ddr, to give, &c. as in the regular verbs. 
 
 Of the Irregular Verbs in er. 
 
 I begin with fazer, poder, and saber, because they 
 occur oftenest in discourse. 
 
 Fazer to do or make. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 Present. 
 
 fdc o I do fazemos we do 
 
 fazes thou dost fazeis you do 
 
 fdz he does fdzem they do 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 fazia, I did or did make, &c. faziamos 
 
 fazias fazieis 
 
 fazm faztao 
 Preterperfeet definite. 
 
 fiz I made, &c. fizemos 
 
 fizeste fizestes 
 
 fez fizerao 
 
 Preterperfeet. 
 
 tenhofeito I had done. &c. 
 tensfeito, &c. 
 
 Preterpluperfect. 
 
 tinhafeito I had done, &c. 
 tinhasfeito, &c. 
 
 Future. 
 
 farti I shall do, &c. (according to the regular verb.) 
 far as , &c. 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 facdmos nos let us do 
 faze tu do thou • fazei vos ' do you 
 
 fdea elk let him do fdcao elles let them do 
 
74 PORTUGUESE 
 
 OPTATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 
 que eu fata that I may do, &e. (according to the regu- 
 
 facas lar verhs.) 
 
 fdea, &c. 
 
 Preterimperfect. 
 
 que eufizera or fizesse that I might do, &c. 
 fizer as or fizesses 
 fizer a or Jizesse 
 fixer amos or fiiessemos 
 fizereis or fizesseis 
 fizer ao or fizesscm 
 
 Second Imperfect. 
 
 farm I should do, &c. farmmos 
 farms farms 
 
 farm far'iao 
 
 Future. 
 qudndo eu fizer when T shall do, &c. 
 fizeres 
 fizer 
 fizermos 
 fizerdes 
 fizer em 
 
 Second Future. 
 
 qudndo eu tiver feito when I shall have done 
 tiveres feilo, &c. 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 fazer, to do. 
 
 GERUNDS. 
 
 fazendo doing or in doing. 
 
 PARTICIPLE. 
 
 feito made or done. 
 
 After the same manner are conjugated desfazer* 
 to undo ; contrafazer, to counterfeit ; nfazei\ to 
 make again. 
 
GRAM M A R. 75 
 
 Poder to be able. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 
 posso I can or am able podemos we can 
 
 podes thou canst podeis you can 
 
 /?de/e he can podem they can 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 £>oc?«a I could or was able, &c. 
 podias, &c. 
 
 Preterperfect definite. 
 
 ptw/e I could pudemos we could 
 
 pudeste thcu couldst pudestes you could 
 
 /jorfe, he could puderao they could 
 
 Preterperfect. 
 
 £e?iAo podido, &c. I have been able, &c. 
 
 Future. 
 
 poder ei I shall be able, &c. 
 poderds, &c. 
 
 There is no Imperative. 
 
 OPTATIVE AND SUBJUNCTIVE MOODS. 
 
 Present. 
 
 que eu possa that I may be able 
 
 possas thou mayest be able, &c. 
 
 possa 
 
 possdmos 
 
 possdis 
 
 jjossao 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 que eu pudera or pudesse that I might be able 
 
 puderas or pudesses thou mightest be able, &c. 
 
 pudera or pudesse 
 puderamos or pudessemos 
 pudereis or pudesseis 
 puderao or pudessem 
 
76 PORTUGUESE 
 
 Second Imperfect. 
 
 poder i a I should be able, &c. 
 
 podcrias, &c. 
 
 Future. 
 qudndo eu puder when I shall be able, &c. 
 
 puder es 
 
 puder 
 
 puder mos 
 
 puderdes 
 
 puderem 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 poder to be able. 
 
 GERUNDS. 
 
 podendo being able 
 
 PARTICIPLE. 
 
 pudido, been able 
 
 Saber, to know 
 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 
 Present. 
 
 
 set 
 
 I know sabemos 
 
 we know 
 
 sdbes 
 
 thou knowest sabeis 
 
 you know 
 
 sdbe 
 
 he knows sdbem 
 Imperfect. 
 
 they know 
 
 sabia 
 
 I did know 
 
 
 sabias 
 
 thou didst know> &c 
 
 
 sabia, 
 
 &c. 
 
 
 Preterperfect definite. 
 soube I knew, &c. soubemos 
 soubeste soubestes 
 
 soube soubcrao 
 
 Preterperfect. 
 tenho sabido I have known, &c. 
 
GRAMMAR. 77 
 
 Future. 
 saberei I shall or will know, &c. (according to the 
 
 saherds, &c. regular verbs. 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 saibdmos nos let us know 
 sdbe tu know thou sabei vos know you 
 
 scuba elle let him know saibao elles let them know 
 
 OPTATIVE AND SUBJUNCTIVE MOODS. 
 Present. 
 que eu sdiba that I may know 
 
 sdibas thou mayest know, &c, 
 
 sdiba 
 
 saibdmos 
 
 saibdis 
 
 saibao 
 
 Imperfect. 
 que eu soubera or soubesse that I might know, &c. 
 
 soubera or soubesses 
 soubera or soubesse 
 souberamos or soubessemos 
 soubereis or soubesseis 
 souberao or soubessem 
 
 Second Imperfect. 
 sabcria I should know, &c. saberiamos 
 
 saberias saberieis 
 
 saberia saberiao 
 
 Future. 
 
 qudndo eu souber when I shall know, &c. 
 souberes 
 souber 
 soubermos 
 souberdes 
 souberem 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 
 saber to know 
 
 GERUND. 
 
 sabendo knowing 
 
78 PORTUGUESE 
 
 PARTICIPLE. 
 
 saUdo (for the masc.) sabida (for the feminine) known 
 
 Of the Irregular Verb trazer, to bring. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 Present. 
 
 trdgo I bring trazemos we bring, &c. 
 
 trdzes thou bringest trazeis 
 
 trdz he brings trdzem 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 trazia, I did bring 
 
 trazias, &c. thou didst bring, &c. (according to the regulars) 
 
 Preterperfect definite. 
 trouxe I brought trouxemos 
 
 trouxeste thou broughtest, &c. trouxestes 
 
 trouxe trouxeruo 
 
 Preterperfect. 
 tenho trazido I have brought, &c. 
 tens trazido, &c. 
 
 Future. 
 
 
 trarei I shall or will bring, &c. 
 
 traremos 
 
 trards 
 
 trareis 
 
 trard 
 
 trardo 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 tragdmos nos let us bring 
 trdze tu bring thou trazei vos bring you 
 
 trdga Slle let him bring trdgao elles, let them bring 
 
 OPTATIVE AND SUBJUNCTIVE MOODS. 
 
 Present. 
 
 que eu trdga that I may bring, &c. 
 
 trdgas 
 trdga 
 tragdmos 
 tragdis 
 tragau 
 
GRAMMA R. 79 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 que eu trouxera or trouxesse that I may bring, $c. 
 
 trouxer as or trouxesses 
 trouxera or trouxesse 
 trouxeramos or trouxessemos 
 trouxereis or trbuxesseis 
 trouxerao or irouxessem 
 
 Second Imperfect. 
 eu traria I should bring, &c. trariamos 
 
 trarias 
 
 trarieis > 
 
 traria 
 
 trariao 
 
 
 Future. 
 
 quando eu trouxer 
 
 when I shall bring, &c. 
 
 trouxeres 
 
 
 trouxer 
 
 
 trouxermos 
 
 
 trouxerdes 
 
 
 trouxerem 
 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD, 
 Present. 
 trazer to bring 
 
 GERUND. 
 
 trazendo bringing 
 
 PARTICIPLE. 
 
 trazido masc. trazida fern, brought 
 
 Conjugation of the Irregular Verb ver, to see, 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 Present. 
 
 vejo I see vemos 
 
 vis thou seest vedes 
 
 vi he sees, &c vem 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 via I did see, &c. 
 
 vias 
 
 via &c. 
 
80 PORTUGUESE 
 
 Preterperfcct definite. 
 
 v'r I saw &c. 
 
 
 vimos 
 
 vistc 
 
 
 vistcs 
 
 vio 
 
 Preterperfect. 
 
 virau 
 
 tenho visto 
 
 I have seen, 
 
 &c. 
 
 this visto &c 
 
 Future. 
 
 
 verei I shall see, &c. 
 
 
 verds, &c. 
 
 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 
 ve tu 
 
 see thou 
 
 
 veja elk 
 
 let him see 
 
 vejdmos nos 
 
 let us see 
 
 
 vide vos 
 
 see you 
 
 
 vejao elks 
 
 let them see him 
 
 OPTATIVE MOOD. 
 
 
 que ea veja that I may see, &c. vejdmos 
 
 v&jas 
 
 vejais 
 
 
 veja 
 
 vejao 
 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 que eu viva or visse thai I might see, &c. 
 vivas or visses 
 vira or visse 
 viramos or vissemos 
 vireis or viseis 
 virao or vissem 
 
 Second Imperfect. 
 
 eu veria I should see, &c. veriamos 
 
 lerias v tries 
 
 veria vertao 
 
 Future. 
 qudndo eu vir when I shall see, &c. 
 
 vires 
 vir 
 
 virmos 
 virdes 
 vir em 
 
GRAMMAR. 81 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 ver to see 
 
 GERUND. 
 
 vendo seeing 
 
 PARTICIPLE. 
 
 visto, vista seen 
 
 In like manner are conjugated the compounds 
 antever, prever, and rever. 
 
 The verb jprotf/r j when it signifies to provide, for, 
 or, to take care of, is conjugated in the present indi- 
 cative thus : 
 
 eu provenhoy I take care of, fyc. provimos 
 
 provens provindes 
 
 provem provem 
 
 But when it signifies to make provision, it is con- 
 jugated thus : 
 
 euprovejo, I make provision, #c. provemos 
 
 proves proveis 
 
 prove prdvem 
 
 Conjugation of the Auxiliary Verb dizer, to say. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 
 dzgo> I say, <$•<;. dizemos 
 
 dtzes dizeis 
 
 diz dizem 
 
 Preterimperfect. 
 diz'ia, I did say, §c. 
 dizias, &c. 
 
 Preterperfect definite. 
 disse, I said ; fyc. dissemos 
 
 dissiste dissestes 
 
 disse disserao 
 
 G 
 
82 PORTUGUESE 
 
 Preterperfect. 
 
 tcnho ditto, I have said, t$-c. 
 tens ditto, &c. 
 
 Future. 
 
 direi I shall or will say, <$'C« 
 dims, &c. 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 dize tu 
 
 say thou 
 
 diga elk 
 
 let him say 
 
 digdmos n6s 
 
 let us say 
 
 dizei vos 
 
 say you 
 
 digad elks 
 
 let them say 
 
 OPTATIVE MOOD. 
 
 que eu diga that I may say, fyc. 
 
 digas, &c. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 que eu dissera or diss6sse that I might say, fyc, 
 disseras or dissesses 
 dissera or diss6sse 
 diss6ramos or dissessemos 
 dissereis or dissesseis 
 disserao or dissessem 
 
 Second Imperfect. 
 diria I should say, fyc. 
 
 dirias, &c. 
 
 Future. 
 
 qudndo eu dissir when shall I say, $c 
 
 disseres 
 disser, &c. 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 dizer to say 
 
 GERUND. 
 
 dizendo saying 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 
 ditto, ditto. said 
 
GRAMMAR. 83 
 
 Observe, that the compounds desdizer, to unsay, . | 
 
 and contradizer, to contradict, are in all points con- 
 jugated like dizer. 
 
 jugation 
 
 of the Irregular Verb 
 willing. 
 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 
 Present. 
 
 quero 
 queres 
 quer 
 
 I will, or am willing 
 thou art willing 
 he is willing, fyc. 
 
 queremos 
 
 
 quereis 
 
 
 querent 
 
 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 queria 
 
 I was willing, fyc. 
 
 queriasy &c. 
 
 
 Preterperfect definite. 
 
 quiz 
 
 quiz6ste 
 
 quiz 
 
 I have been willing, fyc. 
 
 quizemos 
 quizestes 
 
 
 quizerao 
 
 
 
 Future. 
 
 quererei 
 
 I shall be willing, fyc. 
 
 quereras, &c. 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 queiras tu be thou willing 
 
 queira elle let him be willing 
 
 queirdmos nos let us be willing 
 
 queirdis vos be you willing 
 
 queirao elles let "them be willing 
 
 OPTATIVE AND SUBJUNCTIVE MOODS. 
 
 que tu queira that I may be willing, $$c, 
 
 queiras, &c. 
 
84 PORTUGUESE 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 que eu quizera or quizesse that I were willing 
 quizeras or quizesses thou wert willing 
 
 quizera or quizesse he were willing 
 
 quiztramos or quizessemos we were willing 
 quize'reis or quizesseis you were willing 
 
 quizerab or quizessem they were willing 
 
 Second Imperfect. 
 
 ew quereria I should or would be willing, fyc. 
 
 quererias, &c. 
 
 Future. 
 
 qudndo eu quizer when I shall be willing, fyc. 
 
 quizeres, &c. 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 querer to be willing 
 
 i GERUND. 
 
 querindo being willing 
 
 PARTICIPLE. 
 
 querido been willing 
 
 Quer is sometimes a conjunction, when repeated 
 in a sentence, and when it is rendered into English 
 by whether and or ; as, ^w/r ws o tenhais feito, quer 
 nao, whether you have done that or no. But when 
 it is not repeated, and is joined to the particle se, 
 it is sometimes rendered into English by at least ; 
 as, hum se quer^ one at least; and sometimes by 
 however, when joined to the particle que; as como 
 quer que seja, however it be. In all which cases, it 
 is not to be confounded with the third person sin- 
 gular of the indicative of the verb querer. 
 
 The verb querer is sometimes used with the 
 particle se instead of the verb dever ; as, as cuusas 
 nao se quer em feitas a pressa, things must not be 
 done in a hurry. 
 
GRAMMAR. 85 
 
 Of the Irregular Verb valer, to be worth. 
 
 I shall give no other tenses of this verb than the 
 present indicative, the imperative, and the present 
 of the subjunctive, none but these being irregular. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 
 vdlho I am worth, fyc. 
 
 vales 
 
 vale or val 
 
 valemos 
 
 valeis 
 
 vdkm 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 vale tu be thou worth 
 
 vdlha tile let him be worth 
 
 valhdmos nos let us be worth 
 
 valei vos be you worth 
 
 vdlhao elles let- them be worth . 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 que tu vdlha that I may be worth, fyc, 
 vdlhas 
 vdlha 
 valhdmos 
 valhdis 
 vdlhao 
 
 Of the Irregular Verb perder, to lose. 
 
 This verb changes the c before o of the present 
 indicative into d in the other persons of the same 
 tense, as well as in the other tenses and moods, ex- 
 cept the imperative and present subjunctive. It is 
 conjugated in the following manner : 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 perco, I lose, Sec. perdemos 
 
 perdes perdeis 
 
 perde, perdem 
 
86 PORTUGUESE 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 phdc tu lose thou 
 
 perca elk let him lose 
 
 percdmos nos let us lose 
 
 perdei vos lose you 
 
 percao illes let them lose 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 que eu perca that I might lose, fyc, 
 
 percas 
 perca, &c. 
 
 The compounds of the verb ter, as, contenho, I 
 contain ; detenho, I detain, &c. are conjugated in 
 like manner. 
 
 Se me verbs of this conjugation are only irregular 
 in the participle passive ; as escrito, from escrever ; 
 absulto, from absolver. 
 
 Those that have the j before o in the present in- 
 dicative change the j into g in all tenses and per- 
 sons, in which the j would otherwise meet with the 
 vowels i or e ; as, eleger, to elect ; eu clejo, tu eleges, 
 &c. I elect, &c. 
 
 Imperfect. Preter-def. 
 
 elegia, fyc. elegi elegeste, &c. I elected, tyc. 
 
 The verbs ending in eyo in the present indicative, 
 change that termination into ia in the imperfect, 
 and into i in the preter-defmite, and are so conju- 
 gated. 
 
 
 INDICATIVE 
 
 MOOD. 
 
 
 Present. 
 
 
 eu let/o 
 
 les 
 
 U 
 
 I read, fyc. 
 
 lemos 
 
 ledes 
 
 lem 
 
 tu Via 
 lias, &c. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 I did read, fyc. 
 
 
GRAMMAR. 87 
 
 Preter definite. 
 
 tu It I read, #c. 
 
 Uste, Sfc. 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 hdmos nos let us read 
 It tu read thou lede vos read you 
 
 lea elle, let him read leao elks let them read 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 que eu lea that I may read, fyc, 
 
 leas 
 lea, &c. 
 
 You may observe that they lose the y through all 
 the other moods and tenses. The verb ever, to be- 
 lieve, is conjugated in the same manner. 
 
 Of the Irregular Verbs in in 
 Ir, to go. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present tense. 
 
 vou I go vamos we go 
 
 vds thou goest ides you go 
 
 vai he goes vao they go 
 
 Preterimperfect. 
 
 hia I did go, fyc. hiamos 
 
 Mas hieis 
 
 hia Mao 
 
 Preterperfect definite. 
 
 fid I went fomos we went 
 
 foste thou wentest fostes you went 
 foi he went forao they went 
 
 Preterperfect. 
 *2,°&c. } ' ldo { l have 8° ne ' * C< 
 
88 PORTUGUESE 
 
 Preterpluperfect. 
 
 tn'hts { ido I l had g° ne > ** 
 
 Future. 
 
 irei I shall or will go, fyc, 
 
 , irds, &c. 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 vdmos nos y let us go 
 vdi tu go thou tde vos go ye 
 
 vd elle let him go vao elles let them go 
 
 OPTATIVE AND SUBJUNCTIVE MOODS. 
 
 que Su vd that I may go, $c. 
 
 vds 
 vd 
 
 vdmos 
 vddes 
 vao 
 
 First Preterimperfect. 
 
 que eufora or fosse that I might go, fyc. 
 
 for as ox fosses 
 fora oxjosse 
 foramos or fossemos 
 foreis oxfosseis 
 fordo ox f ossein 
 
 Second Preterimperfect. 
 iria I should go, fyc. 
 
 irias, &c. 
 
 Preterperfect. 
 
 It is composed of the participle ido and the pre- 
 sent subjunctive of the auxiliary verb th\ 
 
 Preterpluperfect. 
 
 It is composed of the participle ido and the first 
 preterimperfect subjunctive of the auxiliary verb ter. 
 
GRAMMAR. 89 
 
 Second Preterpluperfect. 
 It is composed of the participle ido and the second 
 preterimperfect subjunctive of the auxiliary verb 
 tfr. 
 
 Future. 
 qudndo eufor when I shall go, <&c, 
 
 fores 
 for 
 formos 
 fordes 
 forem * 
 
 Second Future. 
 
 qudndo eu tiver f ,^ \ when I shall have gone, 
 
 tiveres, &c. \ j <$rc 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 ir to go 
 
 GERUND. 
 
 tndo going 
 
 PARTICIPLE. 
 
 ido gone 
 Fzr, to come. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 venho I come, §c. vimos 
 
 vens vindes 
 
 vem vem 
 
 Imperfect. 
 vinha I did come, fyc. vinhamos 
 vinhas vinheis 
 
 vinha mnhao 
 
 Preter definite. 
 vim I came, fyc. viemos 
 
 viesle viestes 
 
 veio vierao, 
 
 
90 PORTUGUESE 
 
 Preterimpcrfect. 
 
 tenho v'mdo I have come, §c. 
 tens vhido, <$c 
 
 Future, 
 
 virti I shall come, $c. 
 
 virasy &c. 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 venhdmos nos let us come 
 vem tu come thou vinde vos come you 
 
 vhiha ille let him come venhao tiles let them come 
 
 OPTATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 que eu venha 
 
 Imperfect. 
 que eu viera, or viesse 
 
 Second Imperfect. 
 viria, virias, &c. 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 vir to come 
 
 GERUND. 
 
 v'mdo coming 
 
 PARTICIPLE. 
 
 v'mdo come 
 The compounds of vir; as convlr to be conve- 
 nient ; sobrevir, to come unlooked for, are con- 
 jugated in the same manner. 
 
 Of the Irregular Verbs, mentir, to lie, sentir, to feel ; 
 servir, to serve; ferir, to wound. 
 
 These verbs change the i of the first person sin- 
 gular of the present tense, indicative, into e in the 
 
GRAMMAR. 91 
 
 other persons of the same tense, as well as in the 
 other tenses and moods, except in the imperative 
 and the present subjunctive. They are conjugated 
 thus : 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 Present. 
 
 eu minto 
 eu sinto 
 eu s'irvo 
 
 tu mentes 
 tu sentes 
 tu serves 
 
 elle mSnte, &c. 
 elle sente, &c. 
 elle serve, &c. 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 mente tu minta elle mintdmos nos menti v&s m'mtao tiles 
 sente tu sinta elle sintdmos nos senti vos smtao elles 
 serve tu sirva elle sirvdmos nos servi vos sirvao elles 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 minta mintas^ &e. 
 sinta sintas, &c. 
 
 sirva sirvas, &c. 
 
 The compounds, desmentir assentir, consents, 
 dissentir, presentir, are conjugated like mentir and 
 sentir; and also the verbs afferir, refer ir, conferir, 
 defer v'r, differ tr, infer 'ir. 
 
 Of the Irregular Verbs affliglr, to afflict ; corrigir, 
 to correct, fingir, to feign; ungir, to anoint; 
 compungir, frigir, dirigir, tingir, cingir, &c. 
 
 These verbs change the g of the infinitive mood 
 into j in those tenses where the g would other vvise 
 meet with the vowel 0, as in the first person singu- 
 lar of the present indicative afflijo ; or a as in the 
 third person of the imperative in both numbers, in 
 the first plural of the same tense, and in the present 
 subjunctive. 
 
 Of the Irregular Verb seguir, to follow. 
 
 This verb changes the e of the infinitive mood 
 into i in the first person singular of the present indi- 
 
92 PORTUGUESE 
 
 cative, eu sigo, I follow : in the present subjunctive 
 que eu s/ga, that I may follow ; and in the impera- 
 tive where it is conjugated thus : segue tu, siga elk, 
 sigdmos nos, scgui vos, si gab elks. 
 
 Observe that the u is lost in those tenses where 
 it would otherwise meet with the vowels o and a, 
 as you see in the examples ; and this observation 
 applies also to the verbs distlnguir, to distinguish ; 
 extingwr, to extinguish, &c. 
 
 The compounds are perseguir, to persecute ; 
 conseguir, to obtain ; proseguir to pursue. 
 
 Of the Irregular Verb ouvir, to hear. 
 
 This verb changes the v of the infinitive mood 
 into f in the first person singular of the present 
 indicative, eu Sugo, I hear, tu ouves, &c. in the 
 present subjunctive and in the imperative mood, 
 where it is conjugated thus : ouve tu, ouga elk, 
 ougdmos nos, ouvi vos, oucao elles, hear thou, &c. 
 
 Of the Irregular Verb dormfr, to sleep. 
 
 This verb changes the o of the infinitive mood 
 into u in the first person singular of the present 
 indicative, thus eu durmo tu dormes, elle dorme, 
 &c. I sleep, 8$c. In the present subjunctive, que 
 eudurma, &c. that I may sleep ; and in the impe- 
 rative mood, where it is conjugated thus ; dorme tu, 
 durma elk, durmamos nos, dormi vos, durmao elks, 
 sleep thou, 8$c. 
 
 Of the Irregular Verb fugir, to fly away. 
 
 This verb is irregular in the present indicative, 
 and is thus conjugated : fujo, foges, foge, fugimos, 
 fugis,fogem, 1 run away, &;c. It is also irregular 
 in the imperative mood where it is conjugated 
 thus : foge tu, fuja elk, fujdmos nbs,fugi v6s,fujad 
 elks. Finally, it is irregular in the present sub- 
 junctive ; que eu fuja, fit) as, &c. 
 
GRAMMA R. 93 
 
 It keeps the u in all other tenses and moods, as 
 also the g. 
 
 The verb surgir, to arrive, or to come to an an- 
 chor, has the same irregularity, and makes surlo, in 
 the participle passive. 
 
 The verbs, subir, cubrir, encubrir, descubrir, acu- 
 dir, bullir, sumir, consumer, cuspzr, construir\ tossir 
 &c. have the same irregularity in regard to the let- 
 ter u. 
 
 Of the Irregular Verb pedir to ask. 
 
 This verb is irregular in the first person singular 
 of the present indicative and subjunctive, as well as 
 in the imperative, in which it changes the d into g. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 en peco I ask, #c. nos pedimos 
 
 tu pedes vos pedis 
 
 elle pede elks pedem 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 pecamos nos let us ask 
 pede tu ask thou pedi vos ask you 
 
 peca elle let him ask pecao elles let them ask 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. ■ 
 
 que etc pica that I may ask, #c. pecamos 
 
 picas pecdis 
 
 peca pecao 
 
 In like manner is conjugated the verb medh\ to 
 measure : eu me$o, tu medes, &c. 
 
 Of the Irregular Verb vestir, to dress. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 
 eu visto I dress, <$fc. vestimos 
 
 vestes vestis 
 
 vests vestem 
 
94 PORTUGUESE 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD, 
 
 vislamos n6s let us dress 
 vestc tu dress thou vesti vos dress you 
 
 vista ilia let him dress vistao elks let them dress 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 
 que eu vista that I may dress, fyc. vistamos 
 
 vistas mstdis 
 
 vista vistao 
 
 In all other tenses and moods it keeps the let- 
 ter e ; and in like manner is conjugated the verb 
 despir 
 
 Of the Irregular Verb sortfr, to furnish, or stock. 
 
 Feyjo says, that the o of this verb is to be changed 
 into u in those tenses where the t is followed by e 
 or a, and that it is to be kept when the t is followed 
 byi; but in the Fabula dos Planetas we read, surtio 
 effeyto, it took effect : and in Andrade, 2 'part. Apolo- 
 get. we read, nab sortirab effeyto, where the verb 
 sortirab is in the same tense, viz. inthepreterperfectj 
 definite; therefore nothing can be determined about 
 the irregularity of this verb. 
 
 Of the Irregular Verb carpir, to weep. 
 
 This verb is defective, and is only used in those 
 tenses and persons where the p is followed by i ; as 
 carpzmoS) carpis, we weep, you weep. Preterimper- 
 fect, carpia, carpias, &c. I did weep, fyc. 
 
 Of the Irregular Verb parir, to bring forth young. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 
 cu pairo I bring forth, fyc. parimos 
 
 pares pans 
 
 pare parem 
 
 Imperfect. 
 paria, &c. 
 
GRAMMAR. 95 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 pairdmos 
 pare tu bring thou forth, tyc. pari 
 paira ilia pdirao 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 
 que eu paira that I may say, Sfc. pairdmos 
 pairas pairdis 
 
 paira pairao 
 
 Of the Irregular Verb repetir, to repeat. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 repito I repeat, fyc. repetimos 
 
 repeles repetis 
 
 repete repetem 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 repetid, repetias, &c. 
 
 Preterperfect definite. 
 
 repeti, repetiste, &c. 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 repete lie repeat thou, fyc. repitdmos, &c. 
 
 repita elle 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 
 que eu repita that I may repeat, fyc. 
 repitas, &c. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 repetira y or repetisse that I might repeat. 
 
 Of the Irregular Verbs sahir, to go out, andcahir, to 
 
 fall. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD.' 
 
 Present. 
 sdj/o I go out, 8fc. sahimos 
 
 sdhes sahis 
 
 sake sahem 
 
 Preterimperfect. 
 
 salua, sahicts, &c, 
 
96 PORTUGUESE 
 
 Prcterperfect definite. 
 
 sahi, sahiste, &c. 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 sahdmos nus 
 sake tu sahi vos 
 
 sdi/a elk sdgao elks 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 que eu soya, sdi/as, &c. 
 This is the common way of writing the irregular 
 tenses of the verb sahir as well as those of the verb 
 cahir^ viz. eu cdyo, tucahes, &c. I fall, &;c. according 
 to Feyjo, 
 
 Of the Irregular Verb, ordir, to ivarp in a loom. 
 
 Feyjo says that this verb changes the o into u in 
 those persons where it would otherwise meet with 
 the syllables da, de, do, 
 
 Of the Irregular Verb advertir, to warn. 
 
 Advertir is irregular in the following tenses, only 
 by changing vir into ver. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 
 advirto I warn, fyc. advertimos 
 
 advertes advertis 
 
 advertc adveriem 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 advirlamos nos 
 ddverte tu warn thou, Sfc. adverti vos 
 
 advirla ilk advirtao elks 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 Present. 
 que eu advtrta that I may warn, fyc. advirtdmos 
 
 advirtas advirtdis 
 
 advirta advirtao 
 
GRAMMA R. 07 
 
 Conjugation of the Irregular Verb por, to place. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 
 ponho I put, fyc. pomos 
 poens pondes 
 
 poem poem 
 
 Preterimperfect. 
 
 punha I did put, fyc. punhamos 
 punhas punheis 
 
 punha punhao 
 
 Preterperfect definite. 
 
 puz I put, fyc. puzemos 
 
 puzcste puzestes 
 
 poz puzerao 
 
 Preterperfect. 
 It is composed of the present indicative of the 
 auxiliary verb ter, and the participle posto. 
 Preterplu perfect. 
 
 Composed of the participle posto, and the imper- 
 fect of the auxiliary verb ter. 
 
 Future. 
 
 parti I shall or will put, fyc. portmos 
 pords poreis 
 
 pord pordd 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 ponhdmos nos 
 poem put thou, #c. ponde vos 
 
 ponha file ponkao elks 
 
 OPTATIVE AND SUBJUNCTIVE MOODS. 
 
 Present. 
 
 que ea ponha that I may put, #c. 
 iu ponhas, &c. 
 
 First Preterimperfect. 
 
 que £u puzera or puzesse that I might put, fya 
 tu puzeras, or puzesses, &c. 
 H 
 
98 PORTUGUESE 
 
 Second Preterimperfcct. 
 eu porta, I should put, fyc. 
 
 tu porias, &c. 
 
 Pretcrperfect. 
 It is composed of the participle posto, and the 
 present subjunctive of the auxiliary verb ten, 
 Preterpluperfect . 
 Composed of the participle pdsto, and the first 
 preterimperfect subjunctive N of the auxiliary verb 
 ter. 
 
 Second Preterpluperfect. 
 Composed of the participle posto, and the second 
 preterimperfect subjunctive of the auxiliary verb 
 ter. 
 
 Future. 
 quando eu puser, when I shall put, Sfc. 
 
 tu pushes, &c. 
 
 Second Future. 
 Composed of the participle posto, and the future 
 subjunctive of the auxiliary verb ter. 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 por to put 
 
 GERUND. 
 
 pondo, putting 
 
 PARTICIPLE PASSIVE. 
 
 pdsto put 
 After the same manner are conjugated the verbs 
 derived from por; as compur, to compose; clispor 
 to dispose ; propor, to propose, &c. 
 
 Some verbs are irregular only in the participle 
 passive; as aberto, from abrir ; escrito, from escre- 
 
 ver, &c. 
 
 Of Verbs Neuter. 
 Verbs neuter are those which make a complete 
 
GRAMMAR. 99 
 
 sense of themselves, and do not govern any case 
 after them, like the verb sactive ; as dormir, to sleep ; 
 anddr, to go ; tremir, to tremble, &c. There are, 
 however, some verbs neuter which may govern an 
 accusative ; as dormir hum sono profundo, to sleep 
 soundly ; iu fui andando meu caminho, e nao disse 
 huma palavra, I went my way, and said not a word. 
 Verbs neuter may also be defined as those which, in 
 their compound tenses, are seldom conjugated 
 with the verb sir, to be ; as, I sleep, I tremble, I 
 speak, &c. We may indeed say, iu tinho dormido, 
 1 have slept ; iu tenho tremido, I have trembled ; 
 but not, I am slept, &c. I said seldom* because 
 sometimes verbs neuter may be conjugated with the 
 verb sir ; as, sir bemfallado, to have a good name. 
 It is necessary to be acquainted with the nature 
 of a verb neuter, to avoid mistakes in the participle, 
 as may be seen in the Syntax of Participles. 
 
 Of Reciprocal Verbs. 
 
 The term Reciprocal is given to such Verbs as 
 return the action upon the agent, and are conju- 
 gated through all their tenses with the pronouns 
 conjunctive me, te, se, &c. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 indicative Present. 
 
 eu me arrependo I repent, fyc, 
 
 tu te arrependes 
 eile se arrepende, &c. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 eu me arrependia, I did repent, #c. 
 and so of the rest. 
 
 Yet, it is to be observed that the pronouns con- 
 junctive me, te, &c. may be placed either before or 
 after the verb, in the indicative, and consequently 
 we may say, iu me limbro, or eu Zimbro-me*, I re- 
 
 H 2 
 
100 PORTUGUESE 
 
 member ; me lembrei, or lembrei-me, I remembered, 
 &c. But in the imperative they should be placed 
 after the verb, as in the following 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 lembremo-nos nos 
 lembra-te tu remember thou, fyc. lembrdi-vos vos 
 Umbre-se elk lembrem-se elks 
 
 In which example 3^011 will observe also, that the 
 first person plural, which in the other verbs is like 
 the first person plural of the present subjunctive, has 
 the last consonant, s, cut off ; and so from lembremos 
 w r e cut off the s to make lembremo-nos ; and from 
 arrependdmos we make arrependdmo-nos, &c. In re- 
 gard to the infinitive, we may say, he necessdrio ar- 
 repender-se dos peccados, it is necessary to repent of 
 sins ; he necessdrio lembrdr-se, it is necessary to re- 
 member ; and not se arrepender, or se lembrdr. In 
 like manner we may say, lembrdndo-me, remember- 
 ing, and not me lembr&ndo. But the present infi- 
 nitive may be preceded by the particle para (which 
 forms the Portuguese supine), and then the pro- 
 noun conjunctive may be placed either before or 
 after it ; and we may say, para lembrdr-se, or 
 joara se lembrdr, to remember, or in order to re- 
 member. 
 
 In the subjunctive mood, you must put the 
 pronoun conjunctive before the present ; but you 
 must carefully observe, that the pronouns conjunc- 
 tive must be placed before it when preceded by the 
 particles se, if, que, that; thus we may say, que eu 
 me lembrdsse, se e*u me lembrdsse, that I might re- 
 member, &c. but not que eu lembrdsse me, &c. But 
 when the first preterimperfect is not preceded by 
 any particle, then you must place the pronoun con- 
 junctive after it ; as, arrependerame eu disso, I wish 
 I repented it. 
 
 In the second preterimperfect we may place the 
 pronouns conjunctive either before or after it, there- 
 
GRAMMAR. 101 
 
 fore you may say arrependeria-me se, &c. or eu me 
 arrependeria se, &c. I should' repent if, 8$c. 
 
 In the future you must always place the pronouns 
 conjunctive before it ; thus, qudndo eu me lembrar, 
 when I shall remember : but not qudndo eu lembrdr- 
 me. 
 
 Note, all the verbs active may become recipro- 
 cals. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 eu me dmo I love myself 
 
 tu te dmas thou lovest thyself 
 
 elle se dma he loves himself 
 
 nos nos amdmos we love ourselves, fyc. 
 
 Conjugation of the Reciprocal Verb ir-se, to go away. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 
 eu me vou I go away 
 
 tu te vds, &c. thou goest away, $*c. 
 
 Preterimperfect. 
 Su me tiia I did go away 
 tu te Idas, &c. thou didst go away, #c. 
 
 Preterperfect definite. 
 eu me fid, I went away 
 tu tefoste, &c. thou wentestjiway, $c. 
 
 Preterperfect. 
 
 eu me tenho ido I am gone away, or I have gone away. 
 tu te lens ido, &c. thou hast gone away, fyc. 
 
 Preterpluperfect . 
 iu me t'tnha ido I was gone away, or I had gone away. 
 
 tu te tinhas ido, &c. thou hast gone away, fyc. 
 
 Future. 
 
 eu me irei, &c. I shall or will go away 
 tu te irds, &c. thou shalt go away 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 vdi-te, go thou away 
 vd-se let him go away 
 
 vdmo-nos let us go away 
 tde-vos go away, get away, or get you gone 
 vdo-se let them go away 
 
102 PORTUGUESE 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 
 que hi me vd that I may go away 
 
 que tu te vds, &c. that thou mayest go away, #c. 
 
 First Preterimperfect. 
 
 eu me for a, or me fosse I went away 
 
 teforas, or te fosses, &c. thou wentest away, fyc. 
 
 Second Preterimperfect. 
 
 eu me iria I would, fyc. go away 
 
 tu te irias thou wouldst, #c. 
 
 Preterperfect. 
 
 que eu me tenha Mo that I have gone away, #c. 
 
 Preterpluperfect. 
 
 que eu me tivera, or me tivesse tdo that I had gone away 
 
 Second Preterpluperfect. 
 
 £u me teria tdo I should have gone away, fyc. 
 
 Future. 
 
 qudndo eu me for when I shall go away, Sfc. 
 
 Second Future. 
 qudndo eu me tiver tdo when I shall have gone away, §c, 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 zr-se to go away 
 Preterperfect. 
 Ur-se tdo, to have gone away 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 
 Present. 
 gut st vd that is gone away 
 
GRAMMAR. 103 
 
 Preterit. 
 Mo gone away 
 
 Future. 
 que ha de ir-se that is to go, away 
 
 GERUNDS. 
 
 inclose going away 
 tendo-se Mo having gone away 
 
 SUPINE. 
 
 para zr-se to go, or in order to go" away 
 
 Observe, that in the compound tenses the 
 pronouns me, te, &c. are placed before the auxi- 
 liary verb. 
 
 2dly. This verb is also used in speaking of vessels 
 to signify their being leaky ; as vdi-se a cuba, the tub 
 leaks. It is also used before the gerunds ; as, o in- 
 verno vdi-se acabando, the winter is drawing towards 
 an end ; elks vao-se prepardndo, they are preparing 
 themselves : in which examples and in the like, the 
 verb is to be rendered into English by the verb to 
 be itself, and without addition of the adverb away ; 
 and sometimes it is placed before the present infi- 
 nitive ; as, ir-se deitdr, to go to bed. 
 
 Of the Reciprocal Verb vir-se, to come away. 
 
 This verb is to be conjugated like the verb vir ; 
 but you must place the pronouns conjunctive 
 me, te, &c. according to the observations made 
 above. 
 
 Of the Reciprocal Verb avir-se, to agree. 
 
 This is a compound verb, which is to be conju- 
 gated by putting the particle a before the verb 
 vir in all its tenses and moods ; attending to 
 
104 PORTUGUESE 
 
 the observations already made concerning the 
 pronouns conjunctive ; and also in regard to the 
 reciprocal verb haver-se, to behave; in the con- 
 jugation of which, no more is necessary than to 
 add the pronouns conjunctive to the verb haver. 
 
 Impersonal Verbs. 
 
 There are three sorts of verbs impersonal, which 
 have only the third person singular. 
 
 The first are properly impersonals of themselves ; 
 as, 
 
 succede 
 
 it happens 
 
 bdsta 
 
 it is enough, or it suffices 
 
 chove 
 
 it rains 
 
 troveja 
 
 it thunders 
 
 The second are derived from verbs active, fol- 
 lowed by the particle se, which renders them im- 
 personal ; as, ama-se, they love ; diz-se, they say ; 
 nota-se, it is noted. They are also called passive 
 impersonals. 
 
 The third, which have a great affinity with re- 
 ciprocal verbs, are conjugated with the pronouns 
 conjunctive, me, te, the, nos, vos, Ihes ; as doe me 
 doe te, doe the, &c. 
 
 The Impersonal Verbs of themselves are, 
 
 conv6m, it is convenient 
 
 succede, it happens, or it falh out 
 
 esld-me hem, it becomes me 
 
 hdsta, it is enough 
 
 hd-se, it is necessary 
 
 chovisca, it misles 
 
 chove, or cake pedra, it hails 
 
 gta it freezes 
 
 neva, it snows 
 
 fuzila, or relampaguea, it lightens 
 
 importa, it matters, it concerns 
 
 parece, it seems 
 
GRAMMAR. 105 
 
 and the like, which are conjugated with the third 
 persons singular of each tense ; as, 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 
 chove it rains 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 chovia it did rain 
 
 Preterperfect definite. 
 
 chov&o it rained 
 
 Preterperfect. 
 
 tern chovido it has rained 
 
 Preterpluperfect. 
 tinha chovido it had rained 
 
 Future. 
 choverd it shall or will rain 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 chdva let it rain 
 
 OPTATIVE AND SUBJUNCTIVE MOODS, 
 
 Present. 
 
 que chdva that it may rain 
 
 Imperfect. 
 que chovera, or chovesse that it might rain 
 
 Second Imperfect. 
 
 choveria it should rain 
 
 Future. 
 
 qudndo chover ■ when it shall rain 
 
 Second Future. 
 
 qudndo liver chovido when it shall have rained 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 chovir to rain 
 
106 PORTUGUESE 
 
 The particle se which composes the scond sort 
 of impersonal verbs, may be placed either before or 
 after them ; as, diz-se, they say ; sabe-se, it is known ; 
 sabia-se, it was known : logo se soube, it was imme- 
 diately known ; se diz, it is said, §c. but sometimes 
 they make no use of the particle se, and only put 
 the verb in the third person plural ; as, dize??i, in- 
 stead of se diz, they say. 
 
 In like manner all the verbs active may become 
 impersonal. 
 
 In regard to these verbs, observe, that when the 
 noun that follows them is in the singular number, 
 you must put the verb in the singular ; if the noun 
 be in the plural, you must put the verb in the plural. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 Louva-se o capitao, they praise the captain. 
 Louvao-se os capitals, they praise the captains. 
 Fe-se hum homem, they see a man. 
 Vem-se homens, they see men. 
 
 When Ihe is used after the word se, then the is to 
 be rendered into English by his or her ; as, Wiwa- 
 se-lhe o valor, they praise his or her courage. 
 
 The third sort of impersonal verbs are such as 
 are conjugated with the pronouns personal, me, te, 
 Ihe, &c. with the third person singular. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 
 desagrdda-me I am displeased, or it displeases me 
 
 desdgrada-te thou art displeased 
 
 desagrada-lhe he or she is displeased 
 
 desagrdda-nos we are displeased 
 
 desagrdda-vos you are displeased 
 
 desdgrada-lhes they are displeased 
 
 Imperfect. 
 desagradava-me I was displeased 
 
GRAMMAR. 107 
 
 Preterperfect definite. 
 * desagradou-me I was displeased 
 Future. 
 desagraddr-me-hd I shall be displeased 
 
 OPTATIVE MOOD. 
 
 que me desagrdde that I may be displeased 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 que me desagraddra or me desagraddsse that I were displeased 
 
 Second Imperfect. 
 
 desagraddr-me*hia I should be displeased 
 
 Conjugate after the same manner, 
 
 succede-me, it happens to me 
 doe-me, it grieves or it pains me 
 , parece-me, it seems to me 
 he-me preciso* it behoves me 
 agrdda-me, it pleases me 
 lembro-me, I remember 
 
 Many of these impersonal verbs have the third 
 person singular and plural ; as, 
 
 doe me a perna, my leg pains me 
 
 doem me os olhos, I have sore eyes 
 
 o vosso vesttdo partce-me novo, your coat appears new to 
 
 me 
 os vossos sapdtos me 'parecem muito compridos, your shoes 
 
 seem to me too long 
 
 Of the Verb ser, to be. 
 
 The verb ser is also used as an impersonal, as will 
 be seen in the following examples : he tempo de le- 
 vantdr-se, it is time to get up ; era tempo de hir, it 
 was time to go, 6fC. and particularly when it is con- 
 jugated with the adjectives preciso or necessario ; as, 
 he preciso or necessario fazer isto, this must be done ; 
 era preciso or necessario escrever, it was necessary to 
 write ; eu iria, se fdsse preciso, I would go, if it 
 
108 PORTUGUESE 
 
 should be necessary ; he precisq que eu va, I must 
 go ; h6 preciso que eu ley a, I must read ; he prtciso 
 que elle coma, he must eat ; seriapreciso que eu fosse, 
 I should go. You see by the last examples, that 
 when the verb sir and the adjective are before the 
 conjunctive mood, with the participle que, the con- 
 junctive is rendered in English by the infinitive ; 
 but if the verb sir is followed by the relative or par- 
 ticle que, it must then be rendered in English in 
 the following manner ; as, eu he que tenhofeito aquillo, 
 'tis I who have done that ; tu he que tens, 8$c. 'tis 
 thou who hast, &c. elle he que tern, 6fc. 'tis he who, 
 &c. nos he que temos, fyc. 'tis we who have, &c. vos 
 he que thicks, fyc. 'tis you who have, &c. elks he que 
 tern, <§c. 'tis they who have, &c. a ley he que o mantlet, 
 'tis the law that prescribes it ; ella he que o ere, 'tis 
 she who believes it; elks he que ojizerao? is it they 
 have done it ? eu he que o fiz, 'twas I who did it ; 
 entao he que eu to?no as minhas medidas, ^tis then I 
 take my measures ; entao he que eu vi, 'twas then I 
 saw, or only then I saw. You may observe that 
 que is not relative in the last examples, and that it 
 is left out in English. 
 
 Of the Verb haver, when it is impersonal. 
 It is to be thus conjugated. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 
 ha, or nao ha there is, or there is not, or there are ; or 
 there are not 
 
 Imperfect. 
 hav'ia there was, or there were 
 
 Prcterperfect definite. 
 houve there was or there were 
 
GRAMMAR. 109 
 
 Preterperfect. 
 
 tern havido there has been, or there have been 
 
 Preterpluperfect. 
 
 tinha havido there had been 
 
 Future. 
 
 haverd there shall be 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 hdja let there be 
 
 OPTATIVE AND SUBJUNCTIVE MOODS, 
 
 que hdja that there may be 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 que houvera or houvtsse that there were 
 
 Second Imperfect. 
 
 haveria there would be 
 
 Preterperfect. 
 
 que Xtnha havido if there had been 
 
 Preterpluperfect. 
 se tivesse havido if there had been 
 
 Future. 
 
 qudndo houver when there will or shall be 
 
 Second Future. 
 
 qudndo liver havido when there shall have been 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 haver there to be 
 
 Preterit. 
 ter havido there to have been 
 
 GERUNDS. 
 
 havendo there being 
 
 Undo havido in there having been 
 
 Those who learn Portuguese are greatly at a loss 
 how to render the following expressions, there is not ; 
 
110 PORTUGUESE 
 
 is there 9 , although there is nothing more' easy. I 
 have explained them at large in the following con- 
 jugation. • 
 
 Conjugation of the Verb impersonal there is, ha, 
 when it marks the place, through all its tenses. 
 
 There is of it 
 There is not of it 
 Is there of it ? 
 Is there not of it ? 
 
 There was of it 
 There was not of it 
 Was there of it ? 
 Was there not of it ? 
 
 There was of it 
 There was not of it 
 Was there of it ? 
 Was there not of it ? 
 
 There shall be of it 
 There shall not be of it 
 Shall there be of it ? 
 Shall there not be of it ? 
 
 That there may be of it 
 That there may not be of it 
 That there were of it 
 That there were not of it 
 There would be of it 
 There would not be of it 
 Would there not be of it ? 
 
 If there had been of it 
 If there had not been of it 
 
 Had there been of it P 
 Had there not been of it ? 
 
 There would have been of it 
 There would not have been 
 
 of it 
 Would there have been of it ? 
 Would there not have been 
 
 of it? 
 When there will be of it 
 When there will not be of it 
 
 ha la disso 
 nao ha la disso 
 ha la disso ? 
 nao ha Id disso ? 
 
 havia la disso 
 nao havia Id disso 
 havia la disso ? 
 nao havia la disso? 
 
 houve la disso 
 nao houve Id disso 
 houve la disso f 
 nao houve la disso ? 
 
 haverd Id disso 
 nao haverd la disso 
 haverd la disso f 
 nao haverd la disso 
 
 que hdja la disso 
 
 nao hdja Id disso [disso 
 
 que houvera or houvesse la 
 
 nao houvera or houvesse la 
 
 haveria la disso [disso 
 
 nao haveria la disso 
 
 nao haveria la disso ? 
 
 se tivesse havido la disso 
 
 se nao tivesse havido la disso 
 
 teria havido la disso ? 
 nao teria havido Id disso ? 
 
 teria havido la disso 
 nao teria havido la disso 
 
 teria havido Id disso f 
 nao teria havido la disso ? 
 
 qudndo houver Id disso 
 qudndo nao houver Id disso 
 
GRAMMAR. Ill 
 
 When there will have been quando tivSr havido Id disso 
 
 of it 
 
 When there will not have quando nao tiver havido Id 
 
 been of it disso 
 
 •Will there have been of it ? terd havido Id disso c i 
 
 Will there not have been too nao terd havido la disso f 
 
 much of it ? 
 
 For there having been too por ter havido Id demasiada- 
 
 much of it mente disso 
 
 In there having been too little tendo havido Id muito pouco 
 
 of it disso 
 
 Most sentences beginning with the word some, and 
 the verb to be, are expressed in Portuguese by the 
 impersonal ha; as, some friends are false, ha am't- 
 gosfalsos; some Christians are unworthy of that 
 name, ha Christdos que nao sao dignos de tal nome. 
 
 Observe, that ha comes before a substantive even 
 of the plural number. 
 
 The impersonal ha\s besides used to denote a 
 quantity of time, space, and number ; as, ha dez 
 dnnos que morreo, he has been dead these ten years ; 
 or, he died ten years ago ; ha trinta milhuens d* almas 
 em Frdnga\ there are thirty millions of souls in 
 France ; de Paris a Ldndres ha 120 legoas, Paris is 
 120 leagues from London. 
 
 The question of space is asked thus, gudnto ha de 
 Parts a Londres? how far is Paris from London. 
 
 Of the impersonal Verb ha-se, it is necessary ', or must. 
 
 This verb answers to the Italian bisogna, and to 
 the French il faut, and always requires after it the 
 particle de, and the infinitive. It denotes the ne- 
 cessity of doing something, and is Englished by must, 
 and sometimes by the verb to be, through all its 
 tenses, with the words necessary, requisite, needful, 
 &c. and as it denotes the necessity of doing 
 something in general, without specifying who must, 
 therefore the agent coming before must may be 
 
112 PORTUGUESE 
 
 either / or ive, he, or she, or any body, according to 
 the subject of the sentence: as, 
 
 Hd-se defazer aquillo, one, or we, or you, or he, 
 or somebody must do that. 
 
 Hd-se de hir, I or you, or we, or somebody must 
 
 go- 
 
 Sometimes the verb coming after this impersonal, 
 is Englished by the passive voice ; as, hd-se defazer 
 isto, this must be done. 
 
 It is very often joined with mister ; as, hd-se de 
 
 mister dinheiroparademdndas, one must have money 
 
 to go to law ; hd-se de mister hum bom amigo para 
 
 fazer fortuna no mundo, to push one's fortune in the 
 
 world, one must have a good friend. 
 
 In the conjugation of this verb, you must use 
 the verb to) be with the word necessary, as I have 
 already said. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 Present, hd-se, it is necessary. Imperfect, havia- 
 se, it was necessary ; and so through all the tenses 
 and moods. 
 
 Sometimes the infinitive that follows the particle 
 de is placed between this impersonal and its particle 
 se ; as, hd-de achdrse, it will be found ; and some- 
 times the infinitive precedes the impersonal, and 
 this follows the particle se ; as, achdr-se-hd, it will 
 be found; in this case you must not join the 
 particle de to it. Observe, that the infinitive may 
 be also placed between the imperfect tense of this 
 impersonal verb and its particle se ; as, havia de 
 achdr-se, it was to be found ; but when the infinitive 
 precedes both the impersonal and its particle se, 
 then you must put the particle se before the 
 impersonal, and make use of the imperfect hia, 
 and not havia; thus we must say, achdr-se hia, and 
 not achdr-se havia. 
 
GRAMMAR. 113 
 
 Of the Defective Verbs carpi r, to weep, and so&r, 
 to be wont. 
 
 The verb carpir is used only in those tenses and 
 persons where the p is followed by an i; as, carpt- 
 mos, carpis, we weep, you weep. Preterimp. carpia, 
 carpias, &c. I did weep, &c. 
 
 The verb soer is only used in the third persons of 
 the present indicative of the preterimperfect of the 
 same mood, and in the gerund ; as, elk sbe, he is 
 wont; elks soem, they are wont. Imperf. elk soia, 
 he was wont ; elks soiao, they were wont. Gerund, 
 soendo, being wont. 
 
 CHAP. VI. 
 
 OF THE PARTICIPLES. 
 
 THE participle is a tense of the infinitive, which 
 serves to form the preterperfects and preter- 
 pluperfects of all the verbs ; as, tenho amado, L have 
 loved ; tinha amado, I had loved. 
 
 Amado is a participle, and all the verbs in ar form 
 the participle in ado; as, amado, cantado, &c. 
 
 Amado is likewise a noun adjective. Example. 
 Homem amado, mother amada ; livros amddos, letras 
 amadas. 
 
 Some participles are frequently abridged ; as, 
 envdltOy or envolvido, corrupto, or corrompido, enxhto 
 or enxugddo ; and several others, which the use of 
 authors will point to you. 
 
 The regular verbs ending in er or ir form the 
 participle in ido ; as, vendido, recebido, luz'tdo, nu* 
 trido, &c. 
 
 I 
 
114 PORTUG UESE 
 
 There are three sorts of participles ; namely, 
 active, passive, and absolute. 
 
 The active participles are composed of the verb 
 tcr ; as, tenho amado, tinha amado, &c. 
 
 The passive participles are preceded by the verb 
 sh\ to be ; as, sou amado , sendo louvado, &c. 
 
 The passive participles are of the same nature 
 as those called absolute in Latin ; and you must 
 observe, that having and being are often left out in 
 Portuguese. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 Feito tsto, having done this. 
 
 Dzto zsto, having said so. 
 
 Acabada a cea, after he or they have supped. 
 
 The auxiliary and participle are not always im- 
 mediately joined together in compound tenses ; as, 
 Nos temos, com a grdga de Deos, vencido os nossos 
 inimigoS) we have, by the grace of God, overcome 
 our enemies. 
 
 CHAP. VII. 
 
 OF THE ADVERBS. 
 
 THE adverb is that which gives more or less force 
 to the verb. 
 
 The adverb has the same effect with the verb as 
 the adjective with the substantive : it explains the 
 accidents and circumstances of the action of the 
 verb. 
 
 There are a great many sorts ; as, adverbs of 
 time, place, quantity, &c. 
 
 Adverbs of time; as, at present, presentemente ; 
 now, agora ; yesterday, ontem ; to day., huje ; never, 
 
GRAMMAR. 115 
 
 nunca; always, sempre ; in the mean time, entre- 
 tanto. 
 
 Adverbs of place ; as, where, onde ; here, aqui ; 
 from whence, dunde; there, alt; from hence, da- 
 qui ; above, em chna, below, e?n baxo ; far, longe ; 
 near, pt'rto. 
 
 Adverbs of quantity; as, how much, qudnto, 
 how many, qudntos ; or qudntas ; so much, tdnto ; 
 much, muito ; little, pouco. 
 
 A great many adverbs are formed from adjec- 
 tives, changing o into amente ; sdnto, santamente, 
 holily ; rko, ricamente, richly ; douto, doutamente, 
 learnedly. 
 
 From adjectives in e or / we likewise form adverbs, 
 by adding minte to them ; as, 
 
 Constdnte, const ant entente, constantly. 
 
 Diligente, diUgentemente, diligently. 
 
 Prudente, prudentemente, prudently. 
 
 Fiel,Jielmente, faithfully. 
 
 In order to assist the memory of those who are 
 learning the Portuguese language, I have here 
 collected a large number of adverbs, which, by- 
 frequent repetition, may be easily retained, espe- 
 cially those terminated in mente, 
 
 A COLLECTION OF ADVERBS. 
 
 Abundantemtnte, abundantly Adeos, farewell 
 
 Com razao,justamente, justly Admiravel mente "\ g 
 
 Absolutamente, absolutely Maravilhosamente V§ 
 
 A Escachapernas, or a ca- A's mil maravilhas J % 
 
 valleiro, a-straddle Astutamente, cunningly 
 
 Agora, or por hora, now at Atreicoadamente, treacher- 
 
 this time ously 
 
 Jd,parajd, now, immediately De maravilha, very seldom 
 
 Com condicdo, upon condition A miudo, often 
 
 De parte, aside Ass'im, so 
 
 De travez, askew, asquint ,* Tao, so 
 
 as, olhdr de trav6z, to look A'pressa, in haste 
 
 askew, or asquint Facilmente, easily 
 
 Actualmente, actually A'o avesso, or de avessas, the 
 De propositi, purposely wrong side outward 
 
 I 2 
 
116 PORTU 
 
 De improviso, or improvisa- 
 
 mente, unawares 
 Anligamente, anciently 
 Quasi, pretty near, almost 
 Entdo, then 
 
 Desde entdo, since that time 
 Desde qudndo ? since when ? 
 De qudndo ha? from what 
 
 time ? how long ? 
 De qudndo em qudndo, now 
 
 and then, ever and anon 
 Qudndo hem, or aindo qudndo 
 
 albeit, although it should 
 
 be 
 Qudndo muito, at the most 
 Qudndo menos, at least 
 Cd, here, or hither 
 La, there 
 Alt, there, in that place 
 
 there expresses the 
 place where stands the 
 Ahi, -j person spoken to ; as 
 ahi onde esids, there 
 where you are 
 Jcold, there 
 Tra%, or detrdz, behind 
 Para trdz, backward 
 I'sto he, to wit 
 Em vez, instead 
 Tambem, also 
 Tdnto que 1 
 Logo que f 
 De pensddo, wilfully 
 Acdso, by chance 
 Fixaminte, stedfastly 
 Finalmente, finally 
 Livremente, freely 
 Miiito, much 
 Depressa, quickly 
 Aqui, here 
 Ate aqui, as far as here, or 
 
 till now, or hitherto 
 D'aqui, em didnte, hencefor- 
 ward, or hereafter 
 Bern, well 
 
 as soon as 
 
 GUESE 
 
 APmanhaa, to-morrow 
 
 A* manhda pela manhda, to- 
 morrow morning 
 
 Dcspois d? a manhda, after 
 to-morrow 
 
 Ultimam&nte, lastly 
 
 Como, as 
 
 Como ? how ? 
 
 Cedo, soon 
 
 Tdrde, late 
 
 Primeiro que, before that 
 
 Primeiro que tudo, before all, 
 or in the first place 
 
 Fora, abroad, out 
 
 Jd, already 
 
 De sdlto, at one jump 
 
 De qudndo em qudndo, from 
 time to time 
 
 A'ntcs, before 
 
 Despois, afterwards 
 
 Juntamente, together 
 
 Enteiram&ite, entirely 
 
 A'o redor, or em torno, about 
 
 De bdlde, in vain 
 
 Loucamente, madly 
 
 Muito, very 
 
 Alrevidamente, boldly 
 
 Felicemente, happily 
 
 Vergonhosamente, shamefully 
 
 Nunca, never 
 
 Nunca mais, never since 
 
 Logo, immediately 
 
 Ainda, yet ; as, ainda nao 
 veio, he is not come yet 
 
 Ainda, even ; as, seria ver- 
 gonha ainda o falldr nisso, 
 it were a shame even to 
 speak of it 
 
 Nem se quer, even 
 
 Vilmente, basely 
 
 Mai, ill 
 
 Mais, more 
 
 Menos, less 
 
 Ate, until, or even 
 
 Sim, yes 
 
GRAMMAR. 117 
 
 Nad, no, not Qudndo, when 
 
 O'nde, where Ndda, nothing 
 
 De cor, by heart Verdadeiraminte, truly 
 
 As vezes, sometimes; from Dentro, within 
 time to time Devagdr, softly 
 
 CHAP. VIII. 
 
 OF THE PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 PREPOSITIONS are a part of speech indeclin- 
 able, most commonly set before a noun, a pronoun, 
 or verb. 
 
 Every preposition requires some case after it, as 
 you will see in the following collection ; 
 Genitive. 
 
 Antes do dia, before day-break 
 
 Didnte de Deos, before God 
 
 Dentro da igreja within the church 
 
 De trdz ao paldcio, behind the palace 
 
 Debdxo da mesa, under the table 
 
 Em cima da mesa, upon the table 
 
 Alem, besides 
 
 A lent dos mares, on that side of the seas 
 
 Alem disso, besides that;, moreover 
 
 Alem de que, idem 
 
 Aquem, or ddquem dos mares, on this side of the seas 
 
 Ao redor, or em contorno da ciddde, round about the city 
 
 Perto de Londres, near London 
 
 Acerca da quelle negocio, concerning that affair 
 
 For a da cdsa, out of the house 
 
 Fora de perigo, out of danger 
 
 Fora de si, out of one's wits 
 
 This preposition governs also a nominative; as, fora seu 
 irmao, except his brother, or his brother excepted. 
 
 Defronte de minha cdsa, over-against my house. 
 Defronte da igreja, facing the church 
 Despois de cea, after supper 
 
 Dative. 
 
 Qudnto aquillo, with respect to that 
 Pegado a muralha, close to the wall 
 
118 PORTUGUESE 
 
 Dtsde o bico do pe ate a cabeca, from top to toe 
 Accusative. 
 
 Per ante ojuiz, before the judge. 
 
 Plntre, between, among, or amongst 
 
 E'ntre os homcns, among men 
 
 Sobre a mesa, upon the table 
 
 Conforme, or segundo a ley, according to the law 
 
 Por amor de Deos, for God's sake 
 
 Pelo mundo, through the world 
 
 Pela rua, through the streets 
 
 Pelas terras, through the lands 
 
 Por grdnde que seja, let it never be so great 
 
 Contra elles, against them 
 
 Traz do templo, behind the temple 
 
 Durante, during ; as, durante o inverno, during the winter 
 
 We shall be more particular about prepositions 
 when we examine their construction. 
 
 CHAP. IX. 
 
 OF THE CONJUNCTIONS. 
 
 A Conjugation is an indeclinable part of 
 speech which serves to join the members and parts 
 of speech together, in shewing the dependency of 
 relation and coherency between the words and 
 sentences. 
 
 Some conjugations are copulative, which join, 
 and, as it were, couple two terms together ; as, e, 
 and : Portugueses e Ingleses, Portuguese and English. 
 
 Some are disjunctive, which shew separation or 
 division ; as, nem, nor, neither ; ou, either, or. 
 Example ; nem este, nem aquelle, neither this, nor 
 that ; ou este, ou aquelle, either this or that ; nem 
 mdis, nem menos, neither more nor less ; quer o faga, 
 quer nao, tudo para mini he o mesmo, it is all one to 
 me whether he does it, or no ; quer seja verdade, 
 quer nao, whether it be true, or not; nem se quer 
 hum, not even one. 
 
 The adversative denote restriction, or contrariety ; 
 
GRAMMAR. 119 
 
 as, mas, or porem, but ; comtudo, yet, however; mas 
 antes, or pello contrdrio, nay. 
 
 The conjunctions conditional suppose a condi 
 tion, and serve to restrain and limit what has just 
 been said ; as, se, if; com condicdm que, com isto que, 
 dado cdso que, provided that, or upon condition that, 
 or in case that, &c. 
 
 The concessive, which shew the assent we give to 
 a thing ; as, embora, or seja embora, well and good ; 
 est a feito, done, agreed. 
 
 The causal shew the reason of something; as, 
 porque, for, or because, or why. 
 
 The concluding denote a consequence drawn 
 from what is before ; as, logo or por consequencia, 
 therefore, then, or consequently. 
 
 The transitive, which serve to pass from one sen- 
 tence to another; as, alem disso, moreover, or besides 
 that; sobre tudo, or em summa, after all, upon the 
 whole, in the main; a propbsito, now I think of it, 
 or now we are speaking of that. 
 
 There are others of a different sort ; as, se que'r, 
 or ao menos, at least ; aindaque, although ; de sorte 
 que, so that; antes quero ped'ir que fuvtar, Til rather 
 beg than steal ; antes morrerei que dizer-volo, Pll 
 rather die than tell you ; jd que, since, &c. 
 
 To the above-mentioned parts of speech gramma- 
 rians have added Interjections, which are particles 
 serving to denote some passion or emotion of the 
 mind; but there is another sort, which maybe called 
 demonstrative: as, aqui and la; Ex. este homem aqui, 
 this man ; aquella mother la, that woman, &c. and 
 some others continuative, because they denote con- 
 tinuation in the speech ; as, com effeito, in effect; 
 alem disso, besides ; bra vejdmos, now let us see \jinal- 
 mente fbmonos embora, and so, sir, we went away. 
 To which we may add those invented to imitate the 
 sounds of dumb creatures, and the noise which is 
 occasioned by the clashing of bodies against one 
 another ; as, zaz, traz, thwick-thwack, &c. 
 
120 PORTUGUESE 
 
 Interjective Particles. 
 Of Joy. 
 Ha, ha, ha ! Ha, ha, ha ! 
 Oh que gosto /Oh joy ! 
 
 Of Grief. 
 Ay ! Alas ! ah ! 
 Ay de mm! Woe is me ! lack ! 
 Meu Deos ! My God ! 
 
 Of Pain. 
 Ay! Ay! 
 Oh / Oh ! 
 
 To encourage. 
 
 0'ravAmos!\ Come, come on ! 
 
 To call. 
 0, old, Ho, hey, hip 1 
 
 Of admiration or surprise. 
 O, O Id, ahi ! Lack-a-day ! 
 A pre! Heyday! 
 
 Of aversion. 
 I'rra ! ^ 
 Ndda! > Awav, away with, fve ! 
 
 For making people go out of the way, or stand away. 
 Guardem-se, or arredem-se ! Have a care, clear the 
 way, or stand away ! 
 
 For shouting. 
 Viva! Huzza ! 
 
 Of silence. 
 Caldivos! Hush ! Peace ! 
 
 Of cursing and threatening. 
 At, gudi! Woe ! 
 
 For derision. 
 Ah ! Ah ! oh ! oh ! oh ! 
 
 Of wishing. 
 O'provera a Deos ! Would to God ! 
 
GRAMMAR. 
 
 121 
 
 Oxala ! or hah ! O that ! 
 Ose! Would! 
 
 The interjection O serves for different emotions 
 of the mind, as admiration, grief, wish, &c. and 
 sometimes is used ironically, but differently uttered, 
 according to the emotion which it expresses. 
 
 Some Abbreviations used in the Portuguese 
 Language. 
 
 An (0 
 
 Antonio 
 
 Anthony 
 
 Seb am 
 
 Sebastidm 
 
 Sebastian 
 
 JJmo pe 
 
 Beat'issimo Padre 
 
 The most blessed Father 
 
 Cap m 
 
 Capitao 
 
 Captain 
 
 Corap a 
 
 Companhia 
 
 Company 
 
 Corr 
 
 Carreio 
 
 Post 
 
 D. 
 
 Dom or Dona 
 
 Don or Dona 
 
 D r , D or 
 
 Doutor 
 
 Doctor 
 
 D s 
 
 Deos 
 
 God 
 
 D°, D* 
 
 Ditto, dfitta 
 
 Said 
 
 Ex m0 , Ex™ 
 
 JExcellentissimo, maMost excellent 
 
 V. E. 
 
 Vossa excellencia 
 
 Your Excellence 
 
 V. s. 
 
 Vossa senhoria - 
 
 Your Lordship 
 
 V. A. 
 
 Vossa altesa 
 
 Your Highness 
 
 V. M. or V mce 
 
 Vossa merce 
 
 You 
 
 V. P. 
 
 Vossa paterniddde 
 
 Your Paternity 
 
 V. Mag de 
 
 Vossa magestdde 
 
 Your Majesty 
 
 S. 
 
 Santo 
 
 Saint 
 
 Fran co 
 
 Francisco 
 
 Francis 
 
 G de 
 
 Guarde 
 
 Save 
 
 J. H. S. 
 
 Jesus 
 
 Jesus 
 
 M 8 a s 
 
 Muitos dnnos 
 
 Many Years 
 
 M e 
 
 Mestre 
 
 Master 
 
 S or , S fa 
 
 Senhor, ora 
 
 Sir, Lady 
 
 R rao 
 
 Reverendissimo 
 
 Most Reverend 
 
 pa 
 
 Para 
 
 For 
 
 Q e 
 
 Que 
 
 That 
 
 Q do 
 
 Qudndo 
 
 When 
 
 Q m 
 
 Quern 
 
 Who 
 
 Q t0 
 
 Qudnto 
 
 How much 
 
 Supp te 
 
 Supplicdnte 
 
 Petitioner 
 
 Gen^ 1 
 
 General 
 
 General 
 
 Tent e 
 
 Tenente 
 
 Lieutenant 
 
 V. G. 
 
 Verbe gratia 
 
 For Example 
 
 
 And many others that must be learned by use 
 
122 PORTUGUESE 
 
 PORTUGUESE 
 
 GRAMMAR. 
 
 PART II. 
 CHAP. I. 
 
 OF THE DIVISION OF SYNTAX. 
 
 jg YNTAX is a Greek word, by the Latins called 
 construction; and it signifies the right placing 
 and connecting of words in a sentence. It is divided 
 into three sorts ; the first, of Order or Arrangement ; 
 the second, of Concordance ; the third of Govern- 
 ment. The Syntax of Order or Arrangement, is the 
 fit disposition of words in a sentence. The Syntax 
 of Concordance, is when the parts of speech agree 
 with one another, as the substantive with the adjec- 
 tive, or the nominative with the verb. The Syntax 
 of Government, is when one part of speech governs 
 another. 
 
 For the sake of those who, perhaps, have not a 
 grammatical knowledge of their own language, I 
 shall lay down some general rules of Portuguese 
 construction. 
 
GRAMMAR. 123 
 
 Of the Order of Words. 
 
 1. The nominative is that to which we attribute 
 the action of the verb, and is generally ranged in 
 the first place ; it may be either a noun or pronoun, 
 as, Francisco escr eve, Francis writes ; eufdllo, I speak. 
 
 2. When the action of the verb is attributed to 
 many persons or things, these all belong to the no- 
 minative, and are ranged in the first place, together 
 with their conjunction ; as, Pedro e Paulo lent, 
 Peter and Paul read. 
 
 3. The adjectives belonging to the nominative 
 substantive, to which the action of the verb is attri- 
 buted, are put after the substantive, and before the 
 verb ; as, os estuddntes morigerddos e diligentes estu- 
 dao, the obedient and diligent scholars study. 
 
 4. If the nominative has an article, this article 
 always takes the first place. 
 
 ,5. Sometimes an infinitive is put for a noun, and 
 stands for a nominative ; as o dormir faz hem, sleep- 
 ing does one good ; and sometimes a verb with its 
 case ; as, he dcto de humaniddde ter compaLvdo dos 
 afflictos, to have compassion on the afflicted is an 
 act of humanity. 
 
 6. The nominative is sometimes understood ; as, 
 dmo, where you understand eu ; and so of the other 
 persons of the verb. 
 
 7. After the nominative you put the verb ; and if 
 there is an adverb, it is to be placed immediately 
 after the verb, whose accident and circumstances it 
 explains; as, Pedro dmapor extremo a gloria, Peter 
 is extremely fond of glory. 
 
 8. The cases governed by the verb are put after 
 it ; they may be one, or many, according to the na- 
 ture of the action ; as, eu a mo a Pedro, I love Peter. 
 Pago presente de hum Uvro a Paulo, I make a present 
 of a book to Paul. 
 
124 PORTUGUESE 
 
 9. The preposition is always put before the case 
 it governs ; as, perto de casa, near the house. 
 
 10. The relative is always placed after the ante- 
 cedent ; as, Pedro o qual estuda, Peter who studies. 
 
 II. Of Concordance. 
 
 1. The adjectives agree with their substantives 
 in gender, number, and case ; as, homem virtuoso, a 
 virtuous man ; bella mother, a handsome woman ; 
 sumptuosos paldcios, &c. sumptuous palaces, &c. 
 
 2. When two or more substantives singular come 
 together, the adjective belonging to them must be 
 put in the plural ; as, tdnto el rey como a rainha 
 montddos a cavallo parecem bem, both the king and 
 the queen look well when they ride. 
 
 3. If the substantives happen to be one in the 
 singular and the other in the plural, or to be of 
 different genders, the adjective common to both 
 agrees in number and gender with the last ; as, elle 
 tinha os blhos e a bdca abtrta, or elle t'mha a buca e os 
 olhos abertos, his eyes and mouth were opened. As 
 lagdas e rios estdvao congelados, the ponds and rivers 
 were frozen. 
 
 4. But when there is one or many words between 
 the last noun and the adjective, that adjective (com- 
 mon to all) agrees with the noun masculine, though 
 the last noun be feminine ; and if the nouns are in 
 the singular, then the adjective common must be 
 put in the plural number and masculine gender ; as, 
 o rio e a lagua estavao cogelados ; the pond and river 
 were frozen. O trabalho, a industria, e a fortuna 
 uriidos ; pains, industry, and fortune joined together. 
 
 5. Every verb personal agrees with its nomina- 
 tive, expressed or understood, both in number and 
 person. 
 
 6. The relative qual with the article agrees en- 
 tirely with the antecedent ; but without the article 
 
GRAMMAR. 125 
 
 and denoting an absolute quality, it agrees with 
 what follows ; as, aquelte, coragao o quai, &c. that 
 heart which, &c. Consider dndo quaes seriab as con- 
 dicoens, &c. considering which would be the con- 
 ditions, &c. 
 
 7. The question and answer always agree in every 
 thing ; as, a quesenhdra pertence v?n ce ? Hie respondeo, 
 pertenco a ra'mha: To what lady do you belong, sir ? 
 he answered, I belong to the queen. 
 
 III. Of the Dependence of the Parts of Speech 
 on one another, 
 
 1. The nominative being the basis of the sen- 
 tence, the verb depends on it, as the other cases 
 depend on the verb. The adjective depends on the 
 substantive that supports it ; and the adverb on the 
 verb whose accidents it explains. 
 
 2. The genitive depends on a substantive, ex- 
 pressed or understood, by which it is governed. 
 
 3. The accusative depends either on a verb ac- 
 cusative, or on a preposition. 
 
 4. The ablative depends on a preposition by 
 which it is governed ; as, par to de Roma, I go from 
 Rome. 
 
 5. The dative and vocative have, strictly speak- 
 ing, no dependence on the other parts : the dative 
 is common, as it were, to all nouns and verbs ; the 
 vocative only points out the person to whom you 
 speak.^ 
 
 I now come to the Construction of the several 
 parts of speech. 
 
 s 
 
126 PORTUGUESE 
 
 CHAP. II. 
 
 OF THE SYNTAX OF ARTICLES. 
 
 BEFORE we come to the syntax of the articles, 
 remember that o, a, os, as, are articles only when 
 they precede the nouns or pronouns, but not when 
 joined to the verbs. 
 
 Those who understand Latin will quickly per- 
 ceive the difference, if they take notice that every 
 time they render o, a, by ilium, Mam, Mud ; or by 
 eum, earn, id ; and os, as, by iilos Mas, Ma ; or by 
 eos, eas, ea ; they are relative pronouns. 
 
 1. The article is used before the names of the 
 species or things which can be spoken of; therefore 
 nouns of substances, arts, sciences, plays, metals, 
 virtues, and vices, having no article before them in 
 English, require the article in Portuguese ; as, 
 
 ouro e a prdta nao podem fazerfeliz ao homem, 
 gold and silver cannot make the happiness of man. 
 
 A virtude nao he compativel com o vieio, virtue 
 cannot agree with vice. 
 
 A philosophia he huma sciSncia muito nobre, philo- 
 sophy is a very noble science. 
 
 Joguemos as cartas, let us play at cards. 
 
 2. The article is not placed before a substantive 
 which is followed by the adjective of number that 
 stands for a surname, or. meet with a proper or 
 Christian name; as, Joseph Primeiro, Joseph the 
 First. 
 
 3. When a book or some part of it, as chapter, 
 page, &c. is quoted, the adjective of number may 
 come either before or after the substantive ; but if 
 it comes after, the two words are construed with- 
 out the article; as, livro primeiro, capitulo segundo, 
 &c. book i. chapter ii. If the adjective of number 
 
GRAMMAR. 127 
 
 comes before the substantive, it takes the article ; 
 as, o primeiro livro, the first book. 
 
 4. O placed before que signifies what or which ; 
 as, fdga o que quiser, let him do what he likes ; o 
 que eujiz, which I did. 
 
 5. The article is never made use of before proper 
 names of men, women, gods, goddesses, saints. 
 
 6. The article is not used in Portuguese before 
 the pronouns possessive relative ; as, de quern he esta 
 cdsa ? he minha, he tua, 6fC, whose house is this ? it 
 is mine, it is thine, &c. 
 
 7. When a mount's, mountain's or hill's name, is 
 preceded by the word monte, it takes neither ar- 
 ticle nor preposition ; as, o Monte Atlantc, Mount 
 Atlas ; os Monies Pireneos, the Pirenean Moun- 
 tains ; but after the word sen*a, a ridge of hills, it 
 takes the article ; as, a Serra da Estrella, Mount- 
 Strella ; Serra do Potosi, Mount Potosi ; however, 
 they say, also, Serra Lioa. 
 
 8. The noun of the measure, weight, and the 
 number of the things that have been bought, re- 
 quires the articles ; as, o trigo vende-se a tdnto o al- 
 queire, wheat sold so much a peck, three quarts 
 and one pint. 
 
 A manteiga vende-se a tdnto o arratel, butter cost 
 so much a pound. 
 
 Os ovos vendem-se a tdnto a duzia, eggs are sold 
 so much a dozen. 
 
 9. No article is used with proper names of per- 
 sons and planets, except a terra, the earth ; a sol, 
 the sun ; a lua, the moon. 
 
 10. When proper names are used in a determinate 
 sense, that is, when they are applied to particular 
 objects, then they take the article ; o Deos dos Chris- 
 tdos, the God of Christians; o Archimedes de Ing- 
 laterra, the Archimedes of England. The proper 
 names of renowned poets and painters keep also the 
 article ; as, o Camoens, o Pope, o Tdsso, o Ticidno, &c. 
 
12S PORTUGUESE 
 
 11. The indefinite article de is used before nouns 
 following one of this, sorte, especie, genero, and any 
 other noun of which they express the kind, charac- 
 ter, quality, and nature : which sort of nouns are 
 usually Englished by an adjective, or even by the 
 substantive itself placed adjectively, and making 
 together, as it were, but a word compound ; as, 
 Dor de cabeca, the head ach ; huma sorte de fruto, 
 a sort of fruit ; fallar de tolo, a foolish speech. 
 
 Sometimes the English adjective may be made 
 an adjective in Portuguese, as in the last example 
 hum fallar tolo, a foolish speech ; but not unfre- 
 quently the Portuguese express the English ad- 
 jective by a substantive of the same signification 
 with de before the other noun, though they have an 
 adjective of the same nature as the English ad- 
 jective ; as, o diabo de minha mother, my devilish 
 wife ; and sometimes the adjective is used by them 
 substantively, or the substantive is understood ; as, 
 o velhaco de meu filho, my rascally son ; a velhaca 
 de sua may, his or her rascally mother. Finally 
 they also make use of the definite article ; as, o 
 diabo do homem, or da mother, the devilish man or 
 woman ; a pbbre da mother, the poor woman, &c. 
 
 12. Nouns are used without article in the fol- 
 lowing cases : 
 
 1st. At the title of a performance, and in the 
 middle of sentences, where they characterise in a 
 particular manner the person or thing spoken of, in 
 which case the English use especially the particle 
 a ; as, 
 
 Discurso sobre as obrigacoens da religiao natural, 
 a discourse concerning the obligations of natural 
 religion. 
 
 Primeira parte, the first part. 
 
 O Conde de Clermont, principe do Sdngue, morreo, 
 &c. the count of Clermont, a prince of the blood, 
 died, &c, 
 
GRAMMAR. 129 
 
 O S t0 Antonio ; ndo de noventa pegas, the St. An- 
 thony ; a ninety gun ship. 
 
 2ndly. In sentences of exclamation ; as, 
 
 As mais bellas flares sdo as que menos durao ; 
 qualquer chuva as desmdia, o vento as mure ha, o sol as 
 queima, e aedba de secdr ; sem foliar numa infiniddde 
 de insectos que as perseguem e deitao a perder ; 
 natural e verdadeira imdgem da belle za das senhoras ! 
 the most beautiful flowers last but a very short time ; 
 the least rain tarnishes them, the wind withers them, 
 the sun scorches them, and completes the drying of 
 them ; without mentioning an infinite number of 
 insects that spoil and hurt them : a natural and true 
 image of ladies' beauty! 
 
 3dly. When they meet with a noun of number in 
 an indefinite sense ; as, mil soldados de cavdllo contra 
 cem infantes, a thousand horse against an hundred 
 foot. 
 
 Tenho lido dous poetas, I have read two poets, that 
 is, any two out of all that ever existed. 
 
 But before a noun of number, in a definite sense, 
 it would take the article ; as, 
 
 Tenho lido os dous poetas, I have read both poets ; 
 because this plainly iudicates a definite two, ot 
 whom some mention has been made already. 
 
 Os cem infantes que combaterao contra os mil de 
 cavdllo, que, &;c. the hundred foot that fought with 
 the thousand horse, that, &c. 
 
 4thly. After the verb sir, when it signifies to 
 become, and after sSr tornado por, to be accounted ; 
 passdr por, to pass for ; as, elle sera doutor com o 
 tempo, he will become a doctor in time ; elle passa 
 por marinheiro, he passes for a sailor. 
 
 When the adjective is used substantively, it must 
 have the neuter article o before it : 
 
 O verde offende menos a vista que o vermelho, 
 green hurts the eye less than red. 
 
 There are also some adverbs preceded by the 
 
 K 
 
130 PORTUGUESE 
 
 neutral article o ; as the following, o melhor que eu 
 pudcr, the best I can ; o menos que f6r possivel, 
 the least possible. 
 
 Articles are repeated in Portuguese before as 
 many nouns (requiring the article) as there are in 
 the sentence ; as, 
 
 O ouro, a prat a, a saude, as hour as, e os deletes 
 nao podem fazer feliz ao homem que nao tern sciencia 
 nem virtude, gold, silver, health, honours, and plea- 
 sures, cannot make a man happy without wisdom 
 and virtue. 
 
 The article o is put before the word senhor, sir, or 
 my lord ; as, 
 
 O senhor duque, my lord duke ; o scnhdr presidente, 
 my lord the president ; os senhores, the gentlemen ; 
 dos senhores, of the gentlemen. 
 
 The feminine article a must be prefixed to senhor a, 
 my lady, or madam ; as, a senhora duqu/za, or con- 
 dessa de, 8§c. my lady duchess, or countess of, &c. 
 
 The article is never used in Portuguese as it is in 
 English, before mais, more, or menos, less, in the fol- 
 lowing sentences : qudnto mais vivemos, tdnto mens 
 aprendemos, the longer we live, the more we learn ; 
 qudnto mais hum hydropico he be, mais side tern, the 
 more an hydropic drinks, the more thirsty he is ; 
 qudnto mais hum homem he pobre, qudnto menos 
 cuidados tern, the poorer people are, the less care 
 they have, &c. 
 
 Sometimes the English particle to, before infini- 
 tives, is rendered in Portuguese by the article*?; 
 as, hefdcil o dizer, o ver, 8$c. it is easy to say, to 
 see, &c. 
 
 In a word, the natural associators with articles are 
 those common appellatives which denote the several 
 genera and species of beings, or those words which, 
 though indefinite, are yet capable, through the ar- 
 ticle, of becoming definite. Therefore Apollonius 
 makes it part of the pronoun's definition, to refuse 
 
GRAMMAR. 131 
 
 coalescence with the article ; and it would be absurd 
 to say o eu, the I ; or o tu, the thou ; because no- 
 thing can make those pronouns more definite than 
 they are. 
 
 N. B. When the adjective hiwi, huma, is used as 
 an article in Portuguese, it respects our primary 
 perception, and denotes individuals as unknown ; 
 but the articles, o a, respect our secondary percep- 
 tion, and denote individuals as known. To explain 
 by an example : I see an object pass by, which I 
 never saw till then ; what do I say ? AH vai hum 
 pobre com huma barba comprida, there goes a beggar 
 with a long beard. The man departs, and returns a 
 week after ; what do I say then ? AH vai o pobre 
 da barba comprkla, there goes the beggar with the 
 long beard. 
 
 CHAP. III. 
 
 OF THE SYNTAX OF NOUNS ; AND FIRST, OF THE 
 SUBSTANTIVES. 
 
 WHEN two or more substantives come together, 
 without a comma between them, they all govern 
 each the next in the genitive, the first governing 
 the second, the second the third in the same case, 
 and so on (that is, the first is always followed by 
 the preposition de, or by the article before the 
 next noun) ; but that genitive can never come in 
 Portuguese before the noun that governs it, as in 
 Pnglish : 
 
 A philosophia de Newton, Newton's philosophy. 
 
 As guar das do principe, the prince's guards. 
 
 A porta de casa, the house-gate. 
 K 2 
 
132 PORTUGUESE 
 
 Eis aqui a cdsa ao companheiro do irmdo de minha 
 mother, here is my wife's brother's partner's house. 
 
 When two substantives singular are the nomina- 
 tive of a verb, this must be put in the plural ; as, 
 men irmdo e mm pdi estdo no cdmpo, my brother and 
 my father are in the country. 
 
 If the nominative is a collective name, the verb 
 is always put in the singular ; as, tuda a cidade 
 assist to, all the city was present. 
 
 OF THE SYNTAX OF ADJECTIVES. 
 
 Of adjectives, some are put before the noun, and 
 some after ; and others may be put indifferently, 
 either before or after. 
 
 The pronouns adjective possessive, meu, teu, seu, 
 8$c. and adjectives of number, come before the sub- 
 stantive as in English. Ex. Meu pdi, my father ; a 
 sua cdsa, his house ; duas pegoas, two people ; o 
 primeiro homem, the first man. 
 
 But when the adjective of number stands for a 
 surname, or meets with a proper or Christian name, 
 it comes after the substantive, without the article; 
 as, Jodo, V. John the fifth. 
 
 These following Adjectives come after the Substantive. 
 
 1st. Verbal adjectives and participles ; as, hum 
 homem divertido, a comical, a merry man ; huma 
 mother estimdda, a woman esteemed. 
 
 2dly. Adjectives of names of nations ; as, hum 
 mathemdtico Inglez, an English mathematician ; hum 
 alfaidte France z, a French taylor ; musica Italia na, 
 Italian music. 
 
 3dly. Adjectives of colour ; as, hum vestklo negro, 
 a black suit of clothes ; hum capote vermelho, a red 
 cloak, &c. 
 
GRAMMAR. 133 
 
 4thly. Adjectives of figure ; as, huma misa red6n- 
 da, a round table ; hum campo triangular, a triangu- 
 lar field, &c. 
 
 5thly. Adjectives expressing some physical or 
 natural quality; such are quente, hot; frio, cold; 
 humido, wet ; corcovado, hunch-backed, &c. 
 
 Most other adjectives are placed before or after 
 the substantive; as, sdnto, holy ; verdadeiro, true, &c. 
 
 If the substantive has three or more adjectives be- 
 longing to it, they must absolutely be put after it 
 with the enclitic e before the last, which must like- 
 wise be observed, even when there be but two ad- 
 jectives; for the Portuguese don't say, huma desa- 
 graddvel enfadonha obra, &c. but huma obra desa- 
 gradavel e enfaddnha, &c, a disagreeable, tedious 
 work. 
 
 Of adjectives, some always require after them 
 either a noun or verb, which they govern ; as, 
 digno de louvor, praise-worthy ; digno de ser amado, 
 worthy to be loved ; capaz de ensinar, capable to 
 teach ; and these have always the particle de after 
 them. 
 
 Some will be used absolutely without being ever 
 attended by any noun or verb ; as, prudente, wise ; 
 incur avel, incurable, &c. 
 
 Others may be construed both with and without 
 a noun, which they govern ; ilia he huma molher 
 insensivel) she is a woman without any sensibility ; 
 ilia he insensivd ao amor, she is insensible, and a 
 stranger to the passion of love. 
 
 The following adjectives, which require the pre- 
 position de before the next infinitive, govern the 
 genitive case. Observe, that some of them require 
 in English the preposition at or with before the next 
 noun. 
 
 Digno, worthy : as, Hie he digno de louvSr, he is 
 worthy of praise. This adjective is sometimes fol- 
 lowed by que ; as digna que sen nome f6sse y 8$c. her 
 name deserved to be, Sec. 
 
134 PORTUGUESE 
 
 Indtgno, unworthy ; as, imligno da estimagao quefdco 
 delle, unworthy of the esteem which I have for him. 
 
 Capaz, capable ; incapdz, incapable ; as, capaz, 
 or incapdz de servir a prSpria pdtria, capable or in- 
 capable of serving one's country. 
 
 Notddo, charged ; as, not ado de avareza, charged 
 with avarice. 
 
 Contente, glad ; as, estdu contente do successo que 
 elle teve, I am glad or overjoyed at his success. 
 
 Canc/ido, tired ; as, cancddo de estuddr, tired of 
 studying. 
 
 Dezejoso, greedy ; as, dezejdso de gloria, greedy of 
 glory, &c. as likewise adjectives signifying fulness, 
 emptiness, plenty, want, desire, knowledge, remem- 
 brance, ignorance, or forgetting. 
 
 All adjectives signifying inclination, advantage 
 and disadvantage, profit or disprofit, pleasure or 
 displeasure, due submission, resistance, likeness, 
 govern the dative case ; as, insensivel as affrdntas, 
 insensible of affronts ; ser incllnado a alguma causa, 
 to be inclined to something ; nocivo a saude, hurtful 
 to health. 
 
 These adjectives signifying dimensions, as, alto, 
 high, tall ; largo, wide, broad ; and comprido, long, 
 come after words of the measure of magnitude, 
 both in English and Portuguese ; but they are pre- 
 ceded by de in Portuguese ; as, des pes de largo, ten 
 feet broad ; sets pes de comprido, six feet long, &c. 
 they also turn the adjective of the dimension into 
 its substantive, with the word of the measure before : 
 but the word of the dimension is always preceded 
 by de; as seis pes de altura, six feet high; dez pes 
 de largura, ten feet broad. 
 
 The adjectives signifying experience, knowledge, 
 or science, require em, ox no, na, nos, nas, after them ; 
 as, versado, nos livros, versed in books ; exptrto na 
 medicina, expert in medicine. 
 
 The cardinal nouns require the genitive case after 
 them ; as, hum dos ddus, one of the two. 
 
GRAMMAR. 135 
 
 The ordinal nouns, as well as the collective and 
 proportional, likewise require the genitive after 
 them ; as, oprimeiro dos reys, the first of the kings, 
 huma duzia de ovos, a dozen of eggs, &c. 
 
 Of the Syntax of Comparatives and Superlatives. 
 
 The comparative is not made of the positive in 
 Portuguese, as in Latin and English, but by adding 
 mdis, more, or menos, less which govern que, signify- 
 ing than ; as, o todo he mayor que a parte, the whole 
 is greater than the part ; o seu amdnte he mdis hello, 
 mdis moco, e mdis ricoque ella, her lover is handsomer, 
 younger and richer than she is ; eu dcho-o agora 
 menos bellodo que qudndo o comprei, I now find it less 
 handsome than when I bought it. 
 
 The simple comparatives mais, and menos, meet- 
 ing with a noun of number, are attended by de; as, 
 ainda que Hie tivesse mais de cem homens, though he 
 has above an hundred men ; elle tern mdis de vinte 
 dnnos, he is abore twenty. 
 
 When the comparison is made by so as, as much 
 as, they must be rendered by cdmo. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 O meu livro he tad bello cdmo o vosso, my book is 
 as handsome as yours ; hum principe nab he tad po~ 
 deroso como hum rey, a prince is not so powerful as 
 a king. 
 
 They put sometimes muito and pduco before the 
 simple comparatives mdis and menos; as, elle he 
 muito mdis grdnde, he is taller by much ; elle he 1 
 pduco mdis grande, lie is taller by little, &c. 
 
 
136 PORTUGUESE 
 
 CHAP. IV. 
 
 OP THE SYNTAX OF PRONOUNS. 
 
 WE have sufficiently explained the pronouns in 
 the first part ; and to avoid any further repetition, 
 I shall only observe, that, 
 
 1st. The English make use of ihe verb to be, put 
 impersonally through all its tenses in the third per- 
 son, before the pronouns personal, I,thou, he, she, we, 
 you, they ; it is I ; it is he, &c. In Portuguese the 
 verb to be, on this occasion, is not impersonal ; as 
 they express, it is I, by sou eu ; it is thou, es tu ; 
 it is he, he ilia ; it is we, somos nos ; it is ye, sois vos, 
 it is she, he ilia : it is they, masc. sad elles; it is 
 they, fem. sab ellas ; and in like manner through all 
 the tenses ; as, it was I, era eu ; it was we, iramos 
 nos, &c. 
 
 2ndly. The Portuguese seldom make use of the 
 second person singular or plural, but when through 
 a great familiarity among friends, or speaking to 
 God, or a father and mother to their children, or to 
 servants ; thus, you are in the right of it, is ex- 
 pressed by vm ce tern razdo, instead of tendes razao ; 
 como esta vm ce ? how do you do ? In the plural they 
 say vm ces . 
 
 Observe here, that when an adjective comes aftei 
 vm ce V. S. V. E. &c. it does not agree in gender 
 with vm ce V. S. &c. but with the person we speak 
 to, or we speak of, thus we say to a lady or woman ; 
 vm ce he mu'ito bella, you are very beautiful ; and to 
 a man, vm ce he muito bum, you are very good. 
 
 3dly. Nos is generally used by the king, a gover- 
 nor, or a bishop, in their writings, and then it sig- 
 nifies in English we ; as, nosmanclamos, or mandamos, 
 we command ; but nos before or after a verb in Por- 
 
GRAMMAR. 137 
 
 tuguese signifies us in English ; as, tile nos disse, 
 he told us ; ddi-nos tempo, give us time. 
 
 4thly. Vos is also applied to a single person, but 
 only speaking to inferiors, or between familiar 
 friends, to avoid the word thou, tu, which would 
 be too gross and unmannerly. 
 
 5thly. The pronouns conjunctive are joined to 
 verbs, and stand for the dative and accusative cases, 
 as, deu me, he gave me ; ama-me, love me ; but the 
 pronouns personal are used instead of them when 
 they are preceded by a preposition, and not imme- 
 diately followed by a verb ; elle fallSu contra mim, 
 he spoke against me. 
 
 6thly. When o, a, os, as, are joined to the pre- 
 sent infinitive mood, they change the last r of it into 
 lo, la, fyc. thus ; para ama-lo, to love him ; para vela, 
 or, ve las, to see her, or them, &c. and when they 
 are joined to the preterperfect indicative of the 
 verb fazir, and some others that have that tense 
 ending in iz, they change the last z of them into lo, 
 la, 8$c. as ji~lo, I did it ; ellefe-lo, he did, or made 
 it, &c. but when they are joined to the future in- 
 dicative of any verb with the auxiliary verb haver, 
 then they change the terminations rei, ras, &c. of 
 the futures into lo, la, 8$c. as fa~lo-hei, I'll do it ; 
 ama-lo-hei, I'll love him, &c. 
 
 Remarks on the Pronouns. 
 
 1st. Him, or it, which follow the verb in English, 
 must be expressed in Portuguese as in the following 
 examples : 
 
 When him or it in English follow the verb in the 
 first person of the singular number, it must be ex- 
 pressed in Portuguese by o before or after the verb. 
 Exam. 1 call him or it, eu o chdmo, or eu chdmo-o. 
 
 When him or it in English follow the verb in the 
 first person of the singular number, it may be ex 
 pressed in Portuguese either by o before the verb, Q 
 
138 PORTUGUESE 
 
 lo after it, making an elision of the last consonant 
 of the verb. Exam. Thou callest him or it, tu o 
 chdmas, or tu chdma lo. 
 
 When him or it is joined with the third person 
 singular of a verb, it may be expressed by o before 
 or after the verb. Ex. He calls him or it, elk o 
 chdma ,or elk chdma~o. 
 
 When him or it is with a verb in the first person 
 plural, it may be expressed in Portuguese either by 
 o before the verb, or lo after it, making an elision, 
 as in the second case. Ex. We call him or\t, 716s 
 chamdmos or nos chamdmo-lo. 
 
 When him or it is after a verb in the second person 
 plural, it is expressed in Portuguese either by 
 before the verb, or lo after it, making an elision, 
 &c. Ex. You. call him or it, vos chamais, or vos 
 chamai-lo. 
 
 When him or it follows the verb in the third 
 person plural, it may be expressed in Portuguese 
 either by before the verb, or no after it. Examp. 
 They call him or it, elks chdmao, or elks chamao-no. 
 
 Sndly. Her or Rafter a verb in English is ex- 
 pressed in Portuguese by a, according to the rules 
 just now proposed. 
 
 3rdly." Them after a verb is expressed in Portu- 
 guese by os for the masculine, and by as for the 
 feminine, according to the gender and the rules 
 proposed. 
 
 4thly. The words 0, a, os, as, must always be 
 put after the gerunds, but not before the infinitives. 
 Examp. Seeing him, we must not say, vendo, but 
 vendo-o, because vendo is a gerund. To see him, in- 
 stead of saying para ver-o, you must say para ver, 
 because it is in the infinitive. 
 
 5thly. The words lo, la, los, las, must always be 
 put after the verbs. Examp. To see him, you must 
 say para ve-lo, ox para over, and not para olver. 
 The same words must follow also the adverb ei ; 
 
GRAMMAR. 139 
 
 as, ei-lo aqui, here he is ; ei-lo all, there he is ; 
 ei-los aqui, here they are ; ei4a ali, there she is ; 
 ei-las all, there they are. They follow likewise the 
 persons of the verbs : eu ji-lo ; tu Jizeste-lo ; elk fe- 
 lo ; nos fizemo-lo, &c. I made it, &c. 
 
 I have here been speaking of the words o, a, os 
 as, lo, la, los, las, and not of the articles o, a, os, as; 
 because when those words precede, and sometimes 
 when they follow the verbs, they are not articles, 
 but pronouns relative. They are articles only 
 when they precede the nouns or pronouns. 
 
 CHAP. V. 
 
 OF THE SYNTAX OF VERBS. 
 
 THE verbs through every tense and mood 
 (except the infinitive) ought to be preceded by a 
 nominative case, either expressed or understood, 
 with which they must agree in number and person. 
 The nominative is expressed when we say, eu 
 dmo, tu cdntas ; understood when we say, canto 
 digo, &c. 
 
 The Portuguese, as well as English, use the 
 second person plural, though they address them- 
 selves but to a single person. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Mtu amigOj vos nao tendes razao, my friend, you 
 are in the wrong. 
 
 And if we would speak in the third person, we 
 must say, vem ce tern razdo, sir, you are in the right. 
 
 The verb active governs the accusative ; as, dmo 
 a virtude, I love virtue. 
 
140 PORTUGUESE 
 
 The verb passive requires an ablative after it ; 
 as, os doutos sad envejados pillos ignordntes, the 
 learned are envied by the ignorant. 
 
 There is in Portuguese another way of making 
 the passive, by adding the relative se to the third 
 person singular or plural ; as, dma se Dios, God is 
 loved. 
 
 When there are two nominatives singular before 
 a verb, it must be put in the plural number. 
 
 When a noun is collective, the verb requires the 
 singular, not the plural ; as, a ginte estd olhando, the 
 people are looking. 
 
 Syntax of the Auxiliary Verbs. 
 
 The verb tir is made use of to conjugate all the 
 compound tenses of verbs ; as, tenho amado, tinha 
 amado, I have loved, I had loved. 
 
 Ter signifies also to possess, to obtain ; as tenho 
 dinheiro, I have money ; tern miuta capaciddde, he 
 has a great deal of capacity. 
 
 Haver, in account books and trade, expresses 
 credit or discharge. 
 
 Haver is also taken impersonally in Portuguese, 
 and signifies in English there be ; as ha muito duro 
 no Mexico, there is a great quantity of gold in 
 Mexico. 
 
 Havtr-se, made reciprocal, is the same as to be- 
 have, to act ; as huuve-se o governadur com tal pru- 
 dencia, que, 85c, the governor behaved with such 
 wisdom, that, &c. 
 
 We have already observed the difference betwixt 
 sir and estar. 
 
 The verb estar is also used to conjugate the other 
 verbs, chiefly expressing action ; as estoii Undo, 
 estou escrevindo, 1 am reading, I am writing. 
 
 Estar, with the preposition em, in or with, no na 
 nos, ijas, signifies to be present in a place ; as estuu 
 no cdmpo, I am in the country. 
 
GRAMMAR. 141 
 
 Estdr,* with the preposition para denotes the in- 
 clination of doing what the following verb expresses, 
 but without a full determination ; as, estdu para ir 
 me para Lund res, I have a mind to go and live in 
 London. 
 
 Estdr, with the preposition por, and the infinitive 
 of the verb following, means, that the thing express- 
 ed by the verb is not yet done ; as, isto estd por 
 escrever, this is not yet written ; isto estd por alimpdr, 
 this is not yet cleaned ; estdr por algutm signifies to 
 agree with one, or to be of his opinion. 
 
 N. B. See in the Third Part the different signi- 
 fications of the verbs estdr and haver. 
 
 When sir signifies the possessive of one thing, it 
 governs the genitive ; as, a rua he £ eUrey, the 
 street belongs to the king ; esta cdsa he de meu pay, 
 this house belongs to my father. 
 
 Em s6r is taken for a thing to be whole or entire, 
 without any alteration or mutilation ; as, as fazen- 
 das estdo em ser, the goods are not sold. 
 
 Of the Syntax of Verbs active, passive, &$c. 
 
 When two verbs come together, with or without 
 any nominative case, then the latter must be in the 
 infinitive mood ; as, quer vm ee aprender afalldr In- 
 glez ? will you learn to speak English ? 
 
 All verbs active govern the accusative ; but if 
 they are followed by a proper name of God, man, 
 or woman, or any noun expressing their qualities or 
 title, then it governs the dative case ; as, conhego a 
 seu pay, I know his father; Achdrao a Joao no 
 caminho, they found John in the road. 
 
 All verbs of gesture, moving, going, resting, or 
 doing, as also the verbs that have the word that 
 goes before, and the word that comes after, both be- 
 longing to one thing, require the nominative after 
 them ; as, Pedro vdi err ado, Peter goes on wrong ; 
 
142 PORTUGUESE 
 
 opobre dorme descant; ado, the poor sleeps without care. 
 Also the verb of the infinitive mood has the same 
 case, when verbs of wishing and the like come after 
 them ; as tddos dezejao sir ricos, every body wishes 
 to be rich ; antes quisera ser dduto que parccelo, I 
 had rather be learned than be accounted so. 
 
 After verbs the Portuguese express yes and no by 
 que sim and que nab. Example, creyo que sim, I be 
 lieve yes ; creyo que nao, I believe not ; digo que sim, 
 I say yes ; cuido que nab, I think not ; aposto que 
 sim, I lay yes ; quereis apostar que nao? have you a 
 mind to lay not? 
 
 Verbs signifying grief, compassion, want, remem- 
 brance, forgetting, &c. will have the genitive ; as, 
 pesame muito da morte de sen irmko, I am very sorry 
 for the death of your brother ; elle morre defome, he 
 perishes by hunger ; lembre-se do que me disse, re- 
 member what you said to me ; compadeci-me das suas 
 disgracas, I pitied him for his misfortunes ; esqueci- 
 me de tudo isto, all this I forgot. 
 
 The reciprocals of jeering, boasting, and distrust- 
 ing, govern also the genitive; as,jactar-se, gloriar- 
 se, picar-se, envergonhar-se, &c. 
 
 All the verbs active govern the dative only when 
 the substantive represents a person ; as, eu conheco 
 a vm ce , &c. I know you, &c. 
 
 The folio wing verbs belong to this rule of the dative : 
 Jogar, to play ; as, jogar cartas, to play at cards ; 
 jogar aos centos, to play at picquet ; jogar ao xadrez*, 
 to play at chess, &c. 
 
 Obedecer, desobedecer agradar, comprazer ; as, eu 
 obedeco a Deos e el-rey, I obey God and the king ; 
 comprazeo em tiido aos soldados, in all he pleased the 
 soldiers. 
 
 Mandar, when it signifies to command an army, 
 company, &c. requires the accusative, but, when 
 other things, the dative ; as, elle manddva a cavalla- 
 ria 9 he commanded the horse ; o governador man- 
 
GRAMMAR. 143 
 
 ddu a todos os moradores que se relirdssem para suas 
 cdsas, the governor ordered all the inhabitants to 
 retire into their houses. 
 
 Ir, to go ; as, vou a Paris, I go to Paris. 
 
 Assistir, ajuddr, socorrer, to help ; assistir ao 
 officio divinOy to assist at divine service. 
 
 Sauddr, to salute or greet ; as, elle sduda a todos, 
 he salutes every body. 
 
 Falldr, to speak ; satizfazer, to satisfy ; servir, to 
 serve ;favorecer, to favour ; ameacdr, to threaten. 
 
 The verbs of pleasing, displeasing, granting, de- 
 nying, pardoning, will have the person in the da- 
 tive case. 
 
 The i m personals acontecer, succeder, importdr, per- 
 tencer, and the like to these, will have often two 
 datives, of person ; as, a mini me succedeo, it happen- 
 ed to me ; a elle Iheconvem, it suits him, or it is con- 
 venient for him ; a elle nao Ihe importa, it does not 
 concern him, Sec. 
 
 All the active verbs require the accusative ; and 
 the Latin verbs which govern the accusative of the 
 thing, and the dative of the person, govern gene- 
 rally the same in Portuguese ; as, escrevei o que digo 
 a vosso irmdo, write to your brother what I say. 
 
 Verbs of asking, teaching, arraying, will have an 
 accusative of the doer or sufferer, and sometimes 
 verbs neuter will have an accusative of the thing ; 
 as, gozdr saude, to enjoy health ; peco este favdr, I 
 ask this favour; elle toca muito bemjlduta, he plays 
 very well on the flute ; curdr huma doenca, to cure 
 a sickness. 
 
 Verbs passive, and the greatest part of the reci- 
 procals require the ablative, with de, do, da, dos, 
 das, por, or pello, pella, pellos, pellas; as fui cha- 
 mddo porel-rey, I was called by the king ; retirei-me 
 da ciddde, I retired from the city ; elle foi amddo do 
 pdvo, he was loved by the people. Except acostdr- 
 se, which requires a dative, preceded by a ; encostdr- 
 se, which sometimes will have a dative, and some- 
 
144 PORTUGUESE 
 
 times an ablative, preceded by em, no, na, nos, or 
 nas ; meter-se, which requires an ablative ; sentar- 
 se, introduzir-sc, &c. which must have the ablative 
 with the preposition em, no, net, nos, nas. 
 
 The verbs joined with a noun which they govern, 
 must have the infinitive with de ; as, tenho vontade 
 de rir, I am inclined to laugh. 
 
 The price of any thing bought or sold, or bar- 
 tered, will have the accusative with por. 
 
 The verb pdr se, when it signifies to begin, must 
 have the infinitive, with the particle a; as, parse a 
 chorar, to begin to cry. 
 
 Verbs of plenty, filling, emptying, loading, un- 
 loading, will have the ablative ; as, esta terra abun- 
 da de trigo ; this country abounds with corn ; elle 
 esta carregado de miserias, he is loaded with calami- 
 ties. 
 
 Verbs denoting custom, help, beginning, exhorta- 
 tion, invitation, require the infinitive with the par- 
 ticle a ; as, ajudar a semear, to help to sow, convi- 
 doume a cear, he invited me to supper. 
 
 Verbs that signify distance, receiving, or taking 
 away, will have the ablative ; as, a Madeira dista 
 de Marrocos 320 mtlhas, Madeira lies 320 miles 
 from Morocco. 
 
 Verbs signifying receiving, or taking away, ge- 
 gerally require the ablative of the person ; but 
 they sometimes require an accusative: particularly 
 the verb receber, when it signifies to welcome, or 
 to entertain : as, elle recebe todos com muito agrado, 
 he gives his company a hearty reception, he makes 
 them very welcome. 
 
 Verbs denoting obligation, govern the following 
 infinitive with the preposition a; as, eu o obrigarei 
 afazer zsto, I will oblige him to do it. 
 
 Verbs of arguing, quarrelling, fighting, &c. will 
 have the ablative with com ; as, pelejuu mais de huma 
 hora com seu irmao, he quarrelled more than one 
 hour with his brother. 
 
GRAMMAR. 145 
 
 After the verb substantive sir, to be, para is 
 made use of as well as a : the first is employed to 
 denote the use or destination of any thing ; as, esta 
 penna he para escrever, this pen is to write with. 
 But the particle a is used to denote only the action ; 
 as, ellefoi o prime iro a fugir, he was the first to 
 run away. 
 
 Verbs of motion to a place always govern the 
 dative ; as, vou a comedia, I go to the play. 
 Though the verb voltdr, to return, may also have 
 an accusative, with the preposition para. But 
 verbs of motion from a place govern the ablative 
 with de, do, da, dos, das ; as, venho do cdmpo, I come 
 from the country. If the motion is through a place, 
 then they govern the accusative, with por ; as* 
 passarei por Ldndres, I will come by the way of 
 London. 
 
 Of the Use and Construction of the Tenses, 
 
 Although I have spoken at large upon the tenses 
 in the First Part, I would further observe, 
 
 1. That the infinitive and the auxiliary verb haver, 
 are used together with the pronouns lo, la, los, las, 
 instead of the future indicative; as, ouvir-lo-hei, I 
 will hear him : and then the r of the infinitive is 
 changed into lo, la, los, las ; sometimes the infini- 
 tive and the auxiliary verb haver, are used with the 
 pronouns conjunctive me, te, se, Sec, instead of the 
 same future ; as, dar-lhe-hei, I will give him ; agas- 
 tar-se-ha, he will be angry. 
 
 c 2. That when we find the particle if, which in 
 Portuguese is expressed by se, before the imperfect 
 indicative, we must generally use the imperfect 
 subjunctive in Portuguese ; example, se eu tivesse, if 
 I had ; se eu pudesse, if I could. But sometimes the 
 imperfect indicative is used ; as, disse4he que se 
 queria, &c. ; he told him that if he was willing, -(§•<?♦ 
 
 1 
 
146 PORTUGUESE 
 
 3. That the first imperfect subjunctive in Portu- 
 guese is also used in a sense that denotes the present, 
 especially in sentences of wishing ; as, quizera que 
 Domingo fizesse bum tempo, I wish it would be fine 
 weather on Sunday. But if the same tense is pre- 
 ceded by a'nida que, although, then it must be ren- 
 dered into English by the second imperfect subjunc- 
 tive, or by the imperfect indicative ; as, en nao a 
 quizera, ainda que tivesse milhdens cle seu, though she 
 was worth several millions, I would not have her ; 
 ainda que elle consentisse nisso, nao se podia fazer, 
 although he would consent to it, that could not be 
 done. Lastly, when the first imperfect subjunctive 
 is preceded by se, it is sometimes rendered into 
 English by the second imperfect subjunctive ; as, 
 se elle viesse, if he should come. 
 
 The English are apt to put the first imperfect of 
 the subjunctive where the Portuguese make use of 
 the second ; as, I had been in the wrong, nao term 
 tido razao ; and though they may say nao tivera tido 
 razao, they may not say nao tivesse tido razao, to 
 express the English of, / should have been in the 
 wrong, or / had been in the wrong. 
 
 Note, that to express in Portuguese, though that 
 should be, we must say, qudndo isso fosse, and not seria. 
 
 The Portuguese use the future tense subjunctive 
 after the conjunction if, when they speak of a future 
 action, but the English, the present indicative : ex- 
 ample, to-morrow, if I have time, amanhaa se tiver 
 tempo, and not se tenho ; if he comes, we shall see 
 him, nus o veremos, se elle vier. 
 
 A conjunction between two verbs obliges the last 
 to be of the same number, person, and tense as the 
 first: example, the king wills and commands, el rei 
 quer e ordena ; I see and I know, eu vejo e conhego* 
 
 Sometimes the present is made use of, instead of 
 the preter definite in narrations, as, no niesmo tempo 
 que hia andando, o encuntra, o despe, e o dta a huma 
 
GRA M M A R. 147 
 
 arvore, as he was going, he meets him, Strips him, 
 and ties him to a tree. 
 
 When the Portuguese use the infinitive with a 
 third person in the plural, they add em to it, and it 
 is generally preceded by po?\ for, and para, in order 
 to, thai, or to the end that ; as, ellesforao enforcados 
 por furthrem, they were hanged for robbing; para 
 serem e?iformados, that, to the end that they may be 
 informed ; para podfaem dizer, that they may be 
 able to say. 
 
 Observe, that when the Portuguese put por before 
 the first future subjunctive, they speak of a time 
 past ; as, por fallardes, because you have spoken. 
 But when they put para before it, then they speak 
 of a time to come ; as, parafalldrmos, to give us 
 an opportunity for speaking, in order to speak. 
 
 Of Moods. 
 
 All the tenses of the indicative mood may be em- 
 ployed without any conjunction before them ; but 
 they admit also of some. Besides the conjunction 
 que, those that may be made use of are se, como, and 
 quctndo ; with some distinction in respect to se, be- 
 cause this conjunction is seldom used before the fu- 
 ture tense, and then it is governed by a verb signi- 
 fying ignorance, doubt, or interrogation ; as, nao 
 sti se hao de air, I do not know whether they will 
 come ? estou em duvida se os inimigos pasSarao o rw, 
 I doubt whether the enemy will pass the river ; 
 nao pergunto se partira, I do not ask whether he 
 will set out. 
 
 The optative or subjunctive in Portuguese has 
 always some sign annexed;* as, oxala, prouvera a 
 Decs, 6 se! would to God, I pra}^ God, God grant ; 
 &c. ; que para, que, &c. that, &c. 
 
 The particle que is not expressed in the present 
 tense of this mood ; but it is understood in sen- 
 
 l2 
 
14$ PORTUGUESE 
 
 tences of wishing or praying ; as, Deos o faca bom, 
 let God amend him. 
 
 When que is between two verbs, the last is not 
 always put in the subjunctive, because, though some 
 say creyo que venha, I believe he comes ; I think it is 
 better to say creyo que vem ; but when there is a 
 negation, the verb following que must be put in the 
 subjunctive ; as, nao creyo que venha, I do not be- 
 lieve he will come, nab creyo que venha tab cedo, I 
 do not believe he will come so soon. 
 
 When the verbs crer, to believe, saber, to know, 
 are used interrogatively, and followed by the par- 
 ticle que, the next verb is put in the indicative, 
 when the person that asked the question makes no 
 doubt of the thing which is the object in question ; 
 as, if knowing that peace is made, I want to know 
 if the people whom I converse with know it too, I 
 should express myself thus, sabeis vos que estafeita a 
 paz f do you know that peace is made ? But if I 
 have it only by a report, and doubt of it, and want 
 to be informed of it, I must ask the question thus, 
 sabeis vos que a paz esteja feita? and not sabeis vos 
 que est a feita a paz P 
 
 Observe also, that the present subjunctive of 
 saber is elegantly used when it is attended by a 
 negative, and the particle quern this phrase, nab que 
 eu saiba, not that I know of. 
 
 All the verbs used impersonally with the particle 
 que require the subjunctive ; as, he preciso que elle 
 v nha, he must come; convent que isto sefaca, it is 
 convenient that this be done. You must only ex- 
 cept such sentences as express any positive assurance, 
 or certainty ; as, he certo que vem, it is certain that 
 he comes ; set que esta em ccisa, I know he is at home. 
 
 From these observations it follows, that all the 
 verbs not expressing a positive assurance, or believ- 
 ing, but only denoting ignorance, doubt, fear, as- 
 tonishment, admiration, wishing, praying, pretension, 
 
GRAMMAR. 149 
 
 or desire, govern the subjunctive mood after que ; 
 as, duvido que possa, I doubt if it be in his power ; 
 tSmo que mdrra, I am afraid he will die ; admiro-me 
 que consmta nisso, I wonder he agrees to it, &c. ; to 
 all which they add oxala, an Arabic word, signifying 
 God grant, which is used in Portuguese before all 
 the tenses of the optative or conjunctive, as well as 
 prhza a Deos, may it please God ; or, prouvera a 
 Deos, might it please God. 
 
 When que is relative, and there is a verb in the 
 imperative or in the indicative, with a negative or 
 interrogation before it, it governs likewise the sub- 
 junctive ; as nod ha cousa que mats me inquiete, there 
 is nothing that disturbs me more ; ha cousano mundo 
 que me possa dar icinto gosto ? is there any thing in 
 the world that may give me more pleasure? allegai- 
 Ihe ichitas razuens que o pessao persuadir, give him 
 so many reasons that he may be persuaded. 
 
 The present subjunctive is sometimes rendered 
 into English by the second preterimperfect subjunc- 
 tive, when it is followed by a verb in the future 
 tense ; as, alnda que hi trabdlhe, nunca hei de cangar^ 
 though 1 should work, I never should be tired. 
 
 The Portuguese use specially the same present 
 subjunctive for the future ; as in these sentences, 
 and others like: 
 
 Nad duvido que venha, I do not doubt but he will 
 come. 
 
 Duvido que o faca y I doubt that, or whether he 
 will do it. 
 
 Therefore avoid carefully those faults which fo- 
 reigners are so apt to make, in considering rather 
 the tense which they want to turn into Portuguese, 
 than the mood which the genius of the language 
 requires. 
 
 The present indicative is also used for the future, 
 as well as in English : example, jantais hdje em 
 casa 1 do you dine at home to-day ? 
 
150 PORTUGUESE 
 
 Of the Particles governing the Optative or Sub- 
 junctive. 
 
 The conjunction que, that, generally requires the 
 subjunctive after it ; but antes que, prime iro que, be- 
 fore that, always requires it. 
 
 Que makes all the words to which it is joined be- 
 come conjunctives, as, para que, to the end that , 
 hem que, ainda que, 8$c. Pdsto que, although ; ate 
 que, till ; quando, cdmo querque, which commonly 
 govern the subjunctive. But com que assim governs 
 the indicative ; as, com que, or com que assim vira 
 amanhaa, so he will come to-morrow. 
 
 In Portuguese to express though, or although, if 
 it is try ainda que, you may put either the subjunc- 
 tive or indicative after it : example ; ainda que seja 
 homem honrddo, though he is an honest man ; ainda 
 que elle faz aquillo, though he does that. But if 
 you render although or though by nao obstante, then 
 you must use the infinitive ; example, though he 
 h an honest man ; nao obstante sir elle homem 
 honrddo; though he does this, nao obstante fazer 
 elle isto. 
 
 The impersonal verbs generally govern the sub- 
 junctive with que ; but with this distinction, when 
 the impersonal is in the present tense or future, of 
 the indicative mood, then it requires the present 
 subjunctive mood ; but when the impersonal, or any 
 other verb taken impersonally, is in any of the pre- 
 terites indicative, then it governs the imperfect, per- 
 fect, or pluperfect of the subjunctive, according to 
 the meaning of the sentence ; as, import a muito que 
 el-rey veja tudo, it is of great moment that the king 
 may see all \foiconvienenteque o principe fosse com elle, 
 it was convenient that the prince should go with him. 
 
 The present subjunctive is likewise construed, 
 when the particle por is separated from que by an 
 adjective ; as, por grdnde, por admirdvel, por douto 
 que seja, though he be great, admirable, learned. 
 
GRAMMAR. 151 
 
 An imperative often requires the future of the 
 subjunctive ; as succida o que succeder, or sSja o que 
 for, happen what shall happen, at all events. 
 
 The imperfect subjunctive is repeated in this 
 phrase, and others like, succedesse, o que succedesse, 
 let happen what would. 
 
 The future of the subjunctive mood follows gene- 
 rally these, logo que, qudndo, se, cdmo, 8$c. ; as, logo 
 que chegdr iremosapassear, as soon as he comes, we 
 will go and take a walk; qudndo vier, estaremos 
 promptos, when he comes we shall be ready. 
 
 Observe that qudndo and logo que may also be 
 construed with the indicative mood ; as, qudndo el- 
 rey ve tudo, nab o engdnao, when the king sees every 
 thing, he is not deceived ; logo que chegou, falUi com 
 elle, as soon as he came, I spoke with him. 
 
 Of the Infinitive Mood. 
 
 In Portuguese there is not a general sign before 
 the infinitive, as in English the particle to; but 
 there are several particles used before the infinitive, 
 denoting the same as to does in English, and they 
 are governed by the preceding verbs or nouns. 
 These particles are the following : a, para, de, com, 
 em, por, ate, despots de ; and the article o, when the 
 infinitive serves as a nominative to another verb ; 
 as, o dizer e o fazer sad duas cousas, saying and 
 doing are two different things. 
 
 A coming between two verbs, denotes the second 
 as the object of the first ; as, a tarddnca das nossas 
 esperdngas nos ensina a mortijicar os nossos dezejos, 
 the delay of our hopes teaches us to mortify our de- 
 sires ; elle comega a discorrer, he begins to reason. 
 
 Para denotes the intention or usefulness : as, a ad- 
 versiddde serve para experimentar apaciencia, adver- 
 sity serves to try one's patience. Para after an ad- 
 jective denotes its object ; as, esta prompto paraobe- 
 decer, he is ready to obey. 
 
152 PORTUGUESE 
 
 De is put between two verbs, if the first go- 
 verns the genitive or ablative ; and when the sub- 
 stantive or adjective governs either of these two 
 cases, de must go before the following verbs, or in- 
 finitive ; as, venho de ver a meu pay, 1 have just seen 
 my father ; he tempo de hir-se, it is time to go 
 away ; el-rey foi servido de mandar, the king has 
 been pleased to order. 
 
 The infinitive is on several occasions governed by 
 prepositions or conjunctions ; as, sem dizer palavra, 
 without speaking a word ; where you may observe 
 it is expressed in English by the participle present ; 
 as nunca se canga de jugar, he is never weary of 
 playing ; diverte-se em cacdr, he delights in hunting ; 
 elle estd doente por trabalhar demasiadamente, by 
 working too much he is sick ; perde o seu tempo em 
 passear, he loses his time in walking; hei-de ir-me 
 sem me despedfr ? shall I go away without taking 
 my leave ? 
 
 The infinitive is also used passively; as nao ha 
 que dizer, que ver, &c. ; there is nothing to be said, 
 seen, &c. 
 
 The gerund of any verb active may be conjugated 
 with the verb estar, to be, after the same manner as 
 in English ; as, estou escrevendo, I am writing ; 
 elle estava dormindo, he was asleep, 8§c. 
 
 CHAP. VI. 
 
 OF THE SYNTAX OF PARTICIPLES AND 
 GERUNDS. 
 
 THE participle in the Portuguese language ge- 
 nerally ends in do, or to ; as, amado, visto, dito, &c. 
 
 The active participles that follow the verb ter, 
 to have, must end in o ; as, 
 
 Tenho visto elrey, I have seen the king. 
 
GRAMMAR. 153 
 
 Tenho visto a rainha, I have seen the queen. 
 
 Eu tin ha amddo os livi^os, I had loved books. 
 
 Eu tinha levddo as cartas, I had carried the letters. 
 
 We meet with authors who sometimes make the 
 participles agree with the thing of which they are 
 speaking ; as, in Camoens, Canto 1, Stanza xxix. 
 
 E porque como vistes^ tern passados. 
 
 Na vidgem tad dsperos perigos, 
 
 Tdntos climas, e ceos experimentados, fyc. 
 And Canto 2, Stan, lxxvi. 
 
 Sad offerecimentos verdadeiros, 
 
 E paldvras, sinceras, nao dobrddas, 
 
 As que o rei/ mdnda a os nbbres cavaleiros, 
 
 Que tanto mar e terras tern passadas. 
 
 If it be a verb neuter, the participle ought always 
 to terminate in o: example, 
 
 El-rey temjantddO) the king has dined ; a rainha 
 tern ceddo, the queen has supped ; os vossos amigos 
 tern rido, your friends have laughed ; minhas ir?ndas 9 
 tern dormidO) my sisters have slept. 
 
 When the active participle appears to precede 
 an infinitive, it must be terminated in o ; as o juiz 
 Ihe tinha feito cortdr a cabeca, the judge has caused 
 his head to be cut off. 
 
 The passive participles which are joined with the 
 tenses of the verb ser, to be, agree with the sub- 
 stantive that precedes the verb ser ; o capitdo foi 
 louvddo, the captain was praised ; a virtude he esti- 
 mdda, virtue is esteemed ; os preguicosos sao cen- 
 surddos, the lazy are blamed ; as vossas joyas fdrao 
 vendidaS) your jewels were sold. 
 
 The Portuguese generally suppress the gerunds 
 having and being before the participles ; as, dlto isto, 
 having said so ; acabddo o sermao, the sermon being 
 ended. This manner of speaking is called by 
 grammarians ablatives absolute. 
 
 The participle of the present tense in Portuguese 
 has singular and plural, but one termination serves 
 for both genders ; as hum homem temente a Deos, a 
 
154 PORTUGUESE 
 
 man fearing God ; hiuna molher temente a Deos, 
 a woman fearing God ; homens tementes a Deos, 
 people fearing God. 
 
 There are many participles which are used sub- 
 stantively ; as, ignordnte, amdnte, ouvmte, estuddnte, 
 &c. ; an ignorant, a lover, an auditor or hearer, a 
 scholar, §c. 
 
 It is better to place the nominative after the 
 gerund than before ; as estdndo el-rey na comhlia, 
 the king being at the play. 
 
 CHAP. VII. 
 
 OF PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 A preposition is a part of speech, which is 
 put before nouns, and sometimes before verbs, to 
 explain some particular circumstance. 
 
 Prepositions may be divided into separable and 
 inseparable. An inseparable preposition is never 
 found but in compound words, and signifies nothing 
 of itself. A separable preposition is generally sepa- 
 rated from other words, and signifies something of 
 itself. 
 
 The inseparable prepositions are, 
 
 Ab and abs ; as abrogdr, to abrogate ; Abster-se, 
 to abstain. 
 
 Arce, or archi ; as, arceb/spo, an archbishop ; ar- 
 chiduque, an archduke. 
 
 Ad; as, adventicio, adventitious. 
 
 Am ; as ambiguo, ambiguous ; ampdro, protection, 
 shelter. 
 
 Circum ; as, circumstdncia, circumstance. 
 
 Co ; as, cohabitar, to live together, to cohabit. 
 
 Des, serves to express the contrary of the word 
 it is joined to ; as, desacerto, mistake ; desfazer, to 
 
GRAMMAR. 155 
 
 undo ; desenganar, to undeceive ; are the contrary 
 of acerto, fazer, and enganar. 
 
 Dis ; as, dispor, to dispose ; distinguir, to distin- 
 guish ; distribuir, to distribute. 
 
 Ex ; as, extrahir, to extract. 
 
 In, has commonly a negative or privative sense, 
 denoting the contrary of the meaning of the word 
 it precedes; as, incapaz, unable; infeliz, unhappy ; 
 inaccao, inaction, 8$c. ; but sometimes it is affirma- 
 tive, as in Latin. 
 
 Observe, that in before r is changed into ir ; as, 
 irregular, irregular ; irrational, irrational : before /, 
 into il ; as ilkgitimo, illegitimate ; before m, in is 
 changed into im ; as, immaterial, immaterial. 
 
 Ob ; as, obviar, to obviate. 
 
 Pos; as, pospor, to postpose, or to postpone. 
 
 Pre ; as, preceder, to go before ; predecessor, an 
 ancestor. 
 
 Pro ; as, propor, to propose ; prometer, to pro- 
 mise. 
 
 Re, is a participle borrowed from the Latins, 
 which generally denotes iteration, or backward 
 action ; as, reedificdr, to rebuild ; repercutir, to 
 repercute, or strike back. 
 
 So ; as, socorrer, to help to succour. 
 
 Sor ; as, sorrir to smile. 
 
 Sos; as, soster, to support. 
 
 Soto ; as, sotopur, to put or lay under. 
 
 Sub ; or sob ; as, subalterno, subaltern ; subscrever, 
 to subscribe ; sobpena, sobcolor, fyc. 
 
 The Arabic article al, which is common to all 
 genders and both numbers, is found in the begin- 
 ning of almost all the words that remain in the Por- 
 tuguese language from the Arabic, and it is the 
 surest way to distinguish them. But the Portu- 
 guese articles are added to the Arabic nouns, with- 
 out taking off their article, al, as a almofada, the 
 cushion ; o Alcorao, the Koran, <§c. 
 
156 PORTUGUESE 
 
 The Greek preposition anti enters into the coin- 
 position of a great many Portuguese words, which 
 cannot be set down here. It is enough to observe, 
 that it signifies generally opposite ; as in Antipodas, 
 Antipodes; antipapa, antipope; and sometimes it 
 signifies before ; as in antiloquio, a preface, a' 
 speaking first ; but in this last sense it is derived 
 from the Latin preposition ante. 
 
 Of Separable Prepositions. 
 
 It is absolutely impossible ever to attain to the 
 knowledge of any language whatever, without tho- 
 roughly understanding the various relations denoted 
 by the prepositions, and the several cases of nouns 
 which they govern ; both which relations and cases 
 being arbitrary, vary and differ much in all lan- 
 guages. This only instance will evince it : the 
 English say, to think of a thing; the French, fo 
 think to a thing ; the Germans and Dutch, to think 
 o?i, or upon a thing ; the Spaniards and Portuguese, 
 to think in a thing, &c. Now it will avail an English- 
 man but little to know that of is expressed in Portu- 
 guese by de, if he does not know what relations em 
 and de denote in that language ; since the Portu- 
 guese say, to think in a thing, and not of & thing ; 
 therefore we will treat here of each of them, and of 
 their construction separately. 
 
 1st. A, or rather ao, as, aos, (at, in, on, 8$c.) de- 
 note the place whither one is going ; as, 
 
 Eu vou a Londres, I go to London. 
 
 Voltdr a Portugal, to return, or go back to Por- 
 tugal . 
 
 A, in this sense, is a preposition, but in the 
 following observations, it is a particle. 
 
 9ndly. A denotes time ; as, chegar a tempo, to 
 arrive in time ; a todo o tempo, at all times. 
 
 3rdly. A denotes the mode of being, or of doing 
 of people; as also their posture, gesture, or action ; as 
 
GRAMMAR. m 
 
 Estdr a stia vontdde, to be at one's ease. 
 
 A direita, on the right hand ; a esqaerda, on the 
 left hand. 
 
 Viver a sua vontade, to live to/me's mind, as one 
 likes. 
 
 Andar a pe ou a cavallo, to go on foot, or on horse- 
 back. 
 
 Montar a cavhllo, to ride on horseback. 
 
 Correr a redea solta, to ride full speed. 
 
 Trajdrd Francesa, to dress after the French mode. 
 
 Viver a Ingleza, to live after the English fashion. 
 
 Andar a grdndes pdssos, to walk at a great rate. 
 
 Andar a pdssos lentos, to walk very slowly. 
 
 4thly. A denotes the price of things ; as, a otto 
 .velins, at eight shillings. It denotes also the weight : 
 but as the nouns signifying weight are generally used 
 in the plural number, s is added to a, when it is 
 placed before nouns of the feminine gender, and 
 when it precedes nouns of the masculine gender : 
 thus, as 6?igas, by the ounce; aos arrateis, by the 
 pound, &c. A denotes also the measure ; as, 
 medir a palmos, to span or measure by the hand 
 extended. 
 
 When a is preceded by daqui, and followed by a 
 noun of time, it denotes the space of time after 
 which something is to be done: as, el-rey partird 
 daqui a tres dias, the king will set out three days 
 hence. 
 
 5thly. A denotes the tools used in working, as 
 likewise the games one plays at ; as, abrir ao buril, 
 to grave ; where o is added to a ; trabalhar a candea, 
 to do any thing by candle-light ; a agulha, with the 
 needle. 
 
 Andar a vela, to sail, or to be under sail. 
 
 Jogdr a ptla, to play at tennis. 
 
 Jogdr as cartas, to play at cards ; here s is added 
 to «, the noun being of the feminine gender and 
 plural number. 
 
153 PORTUGUESE 
 
 Jogdr aos centos, to pay at piquet ; here os is 
 added to a, as preceding a noun signifying a game, 
 of the masculine gender and plural number. 
 
 6th ly. A signifies sometimes as. Examp. Estd 
 isto a seu gosto ? Is this as you like it? And some- 
 times it signifies after ; as, a seu modo, after his or 
 her way. It signifies also in; as, aoprincipio, in the 
 beginning ; but then o is added to it. 
 
 7thly. A is also put before infinitives, pre- 
 ceded by another verb ; as ensindr a cantdr, to teach 
 to sing. It is also placed between two equal num- 
 bers, to denote order ; as, ddus a dous, two by two ; 
 qudtro a qudtro, four by four : and sometimes it is 
 preceded by a participle or adjective, and followed 
 by an infinitive mood. 
 
 8thly. A is a particle of composition, with many 
 nouns, verbs, and adverbs, of which it often in- 
 creases the meaning ; as, adinheirddo, very rich, 
 that has a great deal of money ; but it generally ex- 
 presses in verbs the action of the nouns they are 
 composed of; as, ajoelhdr, to kneel down, which 
 is formed from a and joelho, knee ; abranddr, to ap- 
 pease ; alargdr, to enlarge ; from brdndo, soft ; 
 largo, wide, &c. 
 
 9th ly. A, when it is preceded by the verb ser, 
 and followed by the pronouns personal, signifies in 
 the stead of; as, se eu fosse a vos, faria aquilo, If I 
 were you (in your place), I would do that. 
 
 lOthly. When a is placed before cdsa, and the 
 sense implies going to, t it is Englished by to, but the 
 word cdsa is left out ; as, ellefoi a cdsa do governador, 
 he went to the governor's. You must observe, that 
 a in this sense is a preposition. 
 
 1 lthly. A'o pe signifies near ; as, ponde ham ao pe 
 do outro, place, put, or set them near one another. 
 Sometimes mesmo comes before ao pe, to express 
 still more the nearness of a thing, and mesmo ao pe 
 is Englished by hard by, just by, fyc. ; as, a sua cdsa 
 estd mesmo ao peda mbiha, his house is just by mine. 
 
GRAMMAR. '159 
 
 12thly. When the noun respeito is preceded by a, 
 it is used in the same sense as em comparacao, but 
 requires one of these particles, do, da, dos, das, after 
 it, and signifies in comparison of, in regard to, in 
 respect of ; as, isto he ndda a respeito do que posso 
 dizer, this is nothing to other things that 1 can say. 
 13thly. When a comes before a verb neuter, it 
 marks a dative ; and after a verb active, an accusa- 
 tive case. 
 
 A before the verb proposito is used in familiar dis- 
 course ; as, a proposito, esquecime de dizer-voso outro 
 dia ; now I think onH, I forgot to tell you the 
 other day. 
 
 14thly. Ao revez, or as avessas, are also used as 
 prepositions, attended by, de, do, da, 8$c. ; and it sig- 
 nifies quite the reverse, or, contrary ; as, ellefaztudo 
 ao revez, or as avessas do que ouvera deser, ou do que 
 the dizem, he does every thing quite the reverse of 
 right, or contrary to what he is bid. 
 
 15thly. A before truco signifies provided that. It 
 is also used before the word tiro, as, a tiro de peca, 
 within cannon-shot. 
 
 16thly. Car a acara, corpo a cdrpo, signify face to 
 face, body to body. Tomar hiima cousa a bda ou 
 a ma parte, signifies to take a thing well or ill.; 
 
 Such are the chief relations denoted by the parti- 
 cle a. The others must be learned in construing 
 and reading good Portuguese books. 
 
 1st. De, or rather do, da, dos, das, (of, from, 
 <%•£.) denote, first, the place one comes from ; as, 
 sahir de Ldndres, to go out of London ; v'lr de Fran- 
 ca, das Tndias, &c. ; -to come from France, from the 
 Indies, &c. 
 
 2nd. De between two nouns denotes the quality 
 of the person expressed by the first noun ; as, hum 
 homem de hunra, a man of honour : or the matter 
 which the thing of the first noun is made of; as, 
 Huma cstatua de mdrmore, a statue of marble. 
 
 I 
 
160 PORTUGUESE 
 
 Hiuna pdnte ele madeira ou de pedra, a wood or 
 stone bridge. 
 
 Observe, that two nouns so joined with de are com- 
 monly Englished by two nouns likewise, but with- 
 out a preposition, or rather by a compound word, 
 whose first noun (whether substantive or adjective) 
 expresses the matter and quality, manner, form, and 
 use of the other ; as a stone bridge, huma pdnte de 
 pedra; a dancing-master, hum mestre de danca. 
 
 3rd. De, do, da, dos,das, are used after the par- 
 ticiples of the preterite, wither; as ser amado, ou 
 bem visto do povo, dos sdbios, 8$c ; to be beloved by 
 the people, by the learned, &c. 
 
 Do serves for the masculine, da for the feminine, 
 and de for both. 
 
 4th. De sometimes signifies by; as, de noite, by 
 night ; de dia, by day. 
 
 5th. De before em, and many nouns of time de- 
 notes the regular interval of the time after which 
 something begins again ; as, eu vou velo de dous em 
 dbus diets, I go to see him every other day ; and be- 
 fore nouns of place and adverbs repeated with em or 
 para between, f/e denotes the passing from one place 
 or condition to another ; as, correr de riia em rua, 
 to run from street to street ; ele mal parapebr, worse 
 and worse. 
 
 6th. De after some verbs, signifies after or in ; 
 as elle portou-se d'esta sbrte, he behaved in or after 
 this manner. 
 
 7th. De is used before an infinitive, and is then 
 governed by some preceding noun or verb; as cei- 
 paz de ensinar, capable of teaching ; digno de ser 
 amado, worthy to be loved, &c. ; procurar defazer, 
 to endeavour to do ; authoridaele ele pregar, the 
 power or authority of preaching, &c. 
 
 8th. De is sometimes Englished by on ; as, p6r~ 
 se dejoelhos, to kneel down on one's knees. 
 
 De between two nouns denotes the use which 
 
GRAMMAR. 161 
 
 a thing is designed for ; as, azeite de cahdea, lamp- 
 oil ; arma de fogo, a fire-arm, moinho de vento, a 
 windmill. 
 
 This relation is expressed in English by two 
 nouns, making a compound word : the first of 
 which signifies the manner, form, and use, denoted 
 by the Portuguese preposition ; as cadeira de bragos, 
 an arm-chair, or elbow-chair ; vela de cera, a wax- 
 candle, &c. 
 
 10. De denotes sometimes the quality of things ; 
 as, miyas de tres fios, stockings with three threads. 
 Sometimes it denotes also the price; as, pdnno de 
 dezoito xelins, eighteen shilling cloth. 
 
 1 1 . De is sometimes Englished by upon ; as, viver 
 or sustentar se de peive, to live upon fish. Some- 
 times it is Englished by with ; as, morrer defrw, to 
 starve with cold. 
 
 12. De sometimes signifies for or out of ; as, saU 
 tar de alegria, to leap for joy ; de modesio, out of 
 modesty. 
 
 13. De signifies sometimes at ; as, zombar de al- 
 guem, laugh at one. 
 
 14. De is sometimes left out in English ; as, go- 
 zdr de huma causa, to enjoy a thing. 
 
 15. De, followed by two nouns of number and 
 the preposition ate between them, is Englished by 
 between; as, hum komem de quarenta ate cincoenta 
 annos, a man between forty and fifty. 
 
 16. De, preceded by the preposition dldnte, is left 
 out in English ; as, didnte de mini, before me ; di- 
 dnte de Deos, before God. 
 
 17. De, when it is placed before casa, and the 
 sense implies coming from, is Englished by from; but 
 the word casa sometimes is left out in English, and 
 sometimes not ; as, venho de casa (meaning my 
 house) I come from home, from my house : but 
 venho da casa da Senhora C. must be rendered in 
 English thus, I am returning from Mrs. C.'s. 
 
 M 
 
162 PORTUGUESE 
 
 Finally, de is used before several words ; as, de 
 brucos, lying all along on the ground ; de madrugd- 
 da, soon in the morning ; de veras, in earnest, seri- 
 ously ; de verdo, in summer ; homem de paldvra, a 
 man as good as his word ; de castas, backwards, or 
 on one's back ; anddr de pe, to be sickly without 
 being bed-rid ; and many others, which must be 
 learned by use. 
 
 A'ntes. 
 
 III. Antes, before, shows a relation of time, of 
 which it denotes priority ; and is always opposite 
 to depots, after ; as, antes da criacdo do mundo, before 
 the creation of the world. 
 
 Primeiro is also a preposition ; as, elle chegdu 
 primfiro que eu, he arrived before me. 
 
 Didnte. 
 
 IV. Didnte, before, shows a relation of place, 
 and it is always opposite to detrdz, behind. It sig- 
 nifies also sometimes em or na presenca ; as, ha ar- 
 vores didnte de sua cdsa, there are trees before his 
 house ; punde aquillo didnte dofogo, set or put that 
 before the fire ; pregdr didnte del-rei, to preach be- 
 fore the king. 
 
 Didnte is also sometimes an adverb, and may be 
 used instead of adidnte ; as, ir didnte or adidnte, to 
 go before ; but in the following phrase you must 
 say, nao vddes tdnto adidnte, and not didnte, don't go 
 so far ; por didnte is to be Englished by on in the 
 following phrase, ide por didnte, go on. 
 
 Depots. 
 
 V. Depdis, after, denotes posteriority of time, and 
 is used in opposition to antes ; as, depots do diluvio> 
 after the deluge : depots do mew dia, afternoon. 
 
 Depots also is used with an infinitive ; as, feito 
 aquillo, or tendo feito aquillo, or depots de fazer 
 
GRAMMAR. 163 
 
 aquillo, after having done that ; and it is also made 
 a conjunction with que, governing the indicative ; as, 
 depots que tevefeito aquillo, after he had done that. 
 
 Detrdz. 
 
 VI. Detraz, behind, denotes posteriority both of 
 place and order, and it is said in opposition to didnte ; 
 as, a sua casa esta detraz davossa, his house is behind 
 yours ; elk vinha detraz de mim ; he walked after me. 
 
 Em. 
 
 VII. Em, or no, na, nos, nas (in, into, within, 
 &c.) denote a relation both of time and place. The 
 many various significations in which these preposi- 
 tions are used, must be accurately observed, and 
 much regard had to them in practice. 
 
 No and na are sometimes rendered into English 
 by a ; as, duds vezes no dia, na semdna, &c. twice a 
 day, a week, &c. 
 
 No, na, &c. are always used before nouns de- 
 noting the place wherein something is kept ; as, esta 
 ?io gabinete, it is in the closet; na papeleira, in the* 
 bureau ; nas gavetas, in the drawers ; na rua, in the 
 street, &c. but sometimes they are Englished by 
 upon ; as, cahir no chad, to fall upon the ground. 
 
 Em, no, na, &c. signifies commonly in ; as, em, 
 Lundres, in London ; esta na graca del~rey, he is in 
 favour with the king ; but in some cases it has a 
 very particular meaning ; as, estar em corpo, which 
 signifies literally to be in body ; but the true sense of 
 it is, to be ivithout a cloak; so that the bodv is more 
 exposed to view without an upper garment. Estar 
 empernas, literally, to be in legs, signifies to be bare- 
 legged ; that is, the legs exposed without stockings. 
 Estar em camisa is said of one that has only the 
 shirt on his back. 
 
 When this preposition em is before an infinitive, 
 then it is an English gerund ; as, consiste emfall&r 
 bem, it consists in speaking well ; but when it is 
 
 M c 2 
 
 J 
 
164 PORTUGUESE 
 
 found before a gerund, it signifies as soon as; as, 
 
 em acabdndo irei, as soon as I have clone, I wilt 
 
 g° 
 
 Nos nossos tempos is Englished by now-a-days. 
 
 Em is used in sentences that imply a general 
 sense; as Elle est a em miserdvel est ado, he is in a 
 wretched condition ; and not no miserdvel ; but if the 
 sentence implies a particular sense, you must make 
 use of no, na, &c. as, no miserdvel estddo em que elle 
 estd in the wretched condition wherein he is ; and 
 not em miserdvel. You must observe in this last 
 example and the like, that em is to be used before 
 que, and not no, na, &c. which are to be placed only 
 before qual ; therefore you must not say, no miserd- 
 vel estddo no que elle estd ; but no miserdvel estddo 
 no qual elle estd. 
 
 Em, construed with pronouns without an article, 
 makes a sort of adverb, rendered into English by a 
 preposition and a noun ; thus in this sentence, nos 
 irernos em cache we shall go in a coach, em coche is 
 an adverb of manner, which shows how we shall go : 
 but no cache denotes something besides ; as if a 
 company were considering how they shall ride to a 
 place, somebody would say, vos ireis na cadeirinha, 
 e nos no cache, you shall go in the chair, and we in 
 the coach; no coche would be said in opposition to 
 na cadeirinha, and both respectively to some speci- 
 fied chair and coach ; or else they should say, vos 
 ireis em cadeirinha, e nos em cdche. But in this other 
 sentence, eu deixei o meu chapeo no coche, I left my 
 hat in the coach, it would be improper to say em 
 cdche, because some particular coach is meant, 
 that which has drove me here or there, or which 
 has been spoken of. 
 
 We say de verdo^ no verao, or em o verdo ; de invcr- 
 no } no inverno, &c. in summer, in winter, &c. 
 
 Em is also rendered into English by at ; as, em 
 tddo o tempo, at all times. 
 
GRAMMAR. 165 
 
 Em is used, and never no, na, &c. before proper 
 names of cities and authors ; as elle esta em Londres, 
 he is in London ; nos lemos em Cicero, we read in 
 Cicero. But they say no Porto, in Oporto. 
 
 Em, and no, na, &c. are construed with the names 
 of kingdoms ; as, em or na, Inglaterra, in England : 
 but no, na, is most commonly construed with names 
 of provinces ; as, no Alentejo, na Beira, &c. in Alen- 
 tejo, in Beira, &c. 
 
 Em is sometimes rendered into English by into: 
 as, Narciso foi transformado emjlor, Narcissus was 
 metamorphosed into a flower: and sometimes by 
 to ; as de rua em raa, from street to street. 
 
 No, na, are sometimes rendered into English by 
 against ; as, dar co' a cabeca na parede, to dash one^s 
 head against the wail. 
 
 No, na, &c. are also rendered into English by in, 
 and sometimes by into ; as ter hum menino nos brdcos, 
 to hold a child in one's arms ; entregar alguma cousa 
 nas mads de alguem, to deliver a thing into some- 
 body's hands. 
 
 Em is used before the word travez, as in this 
 phrase, por-se de mar em travez com alguem^ to fall 
 out together. 
 
 Em before a noun of time, denotes the space of 
 time that slides away in doing something ; as, el-rey 
 foi a Hanover, em tres dias, the king went to Hano- 
 ver in three days ; that is, he was no longer than 
 three days in going. 
 
 Em is sometimes used after the verb Mr, to go ; 
 as, vai em quatro meses que eu aqui cheguei, it is 
 now going on four months since I came hither. 
 
 Em before qudnto, and sometimes without it, is 
 rendered into English by while or whilst; as, em 
 qudnto vbs fazeis aquillo, eufarii isto, while you do 
 that, 1 shall do this ; but if they are followed by a 
 noun of time with an interrogation, then they must 
 be rendered into English by in how much, or many ; 
 as, em qudnto tempo 7 , in how much time? Ob- 
 
166 PORTUGUESE 
 
 serve, that em quanta mim, a ti, a elle, &c. are 
 rendered into English by for what concerns me, thee, 
 him, &c. 
 
 No serves for the masculine, na for the femi- 
 nine, and em for both. 
 
 Em signifies as ; as, em sinal da sua amizade, as a 
 token of his friendship ; em premio, as a reward. 
 
 The prepositions em, no, na, &c. and dentro, have 
 very often the same signification, therefore they may 
 sometimes be used one instead of the other ; as 
 est a na gaveta, or dentro da gaveta, it is in the 
 drawer ; esta na cidade, or dentro da cidade, he is in 
 town. 
 
 Em before the words favor, utilidade, considera- 
 cdm, razdo, and the like, signifies in behalf of, for 
 the sake of, on account of, Sec. as, em razabdas be lias 
 accoens que elle tern feito, in consideration of the 
 great things he has performed. 
 
 Observe, that they very often make an elision of 
 the last vowels, o, a, of the preposition no, na, 
 when there is a vowel in the beginning of the next 
 word ; n s agoa, instead of na agoa; they also cut 
 off the e of the preposition em, and change the m 
 into n, as you may see in Camoens, Canto 2, Stanza 
 xxxii. n' algum porto, instead of em algum porto, 
 wherein you must observe that n is to be Englished 
 by to or into. 
 
 Com. 
 
 VII. This preposition signifies with, and it denotes 
 conjunction, union, mixing, assembling, keeping 
 company; as, casar Mma donzella com hum hbmem 
 honrado, to marry a maid with an honest man ; hir 
 com alguem, to go with one ; com a ajuda de Deos, 
 by God's help, &c. 
 
 Observe that most of the adverbs formed of the 
 adjectives are turned in Portuguese by the pre- 
 position com and the substantive ; as, atrevidamente, 
 boldly, com atrevimento, with boldness ; elegante- 
 
GRAMMAR. 167 
 
 mente, elegantly ; com elegancia, with elegance ; cor- 
 tezmente, politely, com cortezia, with politeness, &c. 
 
 The last consonant m is very often cut off, even 
 before the noun of number hum, one; and so they 
 say, cum, instead of com hum, as may be seen in 
 Camoens, Cant. 2, Stanza xxxvii. 
 
 With me, with thee, with himself, &c. are rendered 
 into Portuguese by commigo, comtigo, or comvosco, 
 comsigo comnosco, comvosco, corns ■/ go. 
 
 When com is preceded by para, it signifies to- 
 wards, and sometimes over, in English ; as, sejamos 
 piedosos para com os pbbres, let us be merciful to- 
 wards the poor. Ter grdnde poder para com alguem, 
 to have great influence over somebody's mind. 
 
 Com before the word capa is used metaphorically, 
 and then it signifies under colour ov pretext. 
 
 Para. 
 
 VIII. Para is rendered into English by for ; but 
 it signifies also to, when it is found before the in- 
 finitive, and denotes the intention, or purpose in 
 doing something ; as, este livro he para meu irmao, 
 this book is for my brother ; estapenna he para escre- 
 ver, this pen is to write ; Deos nos fez para amalo, 
 God made us for to love him ; o comer he necessdrio 
 para conservar a vida, eating is necessary for pre- 
 serving life. 
 
 Para que is rendered into English by for what ; 
 as, para que he isto? for what is this? and sometimes 
 by that, or in order that ; as, para que venha virme, 
 that he may come and see me. But porque signifies 
 ivhy, for what, upon what account, as, porque nad 
 vindes? why don't you come? but when it is not 
 followed by an interrogation, it signifies because. 
 
 Para serves likewise before the verbs, to denote 
 what one is able to do in consequence of his present 
 disposition ; as, Hie he bastantemente forte para andiir 
 a cavdllo, he is strong enough to ride ; elle tern bus- 
 
168 PORTUGUESE 
 
 tdnte cabeddl para sustcntdr-se, he has means enough 
 to maintain himself; a occasido he muito favor dvel 
 para nos nao servir-mos della, the occasion is too 
 favourable to let it slip. 
 
 Para expresses also the capacity or incapacity of 
 doing any thing; as, elle he homem para isto, he is 
 the proper man wanted for this ; he homem para pou- 
 co, he is good for little ; he homem para ndda, he is 
 good for nothing. 
 
 This preposition is also used to denote the end or 
 motive of doing any thing ; as, trabdlho para o hem 
 publico, I work for the public good ; hum hospital 
 para os pbbres, an hospital for the poor. 
 
 Para is a preposition of time ; a&istome bdstapara 
 
 todo o anno ; this is sufficient to me for all the year ; 
 
 est ad umdos para sSmpre, they are united for ever; 
 
 para duus meses ha muito pouco, for two months it 
 
 was too little. 
 
 Para is sometimes preceded by the adverb la, 
 and followed by a noun of time, and then it is 
 Englished by against or towards ; as, Id para o Jim 
 da semdna, against the end of the week, or towards 
 the end of the week. 
 
 Para is sometimes Englished by considering, or 
 with respect to ; as, este menino estd muito adiantddo 
 para a iddde que tern, or para o pouco tempo que 
 aprende, this child is very forward for his age, or 
 considering the little time he has learned \para Ingle z 
 fdlla demasiadamente, he talks too much considering 
 that he is an Englishman. 
 
 Para signifies sometimes just or ready to ; as, elle 
 estd para partir, he is just going away, he is ready 
 to go. 
 
 Para is also used before the word grdcas ; as, Slle 
 nao he para grdcas, he takes no jest ; elle nao estd 
 para grdcas, he is out of humour, or he is in an ill 
 humour. 
 
 Para onde ? signifies whither? to what place? 
 
GRAMMAR. 169 
 
 Para que ? or para que Jim ? signifies to what end 
 or purpose? Para cima signifies upward. 
 
 Para huma e antra parte, signifies to both sides, 
 places, ox parts. 
 
 Para is also Englished by towards, and is said of 
 places ; as, para o oriente, towards, or to the east. 
 
 Para onde quer que, signifies whither, or to what 
 place thou wilt, any where. 
 
 Para Sutra parte, signifies towards another place. 
 
 Para comigo, towards me. 
 
 Para o didnte, signifies/or the time to come. 
 
 Demim, para mim, signifies for what concerns me. 
 
 Para is used by Camoens. Cant. 2, Stanza xxiv. 
 before the preposition detraz, and signifies back- 
 wards. 
 
 Para between two nouns of number is Englished 
 by or, and sometimes by and ; as, hum hbmem de 
 quarenta para cincoenta dnnos, a man between forty 
 and fifty ; dista quatro para cinco legoas, it is about 
 four or five leagues distant. 
 
 Por. 
 
 IX. Por, pello, pella, pellos, or pellas, signifies/or ; 
 as, por amor de vos, for your sake ; por sets semdnas, 
 for six weeks ; paldvra por palavra, word for word. 
 
 Polo and pola instead of pello and pella, are out 
 of use. 
 
 Por sometimes denotes that the thing is not yet 
 done ; as, esta Sbra esta por acabar, this work is not 
 yet finished. 
 
 Por, by, for, over, through ; as, alcancSi-o por 
 empenho, I obtained it by protection ; eu vou por 
 dinheiro, I am going for money ; passeio pillos cdmpos, 
 I walk through the fields ; por todo o remo, all over 
 the kingdom. 
 
 When por is before an infinitive, and followed by 
 a negative, in the latter part of the sentence, it is 
 Englished by although or though; as, por ser dev6ta t 
 
170 PORTUGUESE 
 
 or por devota que seja, nao deuva de ser molher, though 
 she is a religious woman, yet she is a woman ; por 
 ser pobre, or por pobre que seja, nao deLva de ser 
 soberba, though she has no fortune, she is neverthe- 
 less, or for all that, proud. Here the negative with 
 the verb dei,var are rendered into English by the 
 verb to be, and the particles nevertheless, yet, &c. 
 Sometimes the words nem por tsso are used before 
 the verb deixar, but the sense is the same. 
 
 Por followed by an adjective and the particle que 
 with a verb in the subjunctive mood, is rendered 
 into English by never so ; as, por grdnde que elk 
 seja, let him be never so great ; por pouco que seja, 
 never so little. 
 
 Por before menos, signifies far less than, or under ; 
 as, vm ce nao o tera por menos de v'inte libras, you shall 
 not have it under twenty pounds. 
 
 Por before qudnto, with an interrogation, signifies 
 for how much, at what rate ? But if there be no 
 interrogation, as in the following and the like sen- 
 tences, then it is to be Englished by for never so 
 much ; as, nao o farm por qudnto me dessem, 1 would 
 not do it for never so much. 
 
 Por before cima signifies upwards, and before baxo 
 is Englished by downwards ; as, o remedio bbra por 
 chna e por bdxo, the medicine operates, or works, 
 upwards and downwards. 
 
 Por before pouco, muito, bem, &c. and followed by 
 que, makes a sort of conjunction governing the sub- 
 junctive, and is Englished by if, followed by ever 
 or never so little, much, well, &c. as, por pouco que 
 erreis, if you do amiss never so little; por bem que 
 eu faca, if I do never so well, &c. 
 
 Por before mini signifies sometimes as for, or for 
 all ; as, por mim estou prompto, as for me, or, for my 
 part I am ready ; por mini podeis dormir se quizerdes, 
 you may sleep for all me. 
 
 Por,pello, pella, &c. denote the efficient cause of 
 
GRAMMAR. 171 
 
 a thing, as also the motive and means, or ways of 
 doing it ; in all which significations they are 
 Englished by by, through, out of, at, &c. as, 
 
 A Asia f Si conquistada por Alexandre , Asia was 
 conquered by Alexander. 
 
 V6s fallals nisso so por enveja, it is out of envy 
 only you speak of it. 
 
 E'lle entrou pella porta, mas sahio pella janella, he 
 got in at the door, but he got out at the window, 
 &c. 
 
 Por denotes place, after the verbs ir and passdr ; 
 as, por onde ireis vos f which way shall you go ? 
 
 Eu passarei por Frdnga, I'll go through France ; 
 por onde passou elle? which way did he go ? 
 
 Por construed with nouns without an article, 
 denotes most times distribution of people, time, and 
 place; and it is Englished by a, or every, before the 
 noun ; as, 
 
 E'lle deu tdnto por cabeca, he gave so much a head. 
 
 Tdnto por soldddo, por anno, por mis, porsemdna, &c. 
 so much a soldier, a year, a month, a week; a razdo 
 de vinte por cento, at the rate of twenty per cent. 
 
 E'lle pede tdnto por legoa, he asks so much a 
 league, or every league. 
 
 Por, between two nouns without an article, or 
 between two infinitives without a preposition, 
 denotes the choice which one makes between two 
 things, alike in their nature, but different in their 
 circumstances ; as, 
 
 Cdsa por cdsa antes quero hta que aquella, since I 
 must have one of these two houses, I like this better 
 than that ; morrer por morrer, melhor he morrer 
 combatendo que fugindo, when a man must die, it is 
 better to die in fighting than in running away. 
 
 Pello meyo is rendered into English by through ; 
 as, pello meyo dos cdmpos, through the fields. 
 
 Por meyo is rendered into English by by ; as, elle 
 alcancou o sen intento por meyo de astugias, he has 
 compassed his ends by devices. 
 
172 PORTUGUESE 
 
 Por turno signifies in o?ie's turn. 
 
 Por before the infinitives is used instead of para 
 by the best Portuguese writers ; and por que instead 
 of para que ; as may be seen particularly in Camoens, 
 Canto 2, Stanza vii. and viii. and in the following 
 example, por nao, or para nao repetir o quejd temos, 
 dtto, not to repeat what we have already said. 
 
 Por is sometimes Englished by for, upon the 
 account of, for sake, &c. as, elle far a isto por amor 
 de vos, he will do this upon your account, or for your 
 sake ; deixarab-o por morto, he was left for dead ; 
 eu tenho-o por meu amigo, 1 take him to be my 
 friend ; todos os homens de bem sao, or estao por elle, 
 all honest people are for him, or are on his side ; por 
 quern me tomais vos P who do you take ine for ? 
 
 We have already observed, that porque without 
 an interrogation signifies because; but it has the 
 same signification in the following sentence, and the 
 like ; porque elle he mentiroso segue-se que tambem 
 eu o seja ; because he is a liar, does it follow there- 
 fore that I am one ? 
 
 Por isto, or por Ssta razao, signifies therefore. 
 
 O porque signifies the reason, the cause, or the 
 subject ; as, sdbe-se o porque P is it known upon 
 what account ? 
 
 Por mbdo de dizer signifies as one may say, if I, 
 or ive, may say, &c. 
 
 Por didnte signifies before ; and por detraz signi- 
 fies behind. 
 
 Por ventura signifies perhaps. 
 
 Pello passddo signifies formerly, in time past, 
 heretofore. 
 
 Por nenhum cdso, by no means. 
 
 Por mar e por terra, by sea and land. 
 
 Hum por hum signifies one by one. 
 
 Por is sometimes Englished by in ; as, e lies sao 
 vinie por todos, they are twenty in all. 
 
 When the verb passdr is followed by por, then the 
 word alto signifies to forget ; as, passdu~lhe aqwllo por 
 
GRAMMAR. 173 
 
 alto, he forgot that; but speaking of goods it sig- 
 nifies to smuggle. 
 
 Por joined with the verb ir signifies to fetch, and 
 seek after ; as, vdipor vinho, go fetch some wine ; vdi 
 pello medico, go see for the physician. 
 
 Por is commonly used before the substantives ; as, 
 por exemplo, for example ; por commodidade, for con- 
 veniency ; por costume, for custom sake ; and many 
 others, that may be learned by use. 
 
 You must observe, that pello serves for the mas- 
 culine, pella for the feminine, and por for both. 
 
 Contra. 
 
 X. Contra (against, contrary to) denotes oppo^ 
 sition ; as, que diz vm ce contra isto P what do you say 
 against this ? It signifies also over against, opposite to. 
 
 Pro e contra signifies in English pro and con. 
 
 Desde. 
 
 XI. Desde denotes both time and place, and enu- 
 meration of things, and is commonly followed in 
 the sentence by the preposition ate (to) ; then desde 
 denotes the term from w hence, and ate that of hither- 
 to ; as, 
 
 Desde o principio ate ofim, from the beginning to 
 the end. 
 
 E'llefoiape desde Windsor ate Londres, he walked 
 from Windsor to London. 
 
 Eu tenho visto todos desde o primeiro ate o ultimo, I 
 have seen them all from the first to the last ; furao 
 todos mbrtos desde o primeiro ate o ultimo, they were 
 all slain to a man. 
 
 Desde a criacao do mundo, from or since the crea- 
 tion. 
 
 Desde o berco, ou infdncia, from the cradle, from 
 a child. 
 
174 PORTUGUESE 
 
 Desde jd, even now ; as, desde jd prevejo, I even 
 now foresee. 
 
 Desde agora, from this time forward. 
 
 Desde entao, from that time ever since. 
 
 Desde que, as soon as, when. 
 
 Desde quandoi how long since, or ago ? 
 
 Rio navegdvel desde o seu nascimento ; a river na- 
 vigable at its very rise. 
 
 AtL 
 
 XII. Ate signifies till, even, to, &c. as yon may 
 see in the following examples. 
 
 Ate onde ? how far ? 
 
 Ate Rdma, as far as Rome. 
 
 Ate quando P till when or how long ? 
 
 Ate que eu viva, as long as I live. 
 
 He hum homem de tarda bonddde, que ate os seus 
 inimigos sao obrigddos a estimdlo, he is so good a man 
 that even his enemies have a value for him. 
 
 Ate os mats vis homem tomdvao a liber ddde de, &c. 
 the very worst of men took such a liberty as to, 
 8$c. 
 
 Ate que, until, till. 
 
 Ate as orelhas, up to the ears. 
 
 Elle vendeo ate a camtsa, he has sold the very 
 shirt off his back. 
 
 Ate agora, or ate aqui, till now, or hitherto. 
 
 Ateaqui (speaking of a place), to this place, hither, 
 so far. 
 
 Ate Id, to that place, so far. 
 
 AtS que isto sefaca, till it be done. 
 
 Ate entao, till then, till that time. 
 
 Ate is also used before an infinitive ; as, gritdr 
 ate enrouquecer, to bawl one's self hoarse. 
 
 Rir ate arrehentdr pellas ilhdrgas, to split one's 
 sides with laughing. 
 
 Ddr de comer a alguem ate arrebentar, to fill, or 
 cram one with victuals till he bursts. 
 
GRAMMAR. 175 
 
 Ate a primeira, till our next meeting, till we 
 
 meet again, 
 
 Por cima. 
 
 XIII. Por cima (above, over), denotes superiority 
 of place ; as, 
 
 Morar por cima da alguem, to live or lodge above 
 somebody. 
 
 A bdlla Ihepassdu por cima da cabeca, the ball went 
 over his head. 
 
 Por cima de tudo, upon the whole. 
 
 Para cima. 
 
 XIV. Paracima (above) denotes superiority of age, 
 and is sometimes put at the end of the sentence ; as, 
 
 Elles alistarao tudos que t'mhao de dez dnnos para 
 cima, they enlisted every body above ten. 
 
 A cima, 
 
 XV. A cima (above) denotes rank, and some 
 moral subjects ; as, 
 
 A cima, delle, above him, or superior to him. 
 
 Estar a cima de tudo, to be above the world. 
 
 Huma mother que esta a cima de tudo, nao se Ihe da 
 do que o mundo diz delta, a woman who is above the 
 public censure, don't care what people say of her. 
 
 Em cima. 
 
 XVI. Em cima (upon) ; as em cima da mesa, upon 
 the table. 
 
 Em cima de tudo isto, or only em cima, signifies 
 and besides all that, over and above all that. 
 
 De cima. 
 
 XVII. De cma, when it is an adverb, signifies 
 from above ; but when a preposition, it is Englished 
 by from, off, ox from off; as, 
 
176 PORTUGUESE 
 
 Tirai aqiiillo de cima da mesa, take that from off 
 the table. 
 
 Elle nunca tirou osseus blhos de cima delta, he never 
 turned his eyes from her. 
 
 Cahir de cima das drvoras, to fall off the trees. 
 
 Debaxo. 
 
 XVIII. The preposition debaxo (under, below, or 
 from under) denotes the time and place ; I say the 
 time of a denomination of a reign, or government ; 
 as, debaxo do imperio de Augusto, under The empire of 
 Augustus. 
 
 Debaxo, as a preposition of place, marks out in- 
 feriority of position ; as, 
 
 Tudo o que ha debaxo dos ceos, all there is under 
 heaven. 
 
 Ter huma almofada debaxo dos jotlhos, to have a 
 cushion under the knees. 
 
 Estar debaxo da chdve, to be under lock and key. 
 
 Debaxo is sometimes rendered into English by 
 upon ; as, affirmar huma causa debaxo de juramento, 
 to swear a thing, to declare upon oath. 
 
 Abaxo. 
 
 XIX. This preposition is rendered into English 
 by under, inferior, or next; as assentou-se abaxo delles, 
 he sat inferior, or under them ; as, assentou-se abaxo 
 de mini ; he sat next, inferior to me, or he was next 
 man to me : abaxo del-reielle he o primeiro, he is the 
 next man to the king. 
 
 This preposition is sometimes put at the end of 
 the following phrases, de telhas abaxo, here below, 
 in this lower world, de cabeca abaxo, headlong. 
 
 Fora. 
 
 XX. Fora (out, without, except, but), denotes 
 exclusion, and exception. It requires generally a 
 genitive before a noun of time, or place; but it 
 governs also the nominative ; as, 
 
GRAMMAR. 177 
 
 For a do reyno, out of the kingdom. 
 
 For a da cidade, out of town. 
 
 For a de tempo, out of season. 
 
 Procurdi-ofora de cdsa, look forhim without doors. 
 
 E'lles sahirab todos, for a dous ou tres, they all 
 went out except, or but, two or three. 
 
 E'lle Ihepermite tudo, for a o ir as assembleas, he 
 indulges her in every thing, but in going to assem- 
 blies. 
 
 E'lle tern todos os poderes, fora o de concluir, he has 
 full powers, except of concluding. 
 
 Fora is sometimes preceded by tad, and then it is 
 to be rendered into English by so far ; as elle est a 
 tao fora de socorrer os seus alliados, que se decldra 
 contra elles, he is so far from assisting his allies, that 
 he declares himself against them. 
 
 Fora is sometimes rendered into English by be- 
 sides ; as, fora daquilles que, &c. besides those that, 
 8§c. and sometimes by beyond; as, fora de medida, 
 beyond measure. 
 
 For a dehor as signifies beyond the hour, or very late. 
 
 For alguem fora da porta, or manddr alguem 
 pella porta fora, to turn one out of doors. 
 
 Defornte or front e. 
 
 This preposition governs the genitive, and signi- 
 fies over against. It is followed by de, do, da, &c. 
 as, 
 
 Def route da sua cdsa esta hum oute'iro, over against 
 his house is a hilL 
 
 Eu estdva defronte delle, I was over against him. 
 
 Sem. 
 
 Sem signifies imthout ; as, 
 Sem dinheiro, without money, 
 Sem duvida, without end. 
 
 Sem dar a entender, or sem fazer conhecer, with- 
 out giving to understand. 
 
 N 
 
178 PORTUGUESE 
 
 Sem metis, nem menos, without any reason or pro- 
 vocation. 
 
 Est a 7 s sem a mo, to be out of place. 
 
 Sem que algum ado precedente possa derrogar o 
 presente, any former act to the contrary of the 
 present notwithstanding. 
 
 Sem governs also the infinitive, which is rendered 
 into English with the participle; as, fallar sem 
 saber, to speak without knowing. 
 
 It is also a conjunction with que, governing the 
 subjunctive ; as, 
 
 Enfada-se sem que Ihe digao nada, he is angry 
 without any body saying any thing to him. 
 
 Nad era euja bastantamente infeliz, semque procu- 
 rasseis de acrescentar a m'mha infelicidade P was I 
 not miserable enough before, but you must still 
 labour to make me more so ? 
 
 Lembro-me sem que me digais, I remember with- 
 out your telling. 
 
 E'lle vird sem que mandem por elle, he will come 
 without sending for. 
 
 Conforme or seguiuk. 
 
 XXIII. Conforme or segundo (according to, con- 
 formable to) govern ■ the nominative, and never 
 the dative as in English : as, 
 
 EI lie foi tratddo conforme o seu merecimento, he 
 was treated according to his deserts. 
 
 Conforme o men parecer, in my judgment, in my 
 opinion. 
 
 In common conversation conforme is used adverb- 
 ially, and Englished as follows : 
 
 I'sso he conforme, or only conforme, it is as it hap- 
 pens ; may be ; may be not ; that is according, 
 
 Conforme a occasiao o pedir, according as there 
 may be need. 
 
 Sobre. 
 
 XXIV. Sobre signifies upon ; as, sabre a mesa> 
 upon the table ; sobre o rh, upon the river. 
 
GRAMMAR. 179 
 
 Sdbre tudo, or sobre todas as cousas, over all, above 
 all, above all things, above any thing, especially ; 
 as, sobre tudo tende cuidado na saude, but, above all 
 things, mind your health. 
 
 P6r alguem sobre si, or dar Ihe o primeiro lugar, 
 to place one above himself. 
 
 Ir sobre huma cidade, to march against a town. 
 
 Ir sobre alguem, to fall, or to rush upon one. 
 
 Ir sobre seguro, to go upon sure grounds. 
 
 Sobre a noite, about or towards the evening. 
 
 Sobre o verde, somewhat green. 
 
 Sdbre a minha palavra, upon my word. 
 
 Sobre palavra, upon parole. 
 
 Mandar carta sobre carta, to send letter upon letter. 
 
 E'lle recebeo a carta sobre o jantdr, he had just 
 dined when he received the letter. 
 
 E'lle dorme sobre o jantdr, he sleeps immediately 
 after dinner. 
 
 Sobre isto, or sobre Sstas cousas, is sometimes 
 Englished by more than that, or besides that; as, 
 
 E'lle roubou-o, e sobre isto matdu-o, he robbed 
 him, and more than that, he killed him. 
 
 Sobre que, is rendered into English by though 
 or although ; as, 
 
 E'ste negbcio sobre que he difficult o so, nabhe impossivel, 
 altho' this is a hard affair, yet it is not impossible. 
 
 Sobre is Englished sometimes by besides ; as, 
 
 Sobre as miserias da guerra, elle teve a disgraga, 
 &c. besides the miseries of the war, he had the 
 misfortune of, fyc. 
 
 Estar sobre si, or andar sobre si, signifies to stand 
 upon one's guard. 
 
 E'u vos escreverei sobre esta materia, I will write 
 to you about this matter. 
 
 Acerca. 
 
 XXV. Acerca, signifies about, as, acerca disto 
 Ihe disse, about this I told him ; acerca de la ir Ihe 
 respond*, about going there I answered him. 
 
 N 2 
 
180 PORTUGUESE 
 
 Per to, junto, ao pe, pegddo. 
 
 XXVI. Perto, (near, by, about)denotes proximity 
 of place and time, and governs the genitive case ; 
 as, aquillo esta muito perto do lume, that is very near 
 the fire ; perto das otto horas, about eight o'clock. 
 
 Perto do rio, near the river. 
 
 Estdmos perto do Natal, we are near Christmas. 
 
 Ao pe requires also the genitive case ; as, 
 
 Assent aivos ao pe de mim, sit down by me, or near 
 me ; ao pe do rio, near the river, &c. 
 
 Note, that junto (near or by) and pegddo (hard 
 by) require the dative case ; as, 
 
 Junto a ciddde, near the town. 
 
 Pegddo ao paldcio, hard by the palace. 
 
 Longe. 
 
 Longe, far, a great way off, governs the genitive, 
 and the particle de, or do, da, &c. as, 
 Longe de cdsa, far from home. 
 Longe daqui, far from hence. 
 
 De longo, or ao longo. 
 
 This preposition requires the genitive case ; as, 
 Ao longo da pray a, along the shore. 
 Ao longo da cbsta, do prddo, &c. along the coast, 
 the meadow, &c. 
 
 Of further Particles. 
 
 Ainda, ainda que,postoque 'or qudndo bem, ainda assim, 
 or com 4 u do. 
 
 Ainda signifies yet ; as, elle ainda nab veyo, he is 
 not come yet. It signifies also even; as, seria ver- 
 gonha ainda o fallar msso, it were a shame even to 
 speak of it ; nem ainda por cem libras, no not for a 
 rfundred pounds. 
 
 Ainda que signifies, though or although ; as, ainda 
 que vos sois mats velho do que elle, though you be 
 older than he ; ainda que assim fdsse though it were 
 so. 
 
GRAMMAR. 181 
 
 Ainda qui, is very often followed by com tudo, 
 yet for all that ; as, ainda que elle nab tivesse neces- 
 sidade disso, com tudo, &c. though he had no need of 
 it, yet, $c. 
 
 Ainda asszm, or com tudo, is sometimes Englished 
 by nevertheless, or for all that ; as, ainda assim sempre 
 ellefoi louvavel, he was praise-worthy for all that. 
 J a desde, j a que and j 'a por que. 
 
 Ja desde is rendered into English by even from; 
 as,jd desde o principio, even from the beginning. 
 
 Ja que signifies since ; as, 
 
 Ja que isso assim he, since it is so. 
 
 The particle que sometimes is not placed imme- 
 diately after ja ; as,jV* ha dous annos que morreo, he 
 died two years since or ago. 
 
 J a ha muito tempo que sahistes de casa, it is a long- 
 time since you went from home. 
 
 Ja por que, is repeated in the same sentence, and 
 then the first is rendered into English by first, be- 
 cause ; and the second by secondly, because ; as, ja 
 por que era cego, ja por que era co,vo, first, because 
 he was blind, and secondly, because he was lame. 
 
 Depois que. 
 
 Depuis que is rendered into English by after ; as 
 Depdis que eu tinha entrado, after I was gone in. 
 
 Com que. 
 
 Com que is only a note either of introduction, or 
 connexion ; as, 
 
 Com que havia hum homem enfermo, &c. now a 
 certain man was sick ; sometimes they add to it 
 the particle assim, and then it is to be rendered into 
 English by and so. 
 
 Ou. 
 
 Ou signifies or, or either ; as, ou bom, ou mao % 
 either good or bad ; metis ou menos, more or less ; 
 ou elle queira ou nab, whether he will or not. 
 
182 PORTUGUESE 
 
 Quer. 
 
 Quer, when a particle, must be repeated, and the 
 first is rendered into English by either or whether, 
 and the second by or ; as, quer elle queira quer nao, 
 whether he will or not ; quer vos o tenhaisfeito } quer 
 nao, whether you have done that, or not. 
 
 Se quer, or ao menos. 
 
 Se quer, or ao menos, Sec. signifies at least, however ; 
 as, se vos nao quereis ser por elle nao sejdis se qair 
 contra elle, if you don't choose to be for him, at least 
 don't oppose him ; dai-lhe se quer com que sustentar- 
 se, give him, however, a subsistence ; o nosso primeiro 
 Jim he de livrarnos de tddos os males, ao menos dos 
 maybres, our chief end is to be freed from all evils ; 
 at least the greatest. 
 
 Nem se quer hum, is rendered into English by 
 never a one, so much, or in the following manner ; as, 
 fdrao tddos mortos, e nem se quer hum escapou, they 
 were all slain to a man. 
 
 Qudndo muito. 
 
 Qudndo muito (at most, at furthest,) is generally 
 used before the nouns of time and price ; as, elle 
 estara aqui dentro em hum mez qudndo muito, he will 
 be here in a month at furthest ; dez libras qudndo 
 muito, ten pounds at most. 
 
 Tdnto. 
 
 Tdnto, so much, is sometimes followed by como, 
 and then it is rendered into English by as well as, 
 as much as, &c. 
 
 A'mo-te tdnto como a mim mesmo, I love thee as 
 well as myself. 
 
 E'lle teme tdnto como qualquer de vos, que Ihe re- 
 sulte algum ddno y he is afraid of harm as much as 
 any of you. 
 
GRAMMAR. 183 
 
 Cuideiqueaestimdsse tdnto comoasi mesmo, I thought 
 he esteemed her, as much as he did himself. 
 
 E'lles vem tdnto de d'ta como de noite, they can see 
 as well by day as by night. 
 
 E'u the tdnto como vos, I had as much as you. 
 
 O'utro tdnto is rendered into English by the double, 
 twice as much, or as much ; as, 
 
 E'u alcancei dutro tdnto mats por isso, I had as 
 much more for it ; eu posso faze r dutro tdnto, I can 
 do as much. 
 
 Tdnto followed by asshn, is a particle merely ex- 
 pletive ; as, 
 
 Tdnto asshn que Ihe posso eu fazer? how can I 
 help it ; vaite, tdnto asshn nao ha nada para ti, go 
 away, here is nothing for you. 
 
 Tdnto ass'im followed by que without an interro- 
 gation, is sometimes rendered by so that, in so much 
 that ; as, tdnto ass'im que elle nao quer ouvir mdis 
 fallar nisso, so that he will hear no more of it. 
 
 Tdnto mdis is followed by que, and Englished by 
 and the more so as ; as, 
 
 E'u estdu prompto para ir com vm ce hum dia destes 
 a comidia, se v?n ce quizer, tdnto mdis que sedeve repre- 
 sents huma nova peca ; I am ready to go with you 
 some day or other to the play, if you'll give me 
 leave ; and the more so, as a new piece is to be acted. 
 
 Tdnto que, or logo que, is rendered into English by 
 as soon as ; as, tdnto que eu o vi, as soon as I saw him. 
 
 Tdnto melhor is rendered into English by so much 
 the better, 
 
 Tdnto is sometimes preceded by com, and followed 
 by que, and is Englished by so, provided that ; as com 
 tdnto que o facais, provided that you do it ; com 
 tdnto que me nao faca mal, so he do me no hurt. 
 
 Tdnto qudnto is Englished by as much as ; as, 
 
 Tdnto qudnto posso, as much as I can. 
 Tao. 
 
 lao, so, is generally followed by como ; as ? 
 
184 PORTUGUESE 
 
 Este naoki tab bom como o outro, this is not so good 
 as the other ; eu sei isso tab bem como vos, I know it 
 ns well as you. 
 
 Tad is sometimes followed by que, and Englished 
 by so, such, to that degree ; as, 
 
 E'lle he tab prudente que nab tern igudl, he is so wise 
 that he has not his equal ; nab sou tab louco que o 
 creya, I am not so simple, or I am not such a fool 
 as to believe it; faz tab grdnde vento que, &c. the 
 wind is so high that, &c. or the wind blows to that 
 degree, &c. 
 
 Como. 
 
 Como, is Englished by as, like, how, &c. as may 
 be seen in the following expressions: 
 
 Como ? how ? 
 
 Dizeime cdmo Ihe hei de fallar P tell me how I 
 may speak to him. 
 
 Como assim ? how so ? 
 
 Cdmo ! what ! 
 
 Como quer que, whereas. 
 
 Como quer que seja, howsoever, in what manner 
 or fashion soever. 
 
 Seja como for, be it as it will. 
 
 Cdmo isto assim he, since it is so. 
 
 Como, as it were, or almost. 
 
 Como se, as if, or even as if; as, como se elles ti- 
 vessem ja vencido, as if they had already over- 
 come. 
 
 Como tambem, as well as. 
 
 Rico como elle he, as rich as he is. 
 
 Como sois men am'tgo, quero, &c. as (or because) 
 you are my friend, FJ1, &c. 
 
 Dizeime o como, tell me how. 
 
 E'u sei como fa zer para que elle venha, I know the 
 way 1 shall take to make him come. 
 
 Como elle la nab esteia, eu irei, provided he is not 
 there, I will come. 
 
GRAMMAR. 185 
 
 Assim. 
 
 Assim, so, thus, is rendered into English as in 
 the following expressions : 
 
 Pois hi assim de vSras? de veras que assim he, is 
 it even so ? it is even so. 
 
 Assim seja, or seja assim, so be it, or be it so. 
 
 Assim hS, it is so. 
 
 Para assim dizer, as it were. 
 
 Assim sdu eu louco, que, &c. I am not so foolish 
 as to, &c. 
 
 Assim Deos me salve, as I hope to be saved. 
 
 Tdnto assim, so that. 
 
 Assim he que vos, &c. is this your way, S$c, 
 
 Assim como assim, after all, nevertheless, or for all 
 that ; as, em vao dilatais a vessa Jornada, assim como 
 assim he preciso que vddes, it is in vain for you to put 
 off your journey, you must go thither nevertheless, 
 or for all that, you must go after all. 
 
 Assim como, as well as, or as soon as. 
 
 Pasta assim por agora thus much for this time. 
 
 Assim na pdz, como na guerra, both in time of 
 peace and war. 
 
 Assim, assim, so so, indifferent. 
 
 Assim queira elle como pode, he can if he will. 
 
 Assim is sometimes preceded by e ; as, e assim que 
 quer isto dizir ? how now ? what do you mean by 
 this ? And sometimes assim is followed by cdmo ; 
 as, assim como o sol eclipsa os outros planetas, da 
 mesma sorte, &c. as the sun eclipses the other pla- 
 nets, so, (§*C. 
 
 &. 
 
 Se, if; as, se elle vier, if he comes ; seme amasses, 
 should you love me ; se elle fosse homem de hour a, 
 were he but an honest man : se soubissem quern eu 
 sou, todos diriao, &c. were it told who I am, every 
 one would say, &c. se he verdade que, &c. if so be 
 that, 8$c. 
 
 The reciprocal verbs, as well as those that are 
 
186 PORTUGUESE 
 
 used impersonally, may have two se se joined toge- 
 ther ; as, se se for, if he goes away ; se se fdlla nisso, 
 if they speak to it. 
 
 Se is sometimes rendered into English by whether ; 
 and when it is repeated, the second is Englished by 
 or ; as, 
 
 Quisera sober se a culpa h6 nossa, se vossa, I would 
 know whether it is our fault or yours. 
 
 Alias, 
 
 Alias is sometimes rendered into English by 
 else ; as, enirdi, porque alias fecharei a porta, come 
 in, or else I'll shut the door ; porque alias seriao os 
 vossos filhos immundos, else were your children un- 
 clean. And sometimes it is rendered into English 
 by otherwise, in other things, or respects. 
 
 Embora. 
 
 Embora is rendered into English by pros- 
 perously, auspiciously ; but sometimes it is a par- 
 ticle merely expletive, and answers to the Italian 
 pure : as, dizei muito embora o que quizerdes, say what 
 you please : the Italian says, dite pur quel che vipidce. 
 
 Muito embora seja assim, well, let it be so. 
 
 Embora is sometimes Englished by away ; as, 
 vaite embora, go away. 
 
 Soldo. 
 
 Sendo signifies if not, did not, were it not that, but 
 that ; as, 
 
 Sendo tivesse medo de meu pay, but that I fear my 
 father. 
 
 Se elle nao tivesse vergdnha de confessar, but that 
 he was ashamed to confess. 
 
 The following expressions, in which they make 
 use of this particle, may be Englished by but, for, 
 and some other variations. 
 
 Se nao fdsse por elle, but for him, or had it not 
 been for him, or had he not been. 
 
GRAMMAR. 187 
 
 Senao fosse por vos, had you not been, or had it 
 not been for you, without you, without your help, 
 hindrance, &c. 
 
 Senao fosse por mim, elle morreria defome, were it 
 not for rne, he would starve. 
 
 Senao is sometimes Englished by but : as, nem elles 
 tern outro intento, senao, &c. nor do they aim at any 
 thing else but, &c. 
 
 Ninguem disse assim senao Cicero, nobody said so 
 but Cicero. 
 
 Senao may be also expressed by mais que in the 
 following sentence, and the like : 
 
 Elle nao faz senao jogdr, or elle nao faz mais que 
 jogar, he does nothing but play. 
 
 Nad, nao porque. 
 
 Nao, not, or no, when followed by porque, is 
 Englished by not that, not but that; as, nao porque 
 Ihefalt sse engenho, not but that he had wit ; nao por- 
 que nao fosse justo, mas porque, &c. not but that it 
 was right, but because, &c. nao porque a cdusa seja 
 impossivel mas porque, &c. not that the thing is pos- 
 sible, but because, &c. 
 
 Tambem, or outrosi. 
 
 Tambem, or outrosi, signifies also, too, likewise; as, 
 v 6s assim o quereis e eu tambem, you will have it so, 
 and I too. 
 
 Para que, porquL 
 
 See the prepositions para and por. 
 
 PSis. 
 
 This particle is very much used by the Portuguese, 
 and is rendered into English several ways, as in 
 the following examples : 
 
 Pois ide, e vmde logo, go, then, and come back 
 presently. 
 
 Pois nao sou eu capaz de fazillo ? what, am I not 
 capable of doing it? 
 
18S PORTUGUESE 
 
 Pais, or pais entao que quer dizer isto ? Well, and 
 what of all this P 
 
 Pais, or pais entao que hei de fazer ? What shall 
 I do then ? 
 
 Pais eu digo que elle estd dcntro, why, he is here 
 within, I say. 
 
 Puis por que me vigidis? Why, then, do you watch 
 me ? 
 
 E'lle tern cabeca ; puis tambem hum alfineie a tern, 
 he has got a head, and so has a pin. 
 
 Pois before nao, and preceded by an interroga- 
 tion, denotes a strong assertion, and is Englished by 
 without doubt, yes, surely, to besiwe, &c. as, vird elle? 
 p6is nao ! will he come ? yes, to be sure. 
 
 Antes, or mdis depressa. 
 
 These particles are sometimes rendered into Eng- 
 lish by rather or sooner ; as, antes or mdis depressa 
 quizera morrer, I would rather die ; antes quizera 
 viver so que na vbssa-companhia, I would sooner live 
 alone than be in your company. Sometimes antes 
 is Englished by before ; as, Tde-vos antes que elle 
 venha, go away before he comes ; antes que eu morra, 
 before I die. 
 
 Mas antes, pelo contrario, mas pelo contrdrio. 
 These particles are rendered into English by on 
 the contrary, on the other hand, nay ; as, mas antes, 
 mas pelo contrdrio, or pelo contrdrio isto he muito dif- 
 ferente, nay, it is quite another thing ; mas antes, pelo 
 contrdrio, &c. elle he avarento, nay, or on the con- 
 trary, he is a covetous man. 
 
 Para melhor dizer. 
 This phrase is rendered into English by nay ; as, 
 elle tern jd bastdnte, ou para melhor dizer, mdis do 
 necessdrio, he has already enough, nay, too much ; 
 a isto he que nos chamdmos direito das gentes, ou para 
 melhor dizer , da razdb, this is what we call the law of 
 
GRAMMAR. 189 
 
 nations, which may be called more properly the law 
 of reason. 
 
 Que. 
 
 We have already observed that que is a particle 
 which most conjunctions are composed of; as, ainda 
 que, although ; de sbrte que, so that, fyc. 
 
 The particle que sometimes is the sign of the third 
 persons of the imperative, as let in English ; as, que 
 falle, let him speak ; que riao, let them laugh. 
 
 Que is used between two verbs, to determine and 
 specify the sense of the first, as eu vos asseguro que 
 assim he, I assure you that it is so; duvido que asszm 
 seja, I doubt whether it is so or not. 
 
 Que is used also after hora in the beginning of a 
 sentence, and followed by a verb in the subjunctive, 
 to denote by exclamation one's surprise, aversion, 
 and reluctance to something ; in which case there is 
 a verb grammatically understood before que; as, 
 hora que se esquecesse elle de si mesmo ! I wonder, or 
 is it possible for him to have forgot himself! 
 
 The exclamation, or admiration, is sometimes 
 expressed without any verb ; as, que gosto ; e ao 
 mesmo tempo, que pena ! how much pleasure and 
 trouble at once ! 
 
 Que is sometimes repeated ; as, 
 
 Que bellos livros que tendes, what fine books you 
 have got ; que bella que he a virtude! how beautiful 
 is virtue ! 
 
 Que is sometimes followed by de; as, quede loucos 
 ha no mundol how many fools there are in the world. 
 
 Que is used after nouns denoting time, and is 
 sometimes Englished by when or since, &c. and 
 sometimes left out ; as, 
 
 O dia que ellepartio, the day when he set out. 
 
 Qudnto tempo ha que estais em Londres ? how long 
 have you lived in London ? 
 
 Ha dez dnnos quefaz a mesma cdusa, he has done 
 the same thing these ten years. 
 
190 PORTUGUESE 
 
 H& dez dnnos que morrio, he died ten years ago. 
 
 Que is sometimes rendered into English by 
 because, as in Camoens, canto 2, stanza xvi. que 
 levemente hum ammo, and sometimes by that, to the 
 end that) in order to ; as in, ibid, stanza xvii. que cdmo 
 vissem, que no rio, &c. 
 
 Que before se in the beginning of a sentence, is a 
 redundancy not expressed in English ; as, que se vos 
 dizeis que, if you say that, &c. 
 
 Que is used after the conjunction a perns (scarcely 
 or hardly), and is Englished by but; as, arenas 
 acabou de fallar, que logo morreo ; he had scarcely 
 done speaking, but he expired. 
 
 Que sometimes is preceded by de sbrte, de maneira, 
 
 de geito, and then it is Englished by so that, in such 
 
 a manner, insomuch that ; as, eu ofarei de sorte que 
 
 Jiqueis cont ente, I will do it so that, or in that 
 
 manner that, you shall be contented. 
 
 De veras, 
 De vSras signifies in earnest ; but sometimes it 
 is Englished by no sure ; de veras ; nao oposso cre'r, 
 no sure ! 
 
 Hora. 
 Hbra, or or a, is an interjection that serves to en* 
 courage, as we have seen above ; but when it is 
 repeated, it is Englished by sometimes, one while, 
 another while ; as, bra esta bem, bra esta mal, some- 
 times he is well, sometimes ill, elle bra esta de hum 
 parecer, e bra de outro, he is now of one opinion, 
 and next moment of another. Por or a, signifies 
 now, for the present. 
 
GRAMMAR. 101 
 
 CHAP. VIII. 
 
 OF THE PORTUGUESE ORTHOGRAPHY AND FIRST 
 OF CAPITALS AND STOPS. 
 
 I. PROPER names, as well as surnames, always 
 begin with a capital. 
 
 II. The names of nations, kingdoms," and pro- 
 vinces, also begin with a capital ; as, France z^ 
 French ; Inglez, English, &c. 
 
 III. All names of dignities, and degrees, and 
 honours, require a capital ; as, Rey, Bispo, &c. 
 King, Bishop, &c. 
 
 IV. At the beginning of a period, as well as of 
 a verse, the first letter is always a capital. 
 
 V. The names of arts and sciences, as well as 
 those of kindred, begin with a capital. 
 
 Of Stops. 
 
 The use of stops, or points, is to distinguish words 
 and sentences. 
 
 The Portuguese have six stops, or pauses, viz. 
 
 1. The panto find', the same as our period or full 
 stop (.), and is used at the end of a period, to show 
 that the sentence is completely finished. 
 
 2. The dous pantos, which is our colon (:), and 
 is the pause made between two members of a 
 period ; that is, when the sense is complete, but the 
 sentence not ended. 
 
 3. The ponto e vzrgula, is our semicolon (;), and 
 denotes that short pause which is made in the sub- 
 division of the members or parts of a sentence. 
 
 4. The panto de inter rogacdm, the point of inter- 
 rogation thus (?). 
 
 5. Ponto de admiracdm, the point of admiration, 
 thus (!). 
 
 6. The vzrgala, the same with our comma (,) 
 and is the shortest pause or resting, in speech, being 
 
192 PORTUGUESE 
 
 used chiefly to distinguish nouns, verbs, and ad- 
 verbs, as also the parts of a shorter sentence. 
 
 The conjunction e, the relative qual, and the dis- 
 junctions ou and nem, require a comma before them. 
 
 The Portuguesem ake use also of a parenthesis, 
 thus ( ) ; but they do not make use of the diaeresis, 
 called by their printers crema (••); they use also 
 the dngulo, thus a, called by the printers caret. 
 
 The apostrophe, or, as they call it, viracento, is 
 used in this as in other languages, being designed 
 only for the more pleasant and easy pronunciation, 
 of words, by cutting off an antecedent vowel ; as 
 d' armaS) d' elvas, and not ddrmas, delvas, &c. 
 Although this is allowable in cases wherein, 
 by use, they seem to be one word ; as, nesta, neste, 
 desta, deste, nalgum, daquelle, nelle, nella, daqut, 
 dali, atequi, ategora ; and not em elle, de elle, &c. 
 
 Of the Accents. 
 
 The accent is a sound of the voice by which we 
 pronounce some syllables shorter, others longer. 
 
 I intend to speak here only of the accents the 
 Portuguese ought to make use of, according to 
 Maduretra^ in his Portuguese Orthography. 
 
 The Portuguese indeed are acquainted with three 
 accents, but they ought to make use of two only, 
 namely, the acute, which descends from the right 
 to the left ('), and the circumflex, thus (t). 
 
 1. The acute serves to prolong the pronuncia- 
 tion, and is put, according to Madureira, on the 
 last syllable of the third person singular of the 
 future tense ; as, amard, lerd, &c. 
 
 2. On the penultima of the preterplu perfect tense 
 of the indicative mood ; as, amara, ensinara, &c. 
 
 3. The acute accent ought to be put also on 
 the penultima of the third persons of the present 
 tense of the verb renunciar, pronuncidr, duviddr, &c. 
 thus renuncia, pronuncia, duvida 7 &c. that they may 
 
GRAMMAR. 193 
 
 be distinguished from the nouns renuncia,pronuncia, 
 duvida, &c. The same accent is also put on estd, 
 )i6> to distinguish them from esta, this, and no, in the. 
 
 The vowel o has two sounds, according to the 
 two accents that may be put on it ; one open, when 
 it is marked with the acute accent, and is pro- 
 nounced like o in store; the other close, when it is 
 marked, with the circumflex accent, and then is 
 pronounced like u in stumble. 
 
 There are many nouns, both substantive and 
 adjective, which are accented in the singular with 
 the circumflex, and in the plural with the acute; 
 and the adjectives that have two terminations, 
 particularly those ending in oso, osa, must be 
 accented Tin the singular) with the circumflex in the 
 masculine, and with the acute in the feminine ; as, 
 
 F6go\ fire ; plural, fogos. 
 
 For no 9 oven ; plural, fornos. 
 
 olho, eye ; plural, olhos. 
 
 6vo, egg ; plural, ovos. 
 
 6sso 9 bone ; plural, qssos. 
 
 Poco, well ; plural, pcgos. 
 
 P6rco 9 hog ; plura.1, porcos. 
 
 Rogo, prayer; plural, rogos. And so fojo, torno, 
 formdso, sequioso, supposto> povo, tor to, tort a, copioso, 
 &c. 
 
 The following keep the circumflex accent in 
 both numbers: bolo, bolos ; bdjo, bojos ; boto, botos ; 
 coco, cocos ; choro, choros ; coto, cdtos ; forro, fdrros ; 
 gordo, gordos ; gosto, gostos ; gozo, gozos ; lobo, Ubos ; 
 moco, mogos ; nojo, nojos ; potro, potros ; tolo, tdlos ; 
 f err olho, f err olhos; raposo\ rapdsos ; arroz, arrozes; 
 algoz, algozes, &c. 
 
 On the contrary, the following keep the acute 
 accent in both numbers : cbpo, copos ; mbdo, modos ; 
 nosso, nossos ; vosso, vossos, &c. 
 
 When the circumflex accent is put on the e, then 
 the e is pronounced like the French masculine e; 
 but when e is accented with the acute accent, then 
 
 O 
 
194 PORTUGUESE 
 
 the c is to be pronounced like the e open in French, 
 and it is exceedingly sonorous and long. See the 
 pronunciation of the vowel e. 
 
 Nouns ending in ax, iz, oz uz, must have the 
 acute accent on the vowel before the z ; as, rapaz, 
 a boy; noz, a walnut; alcacuz, licorice; but you 
 must except arroz, rice ; algoz, a hang-man. 
 
 Nouns ending in ez generally have the circumflex 
 accent ; as mez, a month ; marquez, a marquis, &c. 
 except the surnames ; as, Alvarez, Antunez, Lopez, 
 Henriquez, Gongalvez, Rodriguez, Perez, Nunez, 
 Tellez, &c. 
 
 Some Observations upon the Portuguese 
 Orthography. 
 
 Both the Portuguese orthographers and best au- 
 thors vary so much in their rules and ways of writ- 
 ing, that it is impossible for any grammarian to clear 
 up this part of the Portuguese grammar, it requiring 
 no less authority than that of the Royal Portuguese 
 Academy. However, not totally to set -aside so 
 material a part of the Grammar, I shall present the 
 learner with the following^observations : 
 
 I. When the Latin words from which the Portu- 
 guese are derived, begin with a b, the Portuguese 
 likewise must begin with it; therefore you must 
 write and pronounce the b, in the following words, 
 bom, bondade, bem, bento, &c. because they are de- 
 rived from bonus, bonitas, &c. But you must except 
 balnha, bexiga, bairro, which begin with aZ>, though 
 they are derived from vagina, vesica, vicus. 
 
 II. Likewise if the Latin words begin with a' \v, 
 the Portuguese words derived from them must also 
 begin with it ; as vida, viver, varrer, ver, vinho, &c. 
 from vita, viver e, verrere videre, vinum, Sec. 
 
 Though b ought to be pronounced only by closing 
 the lips, and v by touching the superior teeth with 
 the inferior lips ; yet, by a certain affinity between 
 
GRAMMAR. 195 
 
 these two letters, in speaking there is a great confu- 
 sion in the pronunciation of them in the province 
 of E ntre Douro e Minho: and this confusion has 
 not been peculiar to the Portuguese language, for 
 Nebriva says, in his Castilian Orthography, that 
 in his time some Spaniards could hardly make 
 any distinction between these two Letters. 
 
 III. Thep found in some words originally Latin, 
 is changed in Portuguese into a b ; as, cdbra, cabello, 
 cabega, &c. from capra, capillus, caput, &c. 
 
 IV. The Portuguese generally make use of the y 
 in the following words : ay, rey, frey, ley, may, 
 pay, mayo, meyo, and some others. 
 
 Bluteau says, that we must make use of the y in 
 words having a Greek origin ; as, sy'llaba, Chryso- 
 peia, pyr amide, polygono, hydrographia, hydropico, 
 phy'sica, hyperbole, hypocrita, Apocrypho, Sec. 
 
 V. The ph are used by the Portuguese in some 
 words taken from the Greek : as philosophia, philo- 
 logia, Philadelphia, epitdphio, &c. 
 
 VI. The r in Portuguese has two pronunciations, 
 one soft, expressed by a single r as in arado, a 
 plough; and after the consonants, b, c, d,f,g,p, t ; 
 and another hard, in which two rr are used ; as in 
 bdrro, cdrro, &c. But you must observe, 
 
 1. That in the beginning of a word two rr must 
 never be used, because then the r is always pro- 
 nounced hard in Portuguese ; as in the words remo, 
 rico, rodd, Sec. 
 
 2. When the consonants /, n, s, are before the r, 
 either in a single word, or a compound one, this 
 letter must never be doubled, because then its sound 
 is always strong ; as in abalrodr, enriquecer, honra, 
 desregrddo, Henrique, Israelita, Sec. 
 
 3. The r after a b, is also pronounced hard in 
 compounds with the prepositions ab, ob, sub, and 
 yet is not doubled ; as in abrogdr,obrepgao subrepgao, 
 
 VII. The s is never doubled in the beginning 
 of words, nor after the consonants ; therefore you 
 
 o 2 
 
106 PORTUGUESE 
 
 must write sardr, saber, falsamente, falso, manso, 
 &c. 
 
 The s is pronounced like z between two vowels, 
 in words derived from the Latin, as well as in those 
 that end in dsa, and 6so ; as miisa, cdso, riso, amoroso, 
 cuidaduso, cdsa, &c. You must also observe, that coser, 
 signifies to sew, but cozer signifies to boil or bake. 
 
 VIII. Th are generally used in words derived from 
 the Greek ; as amphitheatro, atheista, theologo, le- 
 thdrgo, methodo, &c. 
 
 Th is also used in the Portuguese preposition 
 athe ; though some write it thus, ate. 
 
 IX. When pt is found in Latin words, it must be 
 kept in the Portuguese derived from them ; as, apto, 
 inepto, optimo, &c. from aptus, ineptus, optimus, &c. 
 The same must be observed in regard to ct. 
 
 X. Ch is sounded like k, in words derived from 
 the Greek ; as, orchdnjo, archiduque, Chrysostomo, 
 chrysol, chrisblogo, Christovao, monarchic &c. These 
 words must be written with ch, in order to preserve 
 to the eye their etymology. 
 
 Note, that ch in words that are not derived from 
 the Greek is pronounced like sh in the English 
 words shawl, shoot, &c. but as some confound the 
 ch with the x, and begin with x those words that 
 should begin with ch, I have thought it necessary to 
 make a collection of them. 
 
 WORDS BEGINNING WITH 
 
 CHA. 
 
 CM 
 
 Chaa 
 
 Chaca 
 
 Chacina 
 
 Chago 
 
 Chacota 
 
 Chafariz 
 
 Chaga 
 
 Chalupa 
 
 Chama 
 
 Chamalote 
 
 Chanc^oneta 
 
 Chamar 
 
 Chanqueta 
 
 Chamariz 
 
 Chantagera 
 
 Chambao 
 
 Chantrado 
 
 Chamejar 
 
 Chantre 
 
 Chamiga 
 Chamine 
 
 Cha 
 Chapa 
 
 Chamuscar 
 
 Chapado 
 
 Chan^a 
 
 Chapeado 
 
 Chancela 
 
 Chapeleta 
 
 Chancelaria 
 
 Chap6o 
 
 Chanceler 
 
 Chapim 
 
GRAMMAR, 
 
 197 
 
 Chapinhar 
 
 Chibo 
 
 Chofrado 
 
 Chapuz 
 
 Chicharos 
 
 Ch6fre 
 
 Charamela 
 
 Chicharro 
 
 Ch61dab61da 
 
 Charameleiro 
 
 Chichelos 
 
 Choque 
 
 Charco 
 
 Chicoria 
 
 Chorar 
 
 Charneca 
 
 Chicote 
 
 Chorrilho 
 
 Charneira 
 
 Chifra 
 
 Chorro 
 
 Char61a 
 
 Chifrar 
 
 Chover 
 
 Charpa 
 
 Chjfre 
 
 Choupa 
 
 Charro 
 
 Chilindrao 
 
 Choupana 
 
 Charrua 
 
 Chilrar 
 
 Choupo, or Chopo 
 
 Chasco 
 
 Chimbeo 
 
 Chourico 
 
 Chasona 
 
 Chinear 
 
 Choutar 
 
 Chatim 
 
 Chincheiro 
 
 
 Chato 
 
 Chinchorro 
 
 CHIT. 
 
 Chavao 
 
 Chinela 
 
 Chiica 
 Chupamel 
 Chupar 
 Chuchurriar 
 
 Chavascal 
 
 Chave 
 
 Chavalha 
 
 Chiqueiro 
 
 Chispa 
 
 Chispar 
 
 Chaveta 
 
 Chiste 
 
 Chuco 
 Chufa 
 
 Chavinha 
 
 Chita 
 
 CHE. 
 
 CHO. 
 
 Chumago 
 
 Chea, or Cheya 
 Chefe 
 
 Choca 
 
 Choca 
 _ Chocalhar 
 " Chocalho 
 
 Chocar 
 
 Chocarrear 
 
 Chocarrice 
 
 Chumbar 
 Chumbo 
 
 Chegar 
 
 Cheriar, and its de- 
 rivatives. 
 Cherivia 
 Cherne. 
 
 Churriao 
 
 Churume 
 
 Chusma 
 
 Chuva 
 
 Chuveiro. 
 
 CHI. 
 
 Chiar 
 
 Choco 
 Chocos 
 
 CHY. 
 
 Chibarro 
 
 Chocolate 
 
 Chy'pre. 
 
 The following 
 
 words begin 
 
 with ce and not se. 
 
 Cea 
 
 Cedela 
 
 Cegar 
 
 Ceado 
 
 Cedenho 
 
 C%o 
 
 Cear 
 
 Ceder 
 
 Cegonha 
 
 CEB. 
 
 Cedilho 
 
 Cegude 
 
 Cebola 
 
 Cebolal 
 
 Cebolinho 
 
 Cedo 
 
 Cedro 
 
 Cedula 
 
 Cegueira 
 
 CEI. 
 
 Ceifa 
 
 CED. 
 
 CEG, 
 
 Ceifao 
 
 Cedavim 
 
 Cesa 
 
 Ceirao 
 
 
198 
 
 PORTUGUESE 
 
 Ceirmha 
 
 Centeal 
 
 Cerracao 
 
 Ceivar. 
 
 Centesimo 
 
 Cerrar 
 
 
 Centeyo 
 
 Cerralheiro 
 
 
 Cento 
 
 Cerralho 
 
 CEL. 
 
 Centoculo 
 
 Cerrarse 
 
 
 Centopea 
 
 Cerro 
 
 Celada 
 
 Central 
 
 C6rta 
 
 Celebracao 
 
 Centro 
 
 Certo 
 
 Celebrar 
 
 Centuplo 
 
 Certaa 
 
 Celebre 
 
 Centuria 
 
 Certeza 
 
 Celeste 
 
 Centuriao 
 
 Certida 
 
 Celestial 
 
 Ceo 
 
 Certificar 
 
 Celestrina 
 
 CEP. 
 
 Cerva 
 
 Celeusma 
 
 Cepa 
 Cepilho 
 Cepo 
 Ceptro 
 
 Cerval 
 
 Celga 
 
 Cerveja 
 
 Celha 
 
 Cervilhas 
 
 Celho 
 
 Cerviz 
 
 Celibado 
 
 Ceruda 
 
 Celibato 
 
 CER. 
 
 Ceruleo 
 
 Celicola 
 
 Cera 
 
 Cervo 
 
 Celidonia 
 
 Ceraferario 
 
 Cerzir. 
 
 eaia 
 
 Cerbero 
 
 CES. 
 
 Celleiro 
 
 Cerca 
 
 Cesar 
 Cesarea 
 
 Celleireiro 
 Celtas. 
 
 Cercado 
 Cercar 
 
 CEM. 
 
 Cem 
 Cemiterio. 
 
 Cercador / 
 
 Cercadura 
 
 Cerce 
 
 Cesma 
 
 Cesmaria 
 
 Cesmeiro 
 
 CEN. 
 
 Cerceado 
 
 \J%Z&tjCkKJ 
 
 Cenaculo 
 
 Cercear 
 
 Cessacao 
 
 Cessar 
 
 Cesta 
 
 Ceno 
 
 Cercillo 
 
 Cenobio 
 Cenobitico 
 
 Cerco 
 Cerdoso 
 
 Cestinha 
 Cp^tinno 
 
 Cenotaphia 
 
 Cerebro 
 
 Cesteiro 
 
 Cenoura 
 
 Cereijas 
 
 Cesto 
 
 Cenrada 
 
 Cercijal 
 
 Cesura 
 
 Cenreira 
 
 Ceremonia 
 
 
 Censo 
 
 Ceremonial 
 
 CEV 
 
 Censor 
 
 Cerieiro 
 
 Ceva 
 
 Censura 
 
 Cernc 
 
 Cevada 
 
 Censurado 
 
 Cernelha 
 
 Cevadal 
 
 Censurar 
 
 Cerol 
 
 Cevadeira 
 
 Centauro 
 
 Ceroulas 
 
 Cevadouro 
 
 Centena 
 
 Cerqueiro 
 
 Cevar 
 
GRAMMAR. 
 
 199 
 
 Cezao 
 
 CEZ. 
 
 Cezimbar. 
 
 N. B. Cerrar signifies to shut, or shut up ; but 
 serrar signifies to saw, to cut timber or other mat- 
 ter with a saw. 
 
 The following words must have ci, and not si, in 
 their beginning. 
 
 CIA. 
 
 Ciarse 
 Ciatica. 
 
 CIB. 
 
 Ciba 
 
 Cibalho 
 
 Ciborio. 
 
 cic. 
 
 Cicatriz 
 
 Cicero 
 
 Cicioso. 
 
 CID. 
 
 Cidadao 
 
 Cidadaos 
 
 Cidade 
 
 Cidadoa 
 
 Cidra 
 
 Cidrada 
 
 Cidrao 
 
 Cidreifa. 
 
 cie. 
 
 Ciencia 
 
 CIF 
 
 Cifar 
 Cifra 
 Cifrar. 
 
 CIG, 
 
 Cigana 
 
 Cigano 
 
 Cintura 
 
 Cigarra 
 
 Cinza 
 
 Cigude 
 
 Cinzento 
 
 Cigurelha 
 
 Cinzeiro 
 
 CIL.' 
 
 CIO. 
 
 Cilada 
 
 Cio 
 
 Cilhas 
 
 Cioso 
 
 CilMr 
 
 Ciosa. 
 
 Cilicia 
 
 
 Cilicio 
 
 CIP. 
 
 Cilladas 
 
 Cip6 
 
 
 Cipreste 
 
 CIM. 
 
 Cipriano. 
 
 Cima 
 
 
 Cimalha 
 
 CIR. 
 
 Clmbalo 
 
 Ciranda 
 
 Cirri eyra 
 
 Cirandagem 
 
 Cimento 
 
 Cirandar 
 
 Cimitarra 
 
 Circo 
 
 Cimo. 
 
 Circulacao 
 Circular 
 
 CIN. 
 
 Circulo 
 
 Cinca 
 
 Circuito 
 
 Cincar 
 
 Circumcidar 
 
 Cincho 
 
 Circumcisao 
 
 Cinco 
 
 Circumferencia 
 
 Cincoenta 
 
 Circumspecto 
 
 Cingidouro 
 
 Circumspeccao 
 
 Cingir 
 
 Circumstancia 
 
 Cingulo 
 
 Circumstantes 
 
 Cinnamomo 
 
 Cirio 
 
 Cinta 
 
 Cirurgia 
 
 Cintillar 
 
 Cirurgiao 
 
200 
 Cirzir 
 
 PORTUGUESE 
 
 CIS. 
 
 Ciscar 
 
 Cisco 
 
 Cisma 
 
 Cismatico 
 
 Cisne 
 
 Cisterciense 
 
 Cisterna 
 
 CIT. 
 
 Citacao 
 
 Citado 
 
 Citar 
 
 Citerior 
 
 Cithara 
 
 Githaredo 
 
 Citrino 
 
 civ. 
 
 Civel 
 Civil 
 Civilidade. 
 
 ciu. 
 
 Chime 
 Ciumes. 
 
 Cizania 
 Cizirao. 
 
 ciz, 
 
 XL No Portuguese word begins with go; but, ac- 
 cording to Madureira, there are some that begin 
 with ca, and gu ; as gapdtOn gapateiro, gargago^ guja, 
 cugidade, gumo, gurra, gurrar, and some others. 
 
 The g is used after p in those Portuguese words 
 that have in their Latin root pt ; as descripgao, ac- 
 cepgao, &c. from description accept to, &c. 
 
 Of Double Letters. 
 
 It is to be generally observed, that the consonants 
 are doubled in those Portuguese words, whose Latin 
 roots have likewise the same double consonants ; as 
 accelerdr, accento, occidente, Sec. from acceiero, ac- 
 centus, occidenSn &c. affiigir.affluencianaffirmagadn &c. 
 from qffligo, affluentia, affirmation &c. as will be seen 
 in the following collection ; 
 
 B 
 
 Is to be doubled in abbade, abbacial, abbad/a, ab- 
 badesscin abbreviaturan dbbreviar 7 and some others. 
 
 Is to be doubled in the following words, and 
 some of their derivatives. 
 
 Abstraccao 
 
 Ac£a5 
 
 Accento 
 
 Accentual* 
 Accepcao 
 
 Acceita 
 
 Acceitacao 
 Acceitador 
 Acceitar 
 
Accessao 
 
 Accessivel 
 
 Aceesso 
 
 Accessorio 
 
 Accidental 
 
 Accidente 
 
 Accelerada 
 
 Accelerado 
 
 Accelerar 
 
 Acclama^ao 
 
 Acclamar 
 
 Accommoda^ao 
 
 Accomodado 
 
 Accommodar 
 
 Accuriiula9ao 
 
 Accumulado 
 
 Accumular 
 
 Accusacao 
 
 Accusado 
 
 Accusador 
 
 Accusar 
 
 Accusativo 
 
 Adstric^ao 
 
 Afflic^ao 
 
 Attrac9ao. 
 
 Baccho 
 
 Bocca 
 
 Boccaca 
 
 Boccadinho 
 
 Boccado 
 
 Boccal. 
 
 Circumspec^ao 
 
 Coac9ao 
 
 Coc9ao 
 
 Collec9ao 
 
 Constric9ao 
 
 Construc9ao 
 
 Contrac9ao 
 
 Correc9ao 
 
 Decoc9ao 
 
 GRAMMAR. 
 
 Deduc9ao 
 
 Desjec9ao 
 
 Desoccupa9ao 
 
 Desoccupado 
 
 Desoccupar 
 
 Detrac9ao 
 
 Dic9ao 
 
 Diccionario 
 
 Direc9ao 
 
 Distrac9ao 
 
 201 
 
 Eccentrico 
 
 Ecclesiastico 
 
 Erec9ao 
 
 Evic9ao 
 
 Exac9ao 
 
 Extrac9ao 
 
 Eac9ao 
 Fic9ao 
 Frac9ao 
 
 Impeccabilidade 1 
 
 Impeccavel 
 
 Inaccessivel 
 
 I ndic9ao 
 
 Induc9ao 
 
 Infec9ao 
 
 Infrac9ao 
 
 Inspec9ao 
 
 Instmc9ao 
 
 Intellec9ao 
 
 Interjec9ao 
 
 Intersec9ao 
 
 Introduc9ao. 
 
 Maimduc9ao 
 
 Objec9ao 
 
 Obstruc9ao 
 
 Occasiao 
 
 Occasional* 
 
 Occaso 
 
 Occidental 
 
 Occidente 
 
 Occiduo 
 
 Occisao 
 
 Occurrer 
 
 Occultamente 
 
 Occultado 
 
 Occultar 
 
 Occulto 
 
 Occupa9ao 
 
 Occupado 
 
 Occupar 
 
 Occurrencia 
 
 Occurrente. 
 
 Peccado 
 
 Peccador 
 
 Peccadora 
 
 Peccante 
 
 Peccar 
 
 Predic9ao 
 
 Preoccupar 
 
 Produc9ao 
 
 Projec9ao 
 
 Profec9ao 
 
 Putrefac9ao. 
 
 Barefac9ao 
 
 Recondac9ao 
 
 Refec9ao 
 
 Befrac9ao 
 
 Besecca9ao 
 
 Bestric9ao 
 
 Satisfac9ao 
 
 Seccar 
 
 Secco 
 
 Sec9ao 
 
 Seccura 
 
 Socco 
 
202 
 
 PORTUGUESE 
 
 Soccorrer 
 
 Successivel 
 
 Transac^ao 
 
 Soccorro 
 
 Successor 
 
 Tradacgao 
 
 Subtrac9ao 
 
 Succintamente 
 
 
 Succeder 
 
 Succinto 
 
 
 Successao 
 
 Succo 
 
 Vacca 
 
 Successo 
 
 Succoso 
 
 Vaccada 
 
 Successivo 
 
 Succubo. . 
 
 Vaccum. 
 
 D. 
 
 This letter is doubled in the following words 
 addigao, addicionado^ addiciondr, additamento, additar 
 
 Is to be doubled in 
 
 Affabilidade 
 
 Affeminado 
 
 Affirmadamente 
 
 Affavel 
 
 Affeminarse 
 
 Affirmador 
 
 Affadigado 
 
 Afferradamente 
 
 Affirmar 
 
 Affadigar 
 
 Afferrado 
 
 Affistularse 
 
 Affagado 
 
 Afferrar 
 
 Affixar. 
 
 Affagar 
 
 Afferretoado 
 
 
 Affagos 
 Affamado 
 
 Afferetoar 
 Afferrolhado 
 
 Afflamarse 
 
 Afflic9a5 
 
 Afflicto 
 
 Affligir 
 
 Affluencia 
 
 ■3 
 
 Affaraarse 
 
 Afferrolhar 
 
 Affastado 
 
 Afferventado 
 
 Affastar 
 Affazendado 
 
 Afferventar 
 Affervorado 
 
 Affazerse. 
 
 Affervorar. 
 
 Affocinhar 
 
 Affeado 
 
 Affiado 
 
 Affogado 
 
 Affear 
 
 Affiar 
 
 Affogador 
 
 Affeamento 
 
 Affidalgado 
 
 Affogar 
 
 Affect adamente 
 
 Affidalgarse 
 
 Affogamento 
 
 Affectado 
 
 Affigurado 
 
 Affogueado 
 
 Affectar 
 
 Affigurar 
 
 Affoguear 
 
 Affecto 
 
 Affilhada 
 
 Afforado 
 
 Affectuoso 
 
 Affilador 
 
 Afforador 
 
 Affeicao 
 
 Affilar 
 
 Afforar 
 
 Affei9oado . 
 
 Affinado 
 
 Afforamento 
 
 Affeiyoar 
 
 Affinar 
 
 Afformentar 
 
 Affeite 
 
 Affincado 
 
 Afformoseado 
 
 Affeitar 
 
 Affincar 
 
 Afformosear. 
 
GRAMMAR. 
 
 208 
 
 AfFoutado 
 
 Affugentar. 
 
 Diffusamente 
 
 Affoutar 
 
 AfFumado 
 
 Diffuso 
 
 Affouteza 
 
 AfFumar 
 
 Effectivamente 
 
 Affbuto. " 
 
 Affundado 
 
 Effectivo 
 
 
 AfFundarse 
 
 Effeito 
 
 
 AfFundirse 
 
 Effeituar 
 
 Affracar 
 
 Affuzillar. 
 
 Efficazmente 
 
 AfFramengado 
 
 
 Efficacia 
 
 AfFreguesado 
 
 
 Efficaz 
 
 Affreguesarse 
 
 Diffamado 
 
 Efficiente 
 
 AfFronta 
 
 DifFamar 
 
 Effigie 
 
 Affrontado 
 
 DifFeren^a 
 
 
 Affrontamento 
 
 Differen^r 
 
 
 Affrontar 
 
 DifFerer^as 
 
 OfFender 
 
 Affrontosamente 
 
 DifFerente 
 
 OfFerecer 
 
 Afirontoso 
 
 DifFerentemente 
 
 Offuscar. 
 
 Aftroxadamente 
 
 Difficil 
 
 
 Affroxado 
 
 Difficuldade 
 
 
 AfFroxar. 
 
 Difficultar 
 
 Suffdcar 
 
 
 Difficultosamente 
 
 Suffragio, and some 
 
 
 Difficultoso 
 
 others 
 
 AfFugentado 
 
 DifFusao 
 
 G. 
 
 This letter is to be doubled in 
 
 Aggravante 
 Aggravar 
 Aggravado 
 Aggravo 
 
 Aggressor 
 Exaggera^ao 
 Exaggerador 
 Exaggerado 
 
 L. 
 
 Is to be doubled in 
 
 AcaFelladura 
 
 Acafellar 
 
 Acallentado 
 
 Acallentar 
 
 Acapellado. 
 
 Aballado 
 
 Aballador 
 
 Aballar 
 
 Aballo 
 
 Aballisado 
 
 Abillisador 
 
 Aballisar. 
 
 Acafellador 
 
 Affillado 
 
 Affillador 
 
 Affillar. 
 
 Exaggerar 
 Suggerir 
 Suggestao 
 Suggerido. 
 
 Allega9ao 
 
 Allegado 
 
 Allegar 
 
 Allegoria 
 
 Allegorico 
 
 Allegorisar 
 
 Alleluia 
 
 Alliviar 
 
 Allucina^ao 
 
 Allucinar 
 
204 
 
 PORTUGU] 
 
 ESE 
 
 Alludir 
 
 Bacellada 
 
 Cavalleiro 
 
 Allumiar 
 
 Bacello 
 
 Cavallo. 
 
 Allusao. 
 
 Barbella 
 Barrella. 
 
 Cebolla 
 
 Amantellado 
 
 
 Cebollal 
 
 Amarello 
 
 Bella 
 
 Cebollinho 
 
 Arnarellecerse 
 
 Bellarnente 
 
 Chanceller 
 
 Amerellidao 
 
 Bello 
 
 Chancellaria 
 
 Amollado 
 
 Belleza 
 
 C&Ia 
 
 Amollar 
 Amollecer 
 
 Belleguim 
 Bellico 
 
 Celleiro. 
 
 Amollecido 
 Amollentar 
 
 Bellico so 
 Belligero 
 
 Clavellina 
 
 Ampolla. 
 
 Belluino. 
 
 Codicillo 
 
 Annullagao 
 Annullar. 
 
 Bulla 
 Bullario. 
 
 C6Ua 
 Collado 
 Collar 
 Colleira 
 
 Appellagao 
 
 Appellante 
 
 Appellar 
 
 Appellidar 
 
 Appellido. 
 
 Calliope 
 
 Camillo 
 
 Cavillagao 
 
 Cavillosamente 
 
 Caballina 
 
 Collagao 
 
 Collateral 
 
 Collecgao 
 
 Collecta 
 
 Collectivo 
 
 Collector 
 
 
 Cadella 
 
 Collega 
 
 Aquella 
 
 Cadellinha 
 
 Collegiada 
 
 A quelle 
 
 Callo 
 
 Collegial 
 
 Aquelloutro 
 
 Camartello 
 
 Collegio 
 
 Aquillo 
 
 Cambadella 
 Cancella 
 
 Colligar 
 Colligir 
 
 
 Capella 
 
 Colly'rio 
 
 Armellas 
 
 Capellao 
 
 C6II0 
 
 Arrepellado 
 
 Capellada 
 
 Collocagao 
 
 Arrepellao 
 
 Capellania 
 
 Collocar 
 
 Arrepellar 
 
 Capello 
 Capillar 
 Castella 
 
 Colloquio 
 
 Atropellado 
 
 Castello 
 
 Compellir 
 
 Atropellar. 
 
 Casullo 
 
 Compostella 
 
 
 Casulla 
 
 Constella^a 
 
 
 Cavalla 
 
 Corrollario 
 
 Avillanado. 
 
 Cavallaria 
 
 Covello 
 
Courella 
 
 GRAMMAR. 
 
 Encelleirar. 
 
 205 
 
 Gabella 
 Gallado 
 Galladura 
 
 Delia 
 
 Equipollencia 
 
 Gallar 
 
 Dallas 
 Delle 
 
 Equipollente. 
 
 Gallego 
 Gallia 
 
 Delles 
 
 
 Gallicado 
 
 Degollado 
 
 Escabellado 
 
 Gallicar 
 
 Degolla9ao 
 
 Escabello 
 
 Gallico 
 
 Degollar 
 
 Esciidella 
 
 Gallinha 
 
 Degolladouro. 
 
 Escudellao 
 Estillagao 
 
 Gallinha^o 
 Gallinheira 
 
 Distillacao 
 
 Estillado 
 Estillar 
 
 Gallinheiro 
 Gallinhola 
 
 DistiUador 
 Distillar. 
 
 Estillicidio 
 Estrella 
 
 Galliopoli 
 Galliota 
 
 
 Estrellado. 
 
 Galliza 
 
 Donzella. 
 
 
 Gallo 
 
 
 Excellencia 
 
 Gam ell a 
 
 
 Excellente 
 
 Gazella. 
 
 Duello. 
 
 Expellir. 
 
 G611a 
 
 Ebulligao. 
 
 Falla 
 Fallacha 
 
 
 
 Fallacia 
 
 Hellesponto 
 
 Ella 
 
 Ellas 
 
 Fallador 
 Fallar 
 
 Hendecasy'llabo 
 Holla nda 
 
 Elle 
 
 Fallecer 
 
 Hypallage. 
 
 E'lles 
 
 Fallecido 
 
 
 Elleboro 
 
 Fallencia 
 
 Janella 
 
 Janelleira 
 
 Janellinha 
 
 Ellipse 
 EUiptico. 
 
 Fallido. 
 
 
 Ferdizello. 
 
 Jarmello. 
 
 Emolliente 
 
 
 • 
 
 Emollir. 
 
 
 
 Enallage 
 
 Flagellante 
 Flagello. 
 
 Illa9ao 
 
 Illaquear. 
 
 Illativo 
 
 Encapellado 
 
 
 Illegitimo 
 
 Encapellar 
 
 F611e 
 
 Illeso 
 
 Encastellada 
 
 Folliculo 
 
 Illigar 
 
 Encastellar 
 
 Fontello. 
 
 Illiciador 
 
206 
 
 PORTUGUESE 
 
 lllicitamente 
 
 Mirandella 
 
 Pelle 
 
 Illicito 
 
 Miscellania 
 
 Pellesinha 
 
 Illocavel 
 
 M611e, 
 
 Pellica 
 
 Illudido 
 
 Molleira 
 
 Pellicula 
 
 Illudir 
 
 Molleza 
 
 Panella 
 
 Illuminagao 
 Illuminado 
 
 Mollice 
 
 Pimpinella 
 
 Mollidao 
 
 Phillis^ 
 
 Illuminar 
 
 Mollificante 
 
 Pollegada 
 
 Illuminativo 
 
 Mollificar 
 
 Pollegar 
 
 Illusao 
 
 Mollinar 
 
 Pollez 
 
 Illuso 
 
 Monosyllabo. 
 
 Pollucao 
 
 Illustracao 
 
 
 Pollute 
 
 Illustrar 
 
 Nella 
 
 Nellas 
 
 Nelle 
 
 Nelles ' 
 
 Nigella 
 
 Novella 
 
 Novelleiro 
 
 Nulla 
 
 Nullidade 
 
 Nullo 
 
 Nuzellos. 
 
 Polysy'llabo 
 
 Illustre 
 
 Portacollo 
 
 Illustrissimo 
 
 Illy'rio 
 
 Imbella 
 
 Portella 
 Postilla 
 Pousafolles 
 
 Impellir 
 Incapillato 
 Infallivel 
 Inintelligivel 
 
 Prunelle 
 Pulmella 
 Pupilla . 
 Pupillo 
 
 Intervallo. 
 
 Pusillanimidade 
 
 
 Pusillanime. 
 
 Libello 
 
 / 
 
 
 Lordello 
 Lousella. 
 
 Odivellas 
 Ollaria 
 
 Quartella. 
 
 Marcella 
 Marcellina 
 
 Olleiro 
 Ouguella. 
 
 Rabadella 
 Rebellado 
 
 Marcello 
 
 
 Rebellao 
 
 Martellada 
 
 Palla 
 
 Rebellarse 
 
 Martellar 
 
 Palladio 
 
 Rebelliao 
 
 Martello 
 
 Pallante 
 
 Rella 
 
 Martellinho 
 
 Pallas 
 
 Rodofolle 
 
 Malfallante 
 
 Palliado 
 
 Rodopello 
 
 Mallogrado 
 
 Palliar 
 
 Rosella 
 
 Mamillar 
 
 Pallidez 
 
 Ruella. 
 
 Medulla 
 
 Pallido 
 
 
 Mellifluo 
 
 Pallio 
 
 Sella 
 
 Mello 
 
 Paradella 
 
 Sellado 
 
 Metallico 
 
 Parallaxe 
 
 Sellador 
 
 Millcnario 
 
 Parallelo 
 
 Sellagap 
 
 Millesimo 
 
 Paralellogramo 
 
 Sellar 
 

 GRAMMAR. 
 
 Selleiro 
 
 Tolla 
 
 Vassallo 
 
 Sello 
 
 Tollice 
 
 
 Sentinella 
 
 Tollo 
 
 
 Sibylla 
 
 Torcicollo 
 
 Velleidade 
 
 Sigillo 
 
 Tranquillidade 
 
 Vellicacao 
 
 Sigillado 
 
 Tranquillo 
 
 Vellicar 
 
 Sobrepelliz 
 
 Trella 
 
 Velio 
 
 Sugillagao 
 
 Trisy'llabo 
 
 Velloso 
 
 Sy'llaba 
 
 Tunicella 
 
 Velludo 
 
 Syllabatico 
 
 Tullio 
 
 Verdesella 
 
 Syllabico 
 
 
 
 Syllogisar 
 Syllogismo. 
 
 Vacillagao 
 
 Villa 
 
 
 Vaeillante 
 
 Villania 
 
 
 Vacillar 
 
 Villaamente 
 
 Tabella 
 
 Valla 
 
 Villao 
 
 Tabelliao 
 
 Vallado 
 
 Villao 
 
 Tabellioa 
 
 Vallar 
 
 Vitella . 
 
 Titillacao 
 
 Valle 
 
 Vitellino. 
 
 Titillar 
 
 Vassallagem 
 
 
 207 
 
 N. R. Annulled signifies to annul; but annular is 
 an adjective, and signifies annular, or in the form of 
 a ring. L is doubled by some in the words pelo, 
 pela, (for) thus pello pella. 
 
 M 
 
 Is to be doubled in 
 
 Accommodar 
 
 Commemoracao 
 
 Commenda 
 
 Commensurar 
 
 Commentar 
 
 Commercial* 
 
 Commettar 
 
 Comminacao 
 
 Commiseracao 
 
 Commissao 
 
 Commissario 
 
 Commogao 
 
 Commodo 
 
 Commover 
 
 Commum 
 
 Commungar 
 
 Communicar 
 
 Communidade 
 
 Commutar 
 
 Consummar 
 
 Desaccommodar 
 
 Descommodo 
 
 Dilemma 
 
 Emmadeirar 
 
 Emmadeixar 
 
 Emmagrecer 
 
 Emmanquecer 
 
 Emmassar 
 
 Emmudecer 
 
 Engommar 
 
 Epigramma 
 
 Flamma 
 
 Flammante 
 
 Flammula 
 
 Gemma 
 
 Gomma 
 
 Grammatica 
 
 Immaculada 
 
 Immanente 
 
 Immarcessivel 
 
 Immaterial 
 
 Immaturo 
 
 
208 P 
 
 Immediatamentc 
 
 Immemoravel 
 
 Immenso 
 
 Immensuravcl 
 
 Immobilidade 
 
 Immoderadamente 
 
 Immodesto 
 
 Immodico 
 
 Immolar 
 
 Immortalisar 
 
 ORTUGUE 
 
 Immortificado 
 
 Immovel 
 
 Immudavel 
 
 lmmundo 
 
 Immunidade 
 
 Immutavel 
 
 Incommodo 
 
 Incommunicavel 
 
 Incommutavel 
 
 Inflammar 
 
 SE 
 
 Mamma 
 Mammar 
 Rccommendar 
 Somma 
 Sommar 
 Sumrna 
 Summario 
 Summidade 
 Symmetria, and some 
 others 
 
 N. B. M, and not n, is always made use of before 
 b, m, p. 
 
 N 
 
 Is likewise doubled in several verbs com- 
 pounded with an, en, in, con, as, annelar, annLva, 
 annao, anncita, annel, Anna, anno, annular, conneocab, 
 conne.ro, depenndr, empenndr, ennastrar, ennegrecSr 
 innato, innavegdvel, innocencia, manna, Maridnna, 
 pdnno, pinna, when it signifies a pen, tyrdnno, and 
 some others. 
 
 This letter is to be doubled in words beginning 
 with p compounded with the Latin prepositions ad, 
 ob, sub; as, apparato apparecer, oppur, opprim'ir sup- 
 por, Philippe, poppa, &c. 
 
 N. B. Pdppa signifies /?#/?, or a sort of spoon-meat 
 for children ; but papa signifies the Pope. 
 
 R. 
 
 The r is doubled in such words as are strongly 
 pronounced in the middle; as guerra, arranedr ar- 
 reddr arrimar, arruindr, carregdr, cdrro, &c. 
 
 S. 
 
 The s is to be doubled in the Portuguese superla- 
 tives, because it is doubled in the Latin roots ; it is 
 also doubled in the following words : 
 
GRAM M A R. 
 
 209 
 
 Abbadessa 
 
 Assaltar 
 
 Condessa 
 Assar 
 
 Asseyo 
 Assessor 
 
 Assanhar 
 
 Assim 
 
 Assegurar 
 
 Assist! r 
 
 Assignor 
 
 Assolar 
 
 Access© 
 
 Assombrar 
 A ssoprar 
 Assobiar 
 
 Aggressor 
 Appressar 
 Amassar 
 
 Assustar 
 
 Atravessar 
 
 Necessitar 
 
 Arremessar 
 
 Nisso 
 
 Nosso 
 Nossa 
 E'ssa 
 E'sse 
 I'sso 
 O'sso 
 Passear 
 Passar 
 Remessa 
 
 Ingresso, and many 
 others. 
 
 T is doubled in the following words and their 
 derivatives : 
 
 Attemperar 
 
 Attribuir 
 
 Permittir 
 
 Atten^ao 
 
 Attribute 
 
 Prometter 
 
 Attender 
 
 Attri^o 
 
 Remetter 
 
 Attentar 
 
 Attrito 
 
 Remettir 
 
 Attenuacao 
 
 Commetter 
 
 Setta 
 
 Attenuar 
 
 Demittir 
 
 Settenta 
 
 Attonito 
 
 Enfittar 
 
 Settecentos 
 
 Attracqao 
 
 Fitta 
 
 Transmittir 
 
 Attractivo 
 
 Intrommetter 
 
 
 Attrahir 
 
 Omittir 
 
 
 OF THE QUANTITY OF SYLLABLES AND THEIR 
 SOUND. 
 
 Of Words that make their Penuliima in a. 
 
 N. B. Observe what we have said above con- 
 cerning the accents. 
 
 All words ending in abo 9 aba, dco, aca, acho, acha, 
 ago, aga, ado, Ada, afo, hfa % ago, aga, agem, agre, alho, 
 alha, alo, ala, have the penultimas long ; as, diabo, 
 mangaba, macdcomacdca r cavaca, mingicho, garnacha, 
 madrago, linhaga, amado, punhada (except reldmpago, 
 antropofago, Uvado, and cagado, which are short in 
 the penultima), abdfo, abafa, saramago, adaga (ex- 
 cept stomago, or estomago, dmago, amaraco, which 
 
210 PORTUGUESE 
 
 are short), trabdlho,loalha,baddlo (except anomalo, bu- 
 falo, escdndalo, which are short), tanchdgem,vindgre. 
 
 Words ending in dmo, dma, dnho, dnha, duo, Ana, 
 have their penultirnas long; as, escdmo, courdma^ 
 castdnho, ardnha, engdno } pestdna ; except pdmpano, 
 tympano, bigamo. 
 
 Words ending in dpo, dpa, dque, aro, dra, have 
 their pen ultimas long ; as, guardandpo^ soldpa, bas- 
 bdque, cmpdro, scar a ; except cant aro, pucaro, laparo 
 bafaro, luparo, pifaro, picaro, camera, tdmara, 
 pass aro, Ldzaro, bar bar o, cocaras, &c. 
 
 Words ending in drro, drra, dto, dta, dvo, dva, 
 dxo, dxas, make the pen ultima long : as, bizdrro, 
 bizdrra, biscdto, patardta, escrdvo, escrdva (except 
 cdncava, and bisavu), cartdxo, tarrdxa. 
 
 Of Words that make their Penultima in e. 
 
 All words ending in ebo, eba, edo, eda, efa, have 
 their penultima long ; as, mancebo, manceba, azedo, 
 azeda, sanefa. 
 
 Words ending in efe are long ; as, magarefe: as 
 well as those ending in eco, eca, ego, ega; as boneco, 
 boneca, cab ego, cabega. 
 
 Words ending in ego, ega, are long ; as, morcego, 
 socego, relego, entrega, allega ; except conego, trdfego, 
 corrego, sofrego, pecego, fclego, butega, cocegas 
 
 Words ending in ejo, eja, elo, ela, are long ; as, 
 caranguejo, bocejo, igreja, Alentejo, envfja, mart elo, 
 querela. 
 
 Words ending in emo, ema, eno, ena, are long ; as, 
 supremo, postema, aceno, agucena ; except apozema. 
 
 N. B. the penultima is short in the word mgreme. 
 
 Words ending in epo, epa, epe, ique, ero, era, are 
 long ; as, decepo, carepa, julepe, moleque, severo, 
 severa y tempero (when a noun) : and tempLro (when 
 a verb), except dspero, prospero. 
 
 Words ending in ho, esa, izo, eza, e'to, eta, etc, 
 evo, eva, 'eve, are long ; as, ace so, acesa, desprezo, 
 
GRAMMAR. 211 
 
 grandeza and despriso (when a verb) entremeto, gal- 
 heta, ramalhete, bofete, atrevo, atreva, atreve. 
 
 Of Words that make their Penultima in i. 
 
 Words ending in ibo, iba, ibe, kho, kha, khe, ko, 
 tea, igo, iga, ke, ido, ida, ifo, (fa, ife, have the pe- 
 nultima long ; as, est ri bo, arriba, arribe, esgukho, 
 esguicha, azeviche, panko (a sort of stuff), botka; 
 except mecdnico, ecumenico, cirtico, politico, pdnico, 
 (panic), and some others borrowed from the Greek 
 and Latin. In Tco, ica, &c. as, roligo, preguica, vel- 
 hice, marido, medida ; excepf humido, pdllido, horrido, 
 and some others derived from the Latin. In ifo, 
 tf a, &c. as borrifo, alcatifa, patife. 
 
 Words ending in igo and iga, are long ; as, amigo, 
 amiga, except, prodigo, prodiga. 
 
 Words ending in ijo, and ija, are long ; as, affltjo, 
 artemija. 
 
 Words ending in Hho, Hha, are long; as, atilho, 
 beatilha. Others ending in Ho, Ha, as, gorgomilo, 
 perfila, desfila. 
 
 Words ending in imo, ima, have the penultima 
 long ; as, opt imo, cadimo, esgrima, lastima (when a 
 verb) ; except lastima (when a noun), Jeronimo, pes- 
 simo, and all the superlatives, anonimo, and some 
 others. 
 
 Words ending in mho, inha, mo, ma, ipo, tpa, tpe, 
 have the penultima long ; as, constipo, constipa, Euripo, 
 acipipe. Others in iquoiqua, ique, iro, ira, ire; as, 
 iniqup, iniqua, lambique, retiro, mentira, suspire. 
 
 Words ending in /so, isa, izo, iza, Ho, Ha ivo, iva, 
 ixo, ixa, are long in the penultima ; as, aviso, camisa, 
 juizo, ajuiza, altivo, altiva, prolLvo, prolixa, apito, 
 cabrlto ; except pulpito, vomito, decrepito, espirito, 
 debito, and some others. 
 
 Rales for such words as make their penultima in o. 
 
 Words ending in 6bo, 6ba, obe, obra, 6bro, bbre, 
 P2 
 
212 PORTUGUESE 
 
 have their pen ultima long; as, Ibbo, lob a, arrbba, 
 arrbbe, glbbo, alcdva, qbro, 6bra, ebbre, ebbro, db-bro. 
 Words ending in bcho, ocha, bco, oca, bco, bga, bdo, 
 bda, ode, oso, osa, ose, have the penuitima long; as, 
 agarrocho, garrbcha, carocha, blbco, except alliloco) 
 massarbca, minhbea, almbco, mbga (a girl), mbga, or 
 mbssa (a notch), almbgo (when a verb), carrbga, lb- 
 do, bbda, bode, pbde (the third person singular of the 
 present indicative of the verb poder), pbde (the third 
 person singular of the preterperfect definite of the 
 same verb), galhbfa, bbfe. 
 
 Words ending in bfro, bfra, of re, are long ; as, 
 alcaxbfra, cbfre, cnxbfre. 
 
 Words ending in ago, bga, bgue are long ; as, af- 
 fbgo, off oga, affbgue, desafbgo when a verb, and des- 
 afbgo, when a noun. 
 
 Words ending in by o,bj a, have the penuitima long ; 
 as, despojo, when a verb, nbjo, despojo, when a noun. 
 Words ending in oh, 61a, ble, are long ; as, vio- 
 la, gallinhbla, bbla, engole, miblo, boh, rebblo, tblo, 
 cebbla; except perola, frivolo, benevolo, malevoh. 
 
 Words ending in bmo, 6ma, bme, have the penui- 
 tima long; as, mordbrno, redbma,fbme, except Thome, 
 Words ending in bnho, bnha, 6no, vna, have the 
 penuitima long ; as, bisbnho, risbnha, dbno, atafdna, 
 dona ; except altisono, and inusono. 
 
 Words ending in bpla, bpo, Spa, ope, bpro, bpra, 
 bpre, oque, have the penuitima long ; as, manbpla, 
 tbpo, tbpa, galbpe, assbpro, when a verb, assbpra, as- 
 sbpre, assbpro, when a noun, botbqae. 
 
 Words ending in bro, bra, ore, are long in the 
 penuitima ; as, penhbro, penhbra, penhbre, chbro, 
 when a noun ; chbro when a verb ; except bacoro, 
 rimora, pblvora, drvore. 
 
 Words ending in brro, brra, are long ; as, soc- 
 corro, mbrro, cachbrra; and some others ending in 
 oso, ose, bsa, bzo, ozb, as, prlmorbso, prlmorbsa, 
 industribso, indastribsa, cibzo, cibza, desebse. 
 
GRAMMAR. 213 
 
 Words ending in 6to, ota, 6te, have their penulti- 
 ma long ; as, goto, gota, bota, devbto,frbta, capote, 
 garrote. 
 
 Words ending in ovo, ova, ove, are long in the 
 penultima ; as, ovo, concova, aprove. 
 
 Words ending in 6xo, oxa, are long in the pe- 
 nultima ; as, roxo, roxa,pintarr6xo. 
 
 Rules for such Words as make their Penultimct 
 
 in ii. 
 
 Words ending in ubo, uba, ubro, ubra, ucho, ucha, 
 uco, uca, ugo, uc^a, make the penultima long ; as, 
 adubo, aduba; except succubo, incubo, and some others ; 
 incubro, incubra, machucho, embucha, caduco, caduca, 
 rebugo, embuga. 
 
 Words ending in udo, uda, ude, ufo, ufa, ufe, ugo, 
 uga, ujo, uja, have the penultima long; as, felpudo, 
 felpuda, almude, pantufo, adufa, adufe, sanguesuga, 
 caramujo, azambuja. 
 
 Words ending in Mho, ulha, ulhe, ulo, ula, ule, umo, 
 uma, lime, unho, unha, iinhe ; as, bagulho, borbulha, 
 entulhe, engi'do, engida, bulebuie ; except vocdbulo, 
 vestibulo, dngulo, regalo, opusculo, Iremulo, patibulo, 
 thiribulo, and some others ; consumo, consuma, car- 
 durne, testemunho, testemunha, empunhe. 
 
 Words ending in uno, una, une, upo, upa, upe, uque, 
 tiro, ura, ure, are long jn the penultima ; as, desuno, 
 fortuna, desune, apupo, apupa, apupe, estuque, maduro, 
 madura, apiire. 
 
 Words ending in uso, usd, use, uzo, uza, uze, uto, 
 uta, ute, uxo, uxa, uxe, have the penultima long ; as, 
 parafiiso, parafusa, para/use, reduzo, reduza, reduze, 
 conduto, labuta, enxuta, labute ; except cSmputo when 
 a noun ; repuxo, empiixa, empuxe ; and some others 
 ending in uvo, uva, uve ; as, viuvo, viuva, enviuve. 
 
 N. B. When the penultima is immediately fol- 
 lowed by another vowel, observe that, 
 
 A before e must be accented with the acute ac- 
 
214 PORTUGUESE 
 
 cent, and pronounced accordingly; as, scie, cde: 
 but before i it has no accent. 
 
 A before o must be pronounced and accented 
 thus bacalhao ; but when the relative o is added to 
 the thiid person singular of the present indicative, 
 then a has no accent; as, dm:i-o. 
 
 E before a is accented thus, baled; and some- 
 times wi+h the acute 5 as assembled, idea, and some 
 others ; and sometimes has no accent at all, as in 
 gavea, femea, and some others. 
 
 E before o is exceedingly sonorous and long, as 
 in chapeo, coruchh ; except pateo, ferreo, plumbeo, 
 aureo, argenteo. 
 
 I before a, e, o, is long ; as, diz'ta, fazia, almo- 
 tolia ; except such as are borrowed from the Latin ; 
 as, nescia, comedia, feria, sciencia, prudencia, and 
 sabia when an adjective, &c. /before and e, is 
 long ; as, desvie, desvio ; except vicio and some 
 others. 
 
 O before a is accented thus, coroa, toa, maa, 
 esmoa. 
 
 O before e is long in the words doe, moe, roe, and 
 in the verb soe when it signifies to be wont ; but 
 when it signifies to sound, it is to be accented thus, 
 soe. 
 
 U before a is long; as, rua, charrua ; except 
 melliflua, insua. 
 
 U before e and is long ; as, concluo, recuo, con- 
 clue, recue; except mellifluo, and some others derived 
 from the Latin, 
 
GRAMMAR. 215 
 
 CHAP. IX. 
 
 Etymology of the Portuguese Tongue from the 
 
 Latin 
 
 THE Portuguese retains so great an affinity to 
 the Latin, that several words of the latter are pre- 
 served in the former, by only allowing a small al- 
 teration; as may easily be seen in the following 
 observations : 
 
 1. The o of the Latin words is preserved in some 
 Portuguese ones ; some Latin words are entirely 
 preserved in the Portuguese ; as, hospede, cbrda, 
 •porta, &c. 
 
 2. The u is changed into o; as, forca, goloso, 
 estopa, mo sea, amdmos, &c. from furca, gulosus, 
 stupa, musca, amamus, &c. 
 
 3. The diphthong, au, is frequently changed into 
 ou ; as, louvavel, ouro, cuuve, muuro, &c. from lauda- 
 bilis, aurum, caulis, maurus, &c. 
 
 4. The e is preserved in several Portuguese 
 words ; as, certo, servo, erva, thra,ferro, &c. from 
 certus,servus, herba, terra, ferrum, &c. 
 
 5. The e takes the place off; as, enfermo, seco, 
 &c. from infirmus, sicus, &c. ; and thei is sometimes 
 preserved, as in indzgno, benigno, &c.from indignus, 
 benignus, &c. 
 
 6. The b is also changed into v ; as, arvore, du- 
 viddr, dever, estava, amava, &c. from arbor, dubltare, 
 debere, stabat, amabat, &c. 
 
 7. The c is very often changed into g ; as, digo, 
 agudo, amtgo, migalha, &c. from dico, acutus, amicus, 
 arnica, &c. 
 
 8. Cl is changed into ch ; as, chamdr, chave, 
 from clamare, clavis, &c. 
 
 9. When the e in Latin is followed by t, this 
 
216 PORTUGUESE 
 
 letter is changed into c ; as, accad, diccao, &c. from 
 actio, dictio, &c. ; and sometimes the e before t is 
 changed into i; ?is,/eito, leito, noite, Uite, peito, &c. 
 from /actus, ledum, mete, lacte, pectus, &c. Finally, 
 both the c and t are preserved in a great number of 
 words ; as, acto, afflkto, distincto, &c. from actus, 
 afflict us, distinct us, &c. 
 
 10. Thesis often lost; as, roer, excluir, raio, 
 &c. from rodere, excluder e, radius, &c. 
 
 11. The/ is frequently preserved; as in filho, 
 fazer, fervor, formdso, &c. ftomjilius, facer e, fervor, 
 formosus, fyc. 
 
 12. The g is changed into i; as, reino, from 
 regnum. Sometimes it is quite lost, as in dedo,/rio, 
 setta, sinal, bainha, &c. from digitus, /rigus, sagitta, 
 signum, vagina, &c. 
 
 13. The h is placed instead of the /; as, alho, 
 from allium. Sometimes it is added ; as, artilho, 
 alheo, felha, consttho, &c. from articulus, alienus, 
 folium, consilium, &c. 
 
 14. The ?i is sometimes added, and sometimes 
 taken off; as, mdncha, ilka, SalHre, espdso, from 
 macula, insula, sal nit rum, sponsus, &c. 
 
 15. The mn is preserved by many Portuguese 
 •writers in the words alumno, calumnia, columna, 
 damno, solemne, somno, from alumnus, calumnia, 
 columna, damnum, &c. 
 
 16. The double nn of the Latin is preserved in 
 several words ; as in anno, innocencia, innocuo, inna- 
 vegavel, innovar, connexo, &c. from annus, innocen- 
 tia, innocuus, bmavigabilis, innovar e, connexus, &c. 
 
 17. The gn and gm are preserved in several 
 Portuguese words ; as \naugmento,/ragmhito, enig- 
 ma, benigno, d/g?io, ind/gno, ignommia, &c. from aug- 
 mentum,/ragmentum, cenigma, benignus, dignus, &c. 
 
 18. The e and the i after n are sometimes 
 changed into // ; as in ardnha, vinha, Hespdnha, cas- 
 tanha, &c. from aranea, vinea, Hispania, castanca, &c. 
 
GRAMMAR. 217 
 
 19. The p is changed into b; as in cobra, ca- 
 bello, cabeca, &c. from capra, capillus, caput, &c. 
 Sometimes pi is changed into ch ; as, chdga, chbro, 
 chuva, &c. from plaga, ploro, phtvia, &c. 
 
 20. The q is changed into g ; as, igudl, alguim, 
 antigo, agoa, aguia, &c. from equus, aliquis, antiquus, 
 aqua, aquila, &c. 
 
 21. The t is likewise changed into d; as, ca 
 dea,fado, lado, nadar,piedade, &c. from catena, fatum, 
 latus, natare, pietas, &c. The ti of the Latin is 
 sometimes changed into ca, and sometimes into ci ; 
 as in grhca, dementia, paciencia, &c. from gratia, 
 dementia, patientia, &c. 
 
 N. B. i\il these alterations are not general in all 
 the words, but are used in several ; and on some oc- 
 casions the Latin word is preserved without any mu- 
 tilation or variation. And as it would be endless to 
 pretend to shew all the affinity between the Portu- 
 guese and the Latin, I shall only observe, that they 
 sometimes add, and sometimes take off letters from 
 the Latin roots ; as in fdcil, debit, final, material, 
 estrepiio, estdmago, expectador, especular, &c. from 
 facilis, debilis,finalis, Crepitus, spectator, &c. 
 
 END OF THE SECOND PART. 
 
 
218 
 
 PORTUGUESE 
 
 PORTUGUESE 
 
 GRAMMAR. 
 
 PART III. 
 
 CONTAINING 
 
 The most elegant Phrases of the Portuguese 
 Language, 
 
 II. Such Words as are most used in Discourse. 
 
 III. A Collection of the choicest Portuguese Pro- 
 
 verbs. 
 
 IV. Familiar Dialogues. 
 
 The different Significations o/'andar, to go. 
 
 ANDA'R a p6 
 Anddr a cavdllo 
 Anddr pella pdsta 
 Anddr em cdche 
 Anddr d v6la 
 Anddr pella bolina 
 Anddr para didnte 
 Anddr para trdz 
 Anddr a trds de alguem 
 
 Anddr ds apalpad6llas 
 Anddr com Umpo 
 
 To go on foot 
 
 To ride on horseback 
 
 To ride, or go post 
 
 To ride in a coach 
 
 To saji 
 
 To sail with a side wind 
 
 To go forward 
 
 To go backward 
 
 To go behind, or after one, 
 
 also to follow, to press, 
 
 to solicit a person 
 To grope along, to grope, 
 
 or feel one's way 
 To go with the times 
 
GRAMMAR, 
 
 219 
 
 Anddr pejdda 
 
 Anddr sahida 
 
 Anddr perdido 
 Anddr de p6 
 
 Anddr com honra 
 
 A'nda 
 
 A'nda para didnte 
 
 Anddr de esguelha 
 
 Anddr de mal para pe6r 
 
 Anddr de r&ixa com al- 
 guem 
 
 Com o anddr do t&mpo 
 Anddr de galdpe 
 Anddr em cdrpo 
 
 A'nda o mundo as av6ssas 
 
 Anddr espalhddos 
 
 Anddr trabalhdndo nal- 
 
 guma 6bra 
 Anddr de gatinhas 
 Anddr de cdcoras 
 Anddr dizendo 
 
 To be with child, or big 
 with child 
 
 (speaking of a bitcK) To be 
 proud 
 
 To go astray 
 
 To be sickish, but not bed 
 rid 
 
 To act like an honest man 
 
 Go 
 
 Go on 
 
 To go sideling 
 
 To fall out of the frying- 
 pan into the fire 
 
 To bear one a grudge, to 
 have a spleen against 
 him, to owe him a spite 
 
 At long run 
 
 To gallop 
 
 To be in cuerpo, or to be 
 without the upper coat 
 or cloak, so as to disco- 
 ver the true shape of the 
 cuerpo or body 
 
 The world is come about 
 
 ToUe about 
 
 To^e about some piece of 
 work 
 
 To go crawling 
 
 To go on one's breech 
 
 To publish or report 
 
 The different Significations of dar and dar-se, 
 
 Dar 
 
 Bar a entendSr 
 
 Darf6 
 
 Dar or vendSr fiddo 
 
 Dar d luz 
 
 Dar senhoria 
 
 Dar tu, or foliar a alguSm 
 
 portu 
 Dar-se,apartido, ovlangdr- 
 
 se no partido de algu6m 
 
 To give, to strike 
 To make one believe 
 To credit, to believe, also 
 to perceive, to descry, to 
 take notice, to smell out 
 To sell upon credit 
 To publish 
 To my-lord a man 
 To thee and thou one 
 
 To side with one, to be fot 
 him 
 
 
220 
 
 Dar paldvra 
 Dar huma sdlva 
 
 Dar fiaddr 
 
 Dar principio, or fim 
 
 Dar cdnta 
 
 Dar-se ao estiido 
 
 Dar em que f altar 
 
 Dar entrdda 
 
 Dar cdusa 
 
 Dar que em entend&r 
 
 Dar de beb6r 
 
 Dar educes 
 
 Dar hum coscorrdo 
 
 Dar paneddas 
 
 Dar murros 
 
 Dar murrddas 
 
 Dar ofdro a alguimde al- 
 
 giima cousa 
 Dar huma estoedda 
 Dar os bons dias 
 Dar a guarddr 
 Dar d edsia 
 Dar com algu6m 
 
 Dar em alguem 
 
 Dar cdrtas 
 
 Dar sobre o inimigo 
 
 Dar os parabtns 
 
 Dar os parab6ns a algu&m 
 
 da sua chegdda 
 Dar a mao ajuddndo 
 Dar a escolh6r 
 Dar enfddo a alguSm 
 Dar no dlvo 
 Dar as edstas 
 
 Dar parte de hum negdcio 
 
 PORTUGUESE 
 
 To promise 
 
 To give a volley of shot, or 
 to make a discharge of 
 guns in honour of some 
 persons of quality 
 
 To bail 
 
 To begin, or end 
 
 To give an account 
 
 To apply one's self to study 
 
 To make one speak, to give 
 an occasion to be talked 
 of 
 
 To give access to 
 
 To give cause 
 
 To vex one sadly, to trou- 
 ble one 
 
 To give drink 
 
 To kick 
 
 To give a box on the ear 
 
 To beat with a cudgel 
 
 To cuff 
 
 To butt, as rams do 
 
 To smell out a matter 
 
 To give a thrust 
 
 To bid one good-morrow 
 
 To give in keeping 
 
 To run a-ground 
 
 To meet with one by 
 chance, to light upon a 
 person 
 
 To strike one, also to ac- 
 cuse one 
 
 To deal, or give the cards 
 
 To fall upon the enemy 
 
 To congratulate 
 
 To bid one welcome 
 
 To give a helping hand 
 
 To let one take his choice 
 
 To molest one 
 
 To hit the mark 
 
 To run away, to betake 
 
 one's self to" flight 
 To impart a business 
 
GRAM 
 
 Dar pello amdr de Deos 
 Dar huma surra 
 Dar huma vdlta em redondo 
 Dar huma vista de dlhos 
 Dar alcdnce ao que se de- 
 
 zeja 
 Dar suspiros 
 Dar ouvidos 
 Dar em rosto 
 
 Da cd 
 
 Deu-me huma ddr 
 Dar quefazer a alguem, or 
 occupdr alguem 
 
 Dar hdras 
 
 reldgio da hdras 
 
 Dar a alma a Deos 
 
 Dar comsigo em alguma 
 
 parte 
 Dar leite 
 Dar garrdte 
 Dar vdzes 
 sol da nos dlhos 
 
 Dar razoens 
 
 Dar coj?isigo no chao 
 
 Darfriito 
 
 Dar as maos 
 
 Dar com a porta na cdra 
 
 de alguem 
 Dar com a porta ?ios dlhos 
 
 a alguma cdusa (me- 
 
 taph.) 
 Dar pressa 
 E'sta travessa vai dar a 
 
 rica larga 
 Dei no pensamenio de, &c. 
 
 Nab sabe a6nde ha de dar 
 
 com a cabeqa 
 I'sto vos ha de dar na 
 
 cabeqa 
 Dar com a cabega tiellas 
 
 parede$ 
 
 MAR, 
 
 221 
 
 To give for God's sake 
 
 To beat one soundly 
 
 To walk a turn 
 
 To cast an eye on 
 
 To obtain, or compass one's 
 
 wish 
 To sigh 
 
 To give hearing 
 To upbraid, to cast in the 
 
 teeth 
 Give hither 
 
 I was taken with a pain 
 To employ one, to set him 
 
 at work, to set him upon 
 
 some business 
 To strike 
 The clock strikes 
 To give up the ghost, to die 
 To cast one's self into a 
 
 place, or to go to a place 
 To suckle 
 To strangle 
 To cry out, to bawl 
 The sun shines in one's 
 
 eyes 
 To debate, or contend 
 To fall upon the ground 
 To bear fruit 
 To shake hands 
 To shut the door upon one 
 
 To slight, to despise a thing 
 
 To press, or hasten 
 
 This lane strikes, or goes 
 
 into the broad street 
 It came into my head to, 
 
 fyc. 
 He does not know which 
 
 way to turn himself 
 The mischief will light upon 
 
 your own head 
 To beat one's head against 
 
 the wall 
 
 
222 
 
 PORTUGUESE 
 
 Dar em tddos, or dizSr mat 
 
 de tddos 
 Dar b6a cdnta de si 
 
 Dar a c6nta 
 
 E'u dar6i cdnta disso 
 
 E'lle d6u em ir dquSlle lugdr 
 
 Dar em droga 
 
 Dar em ridicularias 
 
 Dar huma figa a alguem 
 
 Dar-se por culpddo 
 
 De nenhuma sorte vos dels 
 por entendido, or achddo 
 Dar-se por aggravddo 
 Dar-se por satisf6ito 
 Dar-se por vencido 
 
 Dar-se por desentendido 
 
 Qudndo se d4r a occasido 
 
 Dar-se pressa 
 
 Elle deu-se a tdda a sdrte 
 
 de vicios 
 Nao se me dd disso 
 Que se vos da a v6s disso ? 
 Pduco se me dd 
 Nao se Uie dd morrer 
 E'lles dao-se muito hem 
 
 E'sta came nao se dd bem 
 comigo 
 
 To have a satirical virulent 
 tongue, to spare nobody 
 To give a good account of 
 himself, to behave cleverly 
 To pay an account 
 I'll be answerable for it 
 He began to use that place 
 To grow a mere drug 
 To grow, or become ridicu- 
 lous 
 To flirt at one, to fig 3 to 
 
 give the fico 
 To acknowledge one's self 
 
 guilty 
 Take no notice of any thing 
 
 To make a shew of anger 
 
 To rest satisfied 
 
 To submit, to surrender 
 one's self a prisoner, or to 
 yield a point 
 
 To feign one's self ignorant, 
 to take no notice of any 
 thing, to make as if one 
 saw or knew not 
 
 When occasion shall require 
 it 
 
 To be in haste, to make haste 
 
 He gave himself over to all 
 manner of vices 
 
 I mind it not 
 
 What have you to do withit ? 
 
 I care but little 
 
 He does not fear death 
 
 They agree mighty well to- 
 gether 
 
 This meat does not agree 
 with me 
 
 Of the different Significations of the Verb estar. 
 
 We use the verb estar to make an action of re- 
 pose, by putting the verb that follows in the ge- 
 rund ; as, Hie estd escrevindo, he is writing.* 
 
 Estar has several other significations ; as ? 
 
GRAMMAR, 
 
 223 
 
 Estdr em p£ 
 
 Estdr bem, or mal 
 
 Estdr asseniddo 
 
 Estdr para sahir, para 
 
 fdra 
 Estdr com o sentido em 
 
 Frdnga, or estdr com o 
 
 sentido em outra parte 
 Estd muito hem 
 Estd para chover 
 Estdr para cahir 
 Estdr para morrer 
 Estdr em duvida 
 Estar6mos a ver 
 Estdr com huma mao sdbre 
 
 a Sutra 
 Estdr em cdsa 
 Aquilo nod me estd hem 
 
 Estdr dormindo 
 
 Estdr faz6ndo 
 
 Estdr de n6jo 
 
 Estdr dMrta 
 
 Estdr de sentine'lla 
 
 Estd aUgre 
 
 E'lle estd como quer 
 
 Estdr em perigo 
 
 Estdr encostddo 
 
 Estdr esperdndo 
 
 Estdr muito tempo 
 
 Estdr calddo 
 
 Estdr or viver com dutros 
 
 Estdr de cima 
 
 Estdr debdxo 
 
 Estdr hem aviddo 
 
 Estdr d esp6ra 
 
 Estdr enamorddo 
 
 Estdr de cdma 
 
 Estdr no campo 
 
 Estdr com saude, or de 
 
 saude 
 Estdr quieto 
 Estdr neutral 
 Estarei por tudo o que vos 
 
 parecer mdis convenient^ 
 
 To stand upright 
 To be well, or ill 
 To be sitting 
 To be just going out 
 
 To have one's wits a wool- 
 gathering 
 
 It is well, it is very well 
 
 It is going to rain 
 
 To be ready to fall 
 
 To be like to die 
 
 To be in doubt 
 
 We will expect the issue 
 
 To stand idle 
 
 To stay at home 
 
 That does not become me 
 
 well 
 To lie sleeping 
 To be a doiug 
 To be in mourning 
 To look needfully about 
 To stand centry 
 To be merry 
 He lives in clover 
 To be in danger 
 To lean upon 
 To expect 
 
 To stay a good while 
 To be silent 
 To dwell with others 
 To lie over 
 To lie under 
 To be in an ill taking 
 To lie in wait 
 To be in love 
 To be bed-rid 
 To live in the country 
 To be in health 
 
 To stand still, or to be quiet 
 To stand neuter 
 I shall stand to whatever 
 you shall think proper 
 
224 PORTU 
 
 A difficult! dde estd em, %c. 
 
 Estdr por algufrm 
 
 Estdr por, or em lugdr de, 
 
 Sfc. 
 E'lle estdva na altiira do 
 
 Cdbo de Boa Esperdnoa 
 Eu nao qu6ro estdr as ra- 
 
 zoens comvdsco 
 Estd qudnto quiz6res 
 A6nde estdis de cdsa ? 
 E star Si pello que diss&r a 
 
 pessoa que for de vdsso 
 
 maydr agrddo 
 Nao podemos estdr por isso 
 Nao qu6ro estdr p&tta vossa 
 
 sentSnga 
 C6mo estd vm ce ? 
 
 G U E B E 
 
 The difficulty consists in, 
 
 &c. 
 To stand for one, to be of 
 
 his side 
 To stand for, or signify 
 
 He stood off the Cape of 
 
 Good Hope 
 I won't stand, or dispute 
 
 with you 
 Stay as long as you please 
 Where do you live ? 
 I'll refer it to whom you 
 
 please 
 
 We can't stand to that 
 
 I wonttake your judgment 
 
 How do you do, sir ? 
 
 Estai\ joined with the infinitive of a verb and the 
 particle para, signifies to be ready, or about doing a 
 thing, which has always reference to the signification 
 of the verb ; as 
 
 Estou para ir 
 
 Estdu para comprdr hum 
 
 cavdllo 
 Estou para cazdrme 
 E'sta cdsa estd para cahir 
 Estdu para dize'r 
 Estdr com a boca ab6rta 
 
 (metaph.) 
 Estdr de regimSnto 
 Estdr Jiddo em alguem, 
 
 Estdr no f undo 
 Estdr defronte 
 Estdr em competencia 
 Estdr ao lume 
 
 Estdr de longe 
 Estdr alto 
 
 Estdr a mao dirtiita de al- 
 guem 
 
 I am going, I am ready to go 
 I am about buying a horse 
 
 I am going to be married 
 
 This house is ready to fall 
 
 I dare say 
 
 To stare, to look, to hearken 
 attentively 
 
 To keep to a diet 
 
 To trust to, to rely or de- 
 pend upon one 
 
 To lie at the bottom 
 
 To lie over-against 
 
 To stand in competition 
 
 To stand by the fire 
 
 To stand at a distance 
 
 To stand high, or in a high 
 place 
 
 To be at one's right hand, 
 to have the first place 
 
Elle estSve em perigo de 
 
 dfog&rse 
 Nao estdr no cdso de, &c. 
 
 Estdr a drdem de alguim 
 Isso nao estd nos tSrmos 
 Nao estdu no cdso 
 Estdr ds razdens 
 
 Estdr hem com algtiSm 
 
 Estdr hem 
 
 Bern aviddo estaria Su, se, 
 
 &c. 
 Estdr emconcSito de hdmem 
 
 honrddo 
 Estdr na/6 
 
 Estdr de pdsse 
 
 Deixdi estdr isso, 
 Estdr em si 
 Estdr fora de si 
 Deixavos estdr (a sort of 
 threatening) 
 
 GRAMMAR. 225 
 
 He was like to be drowned 
 
 Not to be aSle, or in the 
 
 case of, Sfc. 
 To be at one's disposal. 
 That is not right, it won't do 
 I don't understand the case 
 To contend, to strive, or 
 
 quarrel 
 To be in favour with one, to 
 live in friendship with him 
 To be well, to be at ease 
 It would be very bad for 
 
 me, indeed, if, fyc. 
 To be looked upon as an 
 
 honest man 
 To believe, to think, or sup- 
 pose 
 To possess, to have the pos- 
 session of a thing 
 Let that alone 
 To be in one's right wits 
 To be out of one's wits 
 I'll be revenged on you, 
 you shall pay for it 
 
 We have already observed the difference between 
 ser and estdr. See page 55. 
 
 Of the different Significations of faz&r and faz&r se. 
 
 Fazer signifies to do, to make, to create ; also to form 
 of materials ; also to feign, to seem, to make as if 
 
 Elle fez que nao o via 
 
 FazSr huma saude 
 
 E'lle Ike fez cortdr a cabega 
 
 FazSr pe atrdz (metaph.) 
 
 Que Undes v6s que faz6r 
 com isto 
 
 Q 
 
 He madeasifhedidnotseeit 
 To drink, or to toast a health 
 He caused his head to be 
 
 cut off 
 To fall, or draw back, to 
 
 give ground ; to yield, 
 
 to submit 
 What have you to do with 
 it? or what is that to you ? 
 
226 
 
 PORTUGUESE 
 
 Faz&r brio de alguma 
 
 cdusa 
 Faz&r Jim ao dezejo 
 
 Fazer por alguma c6usa 
 
 Fdgo por isso 
 
 Fazer ao negdcio, or ao caso 
 
 Faz&r esmolas 
 
 Faz&r gdsto 
 
 Fazer gdsto 
 
 Faz&r o gdsto, or a vontdde 
 
 a algu&m 
 Faz&r paralUlo 
 Fazer de com&r 
 Faz&r fumo 
 
 Fazir auzente a algu&m 
 Fazfrio 
 Fazer gente 
 Fazer em peddgos 
 Fazer zombaria de algu&m 
 
 Naofagdis caso disso 
 
 Fazer agodda 
 
 Isto^ me faz vir a dgoa a 
 
 bdca 
 Fazer dlto 
 Fazer cdsa (in playing at 
 
 backgammon) 
 Faz&r a c&a 
 Faz&r car as 
 Faz&r enr&dos 
 
 Faz&r carrdncas 
 Faz&r cdso 
 
 Faz&r de tripas coragao 
 Faz&r muitocdso de alguma 
 
 cdusa 
 Naofdgo cdsod&lle 
 Faz&r festa 
 Faz&r huma festa 
 
 To make a pride of a thing, 
 
 to glory in it 
 To satisfy one's desire, or 
 
 longing 
 To take pains, to endeavour, 
 
 to labour to a certain 
 
 purpose, to work for a 
 
 certain end 
 I endeavour after it 
 To come to the purpose 
 To give almg 
 To spend 
 
 To like, to be pleased with 
 To please one, to comply 
 
 with one's desire 
 To parallel, to compare 
 To cook 
 To smoak 
 
 To believe one absent 
 It is cold 
 
 To raise men, soldiers 
 To pull into pieces 
 To mock, or to laugh at a 
 
 person 
 Do not mind that 
 To take in fresh water 
 This makes my teeth, or 
 
 mouth, water 
 To halt in a march 
 To put two men on the 
 
 same point 
 To get supper ready 
 To make mouths 
 To form a secret design 
 
 against another 
 To pout 
 To make account of, or 
 
 esteem 
 To make one's utmost efforts 
 To make great account of a 
 
 thing, to make much of it 
 I don't mind him 
 To endear, to fondle 
 To give an entertainment, 
 
 to feast 
 
GRAM 
 
 FazSr as vSzes de algu6m 
 
 Fazer trapdgas 
 
 Fazer lugdr 
 
 Fazir merce 
 
 Fazer ouvidos de mercaddr 
 
 Tir que fazer 
 
 Fazer exercicio 
 
 FazSr exercicio (a military 
 
 word) 
 Os soldddos estdo fazdndo 
 
 exercicio 
 QuefazHs aqui ? 
 Fazer hum vestido 
 Fazer huma ley, hum dis- 
 
 curso 
 Fazer guSrra 
 Fazer saber alguma cousa 
 
 a alguem 
 Fazer enraivecer alguim 
 Fazer huma cdnta 
 Fazer conta 
 E'lle fazia huma c6nta, e 
 
 sahio-lhe dutra 
 Faz6r contas com algu6m 
 
 I'sso ndo me faz ndda 
 
 Fazer pdusa 
 
 Fazer de alguSm toby 
 
 Fazer dinh6iro de alguma 
 
 cdusa 
 Torndr a fazer 
 FazSr a razao 
 Ter que fazer com algu6m 
 
 FazSr a alguem hum gil- 
 
 vdz na cdra 
 FazSr hdnra 
 
 Faz6rf€ 
 
 Fazer forte 
 Fazer mencdo 
 Faz6r mal 
 
 MAR. 227 
 
 To make any business for 
 
 another 
 To chicane, to cavil, to use 
 
 tricks 
 To make room 
 To grant a favour 
 To make as if one were deaf 
 To be busy 
 To use exercise 
 To exercise 
 
 The soldier's exercise 
 
 What do you here ? 
 
 To make a suit of clothes 
 
 To make a law, a speech 
 
 To make war 
 
 To make one acquainted 
 
 with a thing 
 To make one mad 
 To cast up an account 
 To intend, or to propose 
 He was much disappointed 
 
 To settle accounts with 
 
 one 
 It is nothing to me, that 
 
 does not concern me 
 To make a stand 
 To make a fool of one 
 To make money of a thing, 
 
 to sell it 
 To make again 
 To pledge one 
 To deal with one, or to 
 
 have to do with one 
 To mark one in the face 
 
 To honour 
 
 To make known, to testify, 
 
 to witness 
 To fortify, or strengthen 
 To mention 
 To hurt 
 
 Q 2 
 
228 
 
 Fazir de alguim o que 
 
 huma pess6a quer 
 Fazir huma apdsta 
 Faz vinto 
 Faz hdje duto dias 
 
 Fazir vida com alguim 
 
 Fazir a sua vontdde 
 Fazir o possivel 
 
 Nad far Sis ndda com isso 
 Nadfagdis mdis assim 
 Se torndrdes a fazir assim 
 Dezijo quefdga a sua for- 
 
 tuna 
 Custdu-me muito a fazel- 
 
 lovir 
 Fazir a dutrem o que qui- 
 
 ziramos que dutrem nos 
 
 fizisse a n6s 
 Nad tinho que fazir com- 
 
 isso 
 Fazir o que alguem mdnda 
 Faz de mim o que vos pa- 
 
 recir 
 Fazir hum grdnde estrdndo 
 E'llefdi o que fez tudo na- 
 
 quille negdcio 
 Que fare' is hdje ? 
 
 Fazir o seu curso 
 
 Fazir huma bda cdsa 
 
 Fazir a bdrba 
 Fazir a cdma. 
 Nad sii que Ihe fazir 
 Fazer grdnde negdcio 
 Fazir o seu officio 
 Fazir profissad 
 T6dos ofaziad mdrto 
 
 Fazir vir 
 
 PORTUGUESE 
 
 To dispose of one 
 
 To lay a wager 
 
 The wind blows 
 
 This day se'n night, or a 
 week ago 
 
 To cohabit, or dwell to- 
 gether 
 
 To do as one pleases 
 
 To do one's best, or endea- 
 vour to do one's utmost 
 
 You will do no good in it 
 
 Do so no more 
 
 If ever you do so again 
 
 I wish he may do well 
 
 I had much to do to get him 
 
 to come 
 To do by others as you 
 
 would be done by 
 
 I have nothing to do with it 
 
 To do as one is bid 
 
 Do with me as you shall 
 
 think fit 
 To make a great noise 
 He was the do-all in that 
 
 business 
 What will you do to-day ? 
 
 or how do you employ 
 
 yourself to-day ? 
 To finish its course as a 
 
 star does 
 To raise, to set up one's fa- 
 mily 
 To shave 
 To make the bed 
 I can't help it 
 To drive a great trade 
 To exercise, or discharge 
 To profess 
 They gave out that he was 
 
 dead 
 To call, or send for 
 
GRAMMAR. 
 
 229 
 
 Fazer entrdr, ou sahir al- 
 
 guSm 
 Vsto nab faz ndda 
 Nao s6i que fazer disso 
 Ja nao tenho que faz&r 
 
 com 6lle 
 Faz&r hum livro 
 FazSr amizdde com algu4m 
 
 FazSr ex&mplo em alguSm, 
 or castigdllo para dar 
 exemplo 
 
 Fazir huma c6usa muito 
 ao desentendido 
 
 Faz6r das suas 
 
 E'lle sempre estd faztfndo 
 
 das suas 
 Faz6r fdscas 
 
 Fazer de pessda 
 FazSr jurdr algu6m 
 
 FazSrsaltdr, or vodrpGllos 
 
 dres 
 Faz6r b6a vezinhdnca 
 
 Faz&r Unha 
 FazSr a rdnda 
 Fazer dividas 
 
 Faz lua 
 
 Fazer vioUncia 
 
 Faz&r-se ao trabdlho 
 
 Faz6r-se tdlo 
 Faz€r-se vdlho 
 
 Faze*r*sef4io 
 
 To call in,, or out, to bid 
 
 one come in, or out 
 It is no matter 
 I have no need of it 
 I have done with him 
 
 To write a book 
 
 To make friendship, to get 
 into friendship with one 
 
 To make one a public ex- 
 ample 
 
 To do a thing very covertly, 
 so that people can't ap- 
 prehend that it is done on 
 set purpose, and with a 
 design 
 
 To play the fool, to dodge, 
 to play tricks 
 
 He is always playing his 
 foolish tricks 
 
 To bully, to provoke, to ex- 
 cite by words, or actions 
 of contempt ; also to 
 elude, or deceive by false 
 show 
 
 To behave courageously 
 
 To tender the oaths to one, 
 to put one to his oaths 
 
 To blow up 
 
 To keep fair with one's 
 neighbours 
 
 To fell wood 
 
 To walk the rounds 
 
 To run in debt, to contract 
 debts 
 
 The moon shines 
 
 To offer violence 
 
 To inure one's self to hard- 
 ships 
 
 To play the ninny 
 
 To grow old, or to grow in 
 years 
 
 To grow ugly 
 
230 PORTUGUESE 
 
 FazSr-se sobgrbo To grow proud 
 
 Faz-se tdrde It grows late 
 
 FazSrse signifies also to feign, to pretend, to seeni^ 
 make as if 
 Faz-se mduco He won't hear 
 
 The different significations o/t&r and ter-se. 
 
 Ter que faze* r 
 
 Ter 6dio 
 
 Ter por costume 
 
 Ter alguSm por ignordnte 
 
 Ter cuidddo de 
 
 Ter cuidddos 
 
 Terfastio 
 
 Ter dnimo 
 
 Ter bdafdma 
 
 Ter cdra d'ago 
 
 Ter necessiddde 
 
 Ter pr6ssa 
 
 Ter mMtos firnios 
 
 Ter grdnde presumpgao 
 
 Ter razao 
 Nao tSr razao 
 Ter algiima cousa debdxo 
 da lingua 
 
 To be busy 
 
 To hate 
 
 To be wont 
 
 To believe one ignorant 
 
 To be careful of 
 
 To be full of care, or 
 
 thoughtful 
 To loath, to see food with 
 
 dislike 
 To have courage 
 To be well spoken of 
 To have a brazen face 
 To be in want 
 To be in haste 
 To be very proud 
 To presume much on one's 
 
 self 
 To be in the right 
 To be in the wrong 
 To have a thing at one's 
 
 tongue's end 
 
 Ter algiima ctysa na ponta da lingua, we say, to 
 have a thing at one's finger's ends, to have it perfect. 
 They also say, saber alguma cousa nas pontas dos 
 dedos, which answers exactly to our English phrase. 
 
 Ter feigoens feiticeiras 
 
 Termdfdma 
 
 Ter ciume8 
 
 Ter mSyos 
 
 Ter no pensamento 
 
 Ter obrigagdd 
 
 Ter mido 
 
 Ter razdo, e mdis querazdo 
 
 To have a taking look 
 
 To be ill spoken of 
 
 To be jealous of 
 
 To be able, or have means 
 
 To bear in mind 
 
 To be obliged 
 
 To be fearful 
 
 To have reason, to spare 
 
GRAMMAR. 
 
 231 
 
 Que tSndes vds com isso ? 
 Ter carru&gem e criddos 
 
 Ter a algue*m suspinso 
 Hdmem que tern bda feicao 
 
 Ter m^sa franca 
 
 Terfrio 
 
 Ter as cdstas quintes com 
 
 algugm, 
 Ter por hem 
 Te'nho-o por doudo 
 Ter mad na sua resolucdo 
 Ter com que 
 Nao tendes de que vos 
 
 queixdr 
 Nao tendes que, &c. 
 
 Fsto nao tern ndda que fa- 
 
 zSr, com o que eu digo 
 Ter 6ntre maos 
 
 T6nho isso por c6rto 
 
 Ir ter com algudm 
 
 Vinho ter com vm ce para 
 
 sabSr cdmo pdssa a sen- 
 
 hdra fulldna 
 Ir ter a algum lugdr 
 E'sta rua vdi ter ao mer- 
 
 cddo 
 Ter alguim por si 
 
 TSmos por n6s a authori- 
 dade dos mdis prudentes 
 Ter para si 
 
 Ter em muito 
 Ter em pouco 
 Ser tido em b6a cdnta 
 
 Ter mao 
 
 What is that to you ? 
 
 To keep a coach and ser- 
 vants 
 
 To hold one in suspence 
 
 A man of good address, a 
 polite man 
 
 To keep open table, to keep 
 a table where a man may 
 come without bidding 
 
 To be cold 
 
 To be backed, or supported 
 by one 
 
 To approve of, or consent 
 
 I take him to be mad 
 
 To be still in one mind 
 
 To have wherewith 
 
 You have no reason of 
 complaint 
 
 It is useless, or it will be to 
 no purpose for you to,<^*c. 
 
 That is nothing to the pur- 
 pose 
 
 To have in hand, or in one's 
 possession 
 
 I hold that for a certainty 
 
 To address one's self to one 
 
 I address, or apply myself 
 to you to know how Miss 
 such a one does 
 
 To go to a place 
 
 This street strikes, or goes 
 into the market 
 
 To be supported, or pro- 
 tected by one 
 
 We have the wisest men of 
 our side, or of our opinion 
 
 To think, or imagine, to 
 reckon 
 
 To set much by 
 
 To value but little 
 
 To be esteemed, regarded, 
 or valued, to be in great 
 esteem 
 
 To hold or keep in, to re- 
 strain 
 
232 PORTUGUESE 
 
 Ter mad nalguma cdusa 
 
 A'tomos que tern mad huns 
 
 nos dutros 
 Tinha mad, or tern mad 
 Ter 
 
 Terse em p6 
 Terse hem a cavdllo 
 
 Terse em casa 
 Terse com alguSm 
 
 Nad me pdsso ter com riso 
 Nad se pdde ter, que nad 
 fdlle 
 
 To bear up, to support, to 
 prop, to keep up, to hold 
 up 
 
 Atoms that stick together 
 
 Hold, stop 
 
 To contain 
 
 To stand, to stand up 
 
 To sit fast, or well, on 
 
 horseback 
 To keep at home 
 To hold out, to resist, to 
 
 stand against one, to cope 
 
 with one, to oppose, or 
 
 resist him 
 I can't forbear laughing 
 He can't forbear speaking 
 
 The different Significations of quer£r. 
 Querer signifies to will, to be willing , and to be- 
 
 lieve ; as 
 
 Qudrem alguns 
 Querer hem 
 Querir mat 
 A'ntes querer 
 Qu&ira DSos 
 
 Mas qu6ro que assim s6ja 
 Que quer dizSr aquelle 
 
 hdmem ? 
 Que quer diz6r isto ? 
 
 I'sto quer dizer que, &c. 
 
 E'u qu6ro absolutamGnteque 
 
 E'u assim o qu6ro 
 
 Eflle quer que v6s obedecais 
 
 Nad quero 
 
 E'lle ofard qudndo quizer 
 
 E'lle quer partir amanhaa, 
 
 mat que 6u the que'ro me, 
 vSnha a mim 
 
 Some believe 
 
 To love 
 
 To hate 
 
 To have rather 
 
 God grant it, God send it 
 
 may be so 
 I grant it, suppose it were so 
 What does that man mean ? 
 
 What means this ? what's 
 
 the meaning of that ? 
 The meaning is that, <Vc 
 I positively resolve that, #c. 
 I'll have it so 
 He will have you obey 
 1 will not, I won't 
 He will doit when he pleases 
 
 or when he has a mind to it 
 He intends, or has a mind, 
 
 to set out to-morrow 
 I wish him no more harm 
 
 than I do myself 
 
GRAMMAR. 
 
 233 
 
 Haver ) 
 
 Tu has de hir 
 E'lle ha de vir hdje 
 Se eu houv6r de hir 
 Aindaque isso me houvtsse 
 
 de custar a vida 
 E'lle estd todo nu, e ha de 
 
 ter muitofrio 
 Hav6is v6s de estdr em 
 
 cdsa ? 
 Eu hei de achdrme Id 
 E'lle ha de ser enforcddo 
 Eu hei de recebSr dinhHro 
 Vos he que havSis de jugdr 
 Aquillo he que v6s havieis 
 
 defazer 
 Hav&r por hem 
 HavSr por mal 
 Que ha de ser 
 Aquillo nunca hd-de ser 
 E'u Mi de ser a causa da 
 
 sua mdrte. ou ruina 
 Para hav&r defalldr,ouvir, 
 
 &c. 
 Que hd de ser de mint ? 
 Haver filhos 
 
 Livros do deve^e h a de havSr 
 
 Haver misUr 
 
 Hd miste'r apressdr-se 
 
 to have. 
 
 You must go 
 
 He is to come to-day 
 
 If I shall be obliged to go 
 
 Though I were to lose my 
 
 life for't 
 He is all naked, he must 
 
 be very cold 
 Shall you be at home ? 
 
 I must be there 
 He is to be hanged 
 I am to receive money 
 You are to play 
 You should do that 
 
 To take in good part 
 
 To take in ill part 
 
 That is to be hereafter 
 
 That will never be 
 
 I shall be the death, or ruin 
 
 of him 
 In order to speak, hear, fyc, 
 
 What is to become of me ? 
 To beget, to become the 
 
 father of children. 
 Books of debtor andcredi tor 
 To want 
 It is necessary to haste, or 
 
 to make haste 
 
 Haver, when impersonal, is rendered into Eng- 
 lish by the verb to be, preceded by there ; as, 
 
 Hd 
 
 Hd hdmens tad malvddos 
 
 Havia Mima molhe'r 
 
 Hd alguns bons e outros 
 
 mdos 
 Hd muitas cdsas 
 Hd alguma cousa de ndvo? 
 Hd mdis he Mima hdra 
 Hd muito Umpo 
 Hd p6rto de hiima hora que 
 
 Hie sahio 
 
 There is, or there are 
 There are men so wicked 
 There was a woman 
 There are some good, and 
 
 some bad 
 There are several houses 
 Is there any news ? 
 It is above an hour since 
 Long since 
 It is almost an hour since 
 
 he went out 
 
234 
 
 Hd hum dnno 
 Hd 6uto dias 
 Hd p6rto de 20 Ugoas da 
 
 qui Id 
 Naohd 
 E'lle cuida que nao hd mdis 
 
 que purgdr 
 
 HavSr se, v. r. 
 
 E'lle sdbe c6mo sehd-de ha- 
 v6r, or &lle sdbe cdmo ha 
 de haverse 
 
 Elle hduve-se de mane'ira 
 que, &c. 
 
 PORTUGUESE 
 
 A year ago 
 
 Eight days ago 
 
 It is near upon 20 leagues 
 
 thither 
 There is not 
 He believes that purging is 
 
 all in all, or that purging 
 
 is the only remedy in such 
 
 a case 
 To carry, to behave one's 
 
 self 
 He knows how to behave 
 
 himself 
 
 He behaved himself in such 
 a manner that, <^c. 
 
 N. B. When this verb is used impersonally, it is 
 always followed by the particle de ; as, 
 
 Ha-se de mister dinh6iro Money is wanted 
 
 ffa-sedefazer, or dizSristo This must be done, or said 
 
 Ha-se de fazer o que 6lle People must do what he 
 
 quiz6r pleases 
 
 Hir, a neuter and irregular verb, to go, to walk, 
 to march ; also, to grow, to reach any estate gra- 
 dually, to be going. 
 
 To travel by sea and land 
 How go your concerns ? 
 
 Hir por mar e por iSrra 
 Cdmo vao os vdssos nego- 
 
 cios ? 
 Tudo vdi bem 
 As suas cousas vao muito 
 
 mal 
 Hir d mdo 
 
 Ilir passdndo 
 Hir anddndo 
 
 Hir anddndo, or passdndo 
 
 Que vdi de novo ? 
 Que vdi nisto ? or Snde vdi 
 isto a dar comsigo ? 
 
 All is well, all goes well 
 
 Things go very ill (or very 
 hard) with him 
 
 To hinder, to obstruct, to 
 obviate 
 
 To grow outof fashion or use 
 
 To go on or forward, to 
 keep or hold on his way ; 
 also to proceed, to con- 
 tinue on, to prosecute 
 
 Tc shift, to pass life not 
 quite well, to live though 
 with difficulty 
 
 Is there any thing new ? 
 
 What of all this ? 
 
GRAMMAR, 
 
 235 
 
 Hir debdxo 
 
 Hir para 
 
 Qudnto rnais vdmos para a 
 
 primav6ra, mdiscompri- 
 
 dos sdo os dias 
 Hir de mal para pe6r 
 Hir didnte 
 Hir por didnte 
 Hir ao encontro 
 Hir aofundo 
 Hir e vir 
 
 Naofdgo mdis do que hir e 
 
 voltar 
 Isso ja Id vdi 
 Eilo la vdi 
 Eilo vdi 
 Que vos parSce daquSlla 
 
 molh6r ? eilo vdi 6lla ndo 
 
 hefSa 
 Eilo vdi, fdlga que assim 
 
 seja 
 Como as cdusas agora vad 
 
 Por que pdrte ides ? 
 D6os vd comvosco 
 
 Hir d rdda do mundo 
 
 Hir com algu6m 
 
 E'sla trav6ssa vdi ter d 
 
 rua Idrga 
 E'u o irei ver de caminho 
 
 Hir continudndo o seu ca- 
 minho 
 
 Hirfdra do seu caminho 
 
 Hir hum de huma bdnda, e 
 outro da dutra 
 
 Hir para trdz 
 
 Hir detrdz 
 
 Hir atrdz de alguSm 
 
 Hir em alcdnce de alguSm 
 
 Hir buscdr 
 Hir para dintro 
 
 To come by the worst 
 To approach, to go near 
 The uearer the spring, the 
 longer the days 
 
 To grow worse and worse 
 
 To go before 
 
 To go on, or forward 
 
 To go to meet 
 
 To sink, or fall to the bottom 
 
 To go to and fro, to go and 
 come 
 
 I will not stay, I shall be 
 back presently 
 
 'Tis a thing past and done 
 
 There he goes 
 
 So so, pretty well 
 
 How do you like that wo- 
 man ? She is so so, she 
 may pass 
 
 Well, well, I am glad on't 
 
 As things go now, as the 
 
 world goes 
 Which way d'ye go ? 
 The Lord of heaven go 
 
 with you 
 To go about the world 
 To go along with one 
 This lane goes into the 
 
 broad street 
 I will call upon him as I go 
 
 along 
 To go along 
 
 To go out of one's way 
 To go asunder 
 
 To go backward 
 
 To go behind 
 
 To pursue, to go after one 
 
 To go after one, in order to 
 
 overtake him 
 To go for, or fetch 
 To go in 
 
236 
 
 PORTUGUESE 
 
 Hir para for a 
 Hir peregrindndo 
 HirfazSr hiima embaixdda 
 Hir ver, cantdr, &c. 
 Hirfazer hum negocio 
 Hir com a mar6 
 Hir par a par com alguSm 
 Vdi para qudtro mSses que 
 £u aqui cheguH 
 
 I'de em paz 
 
 t6mpo vai abranddndo 
 Hir (at cards) 
 Hir-se, v. r. 
 
 Hir-se a 6lha, ou a panilla 
 
 Hir-se o enfirmo 
 
 A quarSsma vdi-se aca- 
 
 bdndo 
 Hir«se 
 
 Ndda se vdi mdis depr6ssa 
 
 que o timpo 
 AquSlles mdntes vdo-se es- 
 
 tendSndo 
 Hir-se embdra 
 Esperdi ate que a cdlma se 
 
 va embdra 
 Vdi-te embdra; que ndo 
 
 sdbes engoddr a gSnte 
 Hir-se de huma carta (at 
 
 cards) 
 Vdi-se fazendo tdrde 
 Vdi-se chegdndo a noite 
 Vdi-se chegdndo o tempo 
 
 da s6ga 
 Vai-se acabdndo o meu 
 
 consulado 
 Hir-se escapulindo 
 Hir-se a mdo 
 
 To go out 
 
 To go a pilgrimage 
 
 To go on an embassy 
 
 To go to see, to sing, <^c. 
 
 To go upon a business 
 
 To go with the tide 
 
 To go cheek by jole with one 
 
 It is now going on four 
 
 months since I came 
 
 hither 
 Depart in peace 
 The weather grows mild 
 To go, to lay, to stake, to set 
 To go, to go away, to go 
 
 one's way, to depart, also 
 
 to run, or leak 
 Is for the pot to boil over 
 Is for a sick man to die 
 Lent draws to an end 
 
 To slip, or pass away (as 
 
 time) 
 Nothing goes faster than 
 
 time 
 Those mountains extend, or 
 
 stretch themselves. 
 To go away, also to be over 
 Stay till the heat be over 
 
 Away, or go, you know not 
 
 how to wheedle people 
 To throw away a card 
 
 It grows late 
 
 The night draws on 
 
 It grows near harvest 
 
 My consulship is almost at 
 
 an end 
 To sneak away 
 To refrain, to forbear, to 
 
 abstain 
 
 Hir-se impersonal ; as, vdi-se, they go ; foi-se, 
 they are gone ; hir-se hd, they shall go. 
 
GRAMMAR. 
 
 237 
 
 To 
 
 Senh6r, corno amigo, 
 
 game ofavdr 
 Eu vos p£go, or p6govos 
 Pe'golhe em cortesia 
 Pe'golhe encarecidamente 
 
 Pe'golhe por favor que, &c. 
 Fagame afinSza 
 Pe'golhe perdad 
 
 pray. 
 Dear sir, do me the favour 
 
 I pray you 
 
 I beseech you 
 
 I intreat, or conjure, you to 
 
 do it 
 I beg of you that, <^*c. 
 Do me the kindness 
 I beg your pardon 
 
 Expressions of Kindness, 
 
 Minha vida 
 
 Minha alma 
 
 MSu amdr 
 
 M4u querido, minha querida 
 
 M6u coragdo 
 
 Filho do m€u coragao 
 
 Filha da minha alma 
 
 My life 
 
 My dear soul 
 
 My love 
 
 My little darling 
 
 My dear love, my love 
 
 My dear child 
 
 My little honey 
 
 AgradSgo a vm ce 
 
 JDdu a vm" as agradeci- 
 
 mejitos 
 BSij'o as mads de vm" 
 Fdlo-hei com todo a gdsto 
 Com todo o meu coragdo 
 De miiito bda vontdde 
 Veja vm" se o pdsso servir 
 
 nalgujna cdusa 
 Dispdnha vm" como Ihe 
 
 parecer dSste siu criddo 
 Estdu esperdndo p Silas 6r- 
 
 dens de vm" 
 Ja que vm" assim ordena 
 As drdens de vm ce 
 Fico muito obrigddo a vm" 
 
 Quer vm" que 6u fdga al- 
 
 guma cdusa 
 Sem ceremdnia 
 Nad tern vm" mdis quefallar 
 Fdgame a hour a de me p6r 
 
 aos pCs da snr* 
 
 To shew Civility. 
 
 I thank you 
 
 I give you thanks 
 
 I kiss your hand 
 
 I will do it cheerfully 
 
 With all my heart 
 
 Heartily, willingly 
 
 See if it is in my power to 
 
 serve you 
 Do what you please with 
 
 your servant 
 I wait for your commands 
 
 Since you will have it so 
 
 At your service 
 
 I am very much obliged to 
 you 
 
 Have you any thing to com- 
 mand me 
 
 Without ceremony 
 
 You need but to speak 
 
 Present my respects, or 
 duty, to my fttdy 
 
238 
 
 PORTUGUESE 
 
 Nab sfri cdmo agradecSr a 
 vm" tdntos favores 
 
 Nab sou de comprimentos 
 Deixemos estes comprim6n- 
 
 tos 
 I'sso he o melhor 
 
 I know not how to make a 
 proper return for so many 
 favours 
 
 ] am not for ceremonies 
 
 Away with these ceremonies 
 or compliments 
 
 That is the best way 
 
 To give tokens of Affirmation, Consent, Belief, 
 and Refusal. 
 
 He verddde 
 
 He isso verddde ? 
 
 He muito verddde 
 
 Para dizirvos a verddde 
 
 Com effeito he assim 
 
 Quern duvida disso ? 
 
 Nad ha duvida nisso 
 
 Pareceme que si?n, que nab 
 
 Apdsto que sim 
 
 Apdsto que nab 
 
 Creame vm ce ? 
 
 Estd vm" zomfydndo ? 
 
 Fdlla vm ce de v6ras ? 
 
 Fdllo de v6ras 
 
 Pots, estd fSito 
 
 Pouco a pouco 
 
 I'sso nab he verddde 
 
 Nab ha tal cdusa 
 
 He mentira 
 
 Estdva zombdndo 
 
 Seja muio embdra 
 
 Nab qu6ro 
 
 It is true 
 
 Is it true ? 
 
 It is but too true 
 
 To tell you the truth 
 
 Really it is so 
 
 Who doubts it \ 
 
 There is no doubt of it 
 
 I think so, not 
 
 I Jay it is 
 
 I lay it is not 
 
 Do believe me ? 
 
 Don't you jest? 
 
 Are you in earnest? 
 
 I am in earnest 
 
 Well, let it be so 
 
 Softly, fair and softly 
 
 It is not true 
 
 There is no such thing 
 
 It is a lie 
 
 I did but jest 
 
 Let it be so 
 
 I won't, I will not 
 
 To consult, 
 
 Que se ha defazSr ? 
 
 Que far6mos ? 
 
 Que Ihe parece a vm ce 
 
 eufdga ? 
 Que remedio tern isso ? 
 Fagdmos assim 
 Fagdmos huma cousa 
 Serd melhdr que 
 Seria melhdr que 
 
 What is to be done ? 
 What shall we do ? 
 que What do you advise me to 
 do? 
 What remedy is there for it ? 
 Let us do so, and so 
 Let us do one thing 
 It will be better that 
 It would be better that 
 
GRAMMAR. 
 
 Esperdi hum pduco Stay a little 
 
 Deixdime com isso Let me alone 
 
 Antes quizira I had rather 
 
 Se isso fosse comigo Were I in your place 
 
 Tudo he o mismo It is all one 
 
 Of Eating and Drinking. 
 
 239 
 
 Tinhofdme 
 
 Morro defdme 
 
 Coma vm ce alguma cousa 
 
 Que quer vm ce comer? 
 
 Quir vm" corner mdis ? 
 
 Tinho side 
 
 J a matii afdme 
 
 Tin ho muita side 
 
 Morro de side 
 
 Berne de bebir 
 
 Viva vm" miiitos dnnos 
 
 Eu beberia hum cdpo de 
 
 vinho 
 Poes beba vm ce 
 Te'nho bebido bast ante 
 Nao pdsso beber mais 
 Ja matei a side 
 
 I am hungry 
 
 I am almost starved 
 
 Eat something 
 
 What will you eat ? 
 
 Will you eat any more ? 
 
 I am dry, or thirsty 
 
 I have no more stomach 
 
 I am very dry 
 
 I am almost dead with thirst 
 
 Give me some drink 
 
 I thank you 
 
 I could drink a glass of wine 
 
 Drink then 
 I have drank enough 
 I can drink no more 
 I am no more thirsty, or my 
 thirst is quenched 
 
 Of Going, Coming, Stirring, &c. 
 
 Ddnde vem vm" ? 
 Para onde vai vm ce ? 
 Vinho de ; vou para, or a 
 Quer vm ce subir, ou descir ? 
 
 E'ntre vm c %faya vm ce 
 Nad se bula daqui 
 Chigue se para mim 
 Va-se vm ce 
 Vem cd 
 
 Espire por mim 
 Nad vd tad deprissa 
 Tire-se de didnte de mim 
 Nad me tdque 
 Deixe estdr isso 
 Estou bem aqui 
 A'bra vm? a porta 
 
 From whence do you come? 
 Where do you go ? 
 I come from ; I am going to 
 Will you come up, or come 
 
 down ? 
 Come in, go out 
 Do not stir from hence 
 Come near to me 
 Go your way, be gone 
 Come hither 
 Stay for me 
 Do not go so fast 
 Get you out of my way 
 Do not touch me 
 Let that alone 
 I am well here 
 Open the door 
 
240 
 
 PORTUGUESE 
 
 Fe'che a pdrta 
 
 A' bra, ou fe'che a jane'Ua 
 
 V6nha vm" por aqui 
 Passe por Id 
 Que procura vm et ? 
 Que perd6o vm" ? 
 
 Shut the door 
 
 Open the window, or shut 
 
 the window 
 Come this way- 
 Pass that way 
 What do you look for ? 
 What have you lost ? 
 
 To wish well to a Person, 
 
 O Ceo vos guarde 
 D6os vos dS bdafortuna 
 Dezfy'o-vos t6do o hem 
 
 DSos vos ajude 
 
 Dios vos perdde 
 
 I'de com Deos 
 
 AU vSr-nos 
 
 B6m provtito faga a vm" 
 
 Heaven preserve you 
 God send you good luck 
 I wish you every thing that 
 
 is good 
 God assist you 
 God forgive you 
 God be with you 
 Till I see you again 
 Much good may do you 
 
 To wish ill. 
 
 O didbo te Uve 
 Maldito sfy'as tu 
 Vdipara os quintosinfirnos 
 Vdite enforcdr 
 Eftforcddo sejas tu 
 
 The devil take thee 
 A curse on thee 
 Away, go to hell 
 Go and be hanged 
 Would thou wert hanged 
 
 To swear. 
 
 Assim DSos me sdlve 
 
 Arrebentado sSja €u 
 Em conciencia 
 
 As God shall help me, shall 
 
 save me 
 May I burst 
 In my conscience 
 
 To threaten and insult. 
 
 O'lha que te hei de dar 
 DHxa-te estdr, or cdla-te 
 
 que me has de pagdr 
 Juro que te fargi arre- 
 
 pender disso 
 Se me enfaddres 
 Coiiddo de ti 
 Pducas raz6ens i or cala 
 
 68sa bdca 
 I'sto basta 
 
 Take care, I will beat thee 
 Thou wilt pay it me 
 
 I swear thou shalt repent of 
 
 it 
 If you put me into a passion 
 Woe be to thee 
 Hold your tongue, don't 
 
 speak to me 
 It is enough, it is sufficient 
 
GRAMMAR 
 
 241 
 
 To mock, to blame, and to call one names. 
 
 Que bSlofocinho ! 
 
 Que cdra de m6no ! 
 
 TrapacSiro 
 
 Embusteiro 
 
 Mexeriqueiro 
 
 Que b€lo sogeito 
 
 Velhdco 
 
 Mardto 
 
 Ma casta 
 
 T6nto .. 
 
 Asneirdo 
 
 O the fine snout ! 
 
 What an ape's face ! 
 
 A chicaner 
 
 A cheat, an impostor 
 
 A tale-bearer, a tell-tale 
 
 O the dull thing 
 
 A knave 
 
 A rogue, a rascal 
 
 Cursed race 
 
 Giddy-brains, blunderbuss 
 
 A great beast, a thick-skull 
 
 To admire. 
 
 a D4os ! 
 
 He possivel ! 
 
 Quern teria imaginddo, 
 
 crido, dito 
 Que animal ! 
 Que maravilha ! or que mi" 
 
 Idgre ! 
 Nad me maravilho ! 
 C6mo pdde ser isto! or 
 
 Cdmo he possivel ! 
 Eis aqui cdmo sdo as 
 
 c6usas deste mujido ! 
 
 O God! 
 
 Is it possible ! 
 
 Who would have thought, 
 
 believed, said ! 
 What a beast I 
 
 strange ! 
 
 1 don't wonder 
 How can that be i 
 
 So goes the world ! 
 
 To show Joy and Displeasure. 
 
 Que gdsto ! 
 
 Que gldria ! 
 
 Que alegria ! 
 
 Que contentame'nto he o 
 
 mSu ! 
 Que feliciddde ! 
 Sinto isso 
 Sinto isso na alma 
 Sinto isso no coragao 
 O' que desgrdca he a minha! 
 
 R 
 
 What pleasure ! 
 What glory ! 
 What joy ! 
 How pleased I am ! 
 
 What happiness ! 
 
 I am sorry for it 
 
 That touches my very soul 
 
 It pierces me to the heart 
 
 O how unhappy am I ! 
 
242 
 
 PORTUGUESE 
 
 Affrontdr-me dtsta sdrte ! 
 Assim he que se trdta ? 
 Olha mardto ! 
 Que b6lla cortesia ! 
 Nad deverla tratdr comigo 
 
 de'sta sdrte 
 Par6ce-te hem ? 
 Aprtnde, peddco d* dsno 
 O'tha cdmo me trdta e*ste 
 
 animdl 
 Olhdi que velhdco he Sste 
 Que didbo tern 6llef&ito ? 
 P6is } ainda teimdis ? 
 
 To affront me thus ! 
 
 Do you deal thus ? 
 
 You rogue ! 
 
 O what fine manners ! 
 
 You ought not to treat me 
 
 thus 
 Do you think that well ? 
 Learn, beast as thou art 
 See the brute, how he uses 
 
 me 
 Do you behold that rascal 
 What the devil has hedone ? 
 What, are you obstinate 
 
 still ? 
 
 To call. 
 
 Ouve ! 
 
 Onde estds ? 
 
 Hiima paldvra 
 
 Duas paldvras sominte 
 
 Hark! 
 
 Where art thou ? 
 A word 
 
 I'll speak but two words to 
 you 
 
 To show Uneasiness, Trouble, and Sorrow. 
 
 Sinto or pSsame 
 Deixame 
 
 P6go-te que me deixes 
 Nad me qu6bres a cabSga 
 Ora vdmos, deixame 
 Deixame, vai com Deos 
 Vdite daqui or vdite emb6ra 
 Vai tratdr da tua vida 
 Vdite na ma hdra, or vdite 
 
 co? didbo 
 Nad mefacas a cabica tonta 
 J a me tens dito is so hum 
 
 cento de vezes 
 
 I am sorry 
 Let me be quiet 
 Prithee get thee gone 
 Do not break my head 
 Away, away 
 Go, go, God be with you 
 Get thee gone from hence 
 Go mind your own business 
 Go to the devil 
 
 Do not make me giddy 
 You have told it me a hun- 
 dred times already 
 
 To ask, 
 
 Que n6vas ha ? 
 
 Que he isto ? que hd ? 
 
 What news ? 
 
 What is this, 
 
 matter ? 
 
 what is the 
 
GRAMMAR. 
 
 243 
 
 O'nde ides? 
 
 D6nde vindes ? 
 
 Que quer dizSr ? 
 
 De que stirve ? 
 
 Que vos par See ? 
 
 Quern teve tal atrevimSnto 
 
 Que dizem ? que se diz ? 
 
 Cdmo diz vm ce ? 
 
 Por que nab me responde 
 
 Where are you going ? 
 
 Whence come you ? 
 
 What do you mean ? 
 
 To what purpose ? 
 
 What do you think ? 
 ? Who has been so bold ? 
 
 What do they say ? 
 
 How do you say ? 
 ? Why don't you answer ? 
 
 To forbid. 
 
 Deixdi estar isso 
 Nab toquSis 
 Nab digdis ?iada 
 Guarddivos 
 
 Let that alone 
 Do not touch 
 Say not a word 
 Have a care 
 
 Of speaking, saying, doing, &c. 
 
 Falle vm" alto 
 
 Falle vm" mdnso 
 
 Com quern f alia vm" ? 
 
 Falle vm e comigo ? 
 
 Falle-lhe 
 
 Fdlla vm ct Portuguez ? 
 
 Que diz vm" ? 
 
 Nab digo nada 
 
 Ella nab quer caldr-se 
 
 Ouvi dizSr que 
 
 Assim mo diss6rab 
 Assim dizem 
 Assim dizem todos 
 Quern Iho disse a vm" ? 
 Dissemo o &r. A. 
 Pois tile he que Iho disse 
 Pois 6lla he que o disse ? 
 Qudndo o ouvio vm. di%€r 
 Disserab mo hoje 
 Nab posso crS-lo 
 Que diz elle ? 
 Que vos disse elle ? 
 E'lle nab me disse nada 
 Nab Iho diga vm. 
 E'u Iho direi 
 Nab diga nada 
 Disse vm. aquillo ? 
 
 Speak loud 
 
 Speak low 
 
 Who do you speak to ? 
 
 Do you speak to me ? 
 
 Speak to him, or to her 
 
 Do you speak Portuguese 1 
 
 What do you say ? 
 
 I say nothing 
 
 She will not hold her tongue 
 
 I was told that— — 
 
 I was told so 
 
 They say so 
 
 Every one says so 
 
 Who told it you ? 
 
 Mr. A. told it me 
 ? Did he tell you so ? 
 
 Did she tell it? 
 ? When did you hear it ? 
 
 I heard it to-day 
 
 I can't believe it 
 
 What does he say ? 
 
 What did he say to you ? 
 
 He said nothing to me 
 
 Do not tell him that 
 
 I'll tell him, or her of it 
 
 Say not a word 
 
 Did you say that ? 
 R2 
 
244 P O R T U 
 
 Nad o disse 
 
 Nao disse vm, assim ? 
 
 Que est a vm. faz€ndo ? 
 
 Que tern vm.fe'ito ? 
 
 Nad f ago nada 
 
 Nao Unhofeito nada 
 
 Tern vm. acabddo ? 
 
 Que estd 6llefaz6ndo ? 
 
 Quefaz 6lla ? 
 
 Que quer,ox que ordSna vm ? 
 
 Que Ihefalta ? 
 
 Of understanding 
 
 Entende-o, or perc6be-o vm . 
 
 hem ? 
 Perctbe vm . o que elle disse ? 
 
 Percebe vm. o que elle diz ? 
 
 Eniendeme, or perc6beme 
 
 vm. ? 
 Entendo a vm. muito bem 
 Nao entendo a vm. 
 Sabe vm. a lingua Portu- 
 
 gueza ? 
 Nad a set 
 
 Tem-me vm. percebido ? 
 ^Igdra o perc6bo 
 Nad seperctbe o queille diz 
 
 ParSce gdgo 
 
 Of knowing, or hav 
 
 Sabe vm. isso ? 
 
 Nad o h6% 
 
 Nad sei nada disso 
 
 E'lla bem o sabia 
 
 Porventura nad sabia Slle 
 
 isso ? 
 DSmos que Su o soub6sse 
 E'lle nad saberd ndda disso 
 Elle nunca soubenddadisto 
 
 E'u sdube-o primeiro, or 
 dntes q e vm. o soub6sse 
 
 GUESE 
 
 I did not say it 
 Did you not say so ? 
 What are you doing ? 
 What have you done ? 
 I do nothing 
 I have done nothing 
 Have you done ? 
 What is he doing ? 
 What does she do ? 
 What is your pleasure ? 
 What do you want? 
 
 or apprehending. 
 
 Do you understand him 
 
 well? 
 Did you understand what 
 
 he said ? 
 Do you understand what he 
 
 says ? 
 Do you understand me ? 
 
 I understand you very well 
 I do not understand you 
 Do you understand Portu- 
 guese? 
 I do not understand it 
 Did you understand me ? 
 Now I understand you 
 One cannot understand 
 
 what he utters 
 He speaks like a stammerer 
 
 ing Knowledge of. 
 
 Do you know that? 
 I do not know it 
 I knew nothing of it 
 She knew well of it 
 Did he not know of it ? 
 
 Suppose I knew it 
 
 He shall know nothing of it 
 
 He never knew any thing 
 
 about this 
 I knew it before you 
 
GRAMMAR. 
 
 245 
 
 Is it so, or not? 
 Not that I know of 
 
 He isto assim ou nao ? 
 Nad que 6u saiba 
 
 Of knowing or being acquainted with, forgetting, 
 and remembering. 
 
 ConhSce-o vm. ? 
 Conhece a vm. ? 
 ConhSce-os vm. ? 
 Conhigo-o muito hem 
 Nad os conhego 
 N6s nao nos conhecSmos 
 Conhego- o de vista 
 Conhego-a de nome 
 Elle conhecSo-me muito hem 
 Conh$ce-me vm. ? 
 T4nho-me esqUecido do sSu 
 
 ndme 
 Tem-se vm. esquecido de 
 
 mini? 
 Conhece-vos ella ? 
 ConhSce o Sr. a vm. ? 
 
 Par tee que nao me conhice 
 
 St. hem me conhece 
 
 E'lle ja me nao conkSce 
 T6nho a honra de ser s$u 
 
 conhecido 
 Limbra-se vm. disso ? 
 Nad me limbro disso 
 LSmbro-me muito bem disso 
 
 Of Age, Life, 
 
 Que iddde tern vm. ? 
 Que iddde tern sSu irmao ? 
 T6nho vinte e cinco dnnos 
 Tern vinte e ddus dnnos 
 Vm. tern mdis dnnos do que 
 
 6u 
 Que iddde terd vm. ? 
 He vm. casddo ? 
 Qudntas vSzes tern vm. sido 
 
 casddo ? 
 
 Do you know him ? 
 
 Do you know her? 
 
 Do you know them ? 
 
 I know him very well 
 
 I do not know them 
 
 We do not know one another 
 
 1 know him by sight 
 
 I have heard of her 
 
 He knew me very well 
 
 Do you know T me? 
 
 I have forgot your name 
 
 Did you forget me ? 
 
 Does she know you ? 
 Does the gentleman know 
 
 you? 
 It appears he does not know 
 
 me 
 The gentleman knows me 
 
 well 
 He knows me no more 
 I have the honour to be 
 
 known to him 
 Do you remember that? 
 I do not remember it 
 I do remember it very well 
 
 Death, &c. 
 
 How old are you ? 
 
 How old is your brother ? 
 
 I am five and twenty 
 
 He is twenty-two years old 
 
 You are older than I 
 
 How old may you be ? 
 Are you married ? 
 How often have you been 
 married ? 
 
246 PORTUGUESE 
 
 Qudntas molhe'res tern vm. 
 
 ainda pay, e 
 
 tido ? 
 Tern vm. 
 
 may? 
 Miu pay morrdo 
 Minha may morre'o 
 Ha ddus dmws que miu 
 
 pay morreo 
 Minha mdycasou outra vez 
 Qudntosfilhos tern vm. ? 
 
 Tenho qudtro * 
 
 Filhosy oufilhas? 
 
 T6nho hum filho 9 e ires 
 
 filhas ? 
 Qudntos irmads tern vm. ? 
 
 Nab tenho nenhum vivo 
 
 Todos morrirad 
 
 Todos hav&nos de morr£r 
 
 How many wives have you 
 
 had? 
 Have you father and mother 
 
 still alive ? 
 My father is dead 
 My mother is dead 
 My father has been dead 
 
 these two years 
 My mother is married again 
 How many children have 
 
 you? 
 I have four 
 Sons or daughters ? 
 I have one son and three 
 
 daughters 
 How many brothers have 
 
 you? 
 I have none alive 
 They are all dead 
 We must all die 
 
 Of the word hora, as a Noun as well as an Interjection, 
 
 H6ra 
 
 Eu estarei Id, dentro de 
 
 hiima hora 
 Que horas sad ? 
 Sao s6te hdras 
 A que hdras estareis vds 
 
 la? 
 As horas que for preciso 
 
 Hdras desoccupddas 
 A ultima hdra ou a 
 
 da mdrte 
 Cada hdra 
 De hdra, em hdra 
 Meya hdra 
 Hum qudrto de hdra 
 Huma hdra e mSya 
 P6rto das ndve hdras 
 Hd huma hdra 
 
 Fdra de hdras 
 
 hdra 
 
 An hour, also a particular 
 
 time 
 I will be there within an 
 
 hour 
 What's o'clock ? 
 It is seven o'clock 
 At what hour or time will 
 
 you be there ? 
 In due or good time, at the 
 
 time appointed 
 Leisure hours 
 The last hour, or the dying 
 
 hour 
 Every hour 
 Hourly, every hour 
 Half an hour 
 A quarter of an hour 
 An hour and a half 
 About nine o'clock 
 An hour ago, or an hour 
 
 since 
 Beyond the hour, or very 
 
 late 
 
GRAMMAR. 
 
 247 
 
 A hdra8 
 
 Recolhir-se a boas hdras 
 RecolhSr-sefdra de hdras 
 Hdras de jantar ou de cedr 
 P6rto das hdras de jantar 
 Ainda estdis na cdma a 
 
 6sfas hdras ? 
 O reldgio da hdras 
 Jd d6ra5 dnze hdras 
 Reldgio de hdra 
 Miiito a boas hdras 
 A bdas hdras 
 
 Na md hdra 
 
 Vdi te na ma-hdra 
 
 T6da a hdra que 
 
 A tdda a hdra que quiz6rdes 
 
 Hdra 
 
 Molh6r que dnda para cdda 
 
 hdra 
 Hdras defazir oracdo 
 Hdras de hir d igrSja 
 Hdras de hir para a cdma 
 Hdras de comer 
 Jd nao sdo hdras 
 Chegdr d hdra 
 Estdr esperdndo pella sua 
 
 hdra 
 Nao vir a hdra 
 
 Sdo hdras de, &c. 
 Hdras candnicas 
 
 Hdras 
 
 In time 
 
 To keep good hours 
 
 To keep bad hours 
 
 Dinner, or supper time 
 
 About dinner-time 
 
 Are you a-bed at this time 
 
 of the day? 
 The clock strikes 
 It struck eleven o'clock 
 Hour-glass 
 Early, betimes 
 Ir good time, in time, at 
 
 the time appointed 
 In an ill hour, unluckily, 
 
 unfortunately 
 Go to the devil, go and be 
 
 hanged 
 Whensoever, at what time 
 
 soever 
 At what time you will 
 Time or hour of child-birth 
 A woman near her time 
 
 Prayer-time 
 
 Church-time 
 
 Bed-time 
 
 Times of eating 
 
 The time is past, it is too late 
 
 Is for a person to die 
 
 To wait for God's time 
 
 To long, to desire earnestly, 
 to wish with eagerness 
 continued, with em, or de 
 before the thing desired 
 
 It is time to, fyc. 
 
 The set time for the clergy 
 to say their office ; also 
 those parts of the office 
 itself, called Prime, 
 Tierce, Sixth, None, &c. 
 
 Any little prayer-book, but 
 particularly that in which 
 is the office of the Blessed 
 Virgin 
 
248 PORTUGUESE, &c. 
 
 As quarSnta hdras So they call the space of 
 
 three days, in which the 
 consecrated Host is ex 
 posed and laid to public 
 view 
 
 Horography, account of 
 hours 
 
 Horometry 
 
 C6nta das hdras 
 
 A'rte de dividir o t6mpo em 
 hdras 
 
 Hora as an Adverb and Interjection, 
 
 Hdra deixa-o-hir 
 
 H6ra deixate d6stas par- 
 voices 
 
 Hdra, deix6mo-nos destes 
 comprime'ntos 
 
 Hdra-vdmos, despdxate 
 
 Hdra vdmos, nao ha pe- 
 rigo 
 
 Hdra vdmos, tira daqui 
 isto 
 
 H6ra vdmos, tSm vergdnha 
 
 Hdra, eu nao pdsso sofrdr 
 aquillo 
 
 Hdra hum, hdra outro 
 
 E'lles hdra estdo sdbre hum 
 p6, hdra sdbre dutro 
 
 Hdra, que quer dizir isso ? 
 
 Tudo o que he bdm, d6ve 
 s6r amddo ; hdra, Deos 
 he infinitamSnte bdm, 
 Id go, &c. 
 
 Hdra, havia hum enfSrmo 
 
 Por hdra 
 
 Pray let him go 
 
 Away with these fopperies 
 
 Away with these compli- 
 ments 
 Come, come, make haste 
 Away, there is no danger 
 
 Away with this 
 
 Away for shame 
 I cannot bear that 
 
 Sometimes one, sometimes 
 
 another 
 They stand now on one 
 
 foot, and then on another 
 How now ? 
 All that is good to be loved, 
 
 now God is infinitely 
 
 good, therefore, $c. 
 
 Now there was a sick man 
 At present, for the present, 
 now, at this time 
 
( 249 ) 
 
 VOCABULARY 
 
 OP 
 
 WORDS most used in DISCOURSE. 
 
 Do Ceo e dos Elementos. 
 
 DEOS 
 
 Jesus Christo 
 
 O Espirito Sdnto 
 
 A Trinddde 
 
 A Virgem 
 
 Os dnjos 
 
 Os archdnjos 
 
 Os sdntos 
 
 Os bemaventur&dos 
 
 O c6o 
 
 O par aiso 
 
 Inf'6rno 
 
 Purgatorio 
 
 Os diabos 
 
 O/dgo 
 
 O dr 
 
 A Urra 
 
 O mdr 
 
 O s6l 
 
 A lua 
 
 As estrGUas 
 
 Os rdios 
 
 Of the Heavens and the 
 
 Elements 
 GOD 
 
 Jesus Christ 
 The Holy Ghost 
 The Trinity 
 The Virgin 
 The angels 
 The arch-angels 
 The saints 
 The blessed 
 Heaven 
 Paradise 
 Hell 
 
 Purgatory 
 The devils 
 The fire 
 The air 
 The earth 
 The sea 
 The sun 
 The moon 
 The stars 
 The rays 
 
250 
 
 PORTUGUESE 
 
 As nuvens 
 
 The clouds 
 
 vdnto 
 
 The wind 
 
 A chuva 
 
 The rain 
 
 trovao 
 
 Thunder 
 
 reldmpago 
 
 The lightning 
 
 Sardiva 
 
 Hail 
 
 rdyo 
 
 The thunderbolt 
 
 A n6ve 
 
 The snow 
 
 A gedda 
 
 The frost 
 
 carameh 
 
 The ice 
 
 orv&lho 
 
 The dew 
 
 N6voa 
 
 A fog, or mist 
 
 Nevo6iro 
 
 A thick fog 
 
 O terremdto 
 
 The earthquake 
 
 diluvio 
 
 The deluge, or flood 
 
 caldr 
 
 The heat 
 
 Ofrio 
 
 The cold 
 
 Do T3mpo. 
 
 Of Time. 
 
 Odia 
 
 The day 
 
 A ndite 
 
 The night 
 
 MSyo dia 
 
 Noon 
 
 MSya ndite 
 
 Midnight 
 
 A manh&a 
 
 The morning 
 
 Despdis do miyo dia 
 
 The afternoon 
 
 Huma hdra 
 
 An hour 
 
 Hum quarto de hdra 
 
 A quarter of an hour 
 
 MSya hdra 
 
 Half an hour 
 
 Tres quartos de hdra 
 
 Three-quarters of an hour 
 
 H6je 
 
 To-day 
 
 Ontem 
 
 Yesterday 
 
 Amanhaa 
 
 To-morrow 
 
 Antes d? dntem 
 
 The day before yesterday 
 
 Depots de amanhaa 
 
 After to-morrow 
 
 Depots de jantdr 
 
 After dinner 
 
 Depdis de cia 
 
 After supper 
 
 Huma semdna 
 
 A week 
 
 Hum mes 
 
 A month 
 
 Hum dnno 
 
 A year 
 
 Dia sdnto 
 
 A holy-day 
 
 Dia de trabdlho 
 
 A working day 
 
 nascSr do sdl 
 
 The sun-rising 
 
 pdr do sdl 
 
 The sun-set 
 
GRAMMAR. 
 
 TSmpo de stga, or da aceifa The harvest 
 TSmpo de vindima The vintage 
 
 251 
 
 Das Estacoens do T6mpo. 
 
 Of the Seasons 
 
 A primavfra 
 
 The spring 
 
 verdo 
 
 The summer 
 
 outSno 
 
 Autumn 
 
 invSrno 
 
 Winter 
 
 Os Dias da Semana. 
 
 The Days of the JR 
 
 Domingo 
 
 Sunday 
 
 Segunda feira 
 
 Monday 
 
 TSrga feira 
 
 Tuesday 
 
 Quartet feira 
 
 Wednesday 
 
 QuintafSira 
 
 Thursday 
 
 Seorta feira 
 
 Friday 
 
 Sabado 
 
 Saturday 
 
 Dos M6ses. 
 
 Of the Months 
 
 Janeiro 
 
 January 
 
 FeverSiro 
 
 February 
 
 Mdrgo 
 
 March 
 
 Abril 
 
 April 
 
 Mdyo 
 
 May 
 
 Junho 
 
 June 
 
 Julho 
 
 July 
 
 Agosto 
 
 August 
 
 Setembro 
 
 September 
 
 Outubro 
 
 October 
 
 NovSmbro 
 
 November 
 
 Dezembro 
 
 December 
 
 Dias Santos. 
 
 Dia de Anno bom 
 
 Dia de R6ys, a Epiphania 
 
 A Candeldria 
 
 Holy-Days of the Year. 
 
 New Year's Day 
 Twelfth Day 
 Candlemas Day 
 
252 
 
 PORTUGUESE 
 
 Purificagdd 
 
 The Purification 
 
 Entriido 
 
 The Carnival, orShrovetide 
 
 Qudrtafeira da Cinzas 
 
 Ash Wednesday 
 
 A Quar6sma 
 
 The Lent 
 
 Annunciagdb 
 
 Lady day in March 
 
 As Quatro TSmporas 
 
 The Ember Weeks 
 
 A Semdna sdnta 
 
 The Holy Week 
 
 Domingo de Ramos 
 
 Palm Sunday 
 
 Qudrtafeira de Trevas 
 
 Wednesday before Easter 
 
 QuintafSira de Endoencas 
 
 Maunday Thursday, the 
 
 
 last Thursday in Lent 
 
 S6stafSira da Paixdo 
 
 Good Friday 
 
 Pdscoa da Resurreygdo 
 
 Easter Day 
 
 Assumpgdo de N. S a . 
 
 Lady-Day in harvest 
 
 As Rogagdens, or Ladain- 
 
 Rogation Week 
 
 has 
 
 
 Ascensao 
 
 The Ascension 
 
 Pentecdste 
 
 The Pentecost, or Whitsun- 
 
 
 tide 
 
 Via do Cdrpo de D6os 
 
 Corpus Christi Day 
 
 Dia de S. Jodo 
 
 Midsummer Day 
 
 Dia de S. PSdro 
 
 Lammas Day 
 
 Dia de tddos os Sdntos 
 
 All Saints Day 
 
 Dia dos Fiiiddos 
 
 All Souls 
 
 Dia de S. Martinho 
 
 Martinmas 
 
 Dia de Natdl 
 
 Christmas Day 
 
 Vigilia, or vSspera 
 
 The eve 
 
 Da Igreja e Dignidades 
 
 Of the Church and Eccle- 
 
 Ecclesiasticas. 
 
 siastical Dignities. 
 
 A ndve 
 
 The aisle of the church 
 
 Zimbdrio 
 
 The dome 
 
 Pindculo 
 
 Pinnacle 
 
 C6ro 
 
 The choir 
 
 Capttla 
 
 The chapel 
 
 Estdnte 
 
 A reading desk, or choris- 
 
 
 ter's desk 
 
 Sacristia 
 
 The vestry 
 
 Campandrio, or t6rre dos 
 
 The belfry, or steeple 
 
 sinos 
 
 
 Sino 
 
 The bell 
 
 Baddlo 
 
 The clapper of the bell 
 
 Pia 
 
 The font 
 
 ffysdpe 
 
 A sprinkler 
 
GRAMMAR. 
 
 253 
 
 Confessiondrio 
 
 Tribuna 
 
 Cemite'rio 
 
 Carneiro 
 
 Altar 
 
 Frontal 
 
 Pallio 
 
 Todlha do altar 
 
 Missdl 
 
 Sotdna 
 
 Sobrepelliz 
 
 Roquete 
 
 O papa. 
 Hum cardedl 
 Hum patridrca 
 Hum arcebispo 
 Hum bispo 
 Hum legddo 
 Vice legddo 
 Hum nuncio 
 Hum prelddo 
 Hum commendaddr 
 Hum abbdde 
 Huma abbadissa 
 Hum prior 
 Hum reitdr 
 Beneficiddo 
 
 Frdde % or religidso 
 Coroa 
 
 Hum guardido 
 Hum definidor 
 Hum provincial 
 Hum gerdl 
 Hum vigdrio 
 Hum vigdrio gerdl 
 Hum dedo 
 Hum arcedidgo 
 Didcono 
 Subdidcono 
 Hum cdnego 
 Arcipr6ste 
 Hum cUrigo 
 
 A confession seat 
 
 A tribune, or gallery 
 
 A church-yard, a burying- 
 place 
 
 A charnel 
 
 An altar 
 
 An antipendium 
 
 A canopy 
 
 The altar cloth 
 
 A missal, a mass-book 
 
 A cassock 
 
 A surplice 
 
 A short surplice, a bishop's 
 surplice 
 
 The pope 
 
 A cardinal 
 
 A patriarch 
 
 An archbishop 
 
 A bishop 
 
 A legate 
 
 A vice-legate 
 
 A nuncio 
 
 A prelate 
 
 A commander 
 
 An abbot 
 
 An abbess 
 
 A prior 
 
 A rector 
 
 Beneficed clergyman, or in- 
 cumbent 
 
 A friar 
 
 A shaven crown 
 
 A guardian 
 
 A definitor 
 
 A provincial 
 
 A general 
 
 A vicar 
 
 A vicar-general 
 
 A dean 
 
 Archdeacon 
 
 Deacon 
 
 A sub-deacon 
 
 A canon 
 
 Arch-priest 
 
 A priest 
 
254 
 
 Capellao 
 
 Hum esmoUr 
 
 Hum pdrroco 
 
 Beneficio simples 
 
 Fr6ira 
 
 Hum prtgador 
 
 Sacristdo, or sancristdo 
 
 Menino do cdro 
 
 PORTUGUESE 
 
 A chaplain 
 
 An almoner 
 
 A curate 
 
 Sinecure 
 
 A nun 
 
 A preacher, or lecturer 
 
 A sexton, a vestry-keeper 
 
 A singing boy 
 
 N6mes das cousas que ge- 
 
 Names of things mosi 
 
 ralraente se comem. 
 
 usually eaten. 
 
 Pad 
 
 
 Bread 
 
 A'goa 
 
 
 Water 
 
 Vinho 
 
 
 Wine 
 
 Cdrne 
 
 
 Meat, or flesh 
 
 P6ixe 
 
 
 Fish 
 
 Cdrne cozida 
 
 
 Boiled meat 
 
 Cdrne agdda 
 
 
 Roast meat 
 
 Hum bocddo de 
 
 pad 
 
 A mouthful of bread 
 
 Hum pasUl 
 
 - 
 
 A pye 
 
 S6pa 
 
 
 Soup 
 
 Cdldo 
 
 
 Broth 
 
 Saldda 
 
 
 A sallad 
 
 Mdlho 
 
 
 Any kind of sauce to dip 
 
 
 
 in, provoking appetite 
 
 Fruta 
 
 
 Fruit 
 
 Queijo 
 
 
 Cheese 
 
 Manteiga 
 
 
 Butter 
 
 Do Servico de huina Mesa. 
 
 A mSsa 
 Huma cadeira 
 A todlha da misa 
 Todlha de maos 
 Hum guardandpo 
 Humafdca 
 Hum gdrfo 
 Huma colhe'r 
 Hum prdto 
 Hum saleiro 
 Galheta do vindgre 
 Galheta do azeite 
 
 Of the Covering of the Table, 
 
 The table 
 
 A chair 
 
 The table-cloth 
 
 A towel 
 
 A napkin 
 
 A knife 
 
 A fork 
 
 A spoon 
 
 A plate 
 
 A saltseller 
 
 A vinegar-bottle, or cruet 
 
 A cruet, or vial for oil 
 
GRAMMAR. 
 
 255 
 
 TalHr 
 
 A cruet-stand 
 
 AssucarSiro 
 
 Sugar-basin 
 
 Bayx6lla ou servigo de 
 
 A set of silver plate 
 
 , pr&ta 
 
 
 Hiima cuMrta 
 
 A cover 
 
 Prdto, guardandpo, fdca, 
 
 A course 
 
 gdrfo, colh6r (tudo junto) 
 
 
 Jdrro 
 
 The ewer 
 
 Huma bacia 
 
 A basin 
 
 Hum cdpo 
 
 A glass 
 
 Huma garrdfa 
 
 A bottle 
 
 Huma tdga 
 
 A cup 
 
 Castigdl 
 
 A candlestick 
 
 Vtla 
 
 A candle 
 
 Tesduras de espevitdr 
 
 Snuffers 
 
 Huma sdlva 
 
 A salver 
 
 Huma escudella 
 
 A porringer 
 
 C6sto pdra p6r o pdd 
 
 A bread-basket 
 
 Donz6lla 
 
 A dumb-waiter 
 
 Faqu6iro 
 
 A case for knives 
 
 Lduga de Bdrro 
 
 Earthen ware 
 
 Lduga de estdnho 
 
 Pewter 
 
 Do Corner, e Beber. 
 
 Of Eating and Drinking. 
 
 Vdca 
 
 Beef 
 
 Carn6iro 
 
 Mutton 
 
 vmiia 
 
 Veal 
 
 Cord6iro 
 
 Lamb 
 
 Gallinha 
 
 Hen, a fowl 
 
 Gdllo 
 
 Cock 
 
 Peru 
 
 A turkey 
 
 Almdndegas 
 
 Force meat balls 
 
 jantdr 
 
 The dinner 
 
 Almogo 
 
 Breakfast 
 
 Cea 
 
 Supper 
 
 Merenda 
 
 The afternoon's luncheon 
 
 Consodda 
 
 A light supper, as upon a 
 
 
 fast-day 
 
 Banquette 
 
 An entertainment, a banquet 
 
 F6me 
 
 Hunger 
 
 Sede 
 
 Thirst 
 
 Fastio 
 
 A loathing 
 
 Pdo 
 
 Bread 
 
256 
 
 PORTUGUESE 
 
 Pdbfrisco, or pdb mdlle 
 
 Pad quGnte 
 
 Pad de tddafarinha 
 
 Pad brdncOy or pdb alvo 
 
 Arrdz 
 
 Pdb de rdla 
 
 Pao de cevdda 
 
 Pad de cent6o 
 
 Pdb de avSa 
 
 Pdb de milho miudo 
 
 Pdd de milho grdnde, ou 
 
 de maiz 
 Pdb livedo 
 Pdb dsmo 
 Biscduto 
 Migdlha de pdb 
 Fatia de pdd 
 Cddea de pdd 
 Mdssa 
 Tdrta 
 R6sca 
 Estofddo 
 Fi&mbre 
 
 Cdrne assdda $6bre grtthas 
 Cdrnefrita 
 
 Pic&do, or cdrne picdda 
 Javaliy or p6rco monUz 
 Presiinto 
 Pdrco 
 Cabrito 
 Toucinho 
 Hum Idmbo 
 Maos de carneiro 
 Fressura, or forgur a 
 Cachdla de porco 
 Li?iguiga, or lingoiga 
 Ckourigo de sdngue de 
 
 pdrco 
 Fricass6 
 Figado 
 L6ite 
 Ndta 
 Sdro 
 
 Bequeijdd 
 Coalhdda 
 
 New bread 
 A hot loaf 
 Common bread 
 White bread 
 Rice 
 
 Brown bread 
 Barley bread 
 Rye bread 
 Oaten bread 
 Millet bread 
 Indian corn bread 
 
 Leavened bread 
 
 Unleavened bread 
 
 Biscuit 
 
 A crumb of bread 
 
 A slice of bread 
 
 A crust of bread 
 
 Dough 
 
 A tart 
 
 Bread made like a roll 
 
 Stewed meat 
 
 Cold meat 
 
 Broiled meat 
 
 Fried meat 
 
 Sausage meat 
 
 A wild boar 
 
 Ham, gammon of bacon 
 
 Pork 
 
 Kid 
 
 Bacon 
 
 A loin 
 
 Sheep's trotters 
 
 A pluck 
 
 A pig's head 
 
 A sausage 
 
 Black-pudding 
 
 A fricassee 
 
 Liver 
 
 Milk 
 
 Cream 
 
 Whey 
 
 A kind of new cheese 
 
 Curdled milk 
 
GRAMMAR, 
 
 257 
 
 6vo 
 
 G6mma do 6vo 
 Clara do 6vo 
 6vo fresco 
 6vo mdlle 
 6vo duro 
 6vo assddo 
 6vo gallddo 
 6vos redes 
 
 6vos escalfddos 
 
 6vos fritos 
 
 6vos mexidos, e fritos 
 
 Bolinhdlo 
 
 6vas de peixe 
 
 D6ces 
 
 ConfSitos 
 
 Marmeldda 
 
 An egg 
 
 The yolk of an egg 
 
 The white of an egg 
 
 A new -laid egg 
 
 A soft egg 
 
 A hard egg 
 
 A roasted egg 
 
 An egg with a chicken in it 
 
 Sweet eggs spun out like 
 
 hairs 
 Poached eggs 
 Fried eggs 
 An amlet 
 A fritter 
 The roes offish 
 Sweetmeats 
 Comfits 
 Marmalade 
 
 O que se A'ssa. 
 
 Hum capad 
 Hiimafrdnga 
 Humfrdngo 
 Pdmbos 
 Pdmbo trocdz 
 
 Gallinhola 
 
 Huma espe'cie de galli- 
 nhdla pequena dqualos 
 Castelhdnoschamao gal- 
 lineta ci6ga 
 
 Perdiz 
 
 Tdrdo 
 
 Faisdo 
 
 Faisaosinho 
 
 Hum leitdo 
 
 Veddo 
 
 Hum coSlko 
 
 Ldparo 
 
 L6bre 
 
 Adem 
 
 Gdnso, or o mdcho da ddem 
 
 Pdta 
 
 Pdto 
 
 S 
 
 That which is roasted* 
 
 A capon 
 A pullet 
 A chicken 
 Pigeons 
 
 A wood culver, or wood- 
 pigeon 
 A woodcock 
 A snipe 
 
 A partridge 
 
 A thrush 
 
 A pheasant 
 
 A pheasant-powt 
 
 A roasting-pig 
 
 A stag 
 
 A rabbit 
 
 A young coney 
 
 A hare 
 
 A duck 
 
 A drake 
 
 Goose [goose 
 
 Gander, the male of the 
 
258 
 
 PORTUGUESE 
 
 CaUidndra 
 
 
 A sky-lark 
 
 Codorniz 
 
 
 A quail 
 
 De 6utros Passaros. 
 
 Of other Birds. 
 
 A'guia 
 
 
 An eagle 
 
 A'guia ndva 
 
 
 An eaglet 
 
 Abutre 
 
 
 A vulture 
 
 Abestrus 
 
 
 An ostrich 
 
 Esmerilhab 
 
 
 A merlin 
 
 Gavidb 
 
 
 A sparrow-hawk 
 
 M6cho 
 
 
 The horned owl 
 
 Falcdo 
 
 
 A falcon 
 
 Falcdo que ainda nab v6a 
 
 A jass-hawk 
 
 Gerifdlte 
 
 
 A ger-falcon 
 
 Sdcre 
 
 
 A saker, a saker-hawk 
 
 Garga 
 
 
 A heron 
 
 MelharuQo 
 
 
 Tomtit 
 
 Gargtita 
 
 
 A little heron 
 
 Milhdno, or milhdfre 
 
 A kite 
 
 Corvo 
 
 
 A crow, or raven 
 
 Grdlha 
 
 
 A rook 
 
 Grdlho 
 
 
 A jack-daw 
 
 AlvUoa or rabUa 
 
 A wag-tail 
 
 Candrio 
 
 
 A canary-bird 
 
 Pintacilgo 
 
 
 A gold-finch 
 
 ftttrlo 
 
 
 A black-bird 
 
 Tentilhdd 
 
 
 A chaffinch 
 
 Houxin6l 
 
 
 A nightingale 
 
 Verdelhdb 
 
 
 A green-bird 
 
 Papagdyo 
 
 
 A parrot 
 
 F6ga 
 
 
 A magpie 
 
 Estorninho, or 
 
 zorzdl 
 
 A starling 
 
 Francelho 
 
 
 A hobby, a musket 
 
 MScho 
 
 
 Owl 
 
 Coruja 
 
 
 A screech owl 
 
 MorcSgo 
 
 
 A bat 
 
 A've nocturna, 
 
 cdmo m6lro, 
 
 A goat milker 
 
 que mdma as cobras 
 
 
 Ofrancolim 
 
 
 A godwit, a moor-cock 
 
 Bufo 
 
 
 A night crow, or raven 
 
 CercSta 
 
 
 A teal 
 
 C6tvq morinho 
 
 
 A cormorant 
 
GRAMMAR. 
 
 259 
 
 Gaiv6ta 
 
 A moor-hen, or gull 
 
 Gaivdo ' 
 
 A martlet, or martin, a kind 
 
 
 of swallow 
 
 Andorinha 
 
 A swallow 
 
 Mergulhad 
 
 A dive, or didapper 
 
 Marr6ca 
 
 A wild-duck 
 
 Pic&nqo 
 
 A wren, a little bird 
 
 Taralhdo 
 
 A kind of ortolan 
 
 Pavdo 
 
 A peacock 
 
 Pavoa 
 
 A pea-hen 
 
 Ardra 
 
 A macaw 
 
 Parddl 
 
 A sparrow 
 
 Kola 
 
 A turtle-dove 
 
 Alcyon 
 
 A king's fisher 
 
 Cegonha 
 
 A stork 
 
 Ciico 
 
 A cuckow 
 
 Cisne 
 
 A swan 
 
 Pintarr6xo 
 
 A red robin 
 
 Grou 
 
 A crane 
 
 Pavoncino 
 
 A lapwing 
 
 Pelic&no 
 
 A pelican 
 
 Tarambdla 
 
 A plover 
 
 Pisco 
 
 A bull-finch, or red-tail 
 
 Para os Dias de Peixe, ou 
 
 For Fish Days, or Fast 
 
 de Jejum. 
 
 Days, 
 
 S6pa de 6rvas, &c. 
 
 Soup meagre, or lenten 
 
 
 pottage 
 
 Peixe 
 
 Fish 
 
 P6ixe do mar 
 
 Sea-fish 
 
 P6ixe do rio, ou da dgoa 
 
 Fresh-water fish 
 
 doce 
 
 
 Sdvel 
 
 A shad 
 
 Anch6va 
 
 An anchovy 
 
 Anguia, or Enguia 
 
 An eel 
 
 Bdrbo 
 
 A barbel 
 
 Lucio 
 
 A pike, or jack 
 
 Cdrpe 
 
 A carp 
 
 Siba 
 
 A cuttle 
 
 Lula 
 
 A calamary 
 
 Cdbra 
 
 The miller's thumb 
 
 Gordz 
 
 A rochet, or roach 
 
 Cdngro 
 
 A conger [the gilt head 
 
 Dourdda 
 
 Dorado, St. Peter's fish, or 
 
 s 
 
 2 
 
260 
 
 PORTUGUESE 
 
 Linguddo 
 
 A sole 
 
 Lagdsta 
 
 A lobster 
 
 Borddlo 
 
 A sturgeon ; some call it 
 
 
 shad-fish 
 
 Mugem 
 
 A mullet 
 
 Rodovdlho 
 
 A byrt or turbot 
 
 S&rda 
 
 A sort of little mackarel 
 
 Cavdlla 
 
 A mackarel 
 
 Sardinha 
 
 A pilchard 
 
 Bacalhdo 
 
 Dry cod 
 
 ArrSnque 
 
 A herring 
 
 Voaddr 
 
 A flying-fish 
 
 ArrSnque defdmo 
 
 A red herring 
 
 ArrSnque com 6vas 
 
 A hard-rowed herring 
 
 Pescdda 
 
 A kind of cod fish 
 
 Caddz 
 
 A gudgeon 
 
 Ostra 
 
 An oyster 
 
 Lamprea 
 
 A lamprey 
 
 Lamprea pequSna 
 
 A lampern 
 
 Pdrco marinho 
 
 A porpoise 
 
 P6lvo 
 
 Pourcontrell or many-feet 
 
 P6rca 
 
 Perch 
 
 Tinea 
 
 A tench 
 
 TrMa 
 
 A trout 
 
 Atiim 
 
 * A tunny-fish 
 
 Salman 
 
 A salmon 
 
 Carmarao 
 
 A shrimp, or pawn 
 
 Carangue'jo 
 
 A crab 
 
 Amiijoa 
 
 A cockle 
 
 Ervilhas 
 
 Pease 
 
 Fdvas 
 
 Beans 
 
 Espindfres 
 
 Spinage 
 
 Alcachdfras 
 
 Artichokes 
 
 Espdrgo 
 
 Asparagus 
 
 C6uve 
 
 Cabbage, colewort 
 
 Bepdlko 
 
 Summer cabbage 
 
 Ndbos 
 
 Turnips 
 
 Grelos de cduve 
 
 Sprouts 
 
 Cduve crespa 
 
 Curled colewort 
 
 Couve Fl6r 
 
 Cauliflower 
 
 Beldro6gas 
 
 Purslane 
 
 CenSuras 
 
 Carrots 
 
 CUgas, or aMgas 
 
 Beets 
 
 Tomdte8 
 
 Love-apples 
 
GRAMMAR. 
 
 261 
 
 Para temparar o Corner. 
 
 To season Meat with. 
 
 Sal 
 
 Salt 
 
 Piminta 
 
 Pepper 
 
 Pimentdo 
 
 Cayan pepper 
 
 AzHte 
 
 Oil 
 
 Vindgre 
 
 Vinegar 
 
 Mostdrda 
 
 Mustard 
 
 Crdvo da India 
 
 Cloves 
 
 ■Canela 
 
 Cinnamon 
 
 Loureiro 
 
 Laurel 
 
 Alcapdrras 
 
 Capers 
 
 Cogumdlos 
 
 Mushrooms 
 
 Tubara da ttrra 
 
 Truffles 
 
 Cebdlas 
 
 Onions 
 
 Our6gao 
 
 Organy 
 
 Fiincho' 
 
 Fennel 
 
 Cebolinhas 
 
 Young onions 
 
 A'lho 
 
 Garlick 
 
 Lardnjas 
 
 Oranges 
 
 Limoens 
 
 JLiemons 
 
 Pinhoens 
 
 The kernels of a pine-appl 
 
 Perreil 
 
 Wild parsley 
 
 Sdlsa 
 
 Garden parsley 
 
 Or tela a 
 
 Mint 
 
 Aipo 
 
 Cellery ' 
 
 A'lho porro 
 
 Leek 
 
 CoSntro 
 
 Coriander 
 
 Acafrdm 
 
 Saffron 
 
 Cominhos 
 
 Cummins 
 
 Para Salada. 
 
 For a Salad. 
 
 Almeirao 
 
 Wild succory 
 
 Almeirao hortSnse, or era- 
 
 Endive 
 
 divia 
 
 
 Alfdce 
 
 Lettuce 
 
 Chicdria 
 
 Succory 
 
 Agridens 
 
 Water cresses 
 
 Mastritgos or masthrcos 
 
 Cresses 
 
 Cerefdlio 
 
 Chervil 
 
 Rdbao 
 
 Raddish root 
 
262 
 
 PORTUGUESE 
 
 Para Sonibremesa. 
 
 Afagads 
 
 Piras 
 
 PSra bergamdta 
 
 PScegos 
 
 CamoSza 
 
 Albricdque 
 
 CerSjas 
 
 Cerejas de sdco 
 
 Gin j as 
 
 Ginja garrafdl 
 
 Lardnja da China 
 
 U'vas 
 
 Pdssas de uva 
 
 Uva espim 
 
 Figos 
 
 Figos lampos 
 
 Ame'ixas 
 
 Pdssas de amttxas 
 
 Am6ras de garca, or de 
 
 sylva 
 Amor as quendcem de Mima 
 
 sorte de sylva tSnra 
 Amdras que ndcem da 
 
 amorSira 
 MarmUos 
 Romdas 
 Lima 
 Azeitdnas 
 Am€ndoas 
 NSsperas 
 Melao 
 
 Melancia, or balancia 
 Castdnhas 
 N6zes 
 Aveldns 
 Mordngos 
 Medrdnho 
 
 Tdmara 
 
 For the Dessert. 
 
 Apples 
 
 Pears 
 
 A bergamot pear 
 
 Peaches 
 
 A pippin 
 
 Apricot 
 
 Cherries 
 
 Hard cherries 
 
 Sour cherries 
 
 A very large sort of cherry, 
 
 the fruit of the dwarf 
 
 cherry-tree 
 China-orange 
 Grapes 
 Raisins 
 Gooseberries 
 Figs * 
 The first figs that come in 
 
 May 
 Plums 
 Prunes 
 Blackberries 
 
 Raspberries 
 
 Mulberries 
 
 Quinces 
 
 Pomegranates 
 
 A lime 
 
 Olives 
 
 Almonds 
 
 Medlars 
 
 A melon 
 
 Water-melon 
 
 Chesnuts 
 
 Walnuts 
 
 Hazel nuts 
 
 Strawberries 
 
 A sort of fruit they have in 
 Portugal like a straw- 
 berry, said to intoxicate 
 
 A date 
 
GRAMMAR. 
 
 263 
 
 Fistico 
 
 A pistache-nut 
 
 Alfarrdba 
 
 A carob 
 
 Boldta 
 
 A sweet acorn 
 
 $6rva 
 
 Service 
 
 Agqfeifa, or magdd de na- 
 
 A jubub 
 
 fega 
 
 
 D6ces 
 
 Sweet-meats 
 
 Das A'rvores e Arbtistos. 
 
 Of Trees and Shrubs. 
 
 Damasqueiro 
 
 An apricot-tree 
 
 Amendoeira 
 
 An almond-tree 
 
 Cerej'Sira 
 
 A cherry-tree 
 
 CastanhSiro 
 
 A chesnut-tree 
 
 CidrSira 
 
 A citron-tree 
 
 SorvHra 
 
 A service-tree 
 
 Palmeiro, 
 
 A palm-tree 
 
 FiguSira 
 
 A fig-tree 
 
 MarmelSiro 
 
 A quince-tree 
 
 MacHra 
 
 An apple-tree 
 
 MacSira da ndfega 
 
 A jubub-tree 
 
 RomSira 
 
 A pomegranate-tree 
 
 Limo&iro 
 
 A lemon-tree 
 
 AmorSira 
 
 A mulberry-tree 
 
 OlivSira 
 
 An olive-tree 
 
 NesperSira 
 
 A medlar-tree 
 
 LaranjHra 
 
 An orange-tree 
 
 Murta 
 
 Myrtle 
 
 NoguSira 
 
 A walnut-tree 
 
 Zambuj&ira 
 
 A wild olive-tree 
 
 E'ra 
 
 Ivy 
 
 PeceguSiro 
 
 A peach-tree 
 
 RosSira 
 
 A rose-bush 
 
 Ameixiiira 
 
 A plum-tree 
 
 PerSira 
 
 A pear-tree 
 
 Rosmaninho 
 
 Rosemary 
 
 PinhSiro 
 
 A pine-tree 
 
 Gritsta 
 
 Broom 
 
 Dos Reptis, e Animaes am- 
 
 Of Reptiles and Amphi- 
 
 phibios. 
 
 bious Creatures. 
 
 Minhdca 
 
 An earth-worm 
 
 SerpGnte 
 
 A serpent 
 
264 
 
 PORTUGUESE 
 
 SerpSnte com dzas 
 
 A flying serpent 
 
 A'spide 
 
 An asp 
 
 Cdbra 
 
 A snake 
 
 Cdbra de case av 61 
 
 A rattle-snake 
 
 Vibora 
 
 A viper 
 
 Lagdrto 
 
 A lizard 
 
 C/sga 
 
 An evet, eft, or newt 
 
 Alacrdo 
 
 A scorpion 
 
 Crocodilo 
 
 A crocodile 
 
 Jacare", or crocodilo da 
 
 An alligator 
 
 America 
 
 
 Castdr 
 
 A bearer 
 
 Cdgado 
 
 A land tortoise 
 
 Ldntra 
 
 An otter 
 
 Dos InsSctos. 
 
 Of Insects. 
 
 Ardnha 
 
 A spider 
 
 Formiga 
 
 A pismire or ant 
 
 Caracdl 
 
 A snail 
 
 Pad 
 
 A frog 
 
 Sdpo 
 
 A toad 
 
 Ougdo 
 
 Hand-worm 
 
 Escarav6lho 
 
 A beetle 
 
 Caruncho 
 
 Wood-worm 
 
 Piolho, or lagdrta da hor* 
 
 Caterpillar 
 
 talica 
 
 
 Cigdrra 
 
 Grasshopper 
 
 Borboleta 
 
 A butterfly 
 
 Grillo 
 
 A cricket 
 
 Piolho 
 
 A louse 
 
 Pidlho Iddro 
 
 Crab-louse 
 
 Lendea 
 
 A nit 
 
 Pulga 
 
 A flea 
 
 Mosca 
 
 A fly 
 
 Persovejo 
 
 A bug 
 
 Carrapdto 
 
 A tick 
 
 Gafanhdto 
 
 A locust 
 
 Polilha, or trdca 
 
 Moth 
 
 Vespa, or abespora 
 
 A wasp 
 
 AbUlia 
 
 A bee 
 
 Zdngo, or Zangdo 
 
 A drone 
 
 Tavao 
 
 An ox fly 
 
 B6y de 2)6os 
 
 A lady-bird 
 
 Mosquito 
 
 A gnat 
 
GRAMMAR. 
 
 265 
 
 Graos de Parentesco. 
 
 Pdy 
 
 May 
 
 Av6 
 
 Av6 
 
 Bisavd 
 
 Bisavd 
 
 Filho 
 
 Filha 
 
 Irmdo 
 
 Irmda 
 
 Primog6nito 
 
 filho mats m6go 
 
 Tio 
 
 Tia 
 
 Sobrinho 
 
 Sobrinha 
 
 Primo 
 
 Prima 
 
 Primo com irmdo 
 
 Prima com irmda 
 
 Cunhdclo 
 
 Cunhdda 
 
 Meyo irmda 
 
 Sdgro 
 
 Sdgra 
 
 Padrdsto 
 
 Madrdsta 
 
 Enteddo 
 
 Entedda 
 
 Genro 
 
 N6ra 
 
 Neta 
 
 N6to 
 
 BisnMo 
 
 Bisn6ta 
 
 Consdrte, masc. and fem. 
 
 Marido 
 
 Molh6r 
 
 Irmdo g6meo 
 
 Coldgo, or irmdo de Uite 
 
 Bastdrdo 
 
 Compddre 
 
 Degrees of Kindred. 
 
 Father 
 
 Mother 
 
 Grandfather 
 
 Grandmother 
 
 Great grandfather 
 
 Great grandmother 
 
 Son 
 
 Daughter 
 
 Brother 
 
 Sister 
 
 The eldest son 
 
 The youngest son 
 
 Uncle 
 
 Aunt 
 
 Nephew 
 
 Niece 
 
 Cousin 
 
 A female cousin 
 
 The male first cousin 
 
 The female first cousin 
 
 Brother-in-law 
 
 Sister-in-law 
 
 Half-brother 
 
 Father-in-law 
 
 Mother-in-law 
 
 A step-father 
 
 A step-mother 
 
 A step-son 
 
 A step-daughter 
 
 A son-in-law 
 
 A daughter-in-law 
 
 A grand-daughter 
 
 A grand-son 
 
 A great grand-son 
 
 A great grand-daughter 
 
 A consort 
 
 Husband 
 
 Wife 
 
 A twin-brother 
 
 A foster-brother 
 
 A bastard 
 
 A male-gossip 
 
266 
 
 PORTUGUESE 
 
 Comddre 
 
 A female gossip 
 
 Afilhddo 
 
 A god-son 
 
 Afilhdda 
 
 A god-daughter 
 
 Padrinho 
 
 A god-father 
 
 Madrinha 
 
 A god-mother 
 
 parSnte 
 
 A male relation 
 
 A parSnte 
 
 A female relation 
 
 ParGnte por affiniddde, or 
 
 A kin, a relation either of 
 
 consanguinidade 
 
 affinity or consanguinity 
 
 Dos differeutes G6neros de 
 
 Of the Conditions of Man 
 
 Estado de hum Homera, 
 
 and Woman, as well as 
 
 ou de huma Molher, e das 
 
 of their Qualities. 
 
 suas Qualidades, 
 
 
 Hum hdmem 
 
 A man 
 
 Huma molhe'r 
 
 A woman 
 
 Hum hdmem de iddde 
 
 An aged man 
 
 Huma molh6r de iddde 
 
 An aged woman 
 
 Hum v6lho 
 
 An old man 
 
 Huma velha 
 
 An old woman 
 
 Hum mdgo, ou ?nancSbo 
 
 A young man 
 
 Huma rapariga 
 
 A girl 
 
 Hum amdnte 
 
 A lover 
 
 Huma amiga 
 
 A mistress 
 
 Huma cridnga, ou menino 
 
 A child, a little child 
 
 Hum rapdz 
 
 A boy 
 
 Hum rapazinho 
 
 A little boy 
 
 Huma menina 
 
 A little girl 
 
 Huma donz6lla 
 
 A maiden 
 
 Hiima virgem 
 
 A virgin 
 
 A'mo 
 
 " A master 
 
 A'ma 
 
 A mistress 
 
 Criddo 
 
 A male-servant 
 
 Cridda 
 
 A female-servant 
 
 Cidaddo 
 
 A citizen 
 
 Rustico 
 
 A countryman 
 
 Hum estrangHro 
 
 A stranger, or foreigner 
 
 Hum viuvo 
 
 A widower 
 
 Huma viuva 
 
 A widow 
 
 Hum herd6iro 
 
 An heir 
 
 Huma herd6ira 
 
 An heiress 
 
 Solt6iro 
 
 A bachelor 
 
 Estddo de solUiro 
 
 Bachelorship 
 
GRAMMAR. 
 
 267 
 
 Hdrnem casddo 
 
 A married man 
 
 Molhe'r casdda 
 
 A married woman 
 
 Molh6r que estd de pdrto 
 De'slro 
 
 A lying-in woman 
 Dexterous 
 
 Agudo 
 Recatddo 
 
 Sharp 
 Cautious 
 
 Astuto, or velhdco 
 EspGrto, or vivo 
 Ddudo 
 
 Cunning, sly, crafty 
 
 Sprightly 
 
 Mad 
 
 Malicidso 
 
 Malicious 
 
 Timido 
 
 Fearful 
 
 Valerdso 
 
 Brave 
 
 T6nto 
 EmbusUiro 
 
 Stupid 
 Deceitful 
 
 Gross6iro 
 
 Clownish 
 
 Bern criddo 
 
 Well-bred 
 
 CorUz 
 
 Courteous 
 
 Justo 
 
 Just 
 
 Desavergonhddo 
 Impertinenie 
 Importiino 
 Descuidddo 
 
 Impudent 
 Impertinent 
 Troublesome 
 Careless 
 
 Temerdrio 
 
 Rash 
 
 Constdnte 
 
 Constant 
 
 Devdto 
 
 Devout 
 
 DiligSnte [sivo 
 Miser icordi6so t or compas- 
 
 Diligent 
 Merciful 
 
 Paciente 
 
 Patient 
 
 Ambicidso 
 
 Ambitious 
 
 Cobigdso 
 Sober bo 
 
 Covetous 
 Proud 
 
 Cobdrde 
 
 Coward 
 
 Lisonj6iro 
 Goloso 
 
 A flatterer 
 Glutton 
 
 Desledl 
 
 Treacherous 
 
 Desagradecido 
 Inhumdno 
 
 Ungrateful 
 Inhumane 
 
 Insolente 
 
 Insolent 
 
 Luxurioso 
 
 Lewd 
 
 Teimoso 
 
 Positive, stubborn 
 
 Preguigoso 
 Prddigo 
 Molher&ngo 
 Atrevido 
 
 Slothful 
 Prodigal 
 Given to women 
 Bold 
 
 AUgre 
 
 Merry 
 
268 
 
 PORTUGUESE 
 
 Que tern ciumes 
 
 Adiiltero 
 
 Salteador 
 
 Mataddr 
 
 MurmuradSr 
 
 Calumniad6r 
 
 Feitice'iro 
 
 Traiddr 
 
 Malvddo 
 
 Reb6lde 
 
 Ptrfido 
 
 B6bo 
 
 Mentir6so 
 
 Altivo 
 
 Cdxo 
 
 Estropeddo das mads 
 
 C6go 
 
 M6uco or sitrdo 
 
 Canhdto, or esquirdo 
 
 Mudo 
 
 Jealous 
 
 Adulterer 
 
 A highwayman 
 
 A murderer 
 
 A censurer 
 
 A calumniator 
 
 A sorcerer 
 
 A traitor 
 
 Wicked 
 
 A rebel 
 
 Perfidious 
 
 A buffoon 
 
 A liar 
 
 Haughty 
 
 Lame of the legs 
 
 Lame of the hands 
 
 Blind 
 
 Deaf 
 
 Left-handed 
 
 Dumb 
 
 Dos Moradores de huma 
 Cidade. 
 
 Fiddlgo 
 
 Ndbre 
 
 Mecdnico 
 
 Tendeiro 
 
 Mercaddr, or hdmem de ne- 
 
 gdcio 
 O vMgo, or a pMbe 
 Candlha, or a mdis vil 
 
 g6nte da pMbe 
 Official 
 
 Jornattiro 
 Ourives 
 
 Ourives do 6uro 
 Livrtiro 
 Impressdr 
 Barbttro 
 Mercaddr de sSda 
 Mercaddr de pdnno 
 
 Of the Inhabitants of a 
 City. 
 
 A nobleman 
 A gentleman 
 A mechanic 
 A shop-keeper 
 Merchant, or tradesman 
 
 The mob 
 The rabble 
 
 A workman, a man that 
 
 labours with his hands 
 A journeyman 
 A silver-smith 
 A gold-smith 
 A book-seller 
 A printer 
 A barber 
 A mercer 
 A woollen-draper 
 
GRAMMAR. 
 
 269 
 
 Mercaddr de pdnno, de tin- 
 
 ho, e roupas da India, or 
 fanqueiro 
 Alfay&te 
 
 Alfaydte remenddo 
 Costureira, 
 
 Chapeleiro, or Sombreireiro 
 Sapat6iro 
 
 Remenddo (sapaUiro) 
 FerrGiro 
 Alveit&T 
 Cerralheiro 
 Parteira 
 M6dico 
 Charlatdo 
 
 Cirurgidm, or surgido 
 Tira dentes 
 Selleiro 
 Carpenteiro 
 Pioneiro, or gastaddr (in 
 
 an army) 
 PadSiro 
 Carniceiro 
 Fruteiro 
 Molher que vSnde verduras 
 
 on ortalicas 
 Pasteleiro 
 
 Taverneiro, or vendeiro 
 Cervejeiro, or o quefaz cer- 
 
 veja 
 Estalajadeiro 
 Bofarinhiiro 
 Melojoeiro 
 Pregoeiro 
 
 Joyeiro, or joyalheiro 
 Boticdrio 
 Vidraceiro 
 Carvoeiro 
 Jardineiro 
 Letrddo 
 Procurador 
 Advogddo 
 Juiz 
 
 Carcereiro 
 Carrdsco 
 
 A linen-draper 
 
 A tailor 
 
 Botcher 
 
 A sempstress 
 
 A hatter 
 
 Shoemaker 
 
 A cobler 
 
 A blacksmith 
 
 Farrier 
 
 A locksmith 
 
 A midwife 
 
 A physician 
 
 A quack 
 
 A surgeon 
 
 A tooth- drawer 
 
 A sadler 
 
 A carpenter 
 
 A pioneer 
 
 A baker 
 A butcher 
 A fruiterer 
 A herb woman 
 
 A pastry-cook 
 A vintner 
 A brewer 
 
 An inn-keeper 
 
 A pedlar 
 
 A watch-maker 
 
 A crier 
 
 A jeweller 
 
 An apothecary 
 
 A glazier 
 
 A coal-man 
 
 A gardener 
 
 A lawyer 
 
 A solicitor 
 
 An advocate, or a pleader 
 
 A judge 
 
 A gaoler 
 
 A hangman 
 
270 PORTUGUESE 
 
 Maridla A porter 
 
 Os cinco Sentidos. 
 
 A vista 
 O ouvido 
 O olfacto 
 O g6sto 
 O tacto 
 
 The five Senses. 
 
 The sight 
 The hearing 
 The smell 
 The taste 
 The feeling 
 
 As Partes do C6rpo Hu- 
 mano. 
 
 Cabega 
 
 Midlos, or ce'rebro 
 
 Toutigo 
 
 TeSta 
 
 Molleira 
 
 Fdntes 
 
 Orilha 
 
 Cartildgem 
 
 Timpano 
 
 Sobrance'lha 
 
 Pdlpebras, or Cap6llas dos 
 
 dlhos 
 Pestdnas 
 Lagrimdl 
 A'lvo do olho 
 Meninas dos 6lhos 
 Nariz 
 
 Magda do fdsto 
 V€ntas 
 Sdpto, or diaphrdgmo do 
 
 nariz 
 A pdnta do nariz 
 A bdca 
 Os dSntes 
 A gengiva 
 A lingoa 
 Paddr, paladdr, or c6o da 
 
 bdca 
 Queixdda 
 A bdrba 
 
 The Parts of the Human 
 Body. 
 
 The head 
 
 The brains 
 
 The hinder part of the head 
 
 The forehead 
 
 The mould of the head 
 
 The temples 
 
 The ear 
 
 The gristle, or cartilage 
 
 The drum of the ear 
 
 Eye-brow 
 
 The eye-lid 
 
 The eye-lashes 
 
 The corner of the eye 
 
 The white of the eye 
 
 The eye-balls 
 
 The nose 
 
 The ball of the cheeks 
 
 The nostrils 
 
 The gristle of the nose 
 
 The tip of the nose 
 
 The mouth 
 
 The teeth 
 
 The gum 
 
 Tongue 
 
 The roof, or palate of the 
 
 mouth 
 The jaw 
 The chin 
 
GRAMMAR, 
 
 271 
 
 As bdrbas 
 
 Bigddes 
 
 O pescogo 
 
 A niica 
 
 A gargdnta 
 
 Siyo 
 
 T6ta 
 
 Pttto 
 
 Bico de piito 
 
 Estdmago 
 
 CosUlas 
 
 Embigo 
 
 Barriga 
 
 Verilha 
 
 O brdgo 
 
 O cotovelo 
 
 Sobdco, or sovdco 
 
 A mao 
 
 Pulso 
 
 A pdlma da mao 
 
 Os dSdos 
 
 O d&do polegdr 
 
 dedo mostrador 
 
 DSdo do meyo 
 
 Dido annular 
 
 Dido meninho, or minimo 
 
 Pontas dosdidos 
 
 Juntas, e nos dos dSdos 
 
 Dedo do p6 
 
 A iinha 
 
 As cdstas 
 
 Os dmbros 
 
 Ilhdrgas 
 
 As nddegas 
 
 C6xa 
 
 Joelho 
 
 Barriga da pirna 
 
 Espinhdgo 
 
 Tornozelo 
 
 Opt 
 
 Sdla do p6 
 
 coragdd 
 
 Os bdfes 
 
 The beard 
 
 Whiskers 
 
 The neck 
 
 The nape of the head 
 
 The throat 
 
 The bosom 
 
 The pap 
 
 The breast 
 
 The nipple 
 
 The stomach 
 
 The ribs 
 
 The navel 
 
 The belly 
 
 The groin 
 
 The arm 
 
 The elbow 
 
 The arm-pit 
 
 The hand 
 
 The wrist 
 
 The palm of the hand 
 
 The fingers 
 
 The thumb 
 
 The fore-finger 
 
 The middle-finger 
 
 The ring-finger 
 
 The little-finger 
 
 The tips, or tops of the fin- 
 gers 
 
 The joints, and knuckles of 
 the fingers 
 
 A toe 
 
 The nail 
 
 The back 
 
 The shoulders 
 
 The sides 
 
 The buttocks 
 
 The thigh 
 
 The knee 
 
 The calf of the leg 
 
 The ridge-bone of the back' 
 
 The ancle 
 
 The foot 
 
 The sole of the foot 
 
 The heart 
 
 The lungs 
 
272 
 
 PORTUGUESE 
 
 Ofigado 
 
 Obdgo 
 
 Os ri7is 
 
 A bdca do estdmago 
 
 As tripas 
 
 0/61 
 
 A mddre 
 
 Bewiga 
 
 Sdngue 
 
 Ciispo 
 
 Ourina 
 
 Excremfoito 
 
 Su6r 
 
 Mdnco or rdnho 
 
 L&grima 
 
 Car&pa, or cdspa 
 
 The liver 
 
 The spleen 
 
 The kidneys 
 
 The pit of the stomach 
 
 The guts 
 
 The gall 
 
 The womb 
 
 The bladder 
 
 The blood 
 
 Spittle 
 
 Urine 
 
 Dung 
 
 Sweat or perspiration 
 
 Mucus 
 
 Tear 
 
 Scurf 
 
 Dos Vestidos. 
 
 Hum vestido 
 
 Cabelleira 
 
 Cravdta 
 
 Chap6o 
 
 A'bas do chapeo [chapeo 
 
 Cordao, ou fita, para o 
 
 BarrGte 
 
 Capdte 
 
 Gibdo 
 
 V6stia, or colSte 
 
 Camisa 
 
 Casdca 
 
 Casacdo 
 
 Calcdens 
 
 Cerdulas 
 
 M$as, or mSyas 
 
 MSas de cabrestilho 
 
 Ligas 
 
 Sapdtos 
 
 Chin6las 
 
 B6tas 
 
 Five'las 
 
 Esporas 
 
 Pimhos 
 
 Tdlim, or taly 
 
 Of Cloaths. 
 
 A suit of cloaths 
 
 A wig 
 
 A cravat or neckcloth 
 
 A hat 
 
 The brims 
 
 A hatband 
 
 A cap 
 
 A cloak 
 
 A doublet 
 
 A waistcoat 
 
 A shirt 
 
 A coat 
 
 A great coat 
 
 Breeches 
 
 Drawers 
 
 Stockings 
 
 Stirrup stockings 
 
 Garters 
 
 Shoes 
 
 Slippers 
 
 Boots 
 
 Buckles 
 
 Spurs 
 
 Ruffles 
 
 A shoulder-belt 
 
GRAMMAR 
 
 273 
 
 Boldri6 
 
 A sword-belt 
 
 Expdda 
 
 A sword 
 
 Luvas 
 
 Gloves 
 
 Cinta 
 
 A girdle 
 
 LSngo 
 
 Handkerchief 
 
 L&ngo para o pesc6go 
 
 A neck-handkerchief 
 
 Samdrra, or pelldte do 
 
 A shepherd's jacket 
 
 cdmpo 
 
 
 Para Molheres. 
 
 For Women, 
 
 Cctmisa de molhires 
 
 A shift, or smock 
 
 Toucddo 
 
 A head-dress 
 
 Sdya 
 
 A petticoat 
 
 Mantilha 
 
 A little cloak women wear 
 
 
 on their heads 
 
 Mdnto 
 
 A mantle, a kind of cloak 
 
 
 women wear in Portugal, 
 
 
 coveringtheir head andthe 
 
 
 upper part of their body 
 
 Aventdl 
 
 An apron 
 
 BraceUtes 
 
 Bracelets 
 
 AnH 
 
 Ring 
 
 Brincos 
 
 Ear-rings 
 
 L6que 
 
 A fan 
 
 Penteaddr 
 
 A combing cloth 
 
 Toucaddr 
 
 A toilet, a dressing table 
 
 Sindes 
 
 Patches to wear on one's face 
 
 Esp6lho 
 
 A looking-glass 
 
 Regdlo 
 
 A muff 
 
 Espartilho 
 
 Stays 
 
 P6nte 
 
 A comb 
 
 AlfinStes 
 
 Pins 
 
 Tesdura 
 
 A pair of scissars 
 
 Dedal 
 
 A thimble 
 
 Agiilha 
 
 A needle 
 
 Fio 
 
 Thread 
 
 Fio de pirolas 
 
 A necklace of pearls 
 
 Polvilhos 
 
 Powder 
 
 J6yas 
 
 Jewels 
 
 C6r 
 
 Paint 
 
 Palito 
 
 A tooth-pick 
 
 R6ca 
 
 A distaff 
 
 Fuso 
 
 The spindle 
 
 Almofadinhapara alfinStes 
 
 Small pincushion 
 
274 
 
 PORTUGUESE 
 
 Asriitha de toucdr 
 
 Bodkin 
 
 Fitas 
 
 Ribbons 
 
 Fichu (sdrte de l&ico para 
 
 A necklace 
 
 o pescdgo) 
 
 
 Tenazinhas 
 
 Nippers 
 
 Pendentes 
 
 Bob, or pendant 
 
 Palatina 
 
 Tippet 
 
 Gudrda infante, or Guard 
 
 Farthingale, or hoop 
 
 infante 
 
 
 Feo 
 
 Veil 
 
 Renda 
 
 Lace 
 
 Bilros 
 
 Bobbins 
 
 Bilros feitos de 6sso 
 
 Bones 
 
 A'goa da rainha de Ungria 
 
 Hungary water 
 
 A'goa de cheiro 
 
 Scented water 
 
 Justilho 
 
 Bodice 
 
 Os doze Signos Celestes. 
 
 The twelve Celestial Signs. 
 
 Aries 
 
 Aries, or the ram 
 
 Touro 
 
 The bull 
 
 G6mini or Ge'minis 
 
 The twins 
 
 Cancer 
 
 The crab 
 
 Leao 
 
 The lion 
 
 Virgem 
 
 The virgin 
 
 Libra 
 
 The balance 
 
 Escorpido 
 
 The scorpion 
 
 Sagitdrio 
 
 The archer 
 
 Capricdrnio 
 
 The goat 
 
 Aqudrio 
 
 The water-bearer 
 
 Peixes 
 
 The fishes 
 
 De htima C&sa e do que 
 
 Of a House, and all that 
 
 lhe perteace. 
 
 belongs to it. 
 
 Cdsa 
 
 A house . 
 
 Alic6rse 
 
 Foundation 
 
 Paride 
 
 A wall 
 
 Tabique 
 
 A light brick-wall 
 
 Pdteo, or Pdtio 
 
 A court, or yard 
 
 Anddr, or sobrddo 
 
 A floor 
 
 Fachdda 
 
 The front 
 
 Jan6lla 
 
 A window 
 
GRAM M A R. 
 
 275 
 
 Abobada 
 
 A vault 
 
 As escddas 
 
 The stairs 
 
 Degrdos 
 
 Steps 
 
 Telhddo 
 
 A tiled roof 
 
 Telhas 
 
 Tiles 
 
 Ladrilkos, or tijolos 
 
 Bricks 
 
 Sdla, or quarto 
 
 A room 
 
 Antecdmara 
 
 Antichamber 
 
 Sdla 
 
 A hall 
 
 T6cto 
 
 A roof 
 
 Alcova 
 
 An alcove 
 
 Balcdo 
 
 A balcony 
 
 GabinSte 
 
 Closet 
 
 Almdrio 
 
 A cupboard 
 
 Gudrda-roupa 
 
 Wardrobe 
 
 Ad6ga 
 
 A cellar 
 
 Cozinha 
 
 A kitchen 
 
 Desp&nsa 
 
 A pantry 
 
 Chemin6 
 
 A chimney 
 
 Cavallariga 
 
 The stable 
 
 Gallinh6iro i or cdsa das 
 
 A hen-house 
 
 gallinhas 
 
 
 Poleiro 
 
 A hen-roost 
 
 Jar dim 
 
 A garden 
 
 Necessdria 
 
 Water-closet 
 
 Cdsa de jantdr 
 
 A dining-room 
 
 Quarto de cdma 
 
 Bed-chamber 
 
 Anddr rente da Rua 
 
 A parlour 
 
 Porta 
 
 The door 
 
 Postigo 
 
 A wicket 
 
 Limindr, or lumidr 
 
 The threshold 
 
 Clara bdia 
 
 Sky-lights 
 
 Algeroz 
 
 The gutter tile 
 
 Beiras, or abas do telhddo 
 
 The eaves 
 
 A couceira da porta 
 
 The hinges 
 
 Fechadura 
 
 A lock 
 
 Cadeddo 
 
 A padlock 
 
 Ferrolho 
 
 The bolt 
 
 Trdnca da pdrta 
 
 The bar of a door 
 
 Cdno da chdve 
 
 The pipe of a key 
 
 Chdve m6stra 
 
 A master-key 
 
 Gudrdas da fechadura 
 
 The wards of a lock 
 
 Palketdo da chdve 
 
 Key bit 
 
 Vidrdqa 
 
 The glass of a window 
 
 Escddafeita a carrac6l 
 
 A winding stair-case 
 
 T 
 
 2 
 
276 
 
 Escdda secr£ta 
 
 Viga 
 
 Parede m6stra 
 
 Parades mfyas 
 
 A'rca 
 
 Cdma 
 
 Sobrecto da cdma 
 
 Cortinas da cdma 
 
 Lengdes 
 
 Cabeceira da cdma 
 
 P6z da cdma 
 
 Cdlcha 
 
 Colchao 
 
 Cobertdr 
 
 Cobertdr defelpa 
 
 Cam a de Armagao 
 
 Travesseiro 
 
 TapSte 
 
 Tapegaria 
 
 PedernSira 
 
 I'sca 
 
 M6cha 
 
 Enxergao 
 
 Estiira 
 
 Cdens da chemin6 
 
 Fdlles 
 
 Tendzes 
 
 F6rra 
 
 Abdno, or abanaddr 
 
 Panttla 
 
 TSsto 
 
 A'za da panSlla 
 
 F6rro para atigdr o liime 
 
 EscumadHra 
 
 Colhir grdnde 
 
 CaldSira 
 
 Sertdd, o r frigidSira 
 
 Coaddr 
 
 Gr6lha$ 
 
 Rdlo 
 
 EspSto 
 
 Almofariz 
 
 Mao do almofariz 
 
 PORTUGUESE 
 
 Back-stairs, a private stair- 
 case 
 A beam 
 The main wall 
 The party walls 
 Chest 
 Bed 
 
 The bed's tester 
 Bed curtains 
 Sheets 
 
 The bed's head 
 Bed's feet 
 
 Counterpane, a quilt 
 A matrass 
 A blanket 
 A rug 
 Bedstead 
 A pillow 
 A carpet 
 Tapestry 
 A flint 
 Tinder 
 Match 
 A straw-bed 
 A mat 
 Hand-irons 
 Bellows 
 Tongs 
 A shovel 
 Fire-pan 
 A pipkin 
 The pot-lid 
 
 The ear of a pot, or pipkin 
 A poker 
 A skimmer 
 A ladle 
 A kettle 
 A frying pan 
 A cullender, or strainer 
 Gridiron 
 A grater 
 A spit 
 A mortar wherein things 
 
 are pounded 
 A pestle 
 
GRAMMAR. 
 
 277 
 
 Eeddma 
 
 Bdlde 
 
 Sabao - 
 
 Rodllha 
 
 Esfregdo 
 
 Fdrno 
 
 Pa do fdrno 
 
 Vasculho para alimpar o 
 
 fdrno 
 Farinha 
 Trinchdnte 
 Morddmo 
 Escudeiro 
 Camareiro m6r 
 Escova 
 Vassdura 
 Despenseiro 
 Pdgem 
 Lacdyo 
 Cocheiro 
 Cocheira 
 M6go dos cavdllos, ou da 
 
 estrebaria 
 Copeiro 
 
 Escudeiro de huma fiddlga 
 A'mo, ou senhor da cdsa 
 A'ma, ou senhdra da cdsa 
 Grimpa 
 
 A vial 
 
 A bucket, or pail 
 
 Soap 
 
 A kitchen towel 
 
 A dish-clout 
 
 Oven 
 
 The peel of the oven 
 
 A maukin, a coal-rake to 
 
 make clean an oven 
 Meal-flour 
 A carver 
 A steward 
 A valet-de-chambre 
 A chamberlain 
 A brush 
 A broom 
 A steward 
 A page 
 A footman 
 A coachman 
 A coach-house 
 A groom 
 
 A butler 
 
 A lady's gentleman usher 
 
 The master of the house 
 
 The mistress of the house 
 
 Weather-cock 
 
 C6res. 
 
 Colours. 
 
 Brdnco 
 Azul 
 
 Azul ceUste 
 Azulferrete 
 Azul cldro 
 C6r de camurga 
 Amarilo 
 C6r de rdsa 
 C6r de pdlha 
 Virde 
 
 C6r de verde mar 3 ou virde 
 cldro 
 
 White 
 Blue 
 
 Sky-colour 
 Dark blue 
 Light blue 
 Light yellow 
 Yellow 
 Rosy colour 
 Straw colour 
 Green 
 Sea-green 
 
278 
 
 PORTUGUESE 
 
 Cdr vermSlha, or Incamada 
 Cdr vermSlha muito viva, 
 
 or car min 
 Cdr de cdrne 
 Cdr carmesin 
 Cdr nSgra, or prSta 
 Cdr de 11161 
 Furta cdres 
 Cdr viva 
 Cdr triste 
 Cdr escura 
 Cor carregdda 
 Cor defdgo 
 Pdrdo 
 Cor de cinza 
 Escarldta 
 Leonddo 
 Cor de lardnja 
 Cor de azeitdna 
 Roxo 
 Roxo, or cor de aurdra 
 
 Red colour 
 
 Carmine, a bright red colour 
 
 Flesh colour 
 
 Crimson red 
 
 Black colour 
 
 A dark yellow 
 
 A deep changeable colour 
 
 A lively and gay colour 
 
 A dull colour 
 
 A dark colour 
 
 A deep colour 
 
 Fire colour 
 
 Grey 
 
 Ash colour 
 
 Scarlet 
 
 Tawney 
 
 Orange colour 
 
 Olive colour 
 
 Purple, violet 
 
 Aurora colour 
 
 R6xo sometimes signifies red or rosy colour ; particularly 
 in poetry, as in Camdens, Canto I. Stanza 82. 
 
 Para que ao PortuguSz se Ihe iorndsse, 
 Em roxo sdngue a dgoa, que bebesse. 
 
 Animaes. 
 
 Beasts, 
 
 Besta dome's tic a 
 
 Besta brdva 
 
 BSsta de cdrga 
 
 BSsta de s6lla 
 
 Gddo 
 
 Gddo grdsso 
 
 Gddo miudo 
 
 Rebdnho 
 
 Mandda de gddo grdsso 
 
 Tduro 
 
 BezSrra 
 
 Bez6rro 
 
 B6y 
 
 Tame beast 
 
 A wild beast 
 
 A beast of burthen 
 
 A beast for the saddle 
 
 Cattle 
 
 Great cattle 
 
 Small cattle 
 
 A flock 
 
 A herd of big cattle 
 
 A bull 
 
 Heifer 
 
 A calf, a steer, a young 
 
 bullock 
 An ox 
 
GRAMMA R. 
 
 27 ( J 
 
 Burro 
 
 Burr a 
 
 Pdrco 
 
 Porca 
 
 Fdca 
 
 E'goa 
 
 Cria 
 
 Pdtra 
 
 Cavdllo 
 
 Cavdllo anao 
 
 Cavdllo de pdsta 
 
 Garranhdo, or cavdllo de 
 
 langamSnto 
 Cavdllo de alugiUl 
 Cavdllo de cdche 
 Cavdllo que dnda de chduto 
 Cavdllo pequeno que s6rve 
 
 para senhdras 
 Cavdllo que tdma o freio 
 
 entre denies 
 Cavdllo rijo da bdca 
 Cavdllo ddce de freio 
 
 Cavdllo que tern boa b6ca 
 
 Cavdllo que tropessa 
 Cavdllo espantadiqo 
 Cavdllo ardgnte, or fogdzo 
 Cavdllo que morde e da 
 
 educes 
 Cavdllo rebelldo 
 Cavdllo que naosdffre dncas 
 
 Cavdllo mal mandddo 
 Cavdllo de albdrda 
 Cavdllo de cdrro 
 Cavdllo de s6lla 
 Cavdllo de corrSr 
 Cavdllo de gu6rra 
 Cavdllo ajaezddo 
 Cavdllo de Barbaria 
 Cavdllo cap ado 
 Cavdllo sem ser capddo 
 Cavdllo que da aos fdlles 
 
 An ass 
 
 A she-ass 
 
 A hog, or pig 
 
 A sow 
 
 A young mare, also a nag 
 
 A mare 
 
 A foal, a filly 
 
 A colt, or young horse 
 
 A horse 
 
 A nag 
 
 A post-horse 
 
 A stallion 
 
 A hackney-horse 
 A coach-horse 
 A jolting-horse 
 A palfrey 
 
 A horse that champs the bit 
 
 A hard-mouthed horse 
 
 A tender-mouthed horse, 
 
 one that easily submits to 
 
 the curb 
 A horse that will eat any 
 
 thing 
 A stumbling-horse 
 A startling-horse 
 A fiery horse 
 A biting and kicking horse 
 
 An untamed horse 
 
 A horse that will not carry 
 
 double 
 A restive horse 
 A pack-horse 
 A cart-horse 
 A saddle-horse 
 A race-horse 
 A war-horse 
 
 A horse with all his furniture 
 A Moorish horse, a barb 
 A gelding 
 A stone-horse 
 A broken-winded horse 
 
280 
 
 PORTUGUESE 
 
 Cavdllo qualrdlvo 
 
 Cavdllo alazdo 
 Car alio bdio 
 Cavdllo castdnho 
 Cavdllo bdio e castdnho 
 Cavdllo rocim 
 Cavdllo remendddo 
 Cavdllo rudo or russo por- 
 
 celldno 
 Cavdllo que sdffre ancas 
 Cavdllo trolao 
 Cavdllo que s6rve para an- 
 
 ddr a. ctica 
 Cavdllo que dnda de furta 
 
 passo 
 Cdo 
 
 Cdo de quinta 
 Cdo de cdga 
 Cdo de dgoa 
 Cdo de gddo 
 Cdo de mdstra, pddengo, or 
 
 perdigueiro 
 Cdo defila 
 Cfyo sacaddr 
 Cdo de busca 
 Aldo 
 Gdlgo 
 Cdo para cagdr rap6zas e 
 
 Idntras 
 Cachorrinho 
 Cachorrinho defrdlda 
 Cachdrro 
 Macho, or mulo 
 Miila 
 Cdrga 
 
 C6rga de Ires dnnos 
 Cdrga de ddus dnnos 
 Cdrga 
 
 Cdrga ou cdra </e hum dnno 
 Gdmo 
 Veddo 
 
 Cdbra montiz [nos 
 
 Veddo grdnde de cinco dn- 
 Doninha 
 
 A horse that has four white 
 
 feet 
 A sorrel horse 
 A bay horse 
 
 A chesnut-coloured horse 
 A chesnut bay 
 A worthless nag, a poor jade 
 A dapple horse 
 A dapple-grey horse 
 
 A double horse 
 A trotting-horse 
 A hunter 
 
 A pad, an easy-paced horse 
 
 A dog 
 
 A house-dog 
 
 A hound 
 
 A water spaniel 
 
 A shepherd's dog 
 
 A setting dog 
 
 A great cur, a mastiff dog 
 
 A dog tumbler 
 
 A finder 
 
 A bull-dog 
 
 A greyhound 
 
 A terrier 
 
 A little puppy, a whelp 
 
 A lap-dog 
 
 A little dog 
 
 A he-mule 
 
 A she-mule 
 
 A she-deer, a doe 
 
 A spade 
 
 A pricket 
 
 A wild buck 
 
 A fawn 
 
 A fallow deer 
 
 A stag 
 
 A wild she-goat 
 
 A hart 
 
 A weasel 
 
GRAMMAR. 
 
 281 
 
 Teixiigo, or texiigo 
 Gdto de agdlia 
 
 A badger 
 A civet cat 
 
 Doninha de rdbo mux fel- 
 
 pudo a modo de rap6sa 
 Elephdnte 
 Foinha,fuinha 
 Arminho 
 
 A squirrel 
 
 An elephant 
 
 A marten, or martern 
 
 An ermin 
 
 Ourigo cacheiro 
 
 Argandz 
 
 Rdto 
 
 An hedge-hog 
 A dormouse 
 A rat 
 
 Raposa 
 
 A fox 
 
 Lobo 
 
 A wolf 
 
 Rata da Fndia 
 
 A rat of India, of the big- 
 
 
 ness of a cat 
 
 Fordo 
 
 A ferret 
 
 Toupeira 
 Leao 
 
 A mole 
 A lion 
 
 Leda 
 
 A lioness 
 
 Zibelina 
 
 A musk cat 
 
 Leopdrdo 
 U'rso 
 
 A leopard 
 A he-bear 
 
 TJ'rsa 
 
 A she-bear 
 
 U'rso pequ£no 
 
 A bear's cub 
 
 Tigre 
 Pdrco montez 
 
 A tiger 
 
 A wild bear 
 
 Das Cousas do Canipo. 
 
 Of Country Affairs, 
 
 Cdsa do cdmpo, or quinta 
 Cdsa de lavrador 
 
 A country house 
 A farm-house 
 
 Quinteiro 
 
 A husbandman, a farmer 
 
 Boyeiro 
 
 A herdsman, he that ploughs 
 with oxen, or tends them 
 
 Vaqueiro 
 Porqueiro 
 Pastdr 
 Surrdo 
 
 A cow-keeper 
 
 A swine-herd 
 
 A shepherd 
 
 A scrip, or small bag 
 
 Cajddo 
 
 Pastora 
 
 Herddde 
 
 Hortoldo 
 
 Hortaliga 
 
 Cavaddr 
 
 A shepherd's hook 
 
 A shepherdess 
 
 A great or large field, a wide 
 
 arable ground 
 A gardener 
 All sorts of herbage 
 A ploughman 
 
282 
 
 PORTUGUESE 
 
 Vinhateiro 
 
 A vine-dresser 
 
 Lavraddr 
 
 A farmer, oue who culti- 
 
 
 vates ground, whether his 
 
 
 own or another's 
 
 Pdstos 
 
 Feeding ground, pasture, 
 
 
 sheep-walk 
 
 Arddo 
 
 A plough 
 
 Ferro do arddo 
 
 The plough-share 
 
 Rdbo do arddo 
 
 The plough-handle 
 
 Abegao, or official que faz 
 
 A plough-wright 
 
 arados 
 
 
 Aguilkdda 
 
 A goad 
 
 Ensinho 
 
 A rake 
 
 Grade 
 
 A harrow 
 
 Semeador 
 
 A sower 
 
 Rogador 
 
 A w T eeder 
 
 Fduce rocad6ura 
 
 A weeding-hook 
 
 Fouce 
 
 A scythe or sickle 
 
 Poddo 
 
 A pruning-knife 
 
 Segaddr 
 
 A reaper, or mower, harvest 
 
 
 man 
 
 Mangodl 
 
 A flail 
 
 Forcddo 
 
 A prong to cast up sheaves 
 
 
 of corn with 
 
 Cacador 
 
 A huntsman 
 
 Pescador 
 
 A fisherman 
 
 Rego 
 
 A furrow 
 
 T6rra que fica levantdda 
 
 A balk, or ridge of land be- 
 
 Sntre dous rSgos 
 
 tween two furrows 
 
 Outeiro 
 
 A hill 
 
 Monte, or montdnha 
 
 A mountain 
 
 Vdlle 
 
 A valley 
 
 Lagda 
 
 A moor, fen, or marsh, a 
 
 
 standing water, but some- 
 
 
 times dry 
 
 Ldgo 
 
 A lake or standing pool, but 
 
 
 always full of water 
 
 Ribeiro 
 
 A brook, a stream of water, 
 
 
 with a gentle or natural 
 
 
 current 
 
 Ribeirinho 
 
 A rivulet, a streamlet 
 
 Piano, or planicie 
 
 A plain 
 
 Penha, or rdcha 
 
 A rock 
 
 Penhdsco 
 
 A great rock 
 
 Des6rto 
 
 A desert or wilderness 
 
GRAMMAR. 
 
 283 
 
 Despenhadeiro 
 
 Bdsque 
 
 Bdsque pequeno 
 
 Peddgo de chad sem drvores, 
 
 dentro de hum bdsque 
 Pomdr, or verg6l 
 Prddo, 
 Ramdda 
 Fdnte 
 Trigo 
 
 Trigo candid I 
 Trigo bret&nha 
 Centio 
 Ferdd 
 
 Tremez 
 
 E spelt a 
 Espiga 
 Cabega da espiga 
 
 Bainha, donde sake a espi- 
 ga depots deformdda 
 Legiimes 
 Grdos de bico 
 Lentilha 
 
 Tramdgo, or tremdgo 
 Feijoens 
 
 Feijdo sapdla, or bdjes 
 Feij'do fradinho 
 
 Chicharo 
 
 Carreta 
 
 Cdrro 
 
 R6da 
 
 Caimbas 
 
 E'ixo 
 
 Rdyo da rdda 
 
 Currdl de bdys 
 
 Currdl de ovSlhas 
 
 Currdl de cdbras 
 
 Chiqueiro de pdrcos 
 
 E'rva 
 
 Trigo em e'rva 
 
 JSedra 
 
 A precipice 
 
 A wood 
 
 A grove, or thicket 
 
 A glade in a wood 
 
 An orchard 
 
 A meadow 
 
 A bower 
 
 A fountain 
 
 Wheat 
 
 The best wheat 
 
 Red wheat 
 
 Rye 
 
 Meslin, mixed corn, as 
 
 wheat and rye, fyc. 
 The corn of three months 
 
 growth 
 Spelt 
 
 Ear of corn 
 The grain at the top of the 
 
 ear of corn 
 The husk in which the ear 
 
 of corn is lodged 
 Pulse 
 
 Spanish pease 
 A lentil 
 A lupine 
 French-beans 
 Kidney-beans 
 A sort of small French beans 
 
 with a black spot 
 Chicklings, a sort of peas 
 A waggon 
 A cart 
 A wheel 
 
 The felloes of the wheel 
 The axle-tree of a wheel 
 The spoke of a wheel 
 An ox-stall 
 A sheep-fold 
 A house for goats 
 A hog's-sty 
 Grass 
 Green corn 
 Standing corn 
 
284 
 
 PORTUGUESE 
 
 Tdrro 
 
 A milk-pail 
 
 Cincho 
 
 A oheese-vat, to make 
 
 
 cheese ia 
 
 Enxdda 
 
 A mattock, a hoe 
 
 JEnxadao, or alviao 
 
 A mattock 
 
 Cdnga 
 
 A yoke for oxen 
 
 Congdlhos 
 
 The arms of the yoke used 
 
 
 for oxen 
 
 S6be 
 
 A hedge or fence 
 
 O que fax s6bes 
 
 Hedger 
 
 Fduce rogadoura de que 
 
 Hedging-bill 
 
 uzao parafazer sebes 
 
 
 Tempo de tosquia e af6sta 
 
 The sheep-shearing, the 
 
 que nSllefdzem os rusticos 
 
 time of shearing sheep 
 
 Cantiga dos segadores des- 
 
 Harvest home 
 
 pots de acabdrfo o tSmpo 
 
 
 da s6ga 
 
 
 Sdrga 
 
 A bramble 
 
 Mdta 
 
 A thicket, a forest 
 
 Mdto 
 
 A heath 
 
 Leira, or taboleiro 
 
 A bed in a garden 
 
 Ch6rro de dgoa 
 
 A water-spout 
 
 Ver6da 
 
 A path 
 
 Rdsto 
 
 A track 
 
 Cesta 
 
 A basket 
 
 Cabdz 
 
 A frail, a pannier 
 
 Cabdna, or choupdna 
 
 A cottage, a hut 
 
 Cab ago 
 
 A dry hollow gourd used 
 
 
 to keep seeds in 
 
 Cdusas pertenc&ntes a 
 
 Things relating to War. 
 
 Gu6rra. 
 
 
 Servigo or vida militdr 
 
 Warfare 
 
 Militdr or servirna gu6rra 
 
 To serve in the army 
 
 Artilharia, artelharia, or 
 
 Artillery 
 
 artilheria [haria 
 
 
 Vanhdo, or pe*ga de artil- 
 
 A cannon 
 
 Canhdo de/6rro 
 
 Iron cannon 
 
 Canhdo de br6nze 
 
 Brass cannon 
 
 Alma do canhdo 
 
 The mouth of a cannon 
 
 Fogdo do canhdo 
 
 The touch-hole of a cannon 
 
 Culdtra do canhdo 
 
 The breech of a cannon 
 
GRAMMAR. 
 
 285 
 
 Botdo, or extremiddde da 
 
 culdtra 
 Bellas encadeddas 
 Bella de canhao 
 
 CarrSta de canhao 
 
 Pdlvora 
 
 M6yo canhao 
 
 Canhao dobrddo 
 
 Canhao pdra batir hitma 
 
 praga 
 Canhao de vinte e qudtro 
 Calibre 
 Carregdr 
 Escorvdr 
 Fazer pontaria 
 Petrechos, or munigdens de 
 
 guerra 
 Encravdr hiima p6ga 
 Descavalgdr hiima p6ga 
 Despardr 
 Tiro de p6ga 
 Trem de artilharia 
 Colubrina 
 Falconet e 
 Petdrdo 
 Pedreiro 
 
 Bdmba 
 
 Bombdrda 
 
 Morteiro 
 
 Granada 
 
 Espingdrda 
 
 Pistola 
 
 Carabina 
 
 MosquSte 
 
 Machadinha 
 
 Ldnga 
 
 A lab dr da 
 
 Partasdna 
 
 Pique 
 
 Caldr os piques pdra rests- 
 
 tir d cavalaria 
 Alfdnge 
 Espdda 
 
 The pummel 
 
 Chain-shots 
 
 A cannon-bullet, cannon- 
 ball, or cannon-shot 
 The carriage of a cannon 
 Gun-powder 
 A demi-cannon 
 A double cannon 
 A battering cannon 
 
 A twenty-four pounder 
 
 Caliber 
 
 To load 
 
 To prime 
 
 To level 
 
 Military stores 
 
 To nail up a gun 
 
 To dismount a gun 
 
 To fire 
 
 A cannon shot 
 
 The train of artillery 
 
 A culverin 
 
 A falconet 
 
 A petard 
 
 A swivel gun, pederero, or 
 
 paterero 
 A bomb 
 
 A great gun, a bombard 
 A mortar-piece 
 A granade 
 A firelock 
 A pistol 
 A carabine 
 A musket 
 A battle-ax 
 A lance 
 An halbert 
 A partizan 
 A pike 
 To present the pikes against 
 
 the cavalry 
 Scymeter 
 A sword 
 
280 
 
 PORTUGUESE 
 
 Disembainhur a espdda 
 Punho da espdda 
 Magaa da espdda 
 Guarnicdo da espdda 
 F6lha da espdda 
 Meter mdo a espdda 
 
 Matdr 
 
 Ferir 
 
 Desbaratdr 
 
 Saquedr 
 
 Punhdl 
 
 BayonSta 
 
 Caldr a bayontita 
 
 Capacete 
 
 Morrido 
 
 Visiira 
 
 Gorjdl, or gdla 
 
 Peito de drmas 
 
 Courdga 
 
 Espalddr 
 
 Cossolete 
 
 Broquel 
 
 Escudo 
 
 Addga 
 
 Sdya de mdlha 
 
 B€y de armas 
 
 Arduto 
 General 
 
 Tendnte general 
 SargSnto m6r de batdlha 
 SargSnto mdr 
 Sargento 
 
 Mariscdl, or marlchdl 
 M6stre de cdmpo general 
 Coron6l 
 
 M6stre de cdmpo 
 Corone'l de infantaria 
 Officidl de gu6rra 
 Brigadeiro 
 TenSnte corone'l 
 Ajuddnte de sargSnto mor 
 Ajuddnte de ten£nte de 
 ?n6stre de cdmpo 
 
 To unsheath the sword 
 The handle of a sword 
 The pommel of a sword 
 The hilt of a sword 
 The blade of a sword 
 To clap one's hand on one's 
 
 sword 
 To kill 
 To wound 
 To rout 
 To sack 
 A poniard 
 A bayonet 
 To fix the bayonets 
 A helmet 
 A morrion 
 
 The vizor of an helmet 
 The gorget 
 A breast-plate 
 A cuirass 
 The back-plate 
 A corslet 
 A buckler 
 A shield 
 
 Dagger, a short sword 
 A coat of mail 
 The king at arms, or king 
 
 of heralds 
 A herald 
 A general 
 
 A lieutenant-general 
 A major-general 
 Major 
 A Serjeant 
 Marshal 
 
 Camp-master general 
 Colonel 
 Camp-master 
 Colonel of foot 
 An officer 
 Brigadier 
 Lieutenant-colonel 
 Adjutant 
 Aid de camp 
 
GRAMMAR. 
 
 287 
 
 Cap it do 
 
 Posto de capitdo 
 
 Tenente 
 
 Cornet a 
 
 Alferes 
 
 Bandeiras 
 
 Estanddrte 
 
 Alf6res de cavalaria que 
 trdz o estanddrte 
 
 Pagador 
 
 Proveddr des mantimentos 
 de huma armada 
 
 Commissdrio 
 
 Commissdrio gerdl 
 
 Engenheiro 
 
 Quartet mestre 
 
 Cdbo de esquddra 
 
 Tambor, or caixa 
 
 Tambor or o que toca tam- 
 bor 
 
 Baquetas 
 
 Cord6is de tambor 
 
 Toques do tambor 
 
 Tocdr o tambor 
 
 Alvordda, or general 
 
 Passar mdstra 
 
 Trojnbeteiro, or trombeta 
 
 Pifano 
 
 Soldo 
 
 Soldddo 
 
 Soldddo que estd de senti- 
 
 n6lla 
 Entrdr de gudrda 
 
 Sentin6lla 
 
 Render a gudrda, senti- 
 
 n€llas, &c. 
 Blocdr, or bloquedr 
 Infdnte, or soldddo de p6 
 Granadeiro 
 Bigddes 
 Dragao 
 
 Soldddo de cavdllo 
 Montdr a cavdllo 
 
 Captain 
 
 Captaincy or captainship 
 
 Lieutenant 
 
 Cornet 
 
 Ensign 
 
 Colours 
 
 Standard 
 
 Standard-bearer 
 
 Pay- master 
 Purveyor 
 
 Commissary 
 
 Commissary-general 
 
 Engineer 
 
 Quarter-master 
 
 Corporal 
 
 Drum 
 
 A drummer 
 
 Drum-sticks 
 
 Drum-strings 
 
 The beats of a drum 
 
 To beat a drum 
 
 The general, one of the 
 
 beats of the drum 
 To muster, to review forces 
 A trumpeter 
 A fifer or fife 
 
 Wages, or pay for soldiers 
 A soldier 
 Soldier on duty 
 
 To mount, or go upon the 
 
 guard 
 Duty, centinel 
 To relieve the guard, c^c. 
 
 To block up 
 
 A foot soldier 
 
 Grenadier 
 
 Whiskers 
 
 Dragoon 
 
 Trooper, or horse-soldier 
 
 To get on horseback 
 
288 
 
 PORTUGUESE 
 
 Apedrse 
 
 To alight 
 
 Gu&rda da pess6a real, or 
 
 Life-guard-man 
 
 ar^heiro 
 
 
 CouracHro 
 
 Cuirassier 
 
 MosquetHro 
 
 Musketeer 
 
 FuziUiro 
 
 Fusilier 
 
 Alabardeiro 
 
 Halberdier 
 
 Genisero 
 
 Janissary 
 
 Soldado armddo com Idnga 
 
 A spearman 
 
 Soldddo que l6va pique, or 
 
 A pikeman 
 
 piquSiro 
 
 
 Besteiro, or soldado que 
 
 Cross-bow-man 
 
 pelS j a com bSsta 
 
 
 PionSiro 
 
 A pioneer 
 
 MinSiro, or minador 
 
 Miner 
 
 Bombardeiro 
 
 A bombardier 
 
 tiro da artilharia, or o 
 
 Gunshot, or the space to 
 
 espdgo que a bala despa- 
 
 which a shot can be 
 
 rdda cdrre; Alcance 
 
 thrown 
 
 Artilheiro 
 
 Matross, also a gunner, or 
 
 
 cannoneer 
 
 A arte da artilharia 
 
 Gunnery 
 
 General de artilharia 
 
 General of artillery 
 
 Voluntdrio 
 
 A volunteer 
 
 Recrutas 
 
 Recruits 
 
 Explorad6r, or correddr 
 
 Scout 
 
 de exe'rcito 
 
 
 Espia 
 
 Spy 
 
 O que leva viveres ao ex6r- 
 
 Sutler 
 
 cito, or vivandeiro 
 
 
 Soldddo quefaz correrias 
 
 A marauder, a soldier that 
 
 
 goes a marauding 
 
 Timbdle or atabale 
 
 Kettle-drum 
 
 Infanteria 
 
 The infantry 
 
 Cavalaria 
 
 Cavalry 
 
 Cavalaria ligiira 
 
 Light-horse 
 
 Vangudrda 
 
 The vanguard 
 
 C6rpo de batdlha 
 
 The main body of an army 
 
 Retagudrda 
 
 The rear 
 
 C6rpo de res6rva 
 
 The corps de reserve 
 
 Cdrpo de gudrda 
 
 The corps de guard 
 
 PiquSte 
 
 The piquets of an army, 
 
 
 or piquet guard 
 
 Ala 
 
 The wing of an army 
 
 Batalhdo 
 
 Battalion 
 
GRAMMA 11 
 
 289 
 
 Desiacamento 
 
 RegimSnto 
 
 Companhia 
 
 Esquadrdo 
 
 Mochila 
 
 Bagdgem, or bagdge 
 
 Bated ores do cdmpo 
 
 AlmazSm, or armazem 
 
 Murdlhas 
 
 Ame'a, on ameya 
 
 Parapeito 
 
 Castillo 
 
 Fdrte 
 
 FortalSza 
 
 Fortificacdo 
 
 Tdrre 
 
 Citade'lla, or cidade'lla 
 
 Baludrte 
 
 Fileira 
 
 Cortina 
 
 MSya lua 
 
 Troneira 
 
 T6rra-pl6no 
 
 Rebelim, or revelim 
 
 Contrascdrpa 
 
 Barreira 
 
 Falsabrdga 
 
 Fosso 
 
 Guarita 
 
 Casamdta 
 
 Correddr, or estrdda enco- 
 
 b6rta 
 Cestdens 
 
 Estacdda, or palissdda 
 Reduto 
 Ataldya 
 Mdnta, or ManteUte 
 
 Faxina 
 
 Mina 
 
 FazSr vodr a mina 
 
 Trincheira 
 
 Abrir as trincheiras 
 
 Cdmpo 
 
 Viveres 
 
 U 
 
 Detachment 
 
 Regiment 
 
 A company 
 
 A squadron 
 
 Knapsack 
 
 Baggage 
 
 Discoverers 
 
 Magazines 
 
 Walls 
 
 A battlement 
 
 The parapet 
 
 A castle 
 
 A fort 
 
 A fortress 
 
 Fortification 
 
 A tower 
 
 A citadel 
 
 Bulwark 
 
 A file 
 
 A curtain 
 
 Half moon 
 
 A loop-hole 
 
 A platform of earth 
 
 A ravelin 
 
 Counterscarp 
 
 A barrier 
 
 A faussbraye 
 
 A ditch 
 
 A centry-box 
 
 A casemate 
 
 The covered way 
 
 Gabions 
 
 A palisade 
 
 A redoubt 
 
 A watch tower 
 
 A mantelet, or cover for 
 
 men trom the shot 
 Fascines 
 A mine 
 
 To spring a mine 
 A trench 
 
 To open the trenches 
 Camp 
 Provisions 
 
290 
 
 PORTUGUESE 
 
 Bisdnho 
 
 Batalha 
 
 Dar batalha 
 
 Escaramuga 
 
 Sitio, or cerco 
 
 Quart6l 
 
 Encamisdda 
 
 Sortida 
 
 BaUr 
 
 Brtcha 
 
 Pontdo 
 
 Escaldda 
 
 Ass alto 
 
 Dar assdlto 
 
 Tomdr por assdlto 
 
 Chamdda 
 
 Capituldr 
 
 Capitulagdo 
 
 Ttrgoas 
 
 Guarnigdo 
 
 Prebdste 
 
 Prebdste-generd I 
 
 L6va 
 
 Levant dr soldddos, oxfazSr 
 
 I6va de gSnte 
 Lev ant dr o sitio 
 Levantdr o cdmpo 
 Assentdr o cdmpo 
 Cdmpo voldnte 
 Campdnha 
 MeUr-se em campdnha 
 
 Guerredr 
 
 Piga de campdnha 
 
 Forrdgem 
 
 Quartets de inv6rno 
 
 Dar quarUl 
 
 Aquarteldr-se 
 
 Marchdr 
 
 Marchdr com bandeiras 
 
 despregddas 
 Tocdr a recolhSr 
 Entregdr huma prdga 
 Fila da vangudrda 
 Fila do cintro 
 
 A new recruit 
 
 A battle 
 
 To give battle 
 
 A skirmish 
 
 A siege 
 
 A quarter 
 
 A camisado 
 
 A sally 
 
 To batter 
 
 A breach 
 
 A pontoon 
 
 An escalade 
 
 An assault 
 
 To storm 
 
 To take by storm 
 
 The chamade 
 
 To capitulate 
 
 Capitulation 
 
 Truce 
 
 Garrison 
 
 A provost 
 
 A provost marshal 
 
 Levy 
 
 To raise men, to levy, or 
 
 raise soldiers 
 To raise the siege 
 To decamp 
 To pitch one's camp 
 A flying camp 
 A campaign 
 To begin the campaign, to 
 
 open the field 
 To war, to fight 
 A field-piece 
 A forage 
 Winter quarters 
 To give quarter 
 To take quarter 
 To march 
 To march with flying 
 
 colours 
 To beat tap-tow 
 To surrender a place 
 Front rank 
 Centre rank 
 
GRAMMAR 
 
 291 
 
 Fila da Rectagudrda 
 
 Rear rank 
 
 DirHta 
 
 Right 
 
 Esquerda 
 
 Left 
 
 Tempos 
 
 Motions 
 
 Exercicio 
 
 Exercise 
 
 FCchos 
 
 Lock 
 
 Cao or Perro da Anna 
 
 Cock 
 
 Crdnha 
 
 Butt 
 
 A boca da Anna 
 
 Muzzle 
 
 cdno 
 
 The barrel 
 
 Vareta 
 
 Ramrod 
 
 Gatilho 
 
 Trigger 
 
 Pellotdo 
 
 Platoon 
 
 Batalhao 
 
 Battalion 
 
 Ala 
 
 Wing 
 
 Devisdo 
 
 Division 
 
 Linha ou Fileira 
 
 Line 
 
 Caqadores 
 
 Riflemen 
 
 Fldnco 
 
 Flank 
 
 Estddo Maydr 
 
 Staff 
 
 Frente 
 
 Front 
 
 Infantaria Ligeira 
 
 Light infantry- 
 
 Regulamentos 
 
 Regulations 
 
 Palavras de Comando. 
 
 Military Words of Cc 
 
 
 mand. 
 
 Sentido 
 
 Attention 
 
 Armas ao Hombro 
 
 Shoulder arms 
 
 Descangar sobre as Armas 
 
 Order arms 
 
 MetSr as Bayonetas 
 
 Fix bayonets 
 
 Apresentdr as Armas 
 
 Present arms 
 
 Caldr as Bayonitas 
 
 Charge bayonets 
 
 Descangar as Armas 
 
 Support arms 
 
 Tirdr as Bayonetas 
 
 Unfix bayonets 
 
 Cruzdr as Armas 
 
 Pile arms 
 
 Prepardr 
 
 Make ready- 
 
 Carregdr 
 
 Load 
 
 Tirdr o Cartucho 
 
 Handle cartridge 
 
 Escorvdr 
 
 Prime 
 
 Tirdr as Vargtas 
 
 Draw ramrods 
 
 Atuchdr o Cartucho 
 
 Ram down cartridge 
 
 Armas a Cara 
 
 Present 
 
 F6go 
 
 Fire 
 
 V 
 
 2 
 
202 
 
 PORTUGUESE 
 
 MetSr o cartucho 
 
 Fogo por pellotoes 
 
 F6go de Filas 
 
 Alto 
 
 Format em linfia 
 
 F6go obliquo 
 
 Formdr 
 
 Mdrcha 
 
 Or clem cerrdda 
 
 Desjildr 
 
 Columna cerrdda 
 
 Meia vdlta d esquerda 
 
 Voltdr 
 
 Avangdr 
 
 Cerrdr as FiUiras 
 
 Navegacao. 
 
 Navio 
 
 Ndo 
 
 Ndo de guSrra 
 
 Navio de cdrga, or mer- 
 
 caniil 
 Navio veUiro 
 
 Navio ranc6iro 
 
 Gale 
 
 Galedca 
 
 Galedo 
 
 Galedta 
 
 Comitre 
 
 Fragdta 
 
 Carrdca 
 
 Fiista 
 
 Pindga 
 
 Bdrca de passdgem 
 
 Bdrco 
 
 Bdrca 
 
 Canda 
 
 Gonddla 
 
 Esquife 
 
 Chalupa, or baldndra 
 
 Chaliipa pequtina 
 
 Cast about 
 
 Firing by platoons 
 
 File firing 
 
 Halt 
 
 To form in line 
 
 Oblique firing 
 
 Form 
 
 March 
 
 Close order 
 
 To file 
 
 Close column 
 
 On your left backward 
 
 wheel 
 Wheel 
 Advance 
 Close the ranks 
 
 Navigation. 
 
 A ship 
 
 A large ship 
 
 A line-of-battle ship 
 
 A merchant-ship, a mer- 
 chantman 
 
 A very srood sailer, or a 
 ship that sails well 
 
 A bad sailer 
 
 A galley 
 
 A galleass 
 
 A galleon 
 
 A galliot, a small galley 
 
 The boatswain of a galley 
 
 A frigate 
 
 A carrack 
 
 A foist 
 
 A pinnace 
 
 A ferry-boat 
 
 A boat 
 
 A bark, great boat 
 
 A canoe 
 
 Gondola, a small boat, 
 much used in Venice 
 
 A skiff 
 
 A sloop 
 
 A shallop 
 
GRAMMAR. 
 
 293 
 
 Bergantim 
 
 Balsa 
 
 Capitdnia 
 
 Almirdnta 
 
 Armada 
 
 Frdta 
 
 Esquddra 
 
 A bdrdo 
 
 Popa 
 
 Proa 
 
 P6gas de prda para dar 
 caga ao inimigo 
 
 Tartdna 
 
 Bruldte 
 
 Falua 
 
 BatAl, or bateira 
 
 Caravela 
 
 Sdrte de patdxo para ser- 
 vigo dehiimando de guerra 
 
 Ndo de linha 
 
 Gudrda costa 
 
 Galedta da qudl se Idngam 
 as bombas 
 
 Navio que s6rve para an- 
 ddr a corso 
 
 Corsdrio 
 
 Hydcte 
 
 Navio de transpdrte 
 
 Ndo da India Oriental 
 
 Ndo da India Occidental 
 
 Sorte de embarcagdo pe- 
 quena Holland6za de 
 hum so mastro 
 
 Navio pdra levdr carvdo 
 
 Embarcagdens pequSnas 
 
 Embarcagdo, or bdrco 
 grdnde que s6rve pdra 
 levdr fazendas a bdrdo 
 
 Embarcagdo grdnde, ou ca- 
 ravela, que s6rve pdra 
 commercedr pella cdsta 
 
 Embarcagdo de avizo 
 
 PaquSte 
 
 Bdrco de pescdr 
 
 Ldncha 
 
 A brigantine, or brig 
 
 A float 
 
 The admiral's ship 
 
 The vice-admiral's ship 
 
 A fleet, a navy 
 
 A fleet of merchant ships 
 
 A squadron, part of a fleet 
 
 On board 
 
 The poop, stern, or steerage 
 
 The prow, or head 
 
 Chase guns 
 
 A tartan 
 
 A fire-ship 
 
 A felucca 
 
 A small bark, a wherry 
 
 A caravel 
 
 A tender 
 
 A line-of-battle ship 
 A guard-ship 
 Bomb-ketch 
 
 A cruiser 
 
 A privateer 
 
 Yacht 
 
 A transport 
 
 East-India-man 
 
 West-India-ship 
 
 A Dutch dogger 
 
 A collier 
 
 Small craft 
 
 A barge, a lighter 
 
 A coasting vessel 
 
 Advice-boat 
 Packet-boat 
 A fishing-boat 
 Boat 
 
294 
 
 PORTUGUESE- 
 
 Bemos 
 Pa do re-mo 
 
 Sen1i)ia 
 
 Ldstro, or Idsto 
 
 Lastdr or langdr Idstro ao 
 
 7MV10 
 
 Mdstro or druore 
 M astro grdnde 
 Mdstro de mezena 
 Mdstro do traquete 
 Gurup6s 
 Gdvea 
 
 Quit ha 
 
 VSrga, or entena 
 
 Laiz or extremidddes das 
 
 vergas 
 Prdnckas, que cdbrem os 
 
 costddos do navio da 
 
 parte defora 
 Vela * 
 V6la mestra, or a v6la do 
 
 mastro grdnde 
 VHa da Gdvea 
 Vela do joanete do mdstro 
 
 grdnde 
 Papqfigos 
 MezSna 
 Gdta, or vela de cima da 
 
 mezena 
 Traquete 
 Veldcho 
 
 Joanete do traquete 
 Cevad6ira 
 Vela lalina 
 Fazerforga de v6la 
 Mastareos 
 
 Mastareo da mezena. or 
 
 mastar6o da gdta 
 Portinhola 
 Bandtiras 
 Fl&mmulas or galhardetes 
 
 Oars 
 
 The blade of the oar 
 
 The well 
 
 Ballast 
 
 To ballast a ship 
 
 A mast 
 
 The main mast 
 
 The mizen mast 
 
 The fore mast 
 
 The bowsprit, or boltsprit 
 
 The round-top, main-top, 
 
 or scuttle of a mast 
 The keel 
 A yard 
 The yard-arm 
 
 Side-planks, or side of a ship 
 
 A sail 
 
 The main sheet 
 
 The main-top-sail 
 Main-top-gallant-sail 
 
 The mizen and fore-sail 
 
 Mizen-sail 
 
 Mizen-top-sail 
 
 The fore-sail 
 The fore-top-sail 
 The fore-top-gallant-sail 
 The sprit-sail 
 A shoulder-of-mutton sail 
 To crowd the sail 
 The topmasts, or top-gal- 
 lant-masts 
 Mizen-top-mast 
 
 A port-hole 
 The colours 
 Streamers, pendants 
 
 '• By vela is often meant the ship itself. 
 
GRAMMAR, 
 
 295 
 
 Agulha de maredr 
 
 Bitdcola 
 
 Costuras do navio 
 
 L6me 
 
 Cdna do Ifrme 
 
 Cub6rta 
 
 Cub&rta corrida 
 
 Escotilhas 
 
 Escotilhdo 
 
 Castillo de pop a 
 Castello de proa 
 Garrdr a dncora 
 
 Ancora 
 
 Meter a dncora na lancha, 
 
 or bdte depots de leoan- 
 
 tdla 
 Ancora de rebdque 
 Ancora de esperdnga 
 U'nhas da dncora 
 Argdla da dncora 
 Estdr a dncora a pique 
 Amdrra 
 Vicar \ or cortdr as amdr- 
 
 ras 
 JSdnda, or prumo 
 CutClos 
 Mar6 
 Bosina 
 Prepardr hum navio, de. 
 
 v6las, cdrdas, &c. 
 Pildto 
 Escrivdo 
 Pilotdgem 
 Carta de maredr 
 Capitdo 
 Capitdo tenSnte 
 Conirame'stre 
 Marinheiro 
 Camardte 
 Marinheiro que he camar- 
 
 dda ou pertence ao mesmo 
 
 rancho 
 Torm6nta 
 
 The mariner's compass 
 
 Bittacle 
 
 The seams of a ship 
 
 Helm, or rudder 
 
 The whip, or whip-staff 
 
 Deck 
 
 Flush fore and aft 
 
 The hatches ; scuttles 
 
 A room by the hatches, to 
 
 keep the provisions 
 The hind castle 
 The fore castle 
 To drive ; or when a ship 
 
 drags her anchor 
 The anchor 
 To boat the anchor 
 
 A kedger 
 
 Sheet anchor y 
 
 The flooks of an anchor 
 
 The ring of an anchor 
 
 Is for the anchor to be a- peak 
 
 A cable 
 
 To cut the cables 
 
 The sounding lead 
 Studding sails 
 The tide 
 
 A speaking trumpet 
 To rig a ship 
 
 Pilot, or steersman 
 A purser 
 Pilotage 
 Sea-chart 
 A captain 
 First lieutenant 
 A boatswain 
 A sailor 
 A cabin 
 A messmate 
 
 A tempest 
 
296 
 
 Borrdsca 
 Bondnga 
 Calmaria 
 Vdnto em pdpa 
 
 Navio arrasddo em pdpa 
 
 Derrdta 
 Alar a bolina 
 
 Ir pela bolina 
 
 Nd da bolina 
 
 BarlavSnto 
 
 Ganhdr a barlavSnto 
 
 Barlaventedr, or deitdr a 
 barlavSnto 
 
 Sotavento 
 
 EscovSns 
 
 Escdtas 
 
 Veldme, cdrdas, e o mdis 
 que he necessdrio pdra 
 prepardr hum navio 
 
 Cdrda 
 
 Enxdrcias 
 
 Arribdr 
 
 Bombdrdo 
 
 Estibdrdo 
 
 Ld 
 
 Meter de Id 
 
 Bdmba 
 
 Ddr d bomba 
 
 Bdlde pdra deitdr dgoa na 
 
 bdmba 
 Escuma que sdhe da bdmba 
 
 depdis de ter tirddo a 
 
 dgoa 
 Navio, cuja dgoa se nao 
 
 pdde tirdr com a bdmba 
 Mdnga de cduro por dnde 
 
 sdhe a dgoa da bdmba 
 Brdco da bdmba 
 Fardl 
 VSnlo 
 
 PORTUGUESE 
 
 A storm 
 
 Fair weather 
 
 Calm 
 
 The wind full a-stern, a 
 
 forewind 
 A ship that sails before the 
 
 wind 
 The course, or way of a ship 
 To sharp the main bowling, 
 
 to haul up the bowling 
 To tack upon a wind, sail 
 
 upon a bowling 
 The bowling knot 
 Windward 
 To get the wind 
 To ply to windward 
 
 Leeward 
 Hawsers 
 
 Tacks 
 
 Tackle, or tackling, the rig- 
 ging of a ship 
 
 A rope 
 
 Shrouds 
 
 To put into a harbour 
 
 Larboard 
 
 Starboard 
 
 Loof 
 
 To loof, or keep the ship 
 
 nearer the wind 
 A pump 
 To pump 
 Pump-can 
 
 Pump-suck 
 
 A ship that is stoaked 
 
 Pump-dale 
 
 The pump handle 
 
 Light, lantern, or lighthouse 
 
 Wind 
 
GRAMMA R. 
 
 297 
 
 Rosa da Agulha, ou dos 
 Ventos. 
 
 Ndrte 
 
 Ndrte 4 a a nord6ste 
 
 Nor norde'ste 
 
 Norde'ste 4 a a ndrte 
 
 Norde'ste 
 
 Norde'ste 4 a a Uste 
 
 Les norde'ste 
 
 L6ste, 4 a a norde'ste 
 
 L6ste 
 
 L6ste 4 a a su6ste 
 
 L6s su6ste 
 
 Su6ste 4 a a Uste 
 
 Su6ste 
 
 Su6ste 4 a a sul 
 
 Susu6ste 
 
 Sul 4 a a su6ste 
 
 Sul 
 
 Sul 4 a a sudo6ste 
 
 Susudo6ste 
 
 Sudoeste 4 a sul 
 
 Sudoeste 
 
 Sudo6ste 4 a a o6ste 
 
 Oes sudo6ste 
 
 06ste 4 a a sudoeste 
 
 06ste 
 
 Oeste 4 a a noro6ste 
 
 Oes nor oeste 
 
 Noro6ste 4 a a o6ste 
 
 Noro6ste 
 
 Noro6ste 4 a a norte 
 
 Nor noroe'ste 
 
 Norte 4 a a noro6ste 
 
 Vento travessao, or Ira- 
 
 vessia 
 Dar a embarcacao a travez 
 Pairdr 
 
 Esporao 
 Colher hum cdbo 
 Largdr mais cdbo 
 Abrir dgoa 
 Fazer agodda 
 
 The Fly of the Mariner's 
 Compass. 
 
 North • 
 
 N. by E. 
 
 N. N. E. 
 
 N. E. by N. 
 
 N. E. 
 
 N. E. by E. 
 
 E. N. E. 
 
 E. by N. 
 
 East 
 
 E. by S. 
 
 E. S. E. 
 
 S. E by E. 
 
 S. E. 
 
 S. E. by S. 
 
 S. S. E. 
 
 S. by E. 
 
 South 
 
 S. by W. 
 
 s. s. w. 
 
 S. W. by S. 
 
 s. w. 
 
 S. W. by W. 
 
 W. S. W. 
 
 W. by S. 
 
 West 
 
 W. by N. 
 
 W. N. W. 
 
 N. W. by W. . 
 
 N. W. 
 
 N. W. by N. 
 
 N. N. W. 
 
 N. by W. 
 
 Contrary wind 
 
 To hull 
 
 To ply to and again in one's 
 
 station 
 Beak 
 
 To coil a cable 
 To pay more cable 
 To leak, or spring a leak 
 To take in fresh water 
 
298 
 
 PORTUGUESE 
 
 At par hum ?iavio 
 
 To grapple a ship 
 
 Fale.va 
 
 Grapple 
 
 Peddgo de lona bredda que 
 
 Tarpaulin 
 
 se*pdem ao reddr domdsto 
 
 
 e das bombas para que a 
 
 
 dgoa nao penttre 
 
 
 Passaddr 
 
 A fidd, orpin of iron to open 
 
 
 the strands of ropes 
 
 Cdrda com que se pr&nde o 
 
 Boat rope, or gift-rope 
 
 bdte, or Idncha d pdpa 
 
 
 do navio 
 
 
 Apito 
 
 A boatswain's call 
 
 Abadernas 
 
 Nippers 
 
 Abita 
 
 Bits 
 
 Emprodr 
 
 To steer right forward, to 
 
 
 turn the prow straight 
 
 
 forward 
 
 Guindr o navio 
 
 To yaw, or make yaws 
 
 Parte superi6r, or mats dlta 
 
 The tafferel 
 
 da popa de hum navio 
 
 
 Apagafandes 
 
 Leech-lines 
 
 Arreigddas 
 
 Puttocks 
 
 Brides 
 
 Bunt lines 
 
 Barredduras 
 
 Bow-studding-sails 
 
 Bartidouro 
 
 Boat's skit 
 
 Bastdrdos 
 
 Parrels 
 
 Bigdta 
 
 A dead-eye 
 
 Botdlos 
 
 Studding-sail-booms 
 
 Bracedr 
 
 To brace 
 
 Brdcos 
 
 Braces 
 
 Bragueiro, or vergueiro 
 
 The rudder's rope 
 
 Branddes 
 
 Back-stays 
 
 Buqdrdas 
 
 Breast-hooks 
 
 Cacholas 
 
 Cheeks 
 
 Caddste 
 
 Stand-post 
 
 Caderndl 
 
 A large block with more 
 
 
 than one shive 
 
 Vavernas 
 
 The floor- timbers 
 
 Colhedores 
 
 Lines of the shrouds 
 
 Compassdr hum navio 
 
 To trim a ship 
 
 Cossduros 
 
 Trucks 
 
 Crdca 
 
 The foulness of the ship's 
 
 
 bottom 
 
 Cabrestante 
 
 The capstan 
 
 Dar cdca 
 
 To chase 
 
GRAMMAR. 
 
 299 
 
 Curvas 
 
 Mesas da guarnigao 
 
 Enborndes 
 
 Porao 
 
 Mdca 
 
 Conv6z 
 
 Camardte do cirurgiao 
 
 Fr6te 
 
 Cdrga 
 
 Ordem que o capitao recebe 
 
 para ddr d vela 
 A acgdm de imbarcdr se 
 Desembdrque 
 Embargo 
 Ancordgem 
 Batdlha naval 
 CaravUa mexeriqueira, ou 
 
 de espia 
 Arridr, or arredr 
 Arredr as v6las 
 Arredr bandeira 
 Levant drf err o, levdr dnco- 
 
 ras, levarferro, levar-se, 
 
 or levar 
 L6va 
 
 Boledr a p6ga 
 
 Pega de ttva 
 
 Rebocdr, ou levdr dereboque 
 
 FazSr costuras 
 
 Passdgem 
 
 Passageiro 
 
 Vidgem 
 
 Navio cujo capitao tern 
 
 cartas de represdlias 
 Querendr hum navio 
 Bredr as costuras do navio 
 Dar d costa 
 Solugdr a ndo 
 
 Naufragdr 
 
 Naufrdgio 
 
 Patrao, or me'sire de ndo 
 
 The knees 
 
 Chain-wales 
 
 Scupper-holes 
 
 The hold of a ship 
 
 Hammock 
 
 Deck or quarter-deck 
 
 Cockpit 
 
 Freight 
 
 Cargo 
 
 Sailing orders 
 
 Embarkation 
 
 Landing 
 
 Embargo 
 
 Anchorage 
 
 Naval battle 
 
 A ship for espial, or look out 
 
 To veer 
 To strike sail 
 To strike the flag 
 To weigh anchor 
 
 The action of weighing or 
 taking up the anchor 
 
 To move a gun towards 
 starboard or larboard 
 
 The signal gun 
 
 To tow 
 
 To splice 
 
 Passage 
 
 Passenger 
 
 Voyage 
 
 Letters of marque 
 
 To careen a ship 
 To pay the seamf of a ship 
 To run a-groundoron shore 
 Is for a ship to roll, or to 
 
 float in rough water 
 To suffer a wreck, to be 
 
 wrecked 
 Shipwreck 
 Shipmaster 
 
300 POR T U 
 
 Carpe?iiciro de nauios 
 E stale no 
 Embarcar 
 Embarcar 
 
 Grumete 
 
 Rapdz que serve como mdgo 
 
 do navio 
 Rapdz que serve ao capitao 
 Calafdte 
 
 Calafetdr hum navio 
 Calafeto 
 Arsenal, ou ribeira das 
 
 ndos 
 Emmastedr hum navio 
 
 Remdr 
 Remador 
 Forgddo 
 Despenseiro 
 
 Mari?iheiros, e tdda a outra 
 gentequepert6nce ao navio 
 Chusma 
 Guarnigao da ndo 
 
 O sobrecdrga do navio 
 
 Balestilha 
 
 Quadrdnte 
 
 Outdnte 
 
 Der6 
 
 Paravdnie 
 
 Situagao de huma cosia, 
 ilha, &c. a respeito de 
 qualqu6r dutro lugdr 
 
 Quarentena 
 
 Baliza 
 
 Ldrga 
 
 Amardr 
 
 Cagdr a v6la 
 
 Cacedr hum navio 
 
 Langdr hum navio do mdr 
 
 G U E S E 
 
 Shipwright 
 Stocks 
 To ship 
 
 To go aboard, to take ship- 
 ^ ping 
 The meanest sort of sailors ; 
 
 or servant to the sailors 
 Ship-boy 
 
 A cabin-boy 
 
 A calker 
 
 To calk a ship 
 
 Oakham 
 
 An arsenal, a store-house, a 
 
 dock-yard 
 To fit a ship, or vessel, with 
 
 masts 
 To row 
 Row T er 
 Galley-slave 
 Steward 
 The crew of a ship 
 
 Crew of galley slaves 
 Marines, soldiers w r ho serve 
 
 on board of ships 
 Supercargo 
 Cross-staff 
 Quadrant 
 Hadley's quadrant 
 Aft 
 Fore 
 The bearing 
 
 Quarantine 
 
 Sea mark 
 
 Large 
 
 To bear off 
 
 To turn the sail to the wind 
 side 
 
 It is said of aship that is hur- 
 ried aw T ay from her course 
 by strong winds, tides, tyc. 
 
 To launch a ship 
 
GRAMMAR. 
 
 301 
 
 Entrdr com vento frSsco e 
 
 bom no pdrto 
 Bdrdo 
 
 Bdrdo, or bdnda 
 Navio de alto bdrdo 
 Cdga 
 
 Presa or tomadia 
 Estar de vergaddlto 
 -V&ntos demongao, ougeroes 
 Anddr de consSrva 
 
 Dar, ou fazSr hum bdrdo 
 
 Estar a cdpa, ou por-se a 
 cap a 
 
 Do Commercio, e do que 
 lhe pert&nce. 
 
 Cdnta 
 
 Conta de vSnda 
 
 Fazer huma cdnta 
 
 Pedir cdntas 
 
 Dar a cdnta 
 
 Cdnta corrSnte 
 
 Dinheiro de contddo 
 
 Fundos Publicos 
 
 O que negocSa em comprdr 
 
 e vendSr acgdens 
 Balldngo 
 Fdrdo 
 Banco 
 Banqueiro 
 Qudbra 
 
 Falido, or quebrddo 
 Ajuste, or concerto 
 Trdca 
 Portaddr 
 Langaddr 
 LStra de cdmbio 
 Negocidr huma tetra de 
 
 cdmbio 
 Partida 
 Conheciminto 
 
 To bear in the harbour 
 
 Tack 
 
 Broadside 
 
 First rate man of war 
 
 Chace 
 
 Prize, or capture 
 
 To stand for the offing 
 
 Trade winds 
 
 To keep company together, 
 
 to sail under a convoy 
 To tack the ship, or tack 
 
 about, or to bring her 
 
 head about 
 To lie by at sea, to back the 
 
 sails 
 
 Of Trade, and of Things 
 relating to it. 
 
 Account 
 
 Account of sales 
 
 To cast up an account 
 
 To call to an account 
 
 To pay on account 
 
 Account current 
 
 Ready money 
 
 Stocks 
 
 Jobber 
 
 Balance 
 Bale 
 Bank 
 Banker 
 Bankruptcy 
 Bankrupt 
 Bargain 
 Barter 
 Bearer 
 Bidder 
 
 Bill of exchange, a draught 
 To negociate a bill of ex- 
 change 
 Parcel 
 Bill of lading 
 
302 
 
 PORTUGUESE 
 
 Escritura de obrigagau 
 
 Bond, engagement 
 
 Gudrdallvros or o que em 
 
 Book-keeper 
 
 h lima cctsa de negdcio tern 
 
 
 a seu cargo os livros 
 
 
 Occupagad, or ?ieg6cio 
 
 Business 
 
 Comprador 
 
 Buyer 
 
 Duikeiro 
 
 Cash 
 
 Pdrte, or carreto 
 
 Carriage 
 
 Caxeiro or o que gudrda a 
 
 A cashier, or cash-keeper 
 
 caixa 
 
 
 Cento 
 
 Cent 
 
 Certidao 
 
 Certificate 
 
 Cdmbio 
 
 Change, exchange 
 
 Freguez 
 
 Chap,chapman, or customer 
 
 Gdstos 
 
 Charges 
 
 Bardto 
 
 Cheap 
 
 Cdro 
 
 Dear 
 
 Rocibo da. alfdndega 
 
 Clearance, or cocket 
 
 Commissao 
 
 Commission 
 
 Mercancia 
 
 Commodity 
 
 Compromisso 
 
 Compromise 
 
 Consignagao 
 
 Consignment 
 
 Consumo 
 
 Consumption 
 
 Conteudo 
 
 Contents 
 
 Contrdto 
 
 Contract 
 
 Correspondente 
 
 Correspondent 
 
 PrSgo 
 
 Price, rate 
 
 Alfdndega 
 
 Custom-house 
 
 Gudrdas d y alfdndega 
 
 Custom-house officers 
 
 Gudrdas que estao vigidn- 
 
 Tidesmen, or tide waiters 
 
 do at6 que os navios 
 
 
 esttjao descarregddos 
 
 
 Feitoria 
 
 Factory, settlement 
 
 Escritdrio 
 
 Counting-house 
 
 Cr6dito 
 
 Credit 
 
 Acredor 
 
 Creditor 
 
 CorrSnte 
 
 Current 
 
 Costume 
 
 Custom 
 
 Contratador 
 
 Dealer 
 
 Trdfego, or negdcio 
 
 Dealing, traffick 
 
 Divida 
 
 Debt 
 
 Deveddr 
 
 Debtor 
 
 Dinheiro desembolgddo 
 
 Disbursement 
 
 Desconto 
 
 Discount 
 
 Extracto, or cdpia 
 
 Docket 
 
GRAMM A R, 
 
 303 
 
 Depdsito 
 
 Direitos que a alfandega 
 lorn a a dar aos export a- 
 dores de certas fazendas, 
 que ja os tinhao pago na 
 supozigao de serem para 
 consumo interidr : servin- 
 do isto para animar o 
 commercio 
 
 Acreddr importuno 
 
 Cdpia 
 
 Corretor 
 
 Corretdrde letras decdmbio 
 
 Asseguraddr, or segurador 
 
 End6sso 
 
 Endossador 
 
 Abarcador 
 
 Levantamdnto de prego 
 
 Entrada or assento no re- 
 gist o 
 
 Equivalent e 
 
 Exigencia 
 
 Despeza 
 
 Extracgau, or exportagao 
 
 Extorsao 
 
 Feitdr, or commissario 
 
 Feira 
 
 Fio, or ardme no qual se 
 enfiao os papeis num es- 
 critdrio 
 
 Quatro, cinco,&c. por cSnto 
 
 Frete 
 
 O quefr6ta hum navio 
 
 Cabeddl or quantia de din- 
 heiro destinddo pdra al- 
 guma cousa 
 
 Gdnho 
 
 O que gdnha 
 
 Fazendas or effeitos 
 
 Estr6a 
 
 Escritura or lettra 
 
 Entrada 
 
 Importaddr 
 RSnda 
 
 Deposit 
 Draw-back 
 
 Dun 
 
 Duplicate 
 
 A broker 
 
 Excbange-broker 
 
 Insurer or under-writer 
 
 Endorsement 
 
 Endorser 
 
 Engrosser 
 
 Enbancement 
 
 Entry 
 
 Equivalent 
 
 Exigency 
 
 Expence 
 
 Export or exportation 
 
 Extortion 
 
 Factor 
 
 Fair 
 
 File for papers 
 
 Four, five, &c. per cent. 
 
 Freight 
 
 A freighter 
 
 Fund 
 
 Gain, or profit 
 
 Gainer 
 
 Goods, effects 
 
 Handsel 
 
 Hand-writing 
 
 A custom for imported 
 
 commodities 
 Importer 
 Income 
 
304 
 
 PORTUGUESE 
 
 Inter esse [cio 
 
 Communicagad, or comme'r 
 Inventdrio 
 InsufficiSncia, or fdlta de 
 
 meyos para pagdr 
 Factura 
 A'rras 
 
 Escritura de arrendam6nto 
 Arrendaddr 
 Livro de razao 
 Empr6stimo 
 Dinheiro emprestddo 
 Carta 
 
 Sobrescrito da cdrta 
 Fechdr huma cdrta com si- 
 
 n€te 
 Mala em que o corr6o trdz 
 
 as cartas 
 HypotMca 
 
 Acreddr hypothecdrio 
 Fiaddr 
 PagamSnto 
 Fait a depagamenio 
 Escrito de divida 
 Ddno 
 Pacdte 
 Serapilheira 
 Brabdnte 
 Mdco de cartas 
 Companheiro de algu6m no 
 
 negocio, or sdcio 
 Socieddde or companhia no 
 
 negdcio 
 Penhdr 
 Contrato do seguro de mer*- 
 
 cancids 
 Seguro 
 
 Protestdr hiima letra 
 Aceitdr huma letra 
 Prot6sto 
 
 Sacdr hiima IStra 
 Correo a6nde se Idncao as 
 
 cdrtas 
 Corr6o que Uva cdrtas 
 P6rte de cdrtas 
 
 Interest 
 Intercourse 
 Inventory 
 Insolvency- 
 Invoice 
 Jointure 
 Lease 
 Lessee 
 
 Ledger-book 
 Loan 
 
 Money lent 
 Letter 
 
 The direction of a letter 
 To make and seal up 
 
 letter 
 Mail 
 
 Mortgage 
 
 Mortgagee 
 
 Bail 
 
 Payment 
 
 Non-payment 
 
 Note, or promissory note 
 
 Owner 
 
 Pack, a truss 
 
 Pack cloth, wrapper 
 
 Packthread 
 
 Packet of letters 
 
 Partner 
 
 Partnership 
 
 Pawn or pledge 
 Policy of insurance 
 
 Insurance 
 
 To protest a bill 
 
 To accept a bill 
 
 Protest 
 
 To draw a bill 
 
 Post-office 
 
 Post-man or letter carrier 
 Postage 
 
GRAMMAR. 
 
 305 
 
 Dinheiro que se pdga aos 
 marinheiros por t6rem 
 carregddo o navio 
 
 Capitdl 
 
 PSrdas e ddnos 
 
 Importdncia 
 
 Importdncia liquida 
 
 Prome'ssa 
 
 Bens 
 
 Pontualiddde 
 
 C6mpra 
 
 Recibo 
 
 Recdmbio 
 
 Arbitro, or louvddo 
 
 LouvamSnto, or arbitrio 
 
 Regatdo 
 
 Quitagao 
 
 Reme'ssa 
 
 VSnda das cdusas por 
 miudo, c6mo fdzem os 
 mercaddres de retdUio 
 
 Mercaddr de retdlho 
 
 Riquezas 
 
 VSnda 
 
 Padrdo 
 
 Amdstra 
 
 Sin6te 
 
 Ldcre 
 
 AjustamSnto de c6ntas 
 
 Mercaddr que tern I6ja 
 
 Livro em que o mercaddr de 
 16 j a tern suas c6ntas 
 
 Contrabandista 
 
 Faz6nda de contrabdndo 
 
 FazSr contrabdndo 
 
 Mode'lo, or fi6l dos pezos e 
 
 medidas publicas 
 Armazim or Almazim 
 Sobrescrevinte 
 Sobscripgdo 
 Tdra 
 Faztinda rolm 
 
 X 
 
 Primage 
 
 Principal, or capital 
 
 Losses and damages 
 
 Proceed 
 
 Neat proceed 
 
 Promise 
 
 Property 
 
 Punctuality 
 
 Purchase 
 
 Receipt 
 
 Re-exchange 
 
 Referee or umpire 
 
 Reference 
 
 Regrater 
 
 Release 
 
 Remittance 
 
 Retail 
 
 Retailer 
 
 Riches, wealth 
 
 Sale 
 
 A pattern 
 
 Sample 
 
 Seal 
 
 Sealing-wax 
 
 Settlement of accounts 
 
 Shop-keeper 
 
 Shop-book 
 
 Smuggler 
 
 Contraband, or prohibited 
 
 * goods, goods smuggled, 
 or run 
 
 To run, to smuggle pro- 
 hibited goods 
 
 Standard measure 
 
 Warehouse 
 
 Subscriber 
 
 Subscription 
 
 Tare 
 
 Trash of goods 
 
30G 
 
 PORTUGUESE 
 
 Risco 
 
 Juros 
 
 Usurdrio 
 
 Usura 
 
 Mercancias 
 
 Val6r 
 
 Avaria 
 
 Direitos 
 
 Tributo, or contribuigdo 
 
 Sisa 
 
 Siseiro 
 
 Cdes 
 
 Direito que se pdga, por 
 
 desembarcar fazGndas no 
 
 cdes 
 Collectdr do mesmo direito, 
 
 ou tributo 
 Dizimos 
 
 Dizimaddr, or dizimeiro 
 Lduga vidrdda, sem ser da 
 
 China 
 Mercaddr de atacddo 
 Venda que se faz por par- 
 
 tidas 
 
 Risk 
 
 Interest 
 
 Usurer 
 
 Usury 
 
 Wares 
 
 Worth, or value 
 
 Average 
 
 Duties or custom 
 
 Cess, tribute 
 
 Excise 
 
 Exciseman 
 
 Wharf 
 
 Wharfage 
 
 Wharfinger 
 
 Tithes 
 
 Tithe-gatherer 
 
 Dutch-ware 
 
 Wholesale dealer 
 Wholesale 
 
 Da Mo6da, ou Dinheiro 
 Portuguez. 
 This mark * is prefixed 
 
 * Redl 
 D6s r6is 
 Vinttm 
 
 Tostdo, ou 5 vint6ms 
 4 Tostdens, ou hum crusado 
 Crusadondvo, ou 24 vintSns 
 8 Tostdens 
 
 Hum quarto de 6uro, ou 12 
 tostdens 
 
 * MilrHs, ou 10 tostdens 
 16 Tostdens 
 
 Miya mo6da de 6uro 
 3,200, ou 32 tostdens 
 Mo6da da duro de 4,800 
 P6ga de 6,400 
 Ddbrao ou 12,800 
 
 Of the Portuguese Coin, 
 
 to the imaginary money. 
 
 A ree, equal to gfcd. 
 10 rees, §g£. 
 A vintin, IJ^d. 
 A testoon, §\d. 
 A crusade, 2s. 3d. 
 A new crusade, 2s, 8fd. 
 8 testoons, 4s. 6d. 
 12 testoons, 6s. 9d. 
 
 A milree, 5s. l\d. 
 16 testoons, 9s. 
 Half moidore, 13s. Gd. 
 32 testoons, 1 8s. 
 A moidore, 11. 7s. 
 Joanese, 11. 16s. 
 128 testoons, SI. 12s. 
 
PROVERBS. 
 
 307 
 
 COLLECCAO A COLLECTION 
 
 DE 
 
 Adagios Portugueses. 
 
 OF 
 
 Portuguese Proverbs. 
 
 A A'GOA o dd, a dgoa 
 I6va 
 
 Na dgoa envolta p6sca o 
 pescador 
 
 Estd como o peixe rC dgoa 
 Trazer a dgoa para o 
 
 moinho 
 Levdr dgoa ao mar 
 As dgoas estdo bdixas 
 O que nao p6de al sir, 
 
 d€ves soffrer 
 C6mo c6mo hum aldrve 
 MetSr a pdlha na alhdrda 
 Alazao tostddo dntes mdrto 
 
 que cancddo 
 Hiima disgrdga alcdnga a 
 
 6utra 
 Estdr na aldea, e nao v6r 
 
 as cdsas 
 
 Quern trabdlha, tern alfdya 
 Fdllo-lhe em alkos, re- 
 
 sp6ndeme em bugdlhos 
 Em t£mpo nevddo o diho 
 
 vale hum cavdllo 
 
 WHAT is got over the 
 devil's back will be spent 
 under his belly ; also 
 lightly come, lightly go 
 
 To fish in troubled waters, 
 (to make a benefit of 
 public troubles) 
 
 He lives in clover 
 
 To bring grist to the mill 
 
 To carry coals to Newcastle 
 He or she is at a low ebb 
 What can't be cured must 
 
 be endured 
 He eats like a thresher 
 To cheat, to impose upon 
 A dark sorrel horse will die 
 
 before he'll jade 
 One mischief draws on an- 
 other 
 We say, you can't see wood 
 for trees : or to be like 
 the butcher that looked 
 for his knife when he had 
 it in his mouth 
 He that works has furniture 
 I talk of chalk, and you of 
 
 cheese 
 Garlick in the foggy wea- 
 ther is as good as a horse ; 
 it means that garlick is a 
 good defence for travel- 
 lers against dampness and 
 cold weather 
 2 
 
308 PORTUGUESE 
 
 Tito co mo hum dlho 
 
 Sua alma, sua palma 
 Na almond a tern a barb a 
 qaeda 
 
 Pagdr os dltos de vasio 
 
 Quern dma a beltrdo, dma 
 
 a seu cao 
 Cdda qual dma sSu semel- 
 
 hdnte 
 Tambem os ameaoddos 
 
 cdmem pdo 
 
 C6?itas de p6rto, e amigos 
 
 de longe 
 Tarn bom he Pedro cdmo 
 
 sSu dmo 
 Furtdr o carneiro, e dar os 
 
 p6s pello am6r de D6os 
 
 Nem hum dedofaz mao, nem 
 huma andorinha verdo 
 
 Levdr pdlhas, e ardlhos 
 
 Na arSa aberta o justo 
 pScca 
 
 Be hum argueiro, fazSr 
 hum cavalleiro 
 
 Com drte, e com engdno se 
 vive m6yo dnno ; com en- 
 gdno, e com drte, se vive 
 a Sutra parte 
 
 Quern a b6a drvore se 
 
 ■■ chiga, bda sdmbra o 
 c6bre 
 
 A'sno m6rto, cevdda do 
 rdbo 
 
 A h sno que temf6me, cdrdos 
 cdme 
 
 As stiff as garlick ; that is 
 a healthy, strong, robust 
 person 
 
 As you brew, even so bake 
 
 At a sale keep your beard 
 on your chin still ; that is, 
 let not your beard wag 
 too fast in bidding, lest 
 you overbid and repent 
 
 To have but little or no 
 sense at all 
 
 Love me, love my dog 
 
 Like will to like, or like 
 
 loves like 
 Threatened folks eat bread ; 
 
 we say, threatened folks 
 
 live long 
 Even reckonings make long 
 
 friends 
 Like master, like man 
 
 We say, to steal the goose 
 
 and give the giblets in 
 
 alms 
 One swallow does not 
 
 make summer. Una 
 
 hirundo non facit ver, 
 
 says Horace 
 To sweep stakes 
 That is, it is opportunity 
 
 that makes the thief 
 We say, to make mountains 
 
 of mole-hjlls 
 That is, all a man's life is a 
 
 cheat 
 
 That is, he that relies on 
 
 good worthy people, 
 
 reaps a benefit 
 A day after the fair, or 
 
 after meat, mustard 
 We say, hungry dogs will 
 
 eat dirty pudding 
 
PROV 
 
 *$opa de met nao sefez pdra 
 
 a bdca do dsno 
 Mais qu6ro dsno que me 
 
 I6ve, que cavdllo que me 
 
 derrube 
 Mais vol ma avinca que 
 
 boa sentenga 
 Nad deites azeite no f 6 go 
 
 Da mdo a bdca se p6rde a 
 
 Em bdca cerrdda nao entra 
 
 mdsca 
 Quern tern bdca vdi a R6ma 
 
 PSlla bdca mdrre o peixe 
 
 Cad a bofarinheiro louva 
 
 sSus alfinetes 
 Quern tern qudtro, e gdsta 
 
 cinco, nao ha mistCr 
 
 bolsa nem bolsinho 
 Cd car vdi pella vinlia por 
 
 onde vdi a may, vdi a 
 
 filha 
 Matdr ddus coSlhos de 
 
 huma cajaddda 
 Q / uem cdnta, seus males 
 
 espdnta 
 
 Deitdr a cdpa a tduro 
 
 Viva el-rey, e da cd a cdpa 
 
 E R B S. 309 
 
 Good things are not fit for 
 
 fools 
 Better be an old man's dar- 
 ling, than a young man's 
 
 warling 
 It is better to agree at any 
 
 rate than go to law 
 Do not throw oil into the 
 
 fire 
 Much falls between the cup 
 
 and the lip 
 A close mouth catches no 
 
 flies 
 That is, a man may go any 
 
 where, if he has language 
 
 to speak for himself and 
 
 ask his way 
 Much talking brings much 
 
 woe 
 Every man thinks his own 
 
 geese swans 
 He that hath four and 
 
 spends five, hath no need 
 
 of a purse 
 Like father like son 
 
 We say, to kill two birds 
 with one stone 
 
 The person who sings 
 makes easy his misfor- 
 tunes ; that is, singing 
 causes him not to reflect 
 on it so much as he other- 
 wise would 
 
 To throw one's cloak at 
 the bull ; that is, ,to ven- 
 ture all a man has, to save 
 his life 
 
 Let the king live, and give 
 me the cloak ; that is 
 spoken of persons who, 
 under a pretence of au- 
 thority, rob and plunder 
 other people, and at the 
 
310 
 
 PORTUGUESE 
 
 Anddr de cdpa cahida 
 
 O cdo com rdiva de sSu 
 ddno trdva 
 
 Quern com cdens se Idnga, 
 compulgas se levdnta 
 
 A cdme de Idbo dSnte de 
 cdo 
 
 Quern faz cdsa na prdga, 
 huns dizem que lie alia, 
 dutros, que he baixa 
 
 A cavdllo dado nab dllies o 
 
 dente 
 Quern quer cavdllo sem 
 
 tdcha, sem elle se dcha 
 C6bra bdafdma, e deita-te 
 
 a dormir 
 Fazir as cdntas sem a hds- 
 
 peda 
 
 Do contddo cdme o l6bo 
 
 Em cdsa de ladrdo 
 fdlles em cdrda 
 
 nao 
 
 Do cduro Ihe sdhem as cor- 
 rias 
 
 same time p retend they are 
 doing justice to the power 
 reposed in their hands 
 
 To be behind-hand in the 
 world 
 
 A mad dog bites his own 
 master ; there is no trust- 
 ing to madmen, or people 
 in a rage 
 
 We say, lie with beggars 
 and you will get fleas 
 
 That is, to return railing for 
 railing ; or, as our mo- 
 dern proverb says, give 
 him a Rowland for his 
 Oliver ; the Latins say, 
 par pari refer re 
 
 That is, a man in public bu- 
 siness can't please every 
 body ; or, as Solon says, 
 'tis rare that statesmen 
 can all parties please 
 
 Never look in the mouth of 
 a gift horse 
 
 'Tis a good horse that never 
 stumbles 
 
 When your name is up, you 
 may lie a-bed till noon 
 
 To reckon without the hos- 
 tess ; or, as we say, the 
 host 
 
 The wolf eats of what is 
 counted ; that is, thieves 
 will steal, though they 
 know it will be missed, 
 much more if they think 
 it will not 
 
 You should not mention a 
 halter to any whose rela- 
 tions or friends have suf- 
 fered by it ; that is, no 
 man should be hit in the 
 teeth of his disgrace 
 
 The thongs come out of his 
 skin ; that is, he pays for it 
 
PROVERBS, 
 
 311 
 
 Cor tar o vestido confdrme 
 
 o pdnno 
 Cria o corvo, tirdrvos-hd o 
 
 olho 
 
 Tdnta culpa tern o ladrao 
 c6mo o consentidor 
 
 Dddivas quebrdntao p€n- 
 has 
 
 Melhdr he fazer de bdlde 
 que estdr deb aide 
 
 Deitdr azeite no f 6 go 
 
 Nao he o d6mo tarn feio 
 
 como o pintad 
 Primeiro sao dSntes, que 
 
 parentes 
 
 Ld vdi a lingoa, 6nde o 
 
 dente grita 
 Qudndo cuidas meter o 
 
 dente em seguro, topardz 
 
 o duro 
 
 Ddr com a li7igoa nos 
 
 dintes 
 Quern nao f alia, nao o ouve 
 
 D6os 
 
 Ventura te dS Deos,filho; 
 que sabSr pouco te bdsta 
 
 Cad a qual por si, e Deos 
 por tddos 
 
 To cut one's coat according 
 to the cloth 
 
 It is said of a person that, 
 being received in distress, 
 defrauds or grows too 
 great for him that enter- 
 tained him 
 
 The receiver is as bad as 
 the thief 
 
 Gifts break rocks ; that is, 
 kindness overcomes the 
 hardest hearts; and bribes 
 or presents corrupt the 
 most resolved 
 
 It is better to work for no- 
 thing than to be lazy and 
 do nothing at all 
 
 To make bad worse. Ho- 
 race says, Oleum addere 
 camino 
 
 We say, the lion is not so 
 fierce as his picture 
 
 We say, near is my coat, but 
 nearerismyskin,<^c. Te- 
 rence says, Heus proxi- 
 mus sum egomet mihi 
 
 To scratch where it itches 
 
 Harm watch, harm catch. 
 Horace says, 
 — etfragili qucerens Mi- 
 
 dere dentem 
 — Offendet solido 
 
 To contradict one's self, to 
 belie . 
 
 A man may hold his tongue 
 in an ill time ; also spare to 
 speak and spare to speed 
 
 God give you good luck, 
 child, for a little learning 
 will serve your turn ; be- 
 cause it is fortune that 
 raises men morethan merit 
 
 Every one for himself, and 
 God for all 
 
312 
 
 PORTUGUESE 
 
 Em bona dias, bdas 6bras 
 Para dia de sao cerijo 
 
 Tudo pdde o dinheiro 
 
 O homem propdem, e DSos 
 
 disp6em 
 D6rme c6mo hum argandz 
 A bom entendeddr pducas 
 
 palavras bastao 
 Gdto escaldddo da dgoa 
 
 fria ha m6do 
 No escudelldr verds quern 
 
 ie qu6r bem, ou mal 
 
 Esmoldu sdo Matthdus, es- 
 mol6u pdra os s£us 
 
 Nao ha melhdr espelho que 
 o amigo vttho 
 
 Nem estdpa com tigdens, 
 nem molhe'r com vardens 
 
 Falldr sem cuiddr, he atirdr 
 sem afrontdr 
 
 Fdlla pduco e bem, tirte 
 hdo por alguSm 
 
 QuSm afdma tern perdida, 
 mdrto dnda nesta vida 
 
 A quern mdfdma tern, nem 
 accompdnhes, nem digas 
 bem 
 
 Aproveitaddr de far6los, 
 esperdigaddr de farinha 
 
 The better days the better 
 
 deeds 
 We say, when two Sundays 
 
 come together, that is 
 
 never 
 Money governs the world 
 Man proposes, and God 
 
 disposes 
 He sleeps like a dormouse 
 A word to the wise is enough 
 
 We say, a burnt child dreads 
 
 the lire 
 That is, people's affections 
 
 are discovered by their 
 
 liberality 
 Charity begins at home 
 
 There is no better looking- 
 glass than an old friend ; 
 that is, such a one will not 
 flatter a man, but tell him 
 the truth 
 
 That is, conversation of wo- 
 men is dangerous; it is not 
 good jesting with edged 
 tools 
 
 To let one's tongue run, 
 without reflecting on what 
 one says, is like shooting 
 at random 
 
 Talk little and well, and 
 you'll be counted some- 
 body ; that is, you'll be 
 esteemed 
 
 He who has lost his reputa- 
 tion is as good as dead 
 w r hilst living 
 
 Do not keep company with, 
 nor be fond of, one that 
 has an ill name 
 
 That is, one that saves atthe 
 spiggot and lets it run out 
 at the bung ; also, penny 
 wise and pound foolish 
 
PROVERBS 
 
 313 
 
 Naofdzem bdafarinha 
 
 Quern md afaz nella jdz 
 Ag6ra dd pao e mel, e de- 
 
 p6is dard pdo efel 
 Lingoa doce como mel, e co- 
 raqdo amargoso como f el 
 Better o f6rro qudndo estd 
 ~ quSnte 
 
 Quern com ferro mdta> a 
 
 f€rro mdrre 
 Carregddo de f6rro, carre^ 
 
 gddo de me do 
 
 Quern te, faz festa, ndo 
 soendo fazer, ou te quer 
 engandr, ou te ha mister 
 
 Ndo fies, nem prqfies, nem 
 arrendes, vivirds Sntre 
 as gentes 
 
 Mijdr claro, dar humafiga 
 
 ao medico 
 Se ndo b6be na tav6rna, 
 
 f6lga n6lla 
 Achdu fdrma pdra o s6u 
 
 sapdlo 
 
 Nao sejdis fornSiro se 
 tendes a cabega de man- 
 teiga 
 
 Ao kdmem ousddo a for- 
 
 tuna the da a mdo 
 Rdupa defrancezes 
 
 Cahir da frigideira nas 
 brasas 
 
 They can't set their horses 
 together 
 
 Self do self harm 
 
 After sweet meat comes 
 sour sauce 
 
 An honey tongue> an heart 
 of gall 
 
 To beat the iron whilst it 
 is hot, or to make hay 
 whilst the sun shines 
 
 He who kills by the sword 
 dies by the sword 
 
 He who is loaded with iron 
 is loaded with fear ; that 
 is, he who loads himself 
 with armourand weapons 
 against danger, discovers 
 he is much afraid 
 
 He that makes more of you 
 than he is wont to do, 
 either designs to cheat 
 you, or stands in need of 
 you 
 
 Do not trust, nor contend, 
 nor hire, and you'll live 
 among men; that is, you'll 
 live peaceably 
 
 Tell the truth and shame the 
 devil 
 
 We say, he does not smoke 
 but smokes 
 
 He has found a last to his 
 shoe ; that is, he has met 
 with his match 
 
 Do not undertake to be a 
 bakerif yourhead ismade 
 of butter ; that is, do not 
 take upon you any busi- 
 ness you are unfit for 
 
 Fortune favours the bold 
 
 Things left at random, or 
 exposed to be pillaged 
 
 To fall out of the frying-pan 
 into the fire 
 
314 
 
 PORTUGUESE 
 
 Dizem osfilhos dosoallwiro, 
 o que onvem diz6r a s£us 
 ]jays do fumeiro 
 
 P6rto vdi ofumo da chtima 
 
 Quern huma viz furta, fiel 
 nimaa 
 
 Mai vdi ao fuso qudndo a 
 bdrba ndo dnda em cima 
 
 Cdda Urra coin seu uso, 
 edda rdca com seu fuso 
 
 Qudntas cabecas, tdntas 
 car apneas 
 
 Quern Ihe doer a cabega que 
 a aperte 
 
 Se quires saber quern hi o 
 villao, mitelke a vara na 
 mdo 
 
 Nao ha rdsa sem espinhos 
 
 Anddr, anddr, vir morrer 
 d beira 
 
 Quern nao dive, nao teme 
 Quern qudndo pdde, nao 
 
 qu6r, qudndo quer, nao 
 
 pdde 
 Hdmem honrddo nao ha 
 
 misUr gabddo 
 Hdmem grdnde, besta dc 
 
 pdo 
 
 Little pitchers have great 
 ears 
 
 We say, there is no smoke 
 
 without some fire 
 He who once steals, is never 
 
 trusty ; or, once a thief, 
 
 always a thief 
 Alas for the spindle when 
 
 the beard is not over it ! 
 
 By the spindle is meant 
 
 the woman, and by the 
 
 beard is meant the man 
 So many countries, so many 
 
 customs 
 Several men, several minds 
 
 We say, if any fool finds the 
 cap fit him, let him put it 
 on 
 
 Set a beggar on horseback, 
 and he will ride to the 
 devil 
 
 There is no rose without 
 thorns, there is no sweet 
 without some sweat 
 
 To eat an whole ox and 
 faint at the tail. This pro- 
 verb is spoken when any 
 body falls short of a thing 
 after having used all his 
 endeavours 
 
 Out of debt out of danger 
 
 It is good to make hay while 
 the sun shines 
 
 We say, a good face needs 
 no band 
 
 This proverb intimates, that 
 things are not to be valued 
 by their bulk, but accord- 
 ing to their intrinsic worth 
 and value ; and'so we say, 
 a lark is better than a 
 kite 
 
PROVERBS. 
 
 315 
 
 Debdixo de ma cdpa jdz 
 boin bebeddr 
 
 Quern muilo abrdga, pouco 
 
 apbrta 
 No agdugue, quern mal 
 fdlla, mal ouve 
 
 Quern em mats alto ndda, 
 mais presto se afoga 
 
 Hdspede com sol, ha hondr, 
 H6spedafor?n6sa, ddnofaz 
 
 d bolsa 
 O hdspede e o peixe aos trSs 
 
 diasftde 
 
 Hdrta sem dgoa, cdsa sem 
 telhddo,molh6r semamdr, 
 marido sem cuidddo, de 
 grdga he cdro 
 
 Hdnra ao bom para que te 
 honre, e ao mdopdra que 
 te nao deshonre 
 
 Hdnra h6 dos dmos, a que 
 sefaz aos criddos 
 
 Officio de conselho, h6nra 
 sem provHto 
 
 Hdmem apercebido, mSyo 
 combatido 
 
 A tattered cloak may cover 
 a good drinker ; that is, 
 men are not to be judged 
 by outward appearance 
 
 All grasp, all lose ; or covet 
 all, and lose all 
 
 He that speaks knavishly 
 shall hear knavishly. Te- 
 rence says, Qui per git ea, 
 quce vulf, dicer e, ea t quce 
 non vult, audiet 
 
 This is, the highest charges 
 are the more liable and 
 nearer to the downfall 
 
 First come, first served 
 
 A beautiful hostess, or land- 
 lady, is bad for the purse 
 
 Fresh fish, and new come 
 guests, smell when they 
 are three days old 
 
 That is, a garden without 
 water, a house untiled, a 
 wife without love, and a 
 careless husband, are all 
 alike, being all stark 
 nought 
 
 Honour a good man, that he 
 may honour you ; and an 
 ill man, that he may not 
 dishonour you 
 
 The honour done to servants 
 redounds to their masters 
 
 An office in the council is 
 honour without profit ; 
 that is, to be of the coun- 
 cil of a town, by which 
 nothing is got in Portugal 
 
 A man that is prepared, bas 
 half the battle over 
 
316 
 
 DIALOGUES. 
 
 D I A L O G O S 
 
 FAMILIARES. 
 
 FAMILIAR 
 
 DIALOGUES. 
 
 TENHA vm. muiio bons 
 
 dias 
 C6mo estd vm. ? ou como 
 
 passa vm. ? 
 Bern, nao muito-b0m 9 vdu 
 
 passdndo 
 Muiio bempara servir a vm. 
 As drdens de vm. 
 Fico-lhe muiio obrigddo 
 Agradecido 
 Cdmo estd, ou pdssa o sen- 
 
 h6r s&u irmdo ? 
 Muiio bem, ndo muito bSm 
 
 Elle terd g6sto de ver a vm. 
 Nao terH tempo para hir 
 
 a vSlo h6je 
 Fdga favor de assentdr-se 
 Da hiima cadSira ao senli6r 
 
 Ndo h6 necessdrio 
 
 Tenho que hir afazSr huma 
 
 visita aqui nesta visin- 
 
 hdnga 
 Vm. tern pressa 
 E'u 16 go voltarei 
 
 Adeos meu senhor 
 
 V6lgo de vSr a vm. com b6a 
 
 saude • 
 BSijo as maos de vm. 
 Sou criddo de vm. 
 S6u muiio seu criddo 
 
 GOOD morrow, sir 
 
 How do you do, sir? 
 
 Well ; not very well ; so, so 
 
 Very well to serve you 
 
 At your service 
 
 I am obliged to you 
 
 I thank you 
 
 How does your brother do ? 
 
 He is very well ; not very 
 well 
 
 He will be glad to see you 
 
 I shall have'no time to see 
 him to-day 
 
 Be pleased to sit down 
 
 Give a chair to the gentle- 
 man 
 
 There's no occasion 
 
 I must go to make a visit in 
 the neighbourhood 
 
 You are in haste 
 
 FI1 be back, or return pre- 
 sently 
 
 Farewell, sir 
 
 I am glad to see you in good 
 health 
 
 I kiss your hand 
 
 I am your servant 
 
 Your most humble servant 
 
DIALOGUES. 
 
 317 
 
 II. Para fazer huma Visita 
 de Manhaa. 
 
 ONDE estd Uu dmo? 
 
 Ainda ddrme ? 
 
 Nao, senhdr, illeestd acor- 
 
 dddo 
 Estd Slle ja levantddo ? 
 Nao, senhdr, elle ainda 
 
 estd na cdma 
 Que vergdnha de estdr ain- 
 da na cdma a 6stas hdras ! 
 Ontem a ndite fui para a 
 
 cdma tao tdrde, que nao 
 
 me pude levantdr cedo 
 
 esta manhaa 
 Que fiz6rab vm c ". depdis 
 
 de cea ? 
 Dangdmos, cantdmos, ri- 
 
 mos, e jugdmos 
 A que j6go ? 
 A'os cantos 
 Qudnto me peza de o nao 
 
 tSr sabido ! 
 Quern ganhdu ? quern per- 
 
 d€o ? 
 Eu ganhei dez mo6das 
 AU que hdras jugdrao 
 
 vm ces ? 
 At6 duas hdras depots da 
 
 mSya ndite 
 A que hdras fdi vm, para a 
 
 cdma ? 
 A's trSs, ds trSs hdras e 
 
 meya 
 Que hdras sao ? 
 Que hdras the parece a vm. 
 
 que sSjao 
 ParSceme que ap4nas sao 
 
 dito 
 Sim ! dito ! ja d6rao dSz 
 
 Entdo he preciso que me 
 levdnte qudnto mais de- 
 pr6ssa puder 
 
 II. To visit in the Morn- 
 ing. 
 
 WHERE is your master? 
 
 Is he asleep still ? 
 No, sir, he is awake 
 
 Is he up? 
 
 No, sir, he is still a-bed 
 
 What a shame 'tis to be a- 
 bed at this time a-day 
 
 I went to bed so late last 
 night I could not rise 
 early this morning 
 
 What did you do after sup- 
 per? 
 
 We danced, we sung, we 
 laughed, we played 
 
 At what game ? 
 
 We played at piquet 
 
 How grieved am I, I did 
 not know it ! 
 
 Who won ? who lost ? 
 
 I won ten moidores 
 
 Till what hour did you 
 
 play ? 
 Till two in the morning 
 
 At what o'clock did you go 
 
 to bed ? 
 At three, half an hour after 
 
 three 
 What's o'clock ? 
 What do you think it is ? 
 
 Scarce eight, I believe yet 
 
 How! eight! it has struck 
 
 ten 
 Then I must rise with all 
 
 speed 
 
318 
 
 DIALOGUES. 
 
 III. Para vestir-se 
 
 QUE M estd ahi? 
 Que qu6r vm. ? 
 
 Despdxa-te, acende o lume, 
 
 e v6sie-me 
 Dd-me a minha camisa 
 Eila aqui estd, senhdr 
 Nao estd quente, estd mui- 
 
 tofria 
 Eu a aquentarei, se vm. 
 
 quizSr 
 Nao, nao; trdze-me as 
 
 minhas m€yas de sSda 
 Hiima deltas estd rdta 
 Da-lhe hum p6nto, concur- 
 
 ta-a 
 Dei- a ao que as conc6rta 
 
 Fize'ste-bem 
 
 C/nde estao as minhas 
 
 chinelas 
 C/nde estd a minha rdupa 
 
 de chdmbre ? 
 Pentea-me 
 Dd-me o mfu lengo 
 Eis aqui hum lav ado 
 Dd-me o que estd na min- 
 ha algibeira 
 Dei-o d lavandeira, £lle 
 estdva suj'o [rdupa ? 
 Tr6uxe 6lla ja a minha 
 Sim, senhdr, e naofdlta nada 
 Trdze-me os meus calgdens 
 Que vestido quer vm. para 
 
 hoje ? 
 O mesmo de Sntem 
 O alfaiate ha de trazSr 
 Idgo o seu vestido [h6 
 Bdtem d pdrta, v6 Id quern 
 
 H6 o alfaiate 
 DHxa-o entrdr 
 
 III. To dress one's self. 
 
 WHO is there ? 
 
 What will you please to 
 
 have ? 
 Be quick, make a fire, dress 
 
 me 
 Give me my shirt 
 Here it is, sir 
 Tis not warm, 'tis quite 
 
 cold 
 If you please I'll warm it 
 
 No, no ; bring me my silk 
 
 stockings 
 One of them is torn 
 Stitch it a little, mend it 
 
 I have given it to the stock- 
 ing mender 
 You have done right 
 Where are my slippers ? 
 
 Where is my night gown 
 
 Comb my head 
 
 Give me my handkerchief 
 
 Here is a clean one 
 
 Give me that which is in my 
 pocket 
 
 I gave it to the washer-wo- 
 man, it was foul 
 
 Has she brought my linen ? 
 
 Yes, there wants nothing 
 
 Bring me my breeches 
 
 What clothes will you wear 
 to-day ? 
 
 Those I wore yesterday 
 
 The taylor will bring your 
 cloth suit presently 
 
 Somebody knocks, see who 
 it is 
 
 It is the tailor 
 
 Let him come in 
 
DIALOGUES. 
 
 319 
 
 IV. O Senh6r e o Alfaiate. IV. 
 
 The Gentleman and 
 the Tailor. 
 
 TRAZEISomtu vestido? 
 
 Sim, senhdr, eilo aqui 
 Ha miiito tempo que estdu 
 
 esperdndo por Slle 
 Nad pude vir at6 agdra 
 Nao estdva acabddo 
 Ainda nao estava forrddo 
 Quer vm. vestir a casdca 
 
 para vSr se Ihe estd bSm ? 
 Vejdmos se estd bemfeita 
 
 T6nho para mim que Ihe 
 
 hdja de agraddr 
 Par6ce-me muito comprida 
 
 He costume, agdra de tra- 
 
 z&las compridas 
 Abotodi-a 
 He miiito apertdda 
 Assim dbves&rpara que Ihe 
 
 estSja bem ao cdrpo 
 Nao sao as mdngas dema- 
 
 siddamente Idrgas ? 
 Nao, senhdr, estao-lhe ad- 
 
 mirdvelminte 
 Os calg6ens sao muito aper- 
 
 tddos ? 
 E'sta he a mdda de agdra 
 Este vestido estd- the bizar- 
 
 ramSnte 
 He muito curto, muito com- 
 
 prido, muito grdnde, 
 
 muito pequino 
 TSndes feito a vdssa c6n- 
 
 ta? 
 Nad, senhdr, nao tive tSm- 
 
 po 
 -TrazH-a amanhad, e pa- 
 
 gdrvos hei 
 
 DO you bring my suit of 
 
 clothes? 
 Yes, sir, here it is 
 You make me wait a great 
 
 while 
 I could not come sooner 
 It was not finished 
 The lining was not sewed 
 Will you please to try the 
 
 close coat on ? 
 Let us see whether it be 
 
 well made 
 I believe it will please you 
 
 It seems to me to be very 
 
 long ' 
 They wear them long now 
 
 Button it 
 
 It is too close 
 
 To fit properly, it ought to 
 
 be close 
 Are not the sleeves too* 
 
 wide ? 
 No, sir, they fit very welt 
 
 The breeches are very nar- 
 row 
 
 That is the fashion 
 
 This suit becomes you 
 mighty well 
 
 'Tis too short, too long, too 
 big, too little 
 
 Have you made your bill ? 
 
 No, sir, I had no time 
 
 Bring it to-morrow, I'll 
 pay you 
 
320 
 
 DIALOGUES, 
 
 V. Paraalmocar. 
 
 TRA'ZE-nos alguma cdu- 
 
 sa para almogdr 
 Sim, senhdr, ha linguigas 
 
 e pastelinhos 
 Gosta vm. de presunto ? 
 
 Sim, trdze-o ; comer emos 
 
 huma talhdda de"lle 
 Estende hum guardandpo 
 
 sobre aqu6lla mesa 
 Dd-nos prdtos, fdcas, e 
 
 gdrfos 
 Ldva os cdpos 
 Dd hum a cadeira ao senhdr 
 AssSnte-se vm. assente-se 
 
 ao p6 do lume 
 Nao tenhofrio, aqui ficarH 
 
 miiito bem 
 Vejdmos se o vinho he bdm 
 
 Da cd aqu6lla garrdfa com 
 
 aquelle c6po 
 Fdga favdr de provdr 
 
 aquelle vinho 
 C6mo Ihe agrdda ; que diz 
 
 vm. delle ? 
 Nao h6 mdo, he muito bdm 
 Eis aqui as linguigas, tira 
 
 aquelle prdto 
 C6ma vm. linguigas 
 J a comi algumas, 6llas sao 
 
 muito bdas 
 Dd-me de beber 
 A saude de vm. 
 Bom proveito fdga a vm. 
 Dd de beber ao senhdr 
 
 E'u bebi dinda agdra 
 
 Os pastelinhos 6rao bem 
 
 b6ns 
 Estdvao hum pduco mdis 
 
 cozidos que deviao estdr 
 
 To breakfast. 
 
 BRING us something for 
 breakfast 
 
 Yes, sir, there are some sau- 
 sages aud petty-patees 
 
 Do you choose the gammon 
 of bacon ? 
 
 Yes, bring it ; we will eat a 
 slice of it 
 
 Lay a napkin on that table 
 
 Give us plates, knives, and 
 
 forks 
 Rinse the glasses 
 Reach the gentleman a ch air 
 Sit down, sir ; sit by the fire 
 
 I am not cold, I shall be 
 
 very well here 
 Let us see whether the wine 
 
 be good 
 Give me that bottle and a 
 
 glass 
 Taste that wine, pray 
 
 How do you like it ? what 
 
 say you to it ? 
 It is not bad, it is very good 
 Here are the sausages, take 
 
 away this plate 
 Eat some sausages, sir 
 I have eat some, they are 
 
 very good 
 Give me some drink 
 Your health, sir 
 Much good may it do you 
 Give the gentleman some 
 
 drink 
 I drank but just now 
 The petty-patees were very 
 
 good 
 They were baked a little 
 
 too much 
 
Vm. nao cdme 
 TSnho comido tdnto, que 
 nao poderH jantdr 
 
 Vm. estct zombdndo, vm. 
 nao tern comido ndda 
 
 Tenho comido com muito 
 g&sto, tdnto das lingui- 
 gas como do presunto 
 
 DIALOGUES. 321 
 
 You do not eat 
 
 I have eat too much, I shall 
 
 not be able to eat any 
 
 dinner 
 You only jest, you have eat 
 
 nothing at all 
 I have eat very heartily 
 
 both of sausages and 
 
 gammon of bacon 
 
 VL 
 
 Para fallar Portuguez. 
 
 COMO vdi vm. com o seu 
 
 Portuguez ? 
 Estd vm. ja muito adian- 
 
 tddo nelle ? 
 Ainda me fdlta muito ; 
 
 nao set quasi ndda 
 Dizem porem que vm. o 
 
 fdlla muito hem 
 Prouv6ra a Deos que assim 
 
 fdsse ! 
 Os que dizem isso, estdo 
 
 muito enganddos 
 Esteja vm. na certeza que 
 
 assim mo diss6rao 
 Pdsso fallar algumas pa- 
 
 Idvras que aprendi de c<$r 
 E unicamente o que h6 ne- 
 
 cessdrio para comecar a 
 
 fallar 
 comecar nao he bastdnte 
 
 he preciso que vm. acdbe 
 Valle vm, s€mpre ou b&m 
 
 ou mdl 
 Tenho m6do de dar Srros 
 
 Nao tSnha vm. medo ; a 
 
 lingoa PortuguSza nao 
 
 h6 difficil 
 Conheco is so, e tambem que 
 
 iUa he muito engragdda 
 Que feliciddde seria a mi- 
 
 nha se $u a soubtsse Mm I 
 
 VI. To speak Portuguese. 
 
 HOW goes on your Por- 
 tuguese ? 
 
 Are you much improved in 
 it now ? 
 
 Far from it ; I know no- 
 thing almost 
 
 It is said, however, you 
 speak it very well 
 
 Would to God it were true ! 
 
 Those that say so are much 
 
 mistaken 
 I assure you I was told so 
 
 I can say a few words which 
 I have learnt by heart 
 
 Only so much as is neces- 
 sary to begin to speak 
 
 The beginning is not all, 
 you must make an end 
 
 Be always speaking, whe- 
 ther well, or ill 
 
 I am afraid to commit blun- 
 ders 
 
 Never fear ; the Portuguese 
 language is not hard 
 
 I know it ; and that it has 
 abundance of graces 
 
 How happy should I be, if 
 I were master of it ! 
 
322 D I A L O 
 
 A applicagao h6 o ujiico 
 
 m&yo para aprend6-la 
 Quunto tempo ha que vm. 
 
 aprSnde ? 
 Ap&nas ha hum miz 
 C6mo se chdma o seu m6s- 
 
 tre? 
 
 Chdma-se 
 
 Ha muito tempo que o con- 
 
 hego 
 Elle tern ensinddo a muitos 
 
 dos m6us amigos 
 Nao Ihe diz Slle ser preciso 
 
 que fdlle sempre Portu- 
 
 guez ? 
 Sim, senhor, assim me diz 
 
 miiitas vezes 
 P ois, por que nao f alia vm.? 
 Com quern qu€r vm. que eu 
 
 fdlle 
 Com os que falldrem com 
 
 vm. 
 E'u quizera foliar, mas 
 
 nao me atrSvo 
 He preciso que vm. nao 
 
 t6nha mSdo, nem se peje 
 
 dos que o ouvirem falldr 
 
 CUES. 
 
 Application is the only way 
 
 to learn it 
 How long have you been 
 
 learning ? 
 Scarce a month yet 
 What is your master's name ? 
 
 His name is 
 
 I have known him a great 
 
 while 
 He has taught several friends 
 
 of mine 
 Does not he tell you that 
 
 you must constantly talk 
 
 Portuguese ? 
 Yes, sir, he often tells me so 
 
 Why do not you talk then ? 
 Who would you have me 
 
 talk with ? 
 With those who shall talk 
 
 to you 
 I would fain talk, but dare 
 " not 
 You must not be afraid, 
 
 you must be bold 
 
 VII. Do Tempo. 
 QUEUmpofaz? 
 
 O Umpo estd admirdvel 
 
 O tempo estd roim 
 
 Faz frio ? faz cdlma ? 
 
 Naofazfrio, nao faz cdlma 
 
 Chdve ? nao ch6ve ? 
 
 Nao o crSyo 
 
 O v6nto estd mudddo 
 
 Ter6mos chuva 
 
 Hoje nao ha de chovSr 
 
 Chdve, Chdve a cdntaros 
 
 Estd nevdndo 
 
 Trovfy'a 
 
 VII. Of the Weather, 
 
 WHAT sort of weather is 
 
 it? 
 It is fine weather 
 It is bad weather 
 Is it cold ? is it hot ? 
 It is not cold, it is not hot 
 Does it rain ? doesit not rain ? 
 I do not believe it 
 The wind is changed 
 We shall have rain 
 It will not rain to-day 
 .It rains, it pours 
 It snows 
 It thunders 
 
DIALO 
 
 Cdhe pedra 
 Relampaguea 
 Fax miiita cdlma 
 Geou a noite passdda ? 
 Nao, senhor, mas agdra 
 
 estd gedndo 
 Parece-me que hd nevo6ir'o 
 
 Vm. nao se engdna, assim 
 
 h6 
 Vm. tern hum grdnde ca- 
 
 tarro or defliixo 
 Hd quinze dias que o tenho 
 Que hdras sao ? - 
 He ceido, nao he tdrde 
 He tempo de almogdr ? 
 Pouco fdlta para sSrem 
 
 hdras de j'antdr 
 Quefaremos depots dejan- 
 
 tdr? 
 Daremos hum passeyo, or 
 
 iremos passear 
 Vdmos ddr huma volta 
 Nao vdmos fora com este 
 
 tempo 
 
 GUES. 323 
 
 It hails 
 
 It lightens 
 
 It is very hot 
 
 Has it freezed last night ? 
 
 No, sir, but it freezes now 
 
 There appears to me to be 
 a great fog 
 
 You are not mistaken, it is 
 very true 
 
 You have caught a violent 
 cold 
 
 I have had it this fortnight 
 
 , \Yhat , s o'clock ? 
 
 'Tis early, 'tis not late 
 
 Is it breakfast-time ? 
 
 'Twill be dinner-time im- 
 mediately 
 
 What shall we do after din- 
 ner? 
 
 We'll take a walk 
 
 Let us take a turn now 
 We must not go abroad this 
 weather 
 
 VIII. Para perguntar que 
 Novas ha. 
 
 Q UE vai de n6vo ? or que 
 
 ndvas hd ? 
 Sdbe vm. algiima cousa de 
 
 ndvo ? 
 Nao tenho ouvido Jidda de 
 
 novo 
 Be que sefdllapella ciddde f 
 Nao sefdlla de ndda 
 Nao Undes ouvido falldr 
 
 de guSrra ? 
 Nao ougo falldr ndda disso 
 Por6m fdlla-se de hum 
 
 cerco 
 Fallou-se nisso, mas nao 
 
 he verddde 
 
 VIII. To enquire after 
 
 News. 
 
 WHAT news is stirrmg ? 
 
 Do you know any news ? 
 
 I have heard none 
 
 What's the talk of the town? 
 There's no talk of any thing- 
 Have you heard no talk of 
 
 war ? 
 I have heard nothing of it 
 There's a talk however of a 
 
 siege 
 It was so reported, but it is 
 
 not true 
 
 y2 
 
324 
 
 Antes pello contrdrio fdl- 
 
 lase de pdz 
 Assim o creyo 
 Que se diz na corte ? 
 Fdlla-se de huma via gem 
 Qudndo vos parece que el 
 
 rey partird ? 
 Nao se sdbe. Nao se diz 
 
 qudndo 
 O'nde, or para 6nde se diz 
 
 que €lle ird ? 
 Huns dizem que ird para 
 
 Fldndres, e uutros para 
 
 Alemdnlia 
 E que diz a Gazeta f 
 E'u nao a li 
 He verddde o que se diz do 
 
 Sr. f 
 
 P6is que se diz delle f 
 Dizem que estdferido mor- 
 
 talmente 
 Muito me pesaria disso; 
 
 6lle he hum homem de bem 
 Quern oferio f 
 Dous ?narotos que o inves- 
 
 tirao 
 Sdbe-se o porque f 
 
 A noticia que cdrre he, que 
 
 deu num delles hum bo- 
 
 fetao 
 E'u nao creyo isso ; nem eu 
 
 tao pouco 
 Eilo vdi, cedo saberSmos a 
 
 verddde 
 
 DIALOGUES. 
 
 On the contrary there's a 
 
 IX. Para escrever. 
 
 DA'I-ME huma folha de 
 pap6l, huma penna, e hu- 
 ma pouca de tint a 
 
 Tde ao meu quarto, e acha- 
 reis em cima da mesa tudo 
 o que vos for preciso 
 
 Nao ha pennas 
 
 talk of peace 
 I believe so 
 
 What say they at court ? 
 They talk of a voyage 
 When do you think the 
 
 king will set out? 
 Tis not known, they do not 
 
 say when 
 Where do they say hell go ? 
 
 Some say into Flanders, 
 others into Germany 
 
 And what says the Gazette? 
 
 1 have not read it 
 
 Is it true what's reported of 
 
 Mr. ? 
 
 What of him ? 
 
 They say he is mortally 
 
 wounded 
 I should be sorry for that, 
 
 he's an honest man 
 Who wounded him ? 
 Two rogues that set upon 
 
 him 
 Is it known upon what ac- 
 count ? 
 The report is, that he gave 
 
 one of them a box on the 
 
 ear 
 I don't believe it. Nor I 
 
 neither 
 However we shall soon 
 
 know the truth 
 
 IX. To write. 
 
 GIVE me a sheet of paper, 
 a pen, and a little ink 
 
 Step to my closet, you'll 
 find on the table what- 
 ever you want 
 
 There are no pens 
 
DIALOGUES. 
 
 325 
 
 Ha grdnde quantiddde del- 
 las na escrivaninha 
 
 Nao prestao para ndda 
 
 La ha dutras 
 
 .Nao estao aparddas 
 
 O'nde estd o vosso caniv6te ? 
 
 Sab6is v6s apardr p6nnas ? 
 
 E'u apdro'Cis a meu mddo 
 
 E'sta nao estd ma 
 
 Em qudnto acdbo e'sta car- 
 ta, fazeime o favor de 
 feclidr as 6utras, efazer 
 hum mdgo deltas 
 
 Que sSllo qu6r vm. que eu 
 Ihe pdnha ? 
 
 S6lla-o com ' o meu sinete, 
 or com as minhas drmas 
 
 Com que Idcre quer vm. que 
 asfeche ? 
 
 Fechdi-as com o vermelho 
 ou com opreto ; seja qudl 
 fdr nao impdrta 
 
 Tern vm. posto a data ? 
 
 Par6ce~me que sim, mas 
 ainda nao a assinei 
 
 A qudntos estdmos hoje do 
 met ? 
 
 J 6uto y a d6z y a quinze, a 
 vinte 
 
 Ponde o sobrescrito ? 
 
 O'nde estd a aria f 
 
 V6s nunca tendes area 
 
 Ahi ha alguma no areeiro 
 
 Ahi estd o sSu criddo ; qu&r 
 vm. que £lle Uve as car- 
 tas ao corrSo ? 
 
 L6va as minhas cartas ao 
 correo, e nao te esqu6gas 
 de pagdr o pdrte 
 
 Nad tenho dinheiro 
 
 Ahi estd huma ?no6da de 
 ouro 
 
 Vdi depr6ssa i e vem l6go 
 
 There are a great many in 
 the standish 
 
 They are good for nothing 
 
 There are some others 
 
 They are not made 
 
 Where is your penknife? 
 
 Can you make pens ? 
 
 I make them my own way 
 
 This is not bad 
 
 While I make an end of this 
 letter, do me the favour to 
 make a packet of the rest 
 
 What seal will you have me 
 
 put to it? 
 Seal it with my cypher, or 
 
 coat of arms 
 Vfhat wax shall I put to it ? 
 
 Put either red, or black, no 
 matter which 
 
 Have you put the date ? 
 
 I believe I have, but I have 
 not signed it 
 
 What day of the month is 
 this ? 
 
 The eighth, the tenth, fif- 
 teenth, twentieth 
 
 Put the address 
 
 Where is the powder? 
 
 Yoti never have powder or 
 sand 
 
 There's some in the sand box 
 
 There's your servant, will 
 you let him carry the let- 
 ters to the post-office ? 
 
 Carry my letters to the post- 
 office, and don't forget to 
 pay postage 
 
 I have no money 
 
 There's a raoidore 
 
 Go quickly, and return as 
 goon as 
 
326 
 
 DIALOGUES. 
 
 X. Para comprar. 
 
 X. To buy. 
 
 Q TIE qu6r vm. ? 
 
 Qu6ro hum bom pdnnofino 
 
 para hum vestido 
 Tenha vm. a bonddde de 
 
 entrdr, e vera o metis b6lo 
 
 pdnno que ha em L6ndres 
 HSixe-me ver o melh6r que 
 
 vm. tern 
 Aqui tern vm. hum. excel- 
 , lenie, que agdra se cos- 
 
 tuma trazer 
 He hum bom pdnno, mas a 
 
 cor nao me agrdda 
 Ahi tern vm. Sutra peca que 
 
 tern a cor mats cldra 
 Agrddame a cor, mas o 
 
 panno nao he fdrte, nao 
 
 tern corpo 
 V6ja 6sta p6ga ; vm. nao 
 
 achard em nenhuma 
 
 parte outra taobdacomo 
 
 6lla 
 Qudnto pede vm. por edda 
 
 ana ? 
 
 O seu justo prego he 
 
 Sr. nao he meu costume p6r- 
 
 me a regatedr ; fdca-me 
 
 favor de dizer me o Ulti- 
 mo preco 
 J a disse a vm. que aquelle 
 
 he o seu jiisto preco 
 He muito caro, dar the h£i 
 
 a vm.— 
 Nao p6sso abater hum 
 
 ceitil 
 Vm. nao hd de vender por 
 
 Ssse pr€qo 
 F?n< quiz sabSr o ultimo 
 
 $riQQ % e m diss^lho 
 
 WHAT do you want, sir ? 
 
 What would you please 
 
 to have ? 
 I want a good fine cloth to 
 
 make me a suit of clothes 
 Be pleased to walk in, sir, 
 
 you'll see the finest in 
 
 London 
 Shew me the best you have 
 
 There's a very fine one, and 
 what's worn at present 
 
 'Tis a good cloth, but I don't 
 
 like the colour 
 There's another lighter piece 
 
 I like that colour well, but 
 
 the cloth is not strong, 'tis 
 
 too thin 
 Look at this piece, sir, you'll 
 
 not find the like any 
 
 where else 
 
 What do you ask for it an 
 
 ell? 
 
 It is fairly worth 
 
 Sir, I am not used to stand 
 
 haggling; pray tell me 
 
 your lowest price 
 
 I have told you, sir, 'tis 
 
 worth that 
 'Tis too dear, I'll give 
 
 you— 
 I can't bate a farthing 
 
 You must not charge that 
 
 price 
 You asked me the lowest 
 
 price, and I have told you 
 
H6ra vdmos, corte vm. Id 
 
 dicas anas clSlle 
 Asseguro-lhe a vm. como 
 
 hdmem de bem que sou, 
 
 que nao gdnho ndda com 
 
 vm. 
 Ahi temvm. cinco moedas 
 
 de duro, dS-me a demasia 
 Tenha a bonddde de ddr- 
 
 me dutra em lugdr desta, 
 
 porque nao he de pezo 
 Ahi esta dutra 
 A Beos, criddo de vm. 
 
 DIALOGUES. 327 
 
 Come, come, cut off two 
 ells of it 
 
 I protest, on the word of an 
 honest man, I don't get 
 any thing by you 
 
 There's five moidores, give 
 
 me the change 
 Be pleased, sir, to let me 
 
 have another for this, it 
 
 wants weight 
 There's another 
 Farewell ; sir, your servant 
 
 XI. Para huma Jornada. XI. For a Journey. 
 
 Q UANTAS Ugoas-hd da- 
 
 qui a N. ? 
 Ha Suto l6goas 
 N6s nao poderemos chegdr 
 
 Id hoje, h6 muito tdrde 
 Nao hi sendo m&yo dia, 
 
 vm ces ainda tern bastdnte, 
 
 tempo 
 He a estrdda boa? 
 Nao he muito boa pdssao- 
 
 se bosques e rios 
 Ha algitm perigo n€lla ? 
 
 Nao ha noticias disso ; he 
 estrdda redl em que se 
 encontra gente a cdda 
 pas so 
 
 Pois nao dizem que ha la- 
 droens nos bdsques ? 
 
 Nao ha de que ter medo, 
 nem de dia, nem de noite 
 
 For 6nde se vai ? 
 
 Qudndo vm ces chegdrem ao 
 pe do outSiro, he preciso, 
 que i6mem a mao direita 
 
 Pois nao h6 necessdrio 
 subiv hum outSiro P 
 
 HOW many leagues is it 
 
 from this place to N. ? 
 It is eight leagues 
 We shall not be able to get 
 
 thither to day, it is too late 
 It is not more than twelve 
 
 o'clock, you have time 
 
 enough yet 
 Is the road good ? 
 So, so ; there are woods and 
 
 rivers to pass 
 Is there any danger upon 
 
 that road ? 
 There's no talk of it, it is a 
 
 highway, where you meet 
 
 people every moment 
 
 Do not they say there ^re 
 
 robbers in the woods ? 
 There's nothing to be feared 
 
 either by day or night 
 Which way must one take? 
 When you come near the 
 
 hill, you must take to the 
 
 right hand 
 / Is it not necessary to ascend 
 
 a hill then ? 
 
328 
 
 DIALOGUES. 
 
 Nao, Sr. nao ha 6utro 
 outeiro senao hiima pe- 
 quena ladeira, (or des- 
 cida) no bosque 
 
 Ciista a atindr com o ca- 
 minho pello meyo dos 
 bdsques ? 
 
 Vm c " nao pddem errd-lo 
 
 L6go que vm c " sahirem do 
 bdsque, lembrem-se de 
 tomdr a mao esquerda 
 
 Vm crs muitos dnnos, fico-lhe 
 muito obrigddo 
 
 Vdmos, vdjnos, senhdres, 
 tomSmos hum cavdllo 
 
 Onde estd o marqu6z ? 
 
 E lief oi adidnte 
 
 E'lle lid de estdr esperdndo 
 por vos l6go ali fora da 
 ciddde 
 
 Fiquem-se embdra, sen- 
 hores, a Deos 
 
 Fdgao vm c " muito boa Jor- 
 nada 
 
 No, sir, there is no other 
 hill but a little declivity 
 in the wood 
 
 Is it a difficult way through 
 the woods? 
 
 You can't lose your way 
 As soon as you are out of 
 
 the wood, remember to 
 
 keep to the left hand 
 I thank you, sir, and am very 
 
 much obliged to you 
 Come, come, gentlemen, 
 
 let's take a horse 
 Where is the marquis ? 
 He is gone before 
 He'll wait for you just out 
 
 of the town 
 
 Farewell, gentlemen, fare- 
 well 
 
 I wish you a very good 
 journey 
 
 XII. Da Cea e da Pousada. XII. Of Supper and 
 
 COMQUE assim estdmos 
 
 chegddos d estaldgem 
 Apeemo-nos, senhores 
 P6ga nos cavdllos dtstes 
 senhores, e trdta delles 
 
 Vejdmos agdra o que v?n. 
 nos hd de ddr para cedr 
 
 Hum cap ad, meya duzia de 
 pombos, hiima saldda, 
 sets codornizes, e hum a 
 duzia do calhdndras 
 
 Qu6rem vm"' mais alguma 
 c6usa ? 
 
 J'sto he bastdnle, ddi-nos 
 algum vinho que s6ja 
 b6m t e huma sobremSsa 
 
 Lodging. 
 
 SO, we are arrived at the 
 inn 
 
 Let's alight, gentlemen 
 
 Take these gentlemen's 
 horses, and take care of 
 them 
 
 Now let's see what you'll 
 give us for supper 
 
 A capon, half a dozen of pi- 
 geons, a sallad, six quails, 
 and a dozen of larks 
 
 Will you have nothing else? 
 
 That's enough, give us some 
 good wine, and a dessert 
 
DIALOGUES. 
 
 329 
 
 Deixem vm c " isso por minha 
 
 Conta, eu Ihes prometo 
 
 quefiquem bem servidos 
 Alumia aos senhores 
 Ddi-nos de cedr o mdis de- 
 
 pr6ssa que fdr possivel 
 Antes que vm ces tSnhao des- 
 
 calgddo as bdtas, estard 
 
 a cea na mesa 
 Tende cuidddo que trdgao 
 
 para cima as nossas 
 
 mdlas e pistdlas 
 Descalcdi-me as bdtas, e 
 
 despois ireis ver se tern 
 
 dado algumfeno aos ca- 
 
 vdllos 
 Levdi-os ao rio, e tende 
 
 cuidddo que Ihes dem 
 
 alguma avea 
 E'u terei cuidddo de tudo, 
 
 estSjao vm ces descancddos 
 Senhores, a cea estdpromp- 
 
 ta, estd na misa 
 N6s vdmos jd 
 Vdmoscedr, senhores, para 
 
 nos hirmos deitdr c6do 
 
 Sentemo-nos, senhores, sen- 
 
 temo-nos a misa 
 Ddi-nos de bebSr 
 A saude de vm c " meus se- 
 nhores 
 He bom o viiiho ? 
 Nao he mdo 
 O capao, nao esta bem as- 
 
 sddo 
 Ddi-nos humas poucas de 
 
 lardnjas, e huma pouca 
 
 de pinienta 
 Porque nao come vm ce destes 
 
 pombos ? 
 Eu tenho comido hum p6m- 
 
 bo, e trSs calhdndras 
 Dize ao estalaja deiro que 
 
 Ihe queremos faUdr 
 
 Letmealone, I'll please you, 
 I warrant you 
 
 Light the gentlemen 
 Let's have our supper as 
 
 soon as possible 
 Before you have pulled your 
 
 boots off, supper shall be 
 
 upon the table 
 Let our portmanteaus and 
 
 pistols be carried up stairs 
 
 Pull off my boots, and then 
 you shall go to see whe- 
 ther they have given the 
 horses any hay 
 
 You shall carry them to the 
 river, and take care they 
 give them some oats 
 
 I'll take care of everything, 
 don't trouble yourself 
 
 Gentlemen, supper is ready, 
 it is upon the table 
 
 We'll come presently 
 
 Let's go to supper, gentle- 
 men, that we may go to 
 bed in good time 
 
 Let us sit down, gentlemen, 
 let's sit down at table 
 
 Give us some drink 
 
 To your health, gentlemen 
 
 Is the wine good ? 
 
 It is not bad 
 
 The capon is not done 
 
 enough 
 Give us some oranges, and 
 
 a little pepper 
 
 Why don't you eat of these 
 
 pigeons ? 
 I have eaten one pigeon and 
 
 three larks 
 Tell the landlord we want 
 
 to speak with kim 
 
330 
 
 DIALOGUES, 
 
 XIII. DoSaltaredoCorrer. 
 
 HORA vdmos, quer vm. 
 
 saltdr ? 
 Nao h6 b6m saltdr Idgo 
 
 despdis de corner 
 De que mddo de saltdr gosta 
 
 vm. mdis? 
 O mats commum he a p&s 
 
 juntos 
 Quer vm. que saltemos so 
 
 com hum p6? 
 CSmo vm. quiz6r 
 Este h6 hum sdlto muito 
 
 grdnde 
 Qudntos })6s saltou vm. ? 
 
 Mdis de qudtro 
 
 Aposlo que salto por cima 
 
 daquelle barrdnco 
 Vm. sdlta com hum pdo 
 
 comprido 
 Demos huma carreira 
 Quir vm. que corrdmos a 
 
 pe ou a cavdllo? 
 De huma e outra sorte 
 Diga vm. ddnde se ha de 
 
 cojnegdr, e dnde se hd de 
 
 acabdr 
 ComegSmos a correr da qui 
 
 Correremos ate chegdr a 
 
 6sta druore 
 TSnho corrido trSz vSzes 
 
 d6sde o lugdr assinalddo 
 
 at6 a drvore 
 Vm. ndo esperoupello sindl 
 
 para principidr a correr 
 Aquelle cavdllo correo 
 
 muito bem 
 Qudnlas carreiras tern elle 
 
 dddo ? 
 Tr$8 ou qudtro 
 Vm, tern ganhdda 
 
 XIII. Of Jumping and 
 Running. 
 
 COME, will you go to 
 jumping ? 
 
 It is not good to jump im- 
 mediately after dinner 
 
 What leaping do you like 
 best? 
 
 The most usual is with one 
 foot close to the other 
 
 Shall we hop with one leg? 
 
 As you please 
 
 This is a very great leap 
 
 How many feet have you 
 
 leap'd? 
 More than four 
 I lay I leap clearly over that 
 
 ditch 
 You jump with a long stick 
 
 Let us run races 
 
 Shall we run on foot or on 
 
 horseback ? 
 Both ways 
 Appoint the race 
 
 This shall be the starting 
 
 place ■ 
 
 This tree shall be the goal 
 
 I have run three times from 
 
 the starting-place to the 
 
 tree 
 You did not stay for the 
 
 signal to start 
 That horse has run his race 
 
 very well 
 How many heats has he 
 
 run? 
 Three or four 
 You have won the plate 
 
COMMERCIAL LETTERS, &c. 331 
 
 CARTAS 
 
 PE 
 
 COMMERCIO, 
 
 Senhor F. F. 30 de Janeiro 
 Londres, de 1827. 
 
 RECEBF as suas de 3 
 e 5 do passado, no dia 5 do 
 corrente, vindas pelo navio 
 F. F. capitao B. B. pelas 
 quaes vejo, Vm" pretende 
 carregdr as fazendas que 
 recommendei ao seu cuidado 
 pSla minha ultima, no pri- 
 me'iro navio para 6sta. 
 
 Inclusas remeto a Vm ce 
 mais algumas amostras, 
 porem dezejo que queira 
 recomenddr ao tintureiro, 
 que as cores sejao vivas e 
 firmes. 
 
 Pelo ultimo navio que 
 daqui partio Ihe remeti a 
 conta de vSnda, da sua 
 partida de mSias de seda, 
 e das tres cdxas de chapeds, 
 pelo navio A ; e achdndo 
 Vm ce algumas partidas de 
 qualqu6r destes dous g6- 
 neros, que Ihe agrddem, as 
 pdde ?nandar, pois sao 
 agora mui procurddos ; 
 deve comtudo ter muito 
 cuidado em que sejao da 
 ultima modat T^nfio veri* 
 
 LETTERS 
 
 on BUSINESS, or 
 
 MERCANTILE AF- 
 FAIRS. 
 
 Mr.F.F. The 30th of Jan. 
 London. 1827. 
 
 YOURS of the 3rd and 
 oth of last month, came 
 to hand on the 5th current 
 by the ship F. F. captain 
 B. B. ; and therein I take 
 notice, that you intend to 
 put on board the next good 
 ship bound hither, the goods 
 I recommended to your 
 care in my last. Herewith 
 I send you more patterns, 
 but I would desire you to 
 be solicitous with your 
 dyer, that the colours may 
 be lively and durable. By 
 the last ship I remitted you 
 account of sales of the 
 parcel of silk stockings, 
 and the three boxes of hats, 
 by the ship A ; and if you 
 meet with a parcel of either, 
 or both, to your mind, 
 please to send them, such 
 articles being now in de- 
 mand, but great care must 
 be taken of the fashion and 
 make. I have taken care 
 to secure your twenty pipes 
 ST oil for the first ships in 
 
332 COMMERCIAL LETTERS, &c. 
 
 ficddo o ajuste das 20pipas 
 azeite da safra proxima, 
 para partirem pelos pri- 
 meiros navios : igualmente 
 tenho carregddo no navio 
 N. Capitao F. as suas 20 
 pipas de vinho Unto ; assim 
 como tamb6m as doze e tres 
 quartos de brdnco, cuja 
 factura remeto inclusa : 
 os conhecimentos, Ihos re- 
 meter eipelo correio. Heide 
 estimdr chegue tudo a 
 salvam&nto. H6 qudnto 
 por hdra se ?ne offerece a 
 dizerlhe ; no entretdnto 
 s6u 
 
 De Vm u muito 
 Veneraddr e Criddo. 
 
 the season, and put on 
 board the ship N. capt. F. 
 your twenty pipes of red, 
 and twelve pipes and three 
 hogsheads of white wine, 
 of which the Invoice goes 
 herewith, and the bills of 
 lading shall be sent by the 
 post, and I hope will come 
 safe to hand ; which being 
 all that is necessary at pre- 
 sent, 1 remain, 
 
 Sir, 
 Your humble Servant. 
 
 v Senhor Diogo Jones. 
 
 VO U por 6sta avisdr a 
 Vm ce que pelo navio Derby, 
 Ihe remeti duds saquinhas 
 de diamdntes, importdndo 
 em pagodas 4,396. 25 fan. 
 10 casks, em retdrno dos 
 sens fundos em men poder ; 
 os quaes fiz registrar nos li- 
 vros da companhia em con- 
 formiddde com as suas or- 
 dems. 
 
 Inclusos achard o conhe- 
 cimento, factura e a sua 
 conta corrente fechdda, que 
 desejo cheguem a salva- 
 mento e me alegrarei de 
 quefaga grandes intereces. 
 
 Como eu estou para vol- 
 tarpara a Eurdpa, d minha 
 chegdda a Ldndres, terei 
 
 Mr. James Jones. 
 
 Sir; 
 THESE will advise you, 
 that by this ship, the Derby, 
 I have made the return of 
 your stock in my hands, 
 viz. two bulses of diamonds, 
 amountingtopagodas 4,396, 
 25 fan. 10 casks, having 
 registered them according 
 to your order in the com- 
 pany's books ; inclosed, is a 
 bill of lading, together with 
 invoice, and your account 
 current closed, which I 
 wish muy come safe to 
 you, and turn to a good 
 account. As I am return- 
 ing to Europe, at my ar- 
 rival in London, I shall 
 have the honour to see you, 
 
COMMERCIAL 
 
 a hdnra de o v6r, e the 
 darei entao huma relagao 
 exacta do commercio da 
 India. 
 Tenho o gosto de s€r, 
 De Vm ct reverente Crd° 
 e Venerador. 
 Forte de S. Jorge. 
 12 de Jan. 1826. 
 
 LETTERS, &c. 333 
 
 and give you an exact ac- 
 count of the trade in India. 
 I am entirely, 
 
 Sir, 
 Your humble Servant. 
 Fort St. George, 
 Jan. 12, 1826. 
 
 Lisboa,4: de Mar go de 1825. 
 
 Snr. Joao Ferrier, 
 Londres. 
 
 ACHO-ME favorecido 
 com a siia de 3 do passddo, 
 e vej'o, que em execugdo as 
 minhas drdems, Vm" tern 
 comprddo os quinhentos 
 barris de arenques defiimo, 
 a ill. por last. Estou c6rto 
 que €sse h6 o mendr preco 
 por que Vm ce os pode obter, 
 e nao Unho a menor duvida 
 que hao de corresponds na 
 sua qualiddde. 
 
 O meu navio se estd a 
 aparelhdr para os ir bus- 
 car, e visto elle nao deman- 
 ddr mais de ndve pes d'd- 
 gua, poderd mesmo carre- 
 gdr no seu cdes (como Vm ce 
 t6ve a bonddde de me dizer) 
 o que jooupard quatro pen- 
 nyspor barril, de desp6sas. 
 Julgo que elle poderd car- 
 regdr sette centos barris, 
 ou mais. O capitao visto 
 nao ter despezas a fazer, 
 nao necessiiard de dinheiro. 
 
 Agradego-lhe muito a sua 
 informagdo relativaminte 
 
 Lisbon, 4 March, 1825. 
 Mr. John Ferrier, 
 
 London. 
 Sir, 
 
 I AM favoured with 
 yours of the 3rd of last 
 month, and find, in com- 
 pliance with my order, you 
 have bought the five hun- 
 dred barrels of red herrings, 
 at III. per last. I make no 
 doubt, but that was the low- 
 est price you could get them 
 for, and the goodness of 
 them corresponds. My 
 ship is getting ready with 
 all speed to go down to 
 fetch them, and she may be 
 laden at your quay, as she 
 draws no more than nine 
 feet of water (as you are 
 pleased to mention), which 
 will save the charge of four- 
 pence per barrel; I judge 
 she will carry seven hun- 
 dred barrels, or more. The 
 captain will not have occa- 
 sion for any money, so will 
 want no supply. I thank 
 you for the information 
 you gave me in relation to 
 the exchange between Lon- 
 
334 COMMERCIAL LETTERS, &c. 
 
 ao cdmbio 6ntre Ldndres e 
 6sta prdga> mas cdmojulgo 
 as reme'ssas sobre o Exche- 
 quer hum pSuco arriscddas, 
 Vm ce se servird sacdr sobre 
 mim ao cdmbio mats van- 
 tajdso possivel, ficdndo na 
 cerUza, que as suas lettras 
 serdo pdgas coin a ponctu- 
 aliddde do costume. 
 Tenho o gdsto de ser 
 Be Vm ce - m t0 . Attento Ven or . 
 
 don and this place, but as I 
 look upon the remittance 
 of the money hence as 
 hazardous in Exchequer 
 bills, you will be pleased 
 to draw on me at the most 
 commodious exchange pos- 
 sible, and your bills at the 
 usual course, which shall 
 meet with all due honour 
 from, 
 
 Sir, 
 Your humble servant. 
 
 Londres, IS de Mar go 
 de 1826. 
 
 Snr. J, Morrice, 
 
 Cadiz. 
 
 TENHO recebido em 
 se"u devido tempo as suas 
 differentes cartas, assim 
 cdmo tambem a minha c6n- 
 ta corrente, a qudl tenho 
 langddo nos meus livros 
 em conformiddde com Vm ce . 
 
 A sua ultima he de 29 
 do passddo, e nella me 
 mdnda o recibo das trSs 
 Mttras, emportdndo em seis 
 mil p6gas de oito, que meu 
 irmao Joze the remeteu por 
 minha cdnta e 6rdem : es- 
 p6ro fazer triste negdcio 
 com Hlas depdis de hum 
 desembdlgo de tdnto tempo, 
 e com hum cdmbio tao 
 desfavordvel. Acho que os 
 limites que dlle Ihe dSu, 
 forao muito abdxo do cdm- 
 bio, e pr6go da prdta : 
 por6m visto eu ter esperddo 
 
 London, March 18, 1826. 
 
 Mr. J. Morrice, 
 Cadiz. 
 Sir, 
 
 YOUR several letters 
 came to hand in due time, 
 as did my account current, 
 which I have noted in con- 
 formity with you ; your 
 last to me was of the 29th 
 ult., wherein you give 
 me receipt of the three 
 bills, amounting to six 
 thousand pieces of eight, 
 which my brother Joseph 
 sent to you for my account 
 and by my order ; I shall 
 make but a sad bargain 
 of them, after so long a dis- 
 bursement ; besides they 
 cost me a dear exchange ; 
 I find his limits to you 
 were much under the price 
 of plate and exchange : 
 now since 1 have w T aited all 
 this time, and there being 
 no probability of their 
 
COMMERCIAL LETTERS, &c. 335 
 
 todo este tempo, e nao 
 haver probabiliddde de hum 
 ou outro baixdr, Vm ce se 
 servird remet&r-me o men 
 dinheiro, ao cdmbio cor- 
 r£nte, para esta prdga, ou 
 Amsterdam, como Ihe pare- 
 c6r metis conveniSnte aos 
 m&us inter esses. 
 
 Se o pre go do cochenilha, 
 ou daprdta descSsse tdnto, 
 que Vm ce julgdsse ser mdis 
 conveniSnte para mim 9 em- 
 pregdr o meu dinhHro em 
 qualqu6r d6stes dois g6ne- 
 ros, do que remet£r-me ISt- 
 tras, n6sse cctzo o poderd 
 fazer, deichdndo eu isso~ 
 inteiraminte d sua dispo- 
 sigao, na certeza de que 
 tratard dos mSus inter esses, 
 com o m€smo disv6lo cdmo 
 se fossem sSus proprios. 
 
 Estimaria sab6r da che- 
 gdda do cambdy, porque 
 poderia sir produzisse al- 
 guma muddnga favordvel 
 no commercio, e que edda 
 hum podSsse fazer iiso dos 
 seus capitdes ; pots ao 
 presente as circumstancias 
 nao convidao a ndda. H6 
 qudnto por agora se me 
 offerSce a dizSrlhe. No 
 entretdnto tenho o gosto de 
 ser 
 
 De Vm ce m t0 AttSnto 
 Ven w e Criddo. 
 
 falling, be pleased to send 
 my money, as the ex- 
 change comes, either for 
 this place or Amsterdam, 
 which you judge will turn 
 most to account. If the 
 plate or cochineal should 
 fall to a price which 
 you may conceive will 
 answer better than by re- 
 mittance at a due ex- 
 change, in such case invest 
 my money in either of 
 them, this I shall leave 
 entirely to you, being per- 
 suaded you will act in my 
 affairs as if they were your 
 own. I should be glad 
 to hear of the fleet's ar- 
 rival ; for, perhaps, it might 
 give some favourable turn 
 to business, so that one 
 could make some use of 
 one's money, for at pre- 
 sent it does not invite one 
 to any thing ; which is all 
 from, 
 
 Sir, 
 Your humble Servant. 
 
336 COMMERCIAL LETTERS, &c. 
 
 Londres, 3 de Abril 
 de 1826. 
 
 Sen rti Mills $ C\ 
 
 Porto. 
 
 EST A serve de infor- 
 mar a Vm ces que de sexta 
 feira a iota dias se hao de 
 abrir os livros do Banco de 
 Inglaterra, para pagar 
 os devidendos vencidos ate 
 aquelle dia, em que eu nao 
 deicharei de receber o que 
 Ihes pertence dos juros re- 
 spectivos ate a esse tempo, 
 em virtude dos pod e res que 
 me conferirao para esse 
 fim, e depots de os ter rece- 
 bido, Ihos remetrei. 
 
 Deos guarde a Vm c " 
 m tos annos. 
 De Vm ciS m 10 
 Fen or e Crd\ 
 
 London, 3rd of April, 
 1826. 
 
 Messieurs Mills & Co. 
 
 Oporto. 
 
 THIS may serve to in- 
 form you that the books 
 will be opened at the Bank 
 of England on Friday 
 se'nnight, to pay the divi- 
 dends due up to this time 
 to the parties concerned, 
 when I shall be ready to 
 receive whatever belongs 
 to you both, with the re- 
 spective interests thereon, 
 by virtue of your powers 
 given to me for that pur- 
 pose, and on receipt there- 
 of, shall remit the same to 
 you, whom God preserve 
 many years. 
 
 Your most humble 
 Servant. 
 
 Hum Escrito, ou Bilhete 
 aberto, a hum Amigo ou 
 Vezinho, em qualquer 
 ocasiao. 
 
 AO Senr. G. S. que seu 
 creado T. M. Ike roga o 
 favor, de Ihe enviar pelo 
 portador 
 
 de que agora pre- 
 cisa, e por que Ihe ficard 
 rauito obrigado. 
 
 A short open Note or 
 Message, to a friend or 
 neighbour ; for any thing, 
 upon occasion. 
 
 TO Mr. G. S. that his 
 most humble servant, T. 
 M. desires the favour of 
 him to send by the bearer 
 
 having 
 immediate occasion for it, 
 and by which he will greatly 
 oblige him. 
 
COMMERCIAL LETTERS, &e. 337 
 
 Carta, on Instrurnento de 
 Procuracao. 
 
 SAIBAM todos qudntos 
 este instrurnento, ou carta 
 de procuragdo virem, que 
 eu, A. B., de Londres, h6- 
 mem de ?iegdcio, tenho 
 nomeddo e constituido e 
 por esta presente nomeo, 
 ordeno, cojistituo e /ago o 
 senhor B. C. de 
 negociante, meo verdadeiro 
 e legitimo procuraddr, por 
 mini e em meu nome e ao 
 ■meu uso, pode demanddr, 
 arecaddr, e regeber de T. 
 B. negociante a soma de 
 a mini devida pelo 
 ditto T. B. ddndo e por 
 esta concedendo ao meu 
 ditto procuraddr o meu 
 poder plenario e autori- 
 dcide de exercitdr, e de usar 
 de tod as e taes acgoes e 
 outras cousas em direito 
 ?iecessdrias, para a co- 
 brdnga da ditto divida, e em 
 meu ndme, de dar, e fazer 
 quitagoes ou outras descdr- 
 gas, e geralmente de fazer 
 e executar na materia so- 
 breditta tab plendriamente 
 como se eu mesmo fizesse 
 ou pudesse fazer, estando 
 pessoalmente presente; ra- 
 tificdndo, confirmdndo, e 
 outorgando toda e qualquer 
 cousa que o ditto meu pro- 
 curadorlegitimamentefizer 
 ou causdr de se fazer n€lla 
 por esta presente. Em tes- 
 ieniunha do que assi?iei e 
 
 A Letter of Attorney. 
 
 KNCHY all men by these 
 presents, that I, A. B., of 
 London, merchant, have 
 named and constituted, and 
 by these presents do name, 
 ordain, appoint, and make 
 my trusty friend, B. C. of 
 merchant, 
 my true and lawful attor- 
 ney, for me, and in my 
 name, and to my use, to 
 demand, sue for, recover, 
 and receive of T. B. of 
 
 merchant, the 
 sum of to me 
 
 due and owing by and from 
 the said T. B. g'iving, and 
 hereby granting unto my 
 said attorney, my full power 
 and authority to use and 
 exercise all such acts, 
 things, and devices in the 
 law, as shall be necessary 
 for the recovering of the 
 said debt, and give acquit- 
 tance, or other discharges, 
 in my name ; to make and 
 give, and generally to do 
 and execute on the premi- 
 ses, as fully as myself 
 might or could do, were I 
 personally present : rati- 
 fying, confirming and al- 
 lowing all and whatsoever 
 my said attorney shall 
 lawfully do, or cause 
 to be done therein, by 
 these presents. In wit- 
 ness whereof I have here- 
 unto set my hand and 
 
338 COMMERCIAL 
 
 sellei 6sia em aos 20 dias 
 do m6z de Mar go de 1826. 
 For A. B. 
 Assinado e sellado 
 didnte de 
 
 T A 1 
 
 M B r Testemunhas, 
 
 LETTERS, &c. 
 
 
 seal, the 20th of March, 
 
 1826. A. 
 
 B. 
 
 Sealed and delivered 
 
 
 in the Presence of 
 
 
 T. A. 
 
 
 M. B. 
 
 
 Carta 5 ou o Instrumento de 
 Fretamento. 
 
 EST A carta, ou instru- 
 mSnto de fretamento con- 
 tratddo,feito aos 
 dias do mez de do 
 
 anno de do naci- 
 
 mento de ?i6sso Senhor 
 Jesus Christo, §c. Entre 
 T. B. mestre, debaixo de 
 Deos, do navio nomeddo, 
 de dozentas e cin- 
 coenta ionetddas que ao 
 presenle estd surto e ancor- 
 ddo no Ho de - de 
 
 huma 'parte, e E. T. M. 
 B. L. fyc, homens de nego- 
 cio da outra parte : Cer- 
 tificao que o ditto m6stre 
 tern dado em alugu6l efre- 
 tcido o ditto navio aos dit- 
 tos hdmens de negdcio e que 
 elles os dittos homens de 
 negocio tern tornado em 
 alugu6l pella vidgem aos 
 concertos e as condigoes, 
 a saber : o ditto m6sirefaz 
 concerto, promeie e ot&rga, 
 por elle m£smo, seus testa- 
 mentSiros, e administra- 
 dores, e com os dittos ho- 
 mens de negdcio, e qual- 
 quer delles, ou sSus, e a 
 qualquer dos seus testamen- 
 
 The Copy of a Charier- 
 Party of Affreightment. 
 
 THIS charter party of 
 Affreightment, indented, 
 made the 
 of the month of 
 anno domini, 
 
 between T. A. master, 
 under God, of the good ship 
 or vessel, called the 
 of the burthen of 
 tons, or thereabouts, now 
 riding at anchor, in the 
 river of of 
 
 the one part, and E, T, M, 
 B, L, &c. merchants, of the 
 other part, witnesseth, that 
 the said master has granted 
 and let the said ship to 
 freight unto the said mer- 
 chants, and that they the 
 said merchantshave accord- 
 ingly hired her for the 
 voyage, and upon the terms 
 and conditions following : 
 that is to say, the said mas- 
 ter doth covenant, promise, 
 and grant for himself, his 
 executors, and administra- 
 tors, to and. with the said 
 merchants, and either of 
 them, their and either of 
 their executors, administra- 
 tors, and assigns, by these 
 
COMMERCIAL 
 
 tSiros, administrdddres, e 
 constituintes, por estes pre- 
 sentes ; que o ditto navio 
 forte e sao de quilha, e'bem 
 provido de mantimentos, 
 enxdrcias e gSnte, e aparel- 
 hctdo de todas as cousas 
 convenientes e necessdrias 
 para fazer a viagem adi- 
 ante declarada ; com o pri- 
 meiro vento favor dvel e 
 bdm tempo que Deos per- 
 mit tir despots da data da 
 presente, patird do pdrto 
 de com iodas as 
 
 tdes fazendas e merca- 
 dorias que as dittos homens 
 de negdcio ou os sens con- 
 stituintes, enirementes car- 
 regardo ou meter do abdrdo 
 ddlle e com elle em direitura 
 dard a vela e aplicard ao 
 como o vento e 
 o iSmpo mats favorecerem 
 ao ditto navio na sua via- 
 gem ; e em chegdndo tao 
 p6rto do ditto lugdr de 
 elle o ditto m6stre 
 ou os seus constituintes den- 
 tro de dias de tra- 
 
 bdlho para se contdrem 
 16 go despots de tal sua che- 
 gdda, nao somente descare- 
 garao, entregarao as dittas 
 fazendas e mercadorias me- 
 tidas abordo do ditto navio 
 ao sdbre ditto, aos 
 
 dittos homens de negdcio, 
 aos seusfeitores ou consti- 
 tuintes, 6u a alguns ou al~ 
 gum delles a salvamSnto e 
 bem acondicionddas, salvo 
 o risco dos mares, e o tolhi- 
 m6nto de principes e gover- 
 
 LETTERS, &c. 339 
 
 presents ; that the said ship, 
 strong and sound, and well 
 and sufficiently victualled, 
 tackled, manned, and ap- 
 parelled, with all things fit, 
 needful and necessary, for 
 the performance of the voy- 
 age, hereafter mentioned, 
 shall, with the first fair 
 wind and weather, which 
 God shall send, after the 
 date of these presents, de- 
 part from the port of 
 
 w^ith all such 
 goods and merchandize as 
 the said merchants, or their 
 assigns, shall in the mean 
 time lade and put on board 
 of her, and therewith di- 
 rectly sail, and apply unto 
 as wind and 
 weather shall best serve for 
 • the said ship to sail, and 
 being arrived as near to the 
 said place of 
 
 he the said master, or as- 
 signs shall and will, within 
 
 working days 
 next from and after such 
 her arrival to be accounted, 
 not only unlade and deli- 
 ver the said goods and 
 merchandize put on board 
 the said ship at 
 aforesaid, unto the said 
 merchants, their factors, or 
 assigns, or some or one of 
 them, in safety, and well 
 conditioned, the dangers of 
 the seas, and restraint of 
 princes and rulers excepted, 
 but also shall and will re- 
 ceive, relade, and take on 
 board the said ship, of and 
 2 
 
340 COMMERCIAL LETTERS, &c. 
 
 nad6res, mas iamb 6m rece- 
 berdo, iornardo a carregdr, 
 e tomardo abdrdo do ditto 
 navio, de e dos dittos ho- 
 mens de negdcio, dos s&us 
 feitdres ou constiiuintes, ou 
 de alguns ou algum delles, 
 todas as tdes fazendas £ 
 mercadorias que Sites ou 
 qualquer delles ali car eg a- 
 rdo, ou meter ao abdrdo delle 
 ate" o comprimento inteiro 
 da cdrga do ditto navio ; 
 a saber : tdnto qudnto bem 
 se pod6r arrumdr debdixo 
 da cub6rta no conve's, e 
 adidnte do mastro grdnde, 
 salvo o lugar para os man- 
 timSntos, enxdrcias e apa- 
 rUhos do ditto navio, e os 
 dittos dias de 
 
 trabdlho sendo acabddos, 
 ou o ditto navio sendo ali 
 mais depr€ssa despachddo, 
 o que primSiro succeder, 
 elle o ditto mestre ou os 
 seus constituintes com a 
 primeira bda occasido de 
 t&mpoe vento favor dvel em 
 dereitura navegardo e tor- 
 nardo a vir c6m o ditto 
 navio e a sua cdrga, do 
 ditto pdrto de descaregar, 
 e recaregar de 
 aqui dentro de 
 
 dids de trabdlho Idgo 
 despois da entrdda do ditto 
 navio ddda na alfdndega 
 desta ditta elle o 
 
 ditto m6stre ou os seus con- 
 stituintes descaregar do e 
 entregardo as dittas fazen- 
 das e mercaddrias carre- 
 gddas abdrdo do ditto na- 
 
 from the said merchants, 
 their factors, or assigns, or 
 some or one of them, all 
 such goods and merchan- 
 dize, as they or any of them 
 shall there please to lade 
 and put on board her, to 
 the said ship's full and 
 complete lading ; that is to 
 say, as much as can con- 
 veniently be stowed in the 
 whole hole, and between 
 decks, afore the mainmast, 
 room only reserved for the 
 said ship's provisions, tackle, 
 and apparel, and the said 
 working days 
 being expired, or the said 
 ship there sooner dispatched , 
 which first shall happen, he 
 the said master, or his 
 assigns, shall and will, with 
 the then next opportunity 
 of wind and weather from 
 her said unlading and re- 
 lading port of afore- 
 said, directly sail, return, 
 and come back with the 
 said ship and lading unto 
 the port of and 
 here within work- 
 ing days next after the said 
 ship shall be entered in the 
 custom-house of this said 
 he the said mas- 
 ter, or his assigns, shall and 
 will unlade, and deliver the 
 said goods and merchan- 
 dizes, laden on board the 
 said ship at her lading and 
 relading aforesaid, 
 unto the said merchants, 
 their executors, adminis- 
 trators, or assigns, in safety, 
 
COMiMERCIAL LETTERS, &c. 341 
 
 vio ao s4u descarregdr e 
 recarregdr sobre 
 
 ditto, nos dittos hdmens de 
 negdcio, e os seus testamen- 
 tSiros, administraddres, ou 
 constituintes, a salvam&nto, 
 salvo o risco dos mares e o 
 tolkimento- de principes e 
 governadores, e assim se 
 acabard a ditta destinada 
 via gem e os dit- 
 
 tos hdmens de negdcio con- 
 certain, prometem, e oidr- 
 gam por elles mesmos e 
 qualqu6r delles, ou sSus, e 
 qualqu6r de sSus testamen- 
 teiros, administr adores, e 
 constituintes por esta pre- 
 sente : que os seus tes- 
 
 tament Sir os, administra- 
 ddres, feitdres ou constitu- 
 intes nao sdjnSnto descarre- 
 gardu e recarregardo o ditto 
 navio ao seu pdrto, de des- 
 carregdr, e recarregar de 
 sobre ditto, 
 e despachardo e descar- 
 regardo o mdsmo neste 
 
 na maneira e 
 forma acima declardda : 
 e dentro dos certos dias 
 e tempos sobre nomeddos ; 
 mas tambSm por intSiro 
 de tddo o frete que 
 se veneer, para se pagar 
 pedir por e durdnte €sta 
 presenie destinada via gem; 
 bem e verdadeiramente pa- 
 gardo ou causardo que se 
 pdgue ao ditto mSstre, aos 
 seus testament eiros, admi- 
 nistraddres ou constitu- 
 intes a somma de 
 de dinheiro cor- 
 
 and well conditioned, the 
 dangers of the seas, and 
 restraint of princes and 
 rulers, excepted, and so end 
 the said intended voyage ; 
 and the said merchants do 
 covenant, promise, and 
 grant, for themselves, and 
 either of them, their, and 
 either of their executors 
 and administrators, to and 
 with the said master, his 
 executors and administra- 
 tors, and assigns, by these 
 presents, that their 
 
 executors, administrators, 
 factors, or assigns, shall and 
 will not only unlade and 
 relade the said ship, at 
 her unlading and relading 
 port of aforesaid, 
 
 and dispatch, and discharge 
 the same at this 
 in the manner and form as 
 above expressed, and with- 
 in the respective days and 
 times above mentioned, but 
 also shall and will, in full of 
 all freight to be due, pay- 
 able, or demandable, for or 
 during this present intended 
 voyage, well and duly pay, 
 or cause to be paid, unto 
 the said master, his execu- 
 tors, administrators, or as- 
 signs 
 
 the sum of 
 of lawful money of 
 in the manner and form 
 following : that is to say, 
 part thereof 
 within days after 
 
 the said ship shall be en- 
 tered into the custom- 
 
342 COMMERCIAL 
 
 rente de na manSira 
 
 efdrma seguinte ; a saber : 
 parte 
 dSlle dSntro em 
 dids despdis da entrdda do 
 ditto navio ddda na alfan- 
 dega de Item 
 
 mdis dSntro em 
 
 dias proximos seguintes, 
 e o restdnte do ditto frSte 
 intSiro dSntro em 
 dias Idgo despdis da des- 
 cdrga do ditto navio aqui 
 em sobre ditto, 
 
 E acdrdase reciprocamSnte 
 por e Sntre dmbas as partes 
 por Sties mSsmos, os sens 
 particuldres testamentei- 
 ros, e administr adores que 
 todos os gdstos dos pdrtos 
 que se vencerem para pa~ 
 gdrse ou pedirse, durdnte 
 esta presSnte destindda 
 vidgem ; serdo pdgos e sa- 
 tisfeitos na maneira e 
 fdrma seguinte : a sabSr 
 
 delles, pellos dittos 
 hdmens de negocio ou s6us 
 testamenteiros ou consti- 
 tuintes : Al6m disso, por, 
 6sta se conc6rta que poderd 
 ser e sSja licito aos, e 
 p Silos dittos hdmens de 
 negocio, os sSus feitores, 
 ou constituintes de retSr o 
 ditto navio em detSnga ao 
 seu pdrto, descarga e re- 
 carga sobre ditta, e tambem 
 em .... sobre ditto, tanto 
 tempo e tdntos dias que se 
 requSirdo, alem dos dias 
 cSrtos acima apontddos, 
 sdlvo que ndo pdssem 
 
 dies por intSiro ; elles 
 
 LETTERS, Sec. 
 
 house of Item 
 
 more thereof 
 within days then 
 
 next following, and the 
 remaining part of the said 
 whole freight within 
 days next after the said 
 ship shall be delivered after 
 lading here at 
 aforesaid; and it is mutually 
 agreed by and between the 
 said parties to these presents, 
 for themselves, their several 
 executors and administra- 
 tors, that all port charges 
 which shall grow due, pay- 
 able, or demandable, during 
 this present intended voy- 
 age, shall be paid and 
 satisfied in the manner and 
 form following ; that is to 
 
 say, 
 
 thereof by 
 
 the said merchants, their 
 executors, factors, or as- 
 signs, and the other 
 thereof by the said master, 
 his executors- or assigns : 
 further, it is hereby agreed, 
 that it shall and may be 
 lawful unto and for the said 
 merchants, their factors, or 
 assigns, to keep the said 
 ship in demurrage at her 
 unlading and relading port 
 above mentioned, and also 
 at aforesaid, over 
 
 and above the respected 
 days aforementioned, such 
 other time and number of 
 days as will be requisite, so 
 as the same exceed not 
 
 days in the whole, they 
 the said merchants, their 
 factors, for each and every 
 
COMMERCIAL LETTERS, &c. 343 
 
 os dittos homensdenegdcio, 
 os seusfeitdres, constituin- 
 tes por cdda hum e cdda 
 tdl dia pagdndo ao ditto 
 mSstre ou aos sens consti- 
 tuintes de dia em dia, cdmo 
 mSs?no se veneer para se 
 pagdr, qualquer cdusa so- 
 breditta em contrario ndo 
 obstdnte ; e pello compri- 
 mento de tddas, e de cdda, 
 huma das cdusas acima 
 declarddas, as quaes por 
 pdrte e pello que toca ao 
 ditto m&stre, aos seus testa- 
 menteir os, administr adores 
 ou constituintes e cdda hum 
 d Sites sao e devem de ser 
 avidas, tidas, observddas 
 e compridas, o ditto me'stre 
 se obriga a si mSsmo, os 
 seus testament eiros, e ad- 
 ministraddres, juntamente 
 com o ditto navio, o seu 
 fre'te, enxarcias eaparSlhos 
 aos dittos homejis de negd- 
 cio, aos sSus testamentei- 
 ros, administr adores e con- 
 stituinies, e cdda hum 
 dilles na soma ou pena de 
 dinhSiro corrente de 
 para se pagdr bem e ver- 
 dadeirdmSnte por 6sta pre- 
 sente, e tambem pSllo com- 
 primento de tddas e de cdda 
 hiima das cdusas sabre 
 dittas, os quaes por pdrte 
 e pSllo que toca aos dittos 
 hdmens de negdcio, aos sSus 
 testamenteiros administra- 
 ddres, constituintes ou qual- 
 quSr dSlles, sao e d6vem de 
 s£r guardddasi pdgas, e 
 cgmpridaBi os dittos h6» 
 
 such day, paying unto the 
 said master, or his assigns 
 day by day, 
 where the same shall grow- 
 due and payable, any thing 
 aforesaid to the contrary 
 notwithstanding ; and for 
 the performance of all and 
 singular the premises, which 
 on the part and behalf of 
 the said master, his execu- 
 tors, administrators, and 
 assigns, and every of them, 
 are and ought to be well 
 and truly hold en, observed, 
 and performed, the said 
 master doth bind and oblige 
 himself, his executors, and 
 administrators, together 
 with the said ship and her 
 freight, tackle and apparel 
 unto the said merchants, 
 their executors, administra- 
 tors, and assigris, and every 
 of 'them, in the sum or 
 penalty of pounds 
 
 of lawful money of 
 well and truly to be paid 
 by these presents, and like- 
 wise for the performance 
 of all and singular the 
 premises, which on the 
 part and behalf of the Said 
 merchants, their executors, 
 administrators, and assigns, 
 or any of them, are and 
 ought to be kept, paid and 
 performed, the said mer- 
 chants do bind and oblige 
 themselves, their executors, 
 and administrators, jointly 
 and severally, together 
 with their goods, to be 
 laden on board $w mid 
 
344 COMMERCIAL 
 
 mens de negdcio s6 obrigad 
 a si mdsmos, os sius testa- 
 menUiros, e administra- 
 dores, junta e separdda- 
 mhite cdm a suasfazendas 
 que se caregarao abordo do 
 ditto navio n6sta presente 
 destindda vidgem, ao ditto 
 mistre aos sens testamen- 
 teiros, administraddres e 
 constituintes, e a cdda hum 
 delles, na semelhdnte soma 
 da pSna de de se- 
 
 melhdnte dinheiro corrente 
 de para sSr pago 
 
 hem e verdadeiramente por 
 6sta presente; em teste- 
 munha do que as partes 
 sobredittas assindrao e 
 setdrao reciprocamente 6s- 
 tas depresentes cdrtasfreta- 
 mento contratddas, ao dia e 
 dnno primSiro acima decla- 
 rddo. 
 
 T. B. 
 Sellddo e entregue 
 diante de 
 
 A. B. 
 
 C. D. 
 
 Apolice de Seguro. 
 EM o Nome de Deos, 
 Amen, 
 
 tdnto no seu pr6prio ndme, 
 c6mo, por, ou em o ndme, 
 ou n6mes de t6dos e cada 
 pessoa ou pessdas a quern 
 o m&smo pertencer, pdssa 
 ou poderd pertencer, em 
 parte ou em t6do, fax o 
 seguro, causa asi mesmo 
 e a titles, e a cada hum 
 dSUes.; de assegurdrse, per- 
 
 LETTERS, &c. 
 
 ship, this present intended 
 voyage, unto the said 
 master, his executors, ad- 
 ministrators, and assigns, 
 and every of them, in the 
 like sum and penalty of 
 
 of like lawful money 
 of also well and 
 
 truly to be paid by these 
 presents. In witness where- 
 of, the parties aforesaid to 
 these present charter-parties 
 indented, have interchange- 
 ably put their hands and 
 seals the day and year first 
 above written. 
 
 T. B. 
 Sealed and delivered in 
 the presence of 
 A. B, 
 C. D. 
 
 A Policy of Assurance. 
 
 IN the Name of God, 
 Amen, as well 
 
 in his own name, as for and 
 in the name and names of 
 all and every other person 
 and persons to whom the 
 same doth, may, or shall 
 appertain, in part, or in all, 
 doth make assurance, and 
 cause himself and them, 
 and every of them, to be 
 insured, lost, or not lost 
 
COMMERCIAL LETTERS, &c. 345 
 
 didos ou nao perdidos 
 sdbre qualquer g6nero de fa- 
 zendas e mercadorias quaes- 
 qu6r, carregddas, 6u para 
 se carregdrem, abdrdo do 
 b6m navio por nome 
 
 do porte de 
 tonelddas, de que h6 m€stre 
 debaixo de Deos P. M. ou 
 quern qu6r que for por 
 mestre do ditto navio, ou o 
 m€stre, delle se nomee ou 
 nomeard ; principidndo a 
 aventura sobre as dittas 
 fazSndas e mercadorias de, 
 e logo despois de carregdl- 
 las abdrdo do ditto navio 
 e assim se continuard 
 e Jicard at6 que o ditto 
 navio cdm as dittas faz&n- 
 das e mercadorias qudes- 
 qu6r chegar e as 
 
 mSsmas ahi descarregddas 
 em salvamento ; e sera 
 licito parao ditto navio, 
 nesta vidgem, de pardr e 
 detSrse em qudesquer p6r- 
 tos, ou lugdres sem 
 
 prejuizo a iste Seguro. As 
 dittas fazendas e mercado- 
 rias por concerto, sao, e se- 
 rdo avaliadas em 
 Sem que se dS Sutra conta 
 deltas mesmas, tocdnte as 
 aventuras e riscos com que 
 nds os seguradores nos 
 contentamos e que tomdmos 
 sobre nos ?i6sta vidgem ; 
 ellas sao dos mares, das 
 ndos de gu6rra, de fogo, 
 inimigos, corsarios, lad- 
 roes, roubaddres, alijamen-^ 
 tos ou fazendas perdidas e 
 deitddas no mar, lettras de 
 
 upon any kind 
 of goods and merchandize 
 whatsoever, laden or to be 
 laden aboard the good ship 
 called the burthen 
 
 tons, or there- 
 abouts ; whereof P. M. is 
 master, under God, for this 
 present voyage 
 or whosoever else shall go 
 for master in the said ship, 
 or by whatsoever name or 
 names the said ship, or 
 the master thereof, is or 
 shall be named or called ; 
 beginniDg the adventure 
 upon the said goods and 
 merchandise from and im- 
 mediately following the 
 lading thereof aboard the 
 said ship and so 
 
 shall continue and endure 
 until the said ship, with 
 the said goods and mer- 
 chandise whatsoever shall 
 be arrived and the 
 
 same there safely landed ; 
 and it shall be lawful for 
 the said ship in this voyage 
 to stop and stay at any 
 port or places 
 without prejudice to this 
 assurance. The said goods 
 and merchandise by agree- 
 ment, are and shall be 
 valued at without 
 
 further account to be given 
 for the same, touching the 
 adventures and perils which 
 we the assurers are con- 
 tented to bear, and do take 
 upon us in this voyage ; 
 they are of the seas, men- 
 of- war, fire, enemies. 
 
346 COMMERCIAL LETTERS, &c. 
 
 marca, e contra marca, so- 
 bresdltos,tomadias no mar, 
 citacoe's, tolhimdntos e de- 
 t&ncas de t6dos os reys, 
 principes e pdvos de nacao, 
 condigdo on qualidddequal- 
 ■que'r, barr atria e contrdstes 
 engandsos do m6stre e dos 
 marinhgiros, e de tddos os 
 dutros perigos ; p6rdas e 
 desdstres que ja vierao ou 
 que virao ou prejuizo, des~ 
 aproveitamSnto ou ddno 
 das dittas fazend as e mer- 
 cadorias, ou de alguapdrte 
 deltas. E se acdso succe- 
 d€r algiima pSrda ou des- 
 ventura, serd licito aos as- 
 seguradores, feitores, ser- 
 vos e constituintes de man- 
 ddr fazer diligSncias e 
 trabalhdr por, em, e dcerca 
 da defdza, salvamento, e 
 recobram6nto, das dittas 
 fazindas e mercadorias, ou 
 de algiima parte d€llas sem 
 prejuizo dSste seguro, aos 
 gdstos do que n6s os asse- 
 guradores contribuiremos 
 cada hum confdrme a sua 
 quantia nelle asscgurdda ; 
 e nos os assegurad6res 
 estdmos de acdrdo e con- 
 certo que 6sta escritnra e 
 seguro terd tdnta forca e 
 val6r cdmo a mdis autken- 
 tica apolice ou escriiura 
 de seguro ddntes feiia em 
 qualqu6r parte de 
 
 E assim nds 
 os asseguraddres sdmos 
 contSntes e por Ssta prome- 
 fJ?nos e nos obrigdmos 
 cada hum por sua propria 
 
 pirates, rovers, thieves, 
 jetsons, letters of marque 
 and counter-marque, sur- 
 prisals, takings of sea, ar- 
 rests, restraints, and detain- 
 ments of all kings, princes, 
 and people of what na- 
 tion, conditions, or quality 
 soever, baratry of the mas- 
 ter 7 and mariners, and of 
 all other perils, losses, and 
 misfortunes, that have or 
 shall come to the hurt, 
 detriment, or damage of 
 the said goods and mer- 
 chandise, or any part there- 
 of ; and in case of any loss 
 or misfortune, it shall be 
 lawful to the assured fac- 
 tors, servants, and assigns, 
 to sue, labour, and travel, 
 for, in, and about the de- 
 fence, safeguard, and reco- 
 very of the said goods and 
 merchandise, or any part 
 thereof, without prejudice 
 to this assurance, to the 
 charges wherof we the as- 
 surers will contribute each 
 one according to the rate 
 and quantity of his sum 
 herein assured. And it is 
 agreed by us the insurers, 
 that this writing and assur- 
 ance shall be of as much 
 force and effect, as the 
 surest policy or writing of 
 assurance heretofore made 
 in or elsewhere 
 
 in And so we the 
 
 assurers are contented, and 
 do hereby promise and bind 
 ourselves, each one for his 
 own part, our beirs ? execu* 
 
COMMERCIAL LETTERS, &c. 347 
 
 pdrte, os ndssos kerdeiros, 
 testamentSiros, adminis- 
 traddres e constituinf.es 
 pello verdadSiro compri- 
 minto das cdusas acima 
 declarddas, confes'sdndo 
 que estdmos pdgos e satis- 
 feiios do que se nos d6ve 
 dcdnta deste seguro. 
 
 Em testemunha do que 
 nds os seguraddres, assi- 
 ndmos ao p6 dSste, com as 
 quantias assegurddas, &c. 
 
 Eu A. B. s6u contente 
 com este seguro por c6m 
 livras Ester I. L. em de 
 £. 100. 
 
 tors, and assigns, to the 
 assured, their executors, 
 administrators, and assigns, 
 for the true performance 
 of the premises, confessing 
 ourselves paid the consider- 
 ation due unto us for this 
 assurance, by 
 
 In witness whereof, we the 
 assurers have subscribed 
 our names and sums assured 
 in 
 
 I A. B. am contented 
 
 with this assurance for one 
 
 hundred pounds. Witness 
 
 my hand the 15th 1 n lnn 
 
 of March, 1826. j *' 1UU 
 
 Conhecimento. 
 
 DIGO eu T. B. de 
 
 m6stre ou capitdo que 
 s6u do navio que Deos salve 
 por nome que ao 
 
 presdnte estd surto e anco- 
 rddo no pdrto de 
 para com o favdr de Deos 
 seguir a sua vidgem ao 
 pdrto de aonde h6 
 
 minha dirSita descdrga, 
 que h6 verddde, que recebi, 
 e tSnho carregddo dentro 
 do ditto navio debdixo de 
 cuberta enxuta e bem acon- 
 diciondda de 
 
 marcado comamarca de 
 f6ra, o qual me obrigo o 
 promt? to, levdndome Deos a 
 bdm salvamSnto e ditto 
 navio ao ditto pdrto, de 
 entregdr em n6me do sohre<> 
 ditto a KM* 
 
 A Bill of Lading. 
 
 SHIPPED, by the grace 
 of God, in good order, and 
 well-conditioned, by 
 
 in and upon the 
 good ship called the 
 
 whereof is master under 
 God for this present 
 voyage and now 
 
 riding at anchor in 
 
 and by God's grace 
 bound for to say 
 
 being marked and 
 numbered as in the margin, 
 and are to be delivered in 
 like good order, and well- 
 conditioned, at the afore- 
 said port of the 
 danger of the seas only ex- 
 cepted, unto Mr. 
 or his assigns, he or they 
 paying for the said goods 
 with primage 
 
COMMERCIAL LETTERS, &c. 
 
 348 
 
 auzinte a qu&m siuspoderes 
 fiver pagdndome de 
 
 fr6te para assim com- 
 
 prir e guarddr, obrigo min- 
 ha pessda, e bems e ditto 
 navio ; em certesa do qual 
 dei tres conhecimentos de 
 hum theor, assinddos par 
 mint oil por meu escrivdo ; 
 hum comprido osdutros nao 
 vdl/iao ; feito em 14 de 
 
 Mar go de 182G Annos. 
 
 Igndro o conteudo. 
 
 and average, as is accus- 
 tomed. In witness whereof, 
 the master and purser of 
 the said ship has affirmed 
 to three bills of lading, all 
 of this tenor and date ; the 
 one of which three bills 
 being accomplished, the 
 other two to stand void. 
 And so God send the good 
 ship to her desired port in 
 safety. , Amen. Dated in 
 the 14th of March 
 1826. 
 Inside and contents un- 
 known. 
 
 Instrumento ou Escritura 
 de Gompromisso. 
 
 A TODOS qudntos este 
 presente Instrumento ou 
 escritura de compromisso 
 virem, de nds acredores de 
 G. M. negociante de 
 
 saude; Cdmoo ditto 
 G. M. ao presente fica de- 
 vendo e em dereito d6ve a 
 nds os acreddres delle ditto 
 G. M. vdrias e div6rsas 
 sdmmas de dinh£iro, fyc. 
 As quaes em rasao de 
 muitas dividas e algumas 
 dfllas mui grd?ides, que 
 tambdm em dir&ito se the 
 d£vem a Slle, nao se pdde??i 
 arrecaddr sem alguma di- 
 lagdo de tempo, e por sdrem 
 algumas de'llas irrecuper- 
 dveis sem demdnda, elle 
 estd por 6ra muito desa- 
 bilitddo de fazir paga- 
 
 A Letter of Licence. 
 
 TO all people, to whom 
 this present writing shall 
 come, we the creditors of 
 G. M. of 
 
 merchant, send greeting. 
 Whereas the said G. M. at 
 this present time, doth stand 
 indebted, and doth justly 
 owe unto us the said cre- 
 ditors of him the said G. M. 
 divers and sundry sums of 
 money, &c. which, by rea- 
 son of many debts, and 
 some of them very great, 
 that are likewise justly 
 owing unto him, and can- 
 not be had or recovered 
 without some respite of 
 time, and some of them not 
 without suit, he is very 
 much disabled at present 
 to make payment unto us 
 
COMMERCIAL LETTERS, &c 349 
 
 mento a n6s os seus acre- 
 ddres da nossa inteira e 
 justa divida confdrme a 
 sua vontdde e des6jo ; a 
 respeitode que, elle nos pede 
 com tddo o encarecimento 
 que nds os dittos acreddres, 
 e cada hum de ndsfossemos 
 servidos de ddr e conceder 
 a elle o ditto G. M. aos seus 
 testamenteiros,administra- 
 ddres, ou constituintes, 
 tdnta larguesa ou dilagdo 
 de tempo pello pagamSnto 
 e satisfagdo de nossas di- 
 vidas particuldres, que the 
 parecer justo, e rasdo pello 
 alcdnce e cobrdnga das 
 dittas dividas : Asab6r, 
 que nos e cdda hum de nos 
 ficdssemos contSntes a 
 tomdr e receber de nossas 
 dividas inteiras em 
 para se repartirem em 
 
 partes, para sepagdrem 
 em pagam6ntos 
 
 diversos na maneira L e 
 fdrma seguinte : AsabSr, o 
 primeiro pagamento d6lla 
 ha de ser e o resto 
 
 pagdr-se-hd em 
 jiroximo pella in- 
 
 teira pdga e satisfagdo 
 das dittas* dividas espece- 
 jicddas ; E pello mdis 
 plendrio comprimento dos 
 vdrios pagamentos sobre- 
 dittos em tdl maneira e 
 forma cdmo acima se limita 
 e decldra ; ao verdadSiro 
 i?itSnto destas presSntes 
 elle o ditto G. M. ao ou 
 antes do sera obri- 
 
 gddo a n6s os dittos acr6- 
 
 the said creditors, of our 
 whole and just debt, as he 
 seems willing and desirous ; 
 in consideration whereof, 
 he desires us, that we the 
 said creditors, and every- 
 one of us, would be pleased 
 to give and grant unto the 
 said G. M. his executors, 
 administrators, or assigns, 
 such liberty or respite of 
 time, for the payment and 
 satisfaction of our several 
 debts, as he thinks reason- 
 able for the obtaining, get- 
 ting, and recovering of the 
 said debts : viz. That we 
 and every one of us would 
 be content to take, and ac- 
 cept of our whole debts in 
 to be divided in 
 parts, to be paid 
 at several pay- 
 
 ments, in manner and form 
 following : viz. The first 
 payment thereof to be 
 
 and the residue to be 
 paid at next 
 
 in full payment and satis- 
 faction of the said several 
 debts : and for the more 
 full performance of the said 
 several payments aforesaid, 
 in such manner and form 
 as is above limited and de- 
 clared, according to the 
 true meaning of these pre- 
 sents, he the said G. M. 
 shall and will, at, or before 
 the become bound 
 
 unto us the said creditors 
 respectively, by one obliga- 
 tion in due form of law to 
 be made, including all and 
 
350 COMMERCIAL LETTERS, &c. 
 
 do res na mtsma confer* 
 middde, por huma obri- 
 gacao que sefard na melhor 
 forma de der6ito com tddos 
 e cada hum dos paga- 
 mentos, na maneira acima 
 limitdda, em hum certo 
 lugdr ou lugdres conveni- 
 €ntes de nos os dittos acre- 
 dor es nomeddos, e a pena 
 de cada huma das obri- 
 gacues ha de ser dobrdda 
 da somma int6ira, inclusa 
 nella mesma, para ser a 
 nos e?itr6gue e a cada hum 
 de n6s, os ?wssos testamen- 
 ts iros, ou constituintes, ao 
 ou dntes do prdxi- 
 
 mo seguinte da data d6sta ; 
 por esta causa sdibase ; 
 que nos os dittos acredores 
 aqui a baixo assinddos, e 
 cada hum de nds para si 
 em particular, e por seus 
 testament eiros, adminis- 
 tradores e constituintes ao 
 respeito do emcima especi- 
 ficddo e declarddo, por estes 
 presentes, de vontdde prd- 
 pria, consentimos, contra- 
 tamos, prometemos e con- 
 corddmos, ao e com o ditto 
 G. J/, ou seus iestamen- 
 teiros, administr adores e 
 iluintes por estes pre- 
 sentes que nos os dittos 
 acredores, e cada hum de 
 nos, os nossos testamen- 
 teiros, administr adores e 
 constituintes, aceitaremos 
 do ditto G. M. dos seus 
 testamenteir os, administr a- 
 d6res e constituintes, todas 
 e cada huma de ides dividas 
 
 every one of the payments 
 in such sort as is above 
 limited at some convenient 
 place or places by 
 
 each of us the said creditors 
 to be nominated and ap- 
 pointed, and the penalty 
 of every obligation to be 
 doubled the whole sum in- 
 cluded in the condition of 
 the same to be delivered 
 unto us, and every one of 
 us, our executors or assigns, 
 at or before the 
 next ensuing the date here- 
 of: Know ye, therefore, that 
 we the said creditors, whose 
 names are here under-writ- 
 ten, and every one of us for 
 his own part, and for his 
 executors, administrators, 
 and assigns, for the consi- 
 deration above specified 
 and expressed, do by these 
 presents willingly consent, 
 covenant, promise, and 
 agree to and with the said 
 G. M. his executors, admi- 
 nistrators, and assigns, to 
 accept of the said G. M. his 
 executors, and assigns, all 
 and every of the said debts 
 and sums of money by the 
 said G. M. unto us, and 
 every one of us, owing, and 
 paying upon such obliga- 
 tions, assurance and assur- 
 ances, as aforesaid, to be 
 paid in such manner and 
 sort, and at such days and 
 times, as is above limited 
 and required. And further, 
 that we the said creditors, 
 and every of us, our, and 
 
COMMERCIAL LETTERS, &e. 351 
 
 e quantias de dinheiro do 
 ditto G. M. a nds e cada 
 hum de ?i6s, devidas e ven- 
 cidas em virtude de tdes 
 obrigagoens, segurdnga ou 
 segurdngas sobredittas, 
 para se pagdrem em tdl 
 modo e maniira, e aos tdes 
 dias e tempos que acima se 
 limit ao e requerem. E alem 
 disso, que nds os dittos 
 acreddres e cada hum de 
 nds, ou ndssos e cada hum 
 de ndssos testamenteiros, 
 administr adores e consti- 
 tuintes, em conformiddde a 
 entrega da ditta obrigagdo 
 a nds e , a cada hum de 
 ndssos testamenteiros, ad- 
 ministr adores, e constitu- 
 intes, sellaremos, assinare- 
 mos, e na melhdr forma e 
 direito entregaremos ao 
 ditto Gi M. a ndssa gerdl 
 e sufficiente descdrga, para 
 ser rendida por elle o ditto 
 G. M. ou sens testamen- 
 teiros, administr adores, e 
 constituintes, a data e d 
 limitagdo, antes do dia e 
 data desta obrigacao ndva; 
 em testemunha do que temos 
 assinddo e sellddo esia. 
 
 Datdda aos lb de Maio 
 de 1826. 
 
 every of our executors, ad- 
 ministrators, and assigns, 
 respectively, upon the de- 
 livery of the said obligation 
 to us, and to every of us, 
 and every of our executors, 
 administrators, and assigns, 
 shall and will, at the charge 
 of the said G. M. his exe- 
 cutors, administrators, and 
 assigns, seal, subscribe, and, 
 in due form of law, deliver 
 to the said G. M. our suffi- 
 cient general release, for 
 him, his executors, admi- 
 nistrators, or assigns, to 
 bear date and limitation, 
 before the day of the date 
 of this new obligation to 
 be made for the debt. In 
 witness whereof, we have 
 hereunto set our hands and 
 seals. 
 
 Dated the 15th of May 
 1826, &c. 
 
352 COMMERCIAL LETTERS, &c. 
 
 L£tras de Cambio 
 
 Bills of Exchange, 
 
 Londres, por 300 Milreis. 
 
 5 de Junho, 1826. 
 
 A' VIST A desta minha 
 primHra IStra de cambio, 
 pagard Vm. ao senhor T. 
 M. ou ordem a somma de 
 trezentos Milreis em din- 
 heiro corrSnte de Portugal, 
 valdr recebido do senhor T. 
 D. como por aviso de 
 
 Seu Venerador e Creddo. 
 
 Ao Senhor T. M. Nego- 
 ciante em Lisboa. 
 
 T.M. 
 
 London, for 300 Milreas. 
 
 5th of June, 1826. 
 
 AT sight of this my first 
 bill of exchange, please to 
 pay to Mr. T. M. or order, 
 the sum of three hundred 
 Milreas in current money 
 of Portugal, value received 
 of Mr. T. D. placing it to 
 account, as per advice 
 from, Sir, 
 
 Yours, H. S. 
 
 To Mr. T. M. Merchant 
 in Lisbon. T. M. 
 
 Lisboa, 
 7 de Junho, 1826. 
 
 250/. Esterl. 
 
 A QUA RENT A dias 
 vista d6sta minha segunda 
 letra de cambio (a primeira 
 nao sendo pctga) pagard 
 Vm. ao Senhor F. G. # 
 Companhia,/ ou ordem a 
 somma de doz&ntas e cin- 
 quenta livras esterlinas em 
 mo6da corrente de Ingla- 
 terra, valdr recebido do 
 Senhor J. D. como por aviso 
 de 
 
 Seu Venerador e Creddo. 
 H.S. 
 
 Ao Senhor T. B. Nego- 
 ciante em Londres. 
 
 Lisbon, for 250/. Sterling. 
 
 7th of June, 1826. 
 
 AT Forty days sight of 
 this my second bill of ex- 
 change, my first and third 
 net being paid, please to 
 pay to Mr. F. G. and Com- 
 pany, or order, the sum of 
 two hundred and fifty 
 pounds sterling, in current 
 money of England, value 
 received of Mr. J. D. and 
 place it to account, as per 
 advice, from Sir, 
 
 Yours, H. S. 
 
 To Mr. T. B. Merchant 
 in London. F. P. 
 
COMMERCIAL LETTERS, &c. 353 
 
 Protesto de huma Letra 
 de Cambio. 
 
 S A IB AM todos a quern 
 esta presente escritura 
 tocdr que aos do 
 
 mez de, do anno de 
 a requerimento de P. C. 
 negociante de eu 
 
 M, N. tabaliao de n6tas 
 jurddo e admit ido pella 
 auioridade del Rei, fyc. fui 
 a cdsa da mordda do senhor 
 T. B, sdbre quern a letra de 
 cambio acima referida h6 
 sacdda, e mostrei a original 
 ao ditto T. B. requerendo a 
 sua aceitacao d6lla : o qual 
 me respondeo que nao acei- 
 taria a ditta Utra por 
 humas rasdens que escreve- 
 ria ao senhor T. P. sacaddr ; 
 pella qual rasao eu o ditto 
 tabaliao protestei, por esie 
 presente proteslo, tdnto 
 contra o ditto F. P. o sacaddr 
 como tambSm contra o ditto 
 T. B. sdbre quern he sacdda, 
 demdis contra todas as 
 outras pessoas, e?idossa- 
 dores, ou outras n6lla in- 
 teressddas, por todos os 
 cdmbios, recdmbios, ddnos 
 e interSsses qudesquer ; em 
 pres&nca de H. J. S.' T*. 
 chamados por testemunhas 
 a este pres6nte dcto, feito 
 no meu escritdrio em o dia 
 e anno acima declarado. 
 M. N. Notario Publico. 
 
 A Protest of a Bill of Ex- 
 
 change. 
 
 KNOW all persons whom 
 this present writing may 
 concern, that the of 
 
 in the year at 
 
 the request of Mr. P. C. of 
 merchant, I, M. N. 
 public notary, sworn and 
 admitted by authority of his 
 most sacred majesty, did go 
 to the dwelling-house or 
 habitation of Mr. T. B. 
 upon whom the above- 
 named bill of exchange is 
 drawn, and showed the 
 original unto the said Mr. 
 T. B. demanding his ac- 
 ceptance of the same, who 
 answered me he should not 
 accept the same bill, for 
 some reasons he should 
 write Mr. F. P. the drawer ; 
 wherefore I the said notary 
 did protest, and by these 
 presents protest, as well 
 against the said F. P. the 
 drawer, as likewise against 
 the said T. B. upon whom 
 it is drawn ; as also against 
 all other persons, indorsers, 
 or others therein concerned, 
 for air changes, rechanges, 
 damages and interest what- 
 soever, in presence of H. J. 
 and S. T. called for witnesses 
 to this present act, done in 
 my office in the day 
 
 and year above mentioned. 
 M. N. Notary Public. 
 
 2 A 
 
354 COMMERCIAL LETTERS, &c. 
 
 Formas de Recibos. Forms of Receipts. 
 
 Dinheiro recebido por 
 inteiro. 
 
 Recebi do senhor Thomas 
 Crew, sets livras sete shi- 
 lins seis penny s, resto de 
 todas as contas, com o ditto. 
 
 A.B. 
 1 de Janeiro. 
 
 Dinheiro recebido porConta 
 de meu Amo. 
 Recebi do Sr. Jonas Lee, 
 quatro livras e cinco shilins 
 por conta de meu amo 
 Moises Trust. 
 
 CD. 
 22 de Fever eiro 1826. 
 
 Dinheiro recebido a conta. 
 
 Recebi, a 30 de Margo, 
 1826, do Sr. Jacinto Cook, 
 oinco livras cinco shilins, 
 a conta de doze livras e dez 
 shilins, por conta de meu 
 pai Antonio Truelove, 
 
 E.F. 
 
 30 de Margo 1826. 
 
 Dinheiro recebido a conta 
 de Contas que nao estao 
 ajustadas. 
 
 Recebi da senhora Mar- 
 tha Rich, por maos de Pedro 
 Cornet, onze livras d conta. 
 G. H. 
 
 24 de Abril 1826. 
 
 Money received in Full. 
 
 Received, 1st January 
 1826, of Mr. Thomas Crew, 
 six pounds seven shillings 
 and sixpence, in full of all 
 demands, per 
 
 A. B. 
 
 For another's Use. 
 
 Received, 22nd Febru- 
 ary, 1826, of Mr. Jonas Lee, 
 four pounds five shillings, 
 for the use of my master 
 Moses Trust, per 
 
 CD. 
 
 Money received in Part. 
 
 R ecei ved, 30th of March, 
 1826, of Mr. James Cook, 
 five pounds ten shillings, 
 in part of twelve pounds 
 ten shillings, for my father, 
 Anthony Truelove, per 
 E, F. 
 
 Money received on Accounts 
 unsettled. 
 
 Received, 24th April, 
 1826, of Mrs. Martha Rich, 
 by the hands of Peter Cor- 
 net, eleven pounds on ac- 
 count. G. H. 
 
COMMERCIAL LETTERS, &c. 355 
 
 Quando hum Rol ou Conta 
 se paga por inteiro. 
 
 Recebi, a 15 de Mayo, 
 1826, o empdrte (Testa 
 conta. 
 
 I.K. 
 
 Quando se paga dinheiro a 
 Conta de hum rol. 
 
 Recebi sete livras a 
 conta deste rol. 
 
 L. M. 
 6 de Junho de 1826. 
 
 When a Bill is paid in 
 Full. 
 
 Received, 15th May, 
 1826, the full contents here- 
 of. 
 
 I.K. 
 
 When a Bill is paid in 
 Part. 
 
 Received, 26th June, 
 1826, seven pounds in part 
 hereof. 
 
 L. M. 
 
 Notas ou Obrigacoens que 
 faz hum Homem quando 
 toma dinheiro imprestado. 
 
 Londres, 4 de Junho, 1826. 
 
 Eu abaixo firmado pro- 
 meto, pagar ao Sr. E. D. 
 banqueiro do Ihesouro de sua 
 Majestade, do Excise, ou 
 d sua ordem, quarenta dias 
 despois da data desta obri- 
 gagaoqudtro centas e trinta 
 livras por valor recebido. 
 Christovao Wade. 
 
 £.430 ' 
 
 Promissory Notes for a 
 Man's Self. 
 
 London, June 4th, 1826. 
 
 I promise to pay to Mr. 
 Edward Draper, cashier of 
 his majesty's revenue of 
 Excise, or order, forty days 
 after date, four hundred 
 and thirty pounds, value 
 received 
 
 Christopher Wade. 
 
 £.430 
 
 Eu abaixo firmado pro- 
 meto pagar ao Sr. Paulo 
 Barker ou d sua ordem em 
 sendo requerido, trezentas, 
 e noventa, e quatro livras 
 dous shilins e seis pennys 
 por valor recebido hoje 17 
 de Julho, 1826. 
 
 Philip Veriham. 
 
 £. 394 2 6 
 
 2 
 
 I promise to pay to Paul 
 Barker, esq. or order, on 
 demand, three hundred and 
 ninety-four pounds, two 
 shillings, and six-pence, 
 value received this 17th of 
 July, 1826. 
 
 Philip Venham. 
 
 £. 394 2 6 
 
 A 2 
 
356 COMMERCIAL 
 
 E Uaba ixo firmado firo- 
 mito pagar ao Sr. J. T. on 
 a sua drdem, quarSnta e 
 nave livras, e Ires shilins 6 
 mezes despdis da data desta 
 obrigacao, por valor rece- 
 bido emverddde do que asig- 
 nei esta 24 de Agosto 1826. 
 W> J. 
 
 £. 49 3 0. 
 
 LETTERS, &c. 
 
 I promise to pay to Mr. 
 J. T. or order, forty-nine 
 pounds three shillings, six 
 months after date, value re- 
 ceived. Witness my hand 
 this 24th of August, 1826. 
 W. J. 
 
 £.49 3 0. 
 
 [N. B. Obs6rvese que em 
 ?iotas ou obrigaqoens s&m- 
 pre se decldra a soma rece- 
 bida sem a qual nao sao de 
 nerihuma forga nem tern 
 authoridade.] 
 
 [N. B. Observe in pro- 
 missory notes that the 
 words " Value received" 
 must be inserted, or they 
 are of no force.] 
 
EXTRACTS. 357 
 
 PORTUGUESE 
 
 GRAMMAR. 
 
 PART IV. 
 
 CONTAINING 
 
 SEVERAL USEFUL AND ENTERTAINING PASSAGES, 
 
 COLLECTED FROM THE BEST PORTUGUESE WRITERS. 
 
 JTjNTRE os bons ditos de Souz6ni, poeta Persi- 
 ano, se conta, que bebendo com outro po6ta, 
 sen amigo, certo licor, se queixava, de que eVa mu- 
 ito quente e dizendolhe, Amigo, " pobre de ti que 
 daqui a poucos dias te faraS beber no inf6rno agoas 
 sulfureas, e ard&ntes, que te abrazarao as entran- 
 has" — "Nao importa/' replicou Souzeni ; " bastara 
 que me lembre algum clos teus versos, que ellas se 
 farao mais frias, que neve." 
 
 Catharina Parthenay, sobrinha da c61ebre Anna 
 Parthenay, deu esta bella resposta a Henrique IV. 
 " Saiba vossa mag de que &u sou muito pobre para ser 
 " sua consorte ; e que no mesmo tempo desc&ndo de 
 f< huma familia muito iilustre, para ser sua dama." 
 
358 PORTUGUESE 
 
 Huma Princeza Catholica, e de rara virtude, v&n- 
 do reduzido o Marechal de Saxonia as agon ids da 
 morte, disse, que era para sentir o nao se poder re- 
 zar hum De profundis pella alma de hum que tinha 
 feito can tar tantos Te Deum. 
 
 A Dom Christovao de Moura, Marquez de Cas- 
 tello Rodrigo, e Vice-Rey'de Portugal por Dom 
 Philipe Terceuo, Indo por huma sala do Paco de 
 Lisboa, hum soldado honrado, que tinha bem ser- 
 vido na India, lhe dava hum memorial, e pedia, que 
 se lembrasse dos seus pap6is, porque havia largo 
 t&mpo, que andava pretendendo. Respond&o-lhe 
 o Marquez, que havia muita Gente para despachar, 
 e nao se podia5 despachar todos com brevidade ; o 
 soldado adiantando o passo se atravessou diante sem 
 descomposicaS, e fazendo parar o Vice-Rey lhe disse 
 com grande conflanca; " Senhor Dom Christovao 
 despache Vs. os homens, e deixeaGente." O Mar- 
 quez aceitou o memorial, e o despachou no mesmo 
 dia. 
 
 Mandando hum Fidalgo em Lisboa abrir em hu- 
 ma rua os Alicerces para se faz&rem humas casas, 
 sem licenca da camera, passando porallioprocurador 
 da cidade, poz pena aos officiaes, que nao trabal- 
 hassem na obra sem licenca dos Vereadores ; e os 
 officiaes diz&nclo-o ao Fidalgo mandou-lhes elle que 
 nao deixassem de trabalhar, e que nao fizessemca- 
 so do que dizia aquelle villao ruim ; tornando jo 
 procurator da cidade por alii e achando os officiaes 
 trabalhando, mandou que dessem com elles no tron- 
 co ; e nao faJtando quern lhe contasse o que o Fi- 
 dalgo diss^ra, teve-o em olho ; e no tempo que el- 
 le hia atravessando pello Rocio para sua casa, sahio- 
 Ihe ao caminho a cavallo, e com huma lanca que 
 Jevava, dando na sua sombra, lhe disse : 4 ' Porque o 
 
EXTRACTS. 359 
 
 que dissestes, foi em minha ausencia, dou em vos- 
 sa sorobra ; se mo tivesseis ditto no rosto, dera na 
 vossa pessda." 
 
 Abou Hanifah, o mais celebre doutdr dos Mus- 
 suimanes, tendo recebido huma bofetada, disse ao 
 que o tinha insultado : " Eu poderia vingarme, pa- 
 gandovos na mesma moeda ; mas nao quero faz&r. 
 Poderia accusarvos ao calife : mas nao quero ser ac- 
 cusador. Poderia nas minhas oracoens queixarme a 
 Deos d£sta affronta ; mas nem isso quero fazer. Por 
 fim poderia pedir a D^os, que se quer no dia do juizo 
 vos castigasse ; por^m o mesmo senhor me livre de 
 semelhante pensamento ; mas antes, se succedesse 
 que neste instaate chegasse aquelle formidavel dia ; 
 e se a minha intercessao tivessealguma sfficacia para 
 com Deos, nao quizera por companheiro senao a 
 vos para entrar no Paraiso.'' Que admiravel ex^m- 
 plo para os Christaos aprend^rem a perdoar as inju- 
 rias ! 
 
 Da Peregrinacao. 
 
 Pass ad as que se dao peregrinando, sao degraos 
 para a casa do desengano. Das suas fdntes sahem os 
 rios muito pequenos, e crescem correndo, e levao 
 mares ao mar. Plomens, que da sua terra na5 sahem, 
 saonavios, queaeabaonoestaleiro. Asabedoriacomo 
 vinda do ceo, anda neste globo terrestre peregrina ; 
 nao he facil achala senao peregrinando ; errando por 
 estemundo, se apprende onaScometter erros. Va- 
 pores, que na terra eram lodo, apartados della se 
 fazam estrellas. Aos homens que querem luzir, 
 d6ve a patria servir, como aos planetas o horizonte, 
 de berco, para ensayo do seii luzim^nto, longe do 
 ponto Ortivo e remontados a mais alta regiao, apura5 
 as intluenciasj e duplicao as luzes. Que nome teriao 
 
3G0 PORTUGUESE 
 
 hoje no m undo Socrates, Pithagoras, e Platao, eou- 
 tros sabios cla antiguidade, se a modo de cepos, on 
 trdncos, que aonde nascerao fazem raiz e no seu 
 primeiro chao apodrecem, nao buscarao foradaPatria 
 as noticias, que Ihes fakavao. Nao se ornara Her- 
 cules com osdespojos dos Monstros, que dornou, se 
 os nao forabuscar pelo mundo ; a sua dilatada viagem 
 devem os Argon aulas a conquista do vello de ouro, 
 Se nao correra Ulysses remotos climas, fora a Aldea 
 de Ithaca de toda a sua gloria o theatro. Homens 
 perpetuamente caseiros, sao gallos, que so sabem 
 do seu poleiro. Sabios peregrinos, imitao no seu 
 cursoas fbntes, que passando por veas de prata, ouro, 
 emeraldas, e safliras, tomao, e comsigo levao a flor 
 de suas preciosas qualidades. Zombe embora Plu- 
 tarco dos que iouvao a peregrinaca5, e diga, que 
 se parecem com os que julga'6 as estrellas errantes 
 mais nobres, e felices. que as fixas. Nao b4 escola 
 mais util para a vida, que as muitas vidas ou modos 
 de viver, que na varied ade das Nacoens se observa. 
 Yem-se muitas cousas nunca vistas ; aprendem-se 
 muitas, que se nao sabiao, faz-se ohomemcapaz de 
 toda a casta de negocios, e folga de ver este mundo, 
 antes de sahir de!!e. Ate paraos prlncipes, que das 
 suas cortes fazem na terra o seu paraiso, bom he que 
 peregrinem, para conhecerem o mundo, que elles 
 governao. Os commodos, as delicias, os obsequios 
 dos subditos, podem dar a conhecer a hum homem, 
 que nasceo soberano, mas com este conhecimento, 
 nao o fazem digno da soberania : se nao sahira 
 Alexandre da sua Macedonia, nao passara dos li- 
 mites de regulo e nao chegara a avassallar o mundo. 
 
 Do Tempo fuliiro. 
 
 Tit ate o homem do presente, e nao queira pene- 
 trar no future) ; quern de tao longe poem a mira, 
 nao pode dar no alvo. Muitas vez< s bom he igno- 
 
EXTRACTS. 361 
 
 Far o que ha de succeder ; porque se for bem, a di- 
 lacao h& tormento ; e se for mao, o trabalho he sem 
 proveito. Para futuros, nao ha seguranca. Ao 
 Embaixador, que na guerra movlda por Luiz XI. 
 Hey de Franca, a Carlos Duque de Borgonha, pro- 
 curava attrahir ao Emperador Frederico, com pro- 
 messa de se repartlreui com eJie os despojos, e os 
 estados, respondeo o dito Emperador com este 
 apologo : u Tres cacadores com a esperanca deapan- 
 harem hum urso, se comprometterao na reparticao 
 deile. Chegados a boca da caverna, sahio a f6ra com 
 tao grande impeto, que hum dos cacadores botou a 
 fugiv, ou-tro subio a huma arvore, e o outro seestendeo 
 no cha5 fingindo-se morto ; chegouse o urso a elle, 
 poz-lhe o focinho no nariz, e nos ouvidos, e nao Ihe 
 conhecendo folego, uem sinal de vida, o deixou por 
 morto. O que estava na arvore, disse ao compan- 
 heiro ; homem, que te disse o urso, quando tefallou 
 a puridade, com o focinho nos ouvidos ? Disseme 
 que era mal feito, dispor da pelie, e carne do urso, 
 antes de o verem morto. Com isto o Emperador 
 deu a entender ao Embaixador, que era preciso 
 apanhar primeiro ao Duque deBorgonha, quedepois 
 se trataria da reparticao dos seus estados. Dos suc- 
 cessos do tempo futiiro, so Deos tern certeza.'' 
 
 Dos Hi 
 
 COS. 
 
 Em lugares estereis, sem hervas, nem plantas 
 produz a natureza o ouro, para mostrar que os 
 amadores das riquezas nao tern fe, nem honra. Os 
 ricos facinorosos, que ainda que celebrados nas 
 historias, sao o opprobrio da sua posteridade, pode- 
 riao ter boa fama, se lhes nao facilitara este metal a 
 execucao de seus daoados intentos, Em todas as 
 idades forao as riquezas antagonistas da virtude ; 
 ellas invenUirao os mais enormes delitos ; ellas en- 
 sinarao os filhos a tirar a seus pais a vida; en- 
 
362 PORTUGUESE 
 
 sinarao os poderosos a opprimir os innocentes, ar- 
 ruinar as familias, saquear os templos, e despir os 
 altares ; ellas induzirao os amigos a que faltassem a 
 fe, incitarao os vassallos a negar aos principes a 
 obediencia, a os libidinosos derao meyos para violar 
 a pudicicia das donzellas, e estragar a honra dos 
 maridos : final mente ellas ainda que boas para a 
 vida civil, sao causa de todos os males ; e posto que 
 os sabios se soubera5 aproveitar dellas, a cobica, 
 e o mao uso das mesmas, encherao o mundo todo 
 de criminosos. Homens ricos ordinariamente se 
 perdem, por terem muito, e saberem pouco ; des- 
 prezao o saber, porque Ihes parece, que para todo 
 o genero de vida, Ihes basta o ter. A Aristippo 
 perguntou Dionysio, porque razao os filosofos fre- 
 quentavao as cazas dos ricos, e nao os ricos as dos 
 filosofos. Respondeo Aristippo, que os filosofos 
 conhecem o que Ihes falta, e os ricos ignorao o de 
 que necessitao. Senhores ricos, e filosofos pobres, 
 nao podeni fazer cousas grandes, porque a estes Ihes 
 falta dinheiro, e aquelles espirito. Dizia Diogenes, 
 que muitos ricos sao como as plantas, que nascem 
 em desertos, e despenhad^iros, porque dos frutos, 
 que ellas dao, nao comem os homens, inas corvos, 
 milhafres, e feras ; tambem as riquezas de muitos 
 nao sao para sugeitos benemeritos, mas para cho- 
 carreiros, espadachins, rufioes, e meretrizes. 
 
 Estado da Lusitania ate ao Tempo em que foi reduzida 
 em Provincia Romana, Por A, C. do AmaraL Ex- 
 -trahido das Memorias da Academia de Lisboa. 
 
 Hum A historia sincera envergonha-se da gloria 
 vaa, que se busca em antiguidades mentirozas : 
 Desgosta-se desses sonhos agradaveis, pasto de 
 liuma esteril recreacao ; e se saborea so com a ver- 
 
EXTRACTS. 363 
 
 dade pura. Tal he a sorte deste escrito, derigido a 
 fazer prezentes aos Portugueses os verdadeiros cos- 
 tumes, e Leis de seus Maiores : rejeita tudo quanto 
 a impostura, ou a credulidade moderna Ihe conta 
 dos Seculos, que a Providencia quiz esconder-lhe : 
 e se contenta com as escassas memorias, que pode 
 colher dos raros monumentos antigos que lhe restao. 
 Nao tenta entrar pel as espessas trevas dos primeiros 
 36 Seculos do mundo, em que nao acha quern o 
 encaminhe. Pois que os Hebreos unicos guias 
 "Seguros, que introduzem em muitos outros paizes, 
 nem hum so passo dao para este que habi tamos ; e 
 apenas dao motivo a conjectural', que das Colonias 
 sahidas do Oriente para povoar a terra, algumas se 
 estenderao ate a esta extremidade ; mas nem donde, 
 nem quando viessem o pode colher a historia. 
 
 Nao acha depois dos Hebreos outros, de quern se 
 fie, senao os Romanos : e ainda estes pouco lhe 
 sabem dizer de hum Paiz ta5 apartado, em quanto 
 a ambicao de o senhorear os nao avizinha a elle : 
 mal conservao huma obscura tradicao de que a estas 
 partes vierao Celtas, lberos, Persas, Lusos, e 
 Gregos : de huns apenas ficara resto na derivaca.5 
 do nome ; de outros na heranca de alguns costumes. 
 A navegacao com que alguns Povos do fundo do 
 Mediterraneo comecao a enriquecer, as traz ate 
 estas ultimas Costas, e vai logo espalhar pello 
 Mundo, a fama das ricas minas, e do fertil torrao 
 deste Paiz desconhecido ainda, antes que da quali- 
 dade de seus habitantes : nao tarda com tudo a 
 mostrar-se esta ; continua a vir em busca dos the- 
 souros descobertos a ambicao estrangeira ; e ve 
 erguer daqui, quaes feras acossadas nos seus covis, 
 homens bravos para defender os bens que a Provi- 
 dencia lhes destinara. E esta he a primeira Scena 
 que se nos representa no Terreno Lusitano ; hum 
 Campo de Batalha, continuada ja com os Fenicios, 
 ja com os Carthaginezes ; que depois de disputarem 
 
364 PORTUGUESE 
 
 por largo tempo com estes Barbaros a sorte das 
 armas, os deixao ainda por domar aos Romanos 
 quando lhes cedem a conquista de Mr.ndo. Mas 
 ao justo motivo da defeza propria succedem depois 
 outros, que facilmente poem as armas na ma5 a 
 huns homens, a quern a falta do commercio, e de 
 artes quasi nao deixa outro meio de enriquecer, que 
 a pilhagem ; nome com que muitas das suas guerras 
 sao infamadas pelos Povos mais polidos que elles. 
 E o mesmo habito de peleijar lhes vai alimentando 
 hum natural feroz, que ja os nao deixa accommodar 
 com o socego da paz, e que os faz buscar inimigos 
 dentro emcaza, quando lhes faltao os de fora. 
 
 Estes vicios, e virtudes de guerra, he" o que de 
 principio nelles distinguem os Romanos, na5 os 
 vendo senao armados no campo ; e de que nao po- 
 dem deixar de dar testemunho estes mesmos vai- 
 dosos desprezadores de tudo o que nao he Romano. 
 Mas em fim a medida que se lhes chegao mais 
 perto, e se envolvem com elles, la vao divisando 
 por entre alguns claros, que as armas deixao, a 
 forma do seu governo interior. 
 
 Vem que este Terreno, que designao pelo nome 
 de Lusitania, he habitado de Povos differentes 
 independentes huns dos outros, e governados cada 
 hum por suas Leis, costumes particulates ; leis 
 raras, e costumes singelos, ainda com a marca da 
 Natureza nao contrafeita. 
 
 Como a seguranca propria he quern so forma 
 estes corpos, nao largao da liberdade que receberao 
 da natureza, mais que o puramente preciso para 
 conservar essa mesma seguranca. A guerra a que 
 sao dados he que os obriga a criar hum Superior, 
 a que jurao fidelidade ; mas .conseguida a paz, 
 expira o governo do General, e a obediencia (Jos 
 Soldados. 
 
 Se ha que estabeiecer de novo para o bem com- 
 niniTi do Sociedade, servem-se do meio usado das 
 
EXTRACTS. 365 
 
 puras Democracias, Assembleas geraes, em que 
 cada pessoa tern o arbitrio de appvovar, ou rejeitar 
 o que se propoem : e ainda nesta accao respira o ar 
 militar, em que sao criados ; hum bater da espada 
 no broquel he o signal de approvacao ; hum susurro 
 inquieto o de desapprovar. 
 
 A' simplicidade da Legislacao segue a das 
 penas ; sao os reos do crime capital apedrejados, e 
 para que o horror do crime se extenda alem ainda 
 do castigo, todo o que passa depois da execucao, 
 he obrigado a lancar alguma pedra sobre o cadaver 
 do justic^ado. 
 
 Nao desmente da parte Legislativa, a do Com«- 
 mercio interior ainda pouco sujeito a fraudes ; nao 
 os move a contratar a sede insaciavel do ouro, que 
 mal conhecem : as mutuas necessidades, a que so 
 procurao soccorrer, os ensina a trocar entre si as 
 cousas precisas a vida. Estas Ihes dictao tambem 
 o que devem conceder ao corpo ; comeres, e bebi- 
 das simples, quaes a Natureza as produsia : vesti- 
 dos sem mais estudo que o do fim para que os usao ; 
 cama sem regalo, nem despeza ; emfim a tudo o 
 preciso para a conservacao se accocle com o menos 
 apparato que pode ser. 
 
 A esta sobriedade bem propria de si para clar a 
 saude, e vigor do corpo, ajuntao o trabalho aturado ; 
 os homens o da guerra quasi continua, e nos inter- 
 vallos deiia o de exercicios semelhantes a guerra ; 
 as mulheres o da cultura dos campos, e de todo o 
 trato domestico, que com discreta economia Ihes he 
 cedido pelos homens occupados com as armas. E 
 se faz memoria dos seus bailes, e cantares, nao sao 
 tanto fructo do ocio, como do innocente prazer da 
 vida social. 
 
 Deste modo. sobrio, e trabalhado de vida era 
 consequencia a raridade de doencas : para alguma, 
 que accaso haja, nao he venal a cura, nem o reme- 
 dio, nao se teixdo alguem por desobrigado de con- 
 
366 PORTUGUESE 
 
 correr para hum officio de rigorosa humanidade ; 
 he o enfermo exposto em publico ; e os que tern 
 sido feridos do mesmo mal ensinao os remedios 
 com que conseguirao a saude. 
 
 Nos que habitavao as vizinhanc^s do Mrnho, 
 como erao os Gronios, ou Gravios, os Amphilocios, 
 e outros, se vem assaz retratados os costumes dos 
 Gregos, de quern os Antigos querem que elles 
 descendao : Jogos, e certames publicos, cazamen- 
 tos, arte de augurar tudo h6 de Gregos. Idolatras 
 como seus Maiores, nada conservaoda Religiao pura 
 que a Razao lhes mostrara, mais que o reconheci- 
 mento de que ha hum. Ente maior que elles, a 
 que devem dar culto : porem estragado este natural 
 sentimento pela corrupcao do corai^ao, imaginao 
 Divindades indignas, a que honrao com hum culto 
 igualmente indigno. Se querem dar-lhes gracas 
 pello feliz successo de huma batalha, as maos 
 direitas doz prizioneiros sao o triste trof£o que lhes 
 levantao. Se antes de qualquer acgao procura5 saber 
 o seu bom ou mao exito, dentro as entranhas de 
 hum inimigo he que vao buscar este fatal segredo : 
 se querem fazer religioso hum juramento, he pre- 
 ciso que as entranhas quentes de hum horaem, e de 
 hum cavallo lhes sirvao de banho, em que depois 
 de mettidas as maos, as poem sobre o altar, junto 
 ao qual se deve fazer esta ridicula ceremonia. Em- 
 fim he sempre sangue o que applaca huns Deoses, 
 que estes Idolatras guerreiros formavao a sua seme- 
 lhanca. 
 
 Estes sao os poucos vestigios, e quasi apagados, 
 que se encontrao dos costumes domesticos dos Lusi- 
 tanos, que de ordinario so se viao no campo de ba- 
 talha, detendo, ou fazendo retroceder os passos aos 
 Conquistadores do mundo. Mal o poderacrer quern 
 mede a forca de hum Estado pelo fausto de seus 
 habitadores, pela magnificencia de suas obras, e por 
 todo o explendor que encanta os sentidos ; quern 
 
EXTRACTS. 367 
 
 nao avalia quanto pode hum Povo, em que todos os 
 individuos sao aptos para a defesada Patria, em que 
 ha tantos Soldados como homens endurecidos todos 
 no trabalho, e todos animados do amor daliberdade. 
 
 Hum Povo, como este, foi o que sem arte, e sem 
 disciplina, em tendo na frente hum homem que o 
 soubesse mandar, escarneu por muitas vezes das 
 tropas mais bem reguladas, e deu muitos dias de 
 magoa, e de deslustre aos soberbos Romanos. Viri- 
 ato, Sertorio, e ainda outros de menos nome forao 
 instrumentos da gloria Lusitana, que sobrepujando 
 a emulacao flcou eternizada nos escritos de seus 
 mesmos inimigos, e nos marmores que o tempo 
 consumidor nao acabou de gastar. 
 
 Por mais de Seculo e meio andarao os Romanos 
 na porfiada lida de subjugar este ultimo pedaco da 
 Hespanha que ja contao toda por huma porcao certa 
 dos seus dominios: todos os annos lhe nomeao Go- 
 vernador : mas por mais que tentem mandar Pretor 
 como para Provincia pacifica, a cada passo se vem 
 obrigados a lhe mandar Consul armado ; depois de 
 terp-i separado o seu Governo do de quasi todo o 
 estoda Hespanha. Esedequandoem quandoalgum 
 destes Generaes consegue a gloria de a pacificar, e 
 sujeitar as Leis Romanas, pouco tempo lhe dura 
 verde o louro ; na sua mesma cabeca lhe murcha, 
 ou ao mais tarde na de seu successor : ate* que a 
 longa experiencia os desengana, que he preciso mu- 
 dar de systema ; e que so costumando primeiro os 
 Lusitanos a se sujeitar como amigos, he que os po- 
 derao insensivelmente ir passando a obedecer como 
 Vassalos. 
 
 Sobre a Poena Bucolica dos Poetas Portuguezes. Por 
 Joaquim de Foyos. Extrahido das Memorias de Littera- 
 tura da Academia de Lisboa, 
 
 Assxm como entre asduas especies de oracio, por 
 
368 PORTUGUESE 
 
 que o homem tanto excede aos outros animaes, se 
 cultivou primeiro o Verso, assim de todas as sortes 
 de Poesias parece ter sido primeira a Bucolica. 
 Ainda que o genero humano nao nasceo da terra, e 
 dos duros troncos das arvores, como iniaginarao 
 muitos Poetas, e parece que chegarao a crer alguns 
 Filosofos; com tuclo depois do diluvio, espalhados 
 os h omens por toda a face da terra, e perdidos pouco 
 a pouco os conhecimentos que berdaraodeseusma- 
 iores,esoconservavao na Sociedade, he summamente 
 provavel, que huma grande parte delles viesse succes- 
 sivamente a passar por estes tres generos de vida : 
 Selvagem, Pastoral, Agricola. Os muitos Povos, que 
 ainda hoje habitao, e se achao na primeira, ou se- 
 gunda destas vidas, confirmao a verdade desta con- 
 jectura. Mas o homem, vivendo huma vida silvestre 
 nos bosques, separado de toda a Sociedade, e sus- 
 tentando-se unicamente de caca, e dos fructos espon- 
 taneos da terra, nem se acha em circumstancias de 
 adiantar os seus conhecimentos, nem tern tempo para 
 cultivallos, occupado, e attento todo em buscar 
 o necessario fysico, que nao pode achar sem muita 
 difficuldade, e trabalho. E ainda que aconteca, que 
 por vezes Ihe sobre algum espaco livre destas con- 
 tin uas fadigas, satisfeitos todos os seus naturaes 
 desejos, e appetites, cancado o corpo, e entorpecidos 
 os membros, lhe entorpecerao juntamente as facul- 
 dades da alma, desacostumadas a discorrer, e a 
 exercitar-se em outros objectos, e se entregara doce- 
 mente a o somno. Nao succedera assirn aos Pas- 
 tores, que tendo gado, que com seu leite lhes sub- 
 ministre o sustento, e com suas pelles o vestido, 
 passarao huma boa parte da sua vida quietos, e des- 
 cancados, sem mais outro cuidado que o de condu- 
 zir, e defender os seus rebanhos, e manadas. Obri- 
 gados de necessidades mutuas, e attrahidos do natu- 
 ral deleite, que causa a companhia dos que tern as 
 mesmas precisoes que nos, e nellas nos podem dar 
 
EXTRACTS. 369 
 
 algum auxilio, e recebello, se chegaraS, quando o 
 permittir a abundancia dos pastos, huns para os 
 outros, cornmunicarao entre si os seuspensamentos, 
 e desejos, praticarao sobre as cousas que mais ama5, 
 e celebrarao a sua felicidade. 
 
 Huma vez juntos os homens, eemocio, contentes, 
 e sem cancaco, impossivel he, que nao inventem 
 diversos jogos, e toda a sorte de desenfado, erecrea- 
 cao para evitar o tedio de huma vida socegada, e 
 satisfeita. Entre estes divertimentos nao devia ter 
 ultimo lugar a Poesia. As faculdades do homem 
 tern huma natural disposicao para ella ; ou a Poesia 
 consista na imitacao, como querem Platao, e Aris- 
 toteles, ainda que clara e distinctamente nunca nos 
 dissessem o que esta imitajcao seja ; ou em huma 
 oracao levantada sobre as expressoes vulgares, in- 
 vert! da com figuras, e harmoniosamente modulada, 
 e compassada com o metro, e com o rhythmo. Em 
 qualquer destas cousas que facamos consistir a Poe- 
 sia, ou ern todas elias, para todas recebeo o homem 
 da Natureza huma admiravel propensao. 
 
 As nossas sensacoes sao nao somente a origem, e 
 fundamento de todas as nossas ideas, mas transfor- 
 mando-se de diversos modos, sao todos os nossos 
 juizos, e raciocinios, as nossas artes, as nossas Scien- 
 cios, e, em huma palavra, tudo quanto sabemos, e 
 conhecemos. Mas a imitacao he huma sensacao 
 facil, e para que esta disposta a conformacaS dos 
 nossos orgaos, e das nossas potencias, e por conse- 
 quencia huma sensacao, que nos achamos por ex- 
 tremo grata, e deleitavel. Deste mesmo principio 
 se segue outro, o qual aqui igualmente pertence, e 
 vera a ser, que h6 natural ao homem nao so a ora- 
 cao, e a harmonia, mas tambem essa mesma oracao 
 variada com differentes tropos, e figuras ; isto h6, 
 com diversos modos de exprimir as cousas, e os 
 pensamentos, ja com a mesma harmonia ; isto he, 
 com o rhvthmo, e ja com o metro. 
 
 2B 
 
370 PORTUGUESE 
 
 Conheeer-se-ha claramente a dependencia que 
 estesdous principios tementre si, se considerar-mos, 
 que a imitacao, (a qua] eu ja mostrei ser hum exerci- 
 cio summamente gostoso ao hornem, e hum nlodo 
 facillimo assim de elle appreuder como de commu- 
 nicar aos outros os seus sentimentos) huma vez 
 feita, e praticada com a oraca5, traz necessaria- 
 mente comsigo todas aquellas yariedades da mesma 
 oracao, que apontei acima. Daqui vem affirmarem 
 agudamente, e com razao justissima os mais celebres 
 Filosofos, que quizerao descer a discussoes deste 
 genero, que a Poesia era tao antiga, como o genero 
 humano. Certamente parece ter nascido logo com 
 as primeiras Sociedades, queellesformarao, equando 
 elles conservavao ainda muito, assim da rusticidade, 
 como da singeleza, e innocencia natural. Do que 
 parece, ou claramente provado, ou deduzido com 
 assaz probabilidade, que a Poesia nasceo, e se in- 
 ventou entre Pastores. Mas em que genero de 
 Poesia se exercitarlao estes primeiros homens ? Na5 
 sera difficil conhecello, se reflectirmos, qual seria a 
 materia que, segundo as circumstancias em que se 
 achavao, se Ihes offerecia para os seus cantos. Aris- 
 toteles foi de parecer, que dos primeiros inventores 
 os que tinhao genio elevado imitavao accoes illus- 
 tres, e feitas por person agens grandes, e pelo con- 
 trario os que tinhao engenho mais rasteiro, cantavao 
 as accoes dos homens vis, em cujo vituperio com- 
 punhaS obras ridiculas, assim como os outros se 
 exercitavao em hymnos e encomios. 
 
 Porem este erudito, e intelligente Filosofo nao 
 fala naquelle lugar da primeira origem da Poesia 
 rigorosamente, mas sim do modo com que ella, de- 
 pois de inventada, se foi dividindo em diversas es- 
 pecies ; porque suppoe tempos em que h6 ja grande 
 a disigualdade dos homens ; o que nao tern lugar 
 nas primeiras e simplicissimas sociedades de Pas- 
 tores. 
 
EXTRACTS. 371 
 
 He pois summamenteverosi mil, que estes homens 
 quizessem imitar aquellas cousas, que com mais 
 frequencia se offereciao aos seus sentidos, que satis- 
 faziao as suas necessidades, e que constituiao a bem- 
 aventuranca da sua socegada vida, e felice estado, 
 por que nellas empregavao toda a sua attencao, e 
 cuidado. Cantariao pois os seus rebanhos, os mon- 
 tes e os valles, em que os apascentavao, os rios, e 
 fontes, a que os levavao a beber ; a alva, e serena 
 madrugada, que os chamava ao trabalho ; a sesta, 
 que os convidava ao descanco ; e os rafeiros, que 
 lhes guardavao o gado. Cantariao, como era natu- 
 ral, as paixoes e affectos da sua alma ; por6m nao 
 afTectos violentos. e desesperados, que nao erao pro- 
 prios daquella vida, mas doces e suaves, e que so 
 lhes causavao aquella inquietacao, e desasocego, a 
 que se nao pudesse seguir fim algum funesto. 
 
 Como estes argumentos sao todos proprios da 
 Poesia Bucolica, segue-seligitimamente, que ellafoi 
 a primeira, que no Mundo inventarao os homens. 
 Sendo pois a Poesia Pastoral a primeira origem de 
 toda a erudicao humana, e os primeiros esforcos, 
 que fizera5 as faculdades do homem para se puli- 
 rem, e cultivarem, justamente me persuadi, que a 
 Academia instituida toda para utilidade publica, e 
 que alem de outros mais gloriosos, e louvaveis em- 
 penhos, tomou a si o de dar a conhecer os princi- 
 pios, e progressos da nossa Litteratura, havia de 
 levar em gosto que hum Socio seu tratasse dos mere- 
 cimentos dos nossos Poetas Bucolicos. Deste tra- 
 balho, Senhores r posto que maior que minhas forcas, 
 me quiz encarregar, por ser dos mais leves e faceis, 
 que ta5 illustre corpo podia eommetter a algum de 
 seus membros. 
 
 Vos tratareis verdades sublimes, por extremo re- 
 motas, e escondidas a commum comprehensao dos 
 homens ; medireis o espaco immenso dos Ceos ; 
 poreis Leis aos corpos mais vastos, mais distantes, 
 
372 PORTUGUESE 
 
 e ate mais rebelcies do Universo ; coin vossas por- 
 fiadas investigacoes, e rara sagacidade obrigareis a 
 Natureza a que vos descubra, e patentee aquillo 
 mesmo, em que ella punha maior estudo em occul- 
 tar. Assim para felieidade dos outros homens aug- 
 mentareis, e aperfeicoareis os seus conhecimentos ; 
 mas sereis mu i to particularmente felices vos, e feliz 
 a Patria, em cuja utilidade haveis de empregar os 
 vossos talentos, e todos estes trabalhos, e fadigas : 
 e ella vo lo sabera agradecer com o premio, que so 
 desejao as almas gran des, do louvor e da gloria. Eu, 
 gozando-me, e comprazendo-me do vosso alto mere- 
 cimento, de que vos quizestes me coubesse tambem 
 alguma parte, me contentarei com examinar a pro- 
 priedade, e elegancia de huma palavra ; a verdade, 
 novidade, e belleza de hum pensamento ; a inno- 
 cencia, e sa singeleza de hum Pegureiro ; e isto 
 jiropter aquae, rivum, ou quando muito, sub r avals 
 arboris altae. 
 
 Mas tornando ao meu assumpto, de que me flze- 
 rao desviar os vossos justos louvores, naosao pouco 
 relevantes, nem concorrem medianamente para a 
 instruccao, e cultura dos homens os trabalhos dos 
 Poetas. Negallo seria nao conhecer o modo, por 
 que se dilatao, e aperfeicoa5 as nossas faculdades, e 
 ignorar inteiramente a Historia dos varios progres- 
 ses do entendimento humano. A restauracao das 
 letras, com que se desterrou a ignorancia, e bar- 
 baridade, a que nos tinhao reduzido as Nacoes 
 do Norte, e as continuas irrupcoes dos Sarracenos, 
 tem as suas sementes nos Trovadores Provencaes 
 e Lombardos, que fructificando felizmente che- 
 garao a produzir os dous abalisados engenhos de 
 Dante, e Petrarca. Cultivada por estes dous gran- 
 des homens, e por alguns mais seus contemporaneos 
 a Lingua Toscana, preparou a Italia, e a sua imita- 
 9'ao a toda a Europa para hum conhecimento pro- 
 fundo da Lingua Latina, e da Grega. Com taes 
 
EXTRACTS. 373 
 
 disposicoes, e auxilios se instruirao as Nacoes 
 Europeas nas Artes, e Sciencias, e ein toda a sorte 
 de erudicao daquelles sabios Povos ; e inflammadas 
 cada vez mais no desejo de saber, rem levado muitas 
 das Artes, e Sciencias dos antigos a hum ponto 
 incrivel de perfeicao, &c. 
 
 Analyse e Combinacoesjiloscyficas sobre a Elocucao e Estylo de 
 Sa de Miranda, Ferreira, Bemardes, Caminha, e Camoes. 
 Pr. Francisco THas. 
 
 Quando entrei nesta composicao, julguei que 
 devia tomar hum ponto fixo, clonde viesse dedu- 
 zindo a sua analyse, e que o Sa de Miranda devia 
 indispensavelmente formar a epoca, donde, segundo 
 a ordem do tempo, havia de dimanar todo o seu 
 progresso, como de hum escritor, que lancou os 
 fundamentos da Poesia Portugueza. ^Ias antes que 
 entrasse nesta diligencia, vi que me era de precisa 
 necessidade fazer hum a descripcao exacta do estado 
 em que se achava a Lingua, quando o Poeta 
 Miranda appareceo, e sondar as qualidades princi- 
 pals da composicao e estylo daquelle padre da Poesia 
 Portugueza, donde passou para Ferreira, para Ber- 
 nardes, para Caminha, e ultimamente para Camoes, 
 o maior Poeta da Nacao, e o que mais enriqueceo, 
 e apurou o nosso Idioma ; discorrendo por aquelles 
 pontos, que mais me pareceraS dignos de compara- 
 cao no genero Sublime, como mais nobre, e como 
 aquelle que mais esforco pede da fantasia humana ; 
 fazendo juizo de cada hum dos Poetas da Analyse, 
 e hnalmente inclicando as origens donde nascerao as 
 expressoes, e formulas combinadas ; no que julge ter 
 satisfeito ao Assumpto, que he certamente mais 
 difficultoso do que parece. 
 
 Na execucao deste tao trabalhoso arffumento me 
 conduzi, segundo as luzes. que pude adquirir ua 
 
374 PORTUGUESE 
 
 lieao de Aristoteles, Cicero, Longino, Quintiliano, 
 e muito mais na de Locke, Condillac, Du Marsais, 
 e em especial na do sobretodos sabio Commentario, 
 que o grande Voltaire fez as Obras de Pedro Cor- 
 neille, onde se vem as regras do gosto na sua maior 
 elevacao. 
 
 Todas estas materias sao novas em Portugal, e 
 por consequencia nao tive a quern seguir : e apezar 
 dos defeitos, posso dizer, 
 
 que aqui vera's presente 
 
 Cousas, que juntas se dchao raramente. Camoes, Lus. 
 
 Introducgao. 
 
 H6 o talento da palavra a mais nobre faculdade 
 do ente racional, como instrumento, com que nao 
 so expoe as suas id6as, mas ate pinta os mais occultos 
 sentimentos do espirito com rasgos ta5 vivos, e 
 sublimes, que os faz passar aos coracoes mais izentos 
 de interesse. Aquella Filosofia inata ao coraca5 do 
 homem, que preside a todas as accoes, que mais o 
 elevao, foi quem formou os sinaes representatives 
 das suas ideas simplices, e compostas ; e quem, a 
 forca de infinitas combinacoes, Ihe fez conceber o 
 grande pensamento do transumpto mental consi- 
 gnado nas palavras por huma successao de ideas nao 
 interrompidas, cujo nexo constitue a pintura eterna 
 nao so do fysico, mas, o que he mais prodigioso, do 
 moral humano. 
 
 Aquella mesma filosofia, que dirigindo e elevando 
 o espirito humano clesde as id£as simplices ate as 
 ^mplexas, Ihe deo as primeiras nocoes da expressao 
 simples he primitiva, como mais adaptada as necessi- 
 dades do homem ; a proporcao que Ihe foi am- 
 plianclo a esCera dos seus conhecimentos, Ihe foi 
 rninistrando expressao complexa, isto he, figurada 
 com a qual pinta aos olhos, e da corpo, e vida as 
 mais sublimes abstraccoes, que pode conceber o 
 entenclimento humanp. 
 
EXTRACTS. 375 
 
 Deste immenso aggregado de ideas simplices, e 
 compostas, como consequencia natural, procedeo a 
 vivacidade da expressao, e a riqueza das Linguas, 
 que se elevarao ao mais distincto grao de perfeicao, 
 segundo o numero de acontecimentos, e revolucoes 
 notaveis ; e muito mais segundo o trato frequente 
 com as nacoes estranhas, e communicaqao social dos 
 povos entre si ; por isso mesmo que das grandes 
 crizes procede a effervescencia das paixoes, que 
 pondo em movimento, e actividade a massa das 
 ideas, gera novos pensamentos, e nova elocu^ao. 
 
 Daqui se infere, que os melhores de todos os 
 idiomas devem forcosamente ser os daquelles povos 
 que mais revolucoes experimentarao, e que melhcv 
 eonhecerao as ieis da Sociedade. Ve-se pois pello 
 que nos ensina a historia, que as Nacoes mais puli- 
 das e sabias, tanto na linguagem, como nos cos- 
 tumes, forao quasi sempre as que situadas junto ao 
 mar eonhecerao mais cedo a necessidade da com- 
 municacao dos povos estranhos, por meio do Com- 
 mercio ; ou aquellas, cujos acontecimentos Ihes 
 derao lugar distincto nos anna.es do genero hu- 
 mano. 
 
 Por isso vemos, que as Linguas geraes do Malabar, 
 Coromandel, e da China regioes maritimas, assim 
 como tambem a Arabe, sao as mais bellas, e antigas 
 de todas as Linguas da Asia. Os Povos da Grecia, 
 que gozando do mais formoso espectaculo da Na- 
 tureza, experimentarao tantas, e tao notaveis revo- 
 lucoes, inventarao o mais significative), e harmonico 
 de todos os Idiomas, onde se achao consignados os 
 mais insignes monumentos do g6nio, e donde pro- 
 cedeo a magestade da Lingua dos Ronianos, nao 
 mais famosos pelas suas conquistas, que pelos es- 
 criptos immortaes, com que illustrarao os Seculos. 
 O mesmo se deve considerar dos Italianos, Fran- 
 cezes, Hespanhoes, e Inglezes, cujos Idiomas tendo 
 erigem na Lingua Latina, se tern elevado ao mais 
 
376 PORTUGUESE 
 
 alto ponto de perfeicao possivel, e nos quaes exis- 
 tem monumentos para quern todo o louvor he dimi- 
 nuto. 
 
 Mas este concurso de circunstancias parece, que 
 ainda nao foi a causa sufficiente da perfeicao das 
 Linguas : ainda ali se diviza hum vacuo, que pre- 
 ciza ser occupado. Aqui vem a Poesia com toda a 
 sua pompa e magestade, desatando or voos, pulindo 
 c aperfeicoando os Idiomas, dando a tudo alma, 
 e vida, ja elevando-se aos maiores assumptos nos 
 louvores do Ente Supremo, e no Panegyrico dos 
 grandes homens, persuadindo a imitacao das accoes 
 nobres, e dignas dos mais distinctos applausos. Ella 
 lhe abre os seus thesouros : ella os enriquece ; ella lhes 
 da forca, elegancia, e harmonia, sem o que seriao huns 
 cadaveres seccos, e inanimados. Sem a Poesia, nada 
 seriao talvez os Gregos, e os Romanos, que tanto 
 encherao o mundo com a fama das suas victorias, v 
 com a grandeza das suas ac9oes, e muito mais com 
 a perfei9ao, com que cultivarao todas as Artes de 
 genio, de que tantos, e tao admiraveis testemunhos 
 nos deixarao principalmente nos seus escritos, A 
 Poesia pois, que tenclo entre os antigos hum carac- 
 ter de harmonia muito diverso da Poesia moderna, 
 veio pella ignorancia dos Seculos a tal decadencia, 
 que pouco faltou par ficar inteiramente ignorada. 
 
 Das reliquias da Lingua Latina, e Grega se 
 formarao os Idiomas modernos, com di versa Syn- 
 taxe ; e com elles resuscitarao, ou por melhor dizer, 
 formarao os Provencaes huma Poesia toda nova na 
 disposicao das cesuras, e combinacoes harmonicas. 
 
 Os Italianos restauradores de quasi todas as 
 Artes, forao os primeiros, que tratarao a Poesia com 
 dignidade, aperfeicoando os metros, e harmonias, que 
 os mesmos Provencaes, e Sicilianos tinhao inventado; 
 e tanto se applicarao a ella, que ja no decimo quarto 
 Seculo era famoso Poeta o celebre Dante, quern 
 fixou todas as accentuacoes harmonicas do hende- 
 
EXTRACTS. 377 
 
 casyllabo, que ficou sendo o mais necessario metro 
 da Poesia Italiana, Castelhana, e Portugueza. 
 
 Entraraoos Mouros em Hespanha, e com elles a 
 Poesia : porem o desassocego da guerra nao deo 
 lugar aos antigos possuidores desta Regiao, tao 
 infestada de Nacoes estranhas, a cultivar a Poesia 
 seriamente, nem a pulir os seus Idiomas tao cedo 
 como os Italianos. Da longa dominacao, que os 
 Romanos tiverao em Hespanha se havia nellaintro- 
 duzido o uzo da Lingua Latina, que veio a ser vul- 
 gar : della, e de varios dialectos barbaros, se forma- 
 rao os dous mais bellos, e sonoros Idiomas de Hes- 
 panha, e talves da Europa, o Castelhano. e o Por- 
 tuguez. 
 
 Estas duas Linguas se forao igualmente aper- 
 feicoando, de sorte que a hum mesmo tempo che- 
 garao ao seu auge. Com tudo, sendo a Nacao 
 Portugueza mais moderna, e occupando muito menos 
 espaeo de terreno, que a Castelhana, veio mais cedo 
 a produzir monumentos, que assaz distinguira5, e 
 acreditarao o seu Idioma. As historias de Joao de 
 Barros dadas a luz nomeio do Seculo decimo sexto, 
 e traduzidas em todas as Linguas cultas da Europa, 
 fizerao mostrar ao Mundo litterario, que a Lingua 
 Portugueza era a mais filha da - Latina. Hum 
 numero sufficiente de Escritores, que logo depois 
 vierao, acabarao de determinar o genio da Lingua, 
 cujo caracter he elegancia, e perspicuidade. Sendo 
 pois a Lingua Portugueza desde a sua origem mui 
 doce e sonora, resultado natural da quantidade 
 proporcionada das suas vogaes e consoantes, das 
 quaes as primeiras, nao sao tao frequentes e con- 
 junctas, que enfraquegao a harmonia, e facao lan- 
 guida e pouco notacla, como se ve na Lingua Italiana ; 
 nem as segundas com nimia frequencia se atro- 
 pellao, e produzem sons rudes e asperos, como nas 
 Linguas do Norte. Todas estas felices disposicoes, 
 al^m do genio, convid&vao a Nacdo a cultura da 
 
378 PORTUGUESE 
 
 Poesia para que sempre teve natural inclinacao. 
 Deixemos a miuda investigacao destas causas, a 
 qual sera mais propria de quern tentar escrever a 
 historia de Lingua. Deixemos tambem as Poesias 
 anteriores ao Seculo de quinhentos, muitas das 
 quaes existem em algumas Bibliothecas antigas, 
 como as d' El Rei D. Diniz, na do Convento da 
 Ordem de Christo em Thomar, e outras andao em- 
 pregadas no celebre Cancioneiro de Resende, col- 
 leccao preciosa, dondese podem extrabir as maiores 
 luzes a respeito da Natureza, e origem da nossa 
 Poesia : e comecando a tratar do auge a que esta 
 elevou a Lingua Portugueza; as gracas e numero 
 que lhe communicou ; principiaremos a discorrer 
 de huma 6poca mais vizinha a nos, e estaseja deter- 
 minada pelo N fam6so Sa de Miranda. 
 
 Veja-mos pois os assumptos, que este Poeta tra- 
 tou, a qualidade de sua imitacao em geral, o uzo 
 que fez do hendecasyllabo, ate ao sen tempo pouco 
 ou nada conhecido em Portugal, e em toda a Hes- 
 panha ; como tratou, como aperfeicoou o Soneto, 
 do qual se deve reputar inventor entre nos, novas 
 gracas que accrescentou a nossa Lingua, e como 
 finalmente preparou aos Poetas, que Ibe succederao, 
 hum novo caminho para se elevarem at6 a immortal 
 Lusiada. 
 
 Mas antes que entremos neste exame, vejamos 
 primeiro o estado em que o Sa de Miranda, achou o 
 Idioma. 
 
 A Nacao Portugueza, que ate ao fim do reinado 
 de D. Fernando jazia na ignorancia, occupada uni- 
 camente da cultura das suas terras, quanto lhe era 
 preciso para o consumo interior do Reino, e para 
 entreter huma ligeira sombra de commercio ex- 
 terior, continuamente vexado pella tyrannia Ara- 
 bica, que infestando os mares, eraeterno obstaculo a 
 navega^ao ; vivendo como desterrada na solida5 dos 
 campos, sem communicacao, nem policia, fallava 
 
EXTRACTS. 379 
 
 huma linguagem informe, e grosseira, chea de sons 
 rudes, que as Linguas barbaras lhe tinhao commu- 
 nicado ; e a pezar de ter huma origem tao pura, 
 como a Lingua Latina, donde procedia, so conser- 
 vava alguma energfa natural nascida das significa- 
 nces primitivas das suas vozes, que, alem de serem 
 maculadas de infinitas anomalias, e dissonancias, 
 erao privadas de translacoes, que da5 forea e eleva- 
 cao a os Idiomas. Chea pois de construcc5es erro- 
 neas, de diphtongos asperos, e desinencias rudes, 
 pobre de termos, sem idea do nexo, que subsiste 
 nas partieulas, sem syntaxe, sem harmonia o seu 
 periodo incerto, e desunido vacillara sem caracter. 
 
 A grande revolucao de D. Joao I. fazendo a mais 
 viva commocao no genio dos Portuguezes, com ella 
 lhe vi^rao novos estimulos de gloria, que eleva o 
 espirito ; novas emprezas, novos pensamentos, nova 
 forca, nova energia as suas enuneiacoes ; novos 
 objectos do discurso, e nova linguagem. Hum 
 Latim barbaro ate alii organ o das Leis, e instru- 
 mentos publicos, cessou de ser a linguagem do 
 Foro. 
 
 Da conquista cle Ceuta nasceo a idea, a grande 
 idea dos descubri mentos, que mostrando a necessi- 
 dade de cultivar as Mathematicas, e a Astronomia, 
 taes quaes existiao naquelles tempos obscuros, 
 alargou a esfera da Mechanica, que fazendo novas 
 investigacoes sobreaaccao, dos ventos, e resistencia 
 das agoas, extrahindo a somraa da combinaeao dos 
 movimentos resultantes da accao e reaccao destes 
 dous Elementos, alcangou mais perfeito conheci- 
 mento das leis dos liquidos, e do equilibrio, e aper- 
 feieoou finalmente a Arte de navegar. Novos 
 Astros, novos mares e costas, novas ilhas, novos 
 mundos enchem de admiracao todo o universo. 
 
380 PORTUGUESE 
 
 EXTRACTOS POETICOS, 
 
 From the third Canto of the Lasiad of Camoes. 
 
 ESTA'VAS linda Inez posta em sossego, 
 De teus annos colhendo o doce fruto, 
 Naquelle engano da alma, 16do, e cego, 
 Que a fortuna nao deixa durar muito : 
 Nos saudosos campos do Mondego, 
 De teus formosos olhos nunca enxuto, 
 Aos montes ensinando, e as ervfnhas. 
 O norne, que no peito escrito tinhas. 
 
 Do teu principe alii te respondiao 
 
 As lembran^as, que na alma lhe moravao, 
 Que sempre ante seus olhos te traziao : 
 Quando dos teus formosos se apartavao : 
 De noite em doces sonhos, que mentiao, 
 De dia em pensamentos, que voavao : 
 E quanto em fim cuidava, e quanto via, 
 E'rao tudo memorias de alegria. 
 
 D'outras bellas senhoras, e princezas, 
 Os dezejados talamos engeita, 
 Que tudo em fim, tu puro amor desprezas, 
 Quando hum gesto, suave te sug^ita : 
 Vendo estas namoradas estranh^zas, 
 O velho pay sesudo, que respeita, 
 O murmurar do povo e a fantasia, 
 Do filho, que casarse nao queria. 
 
 Tirar Inez ao mundo determina, 
 Por lhe tirar o filho, que tern preso, 
 Crendo co'sangue so da morte indina, 
 Matar do firme amor o fogo aceso : 
 Que furor consentio, que a espada fina, 
 Que pode sustentar o grande peso 
 
EXTRACTS. 381 
 
 Do furor; Mauro, fosse levantada, 
 Contra huma fraca dama delicada ? 
 
 Traziao-na os horriferos algozes 
 Ante o Rey, ja movido a piedade, 
 Mas o povo com falsas, e ferozes 
 Razoens, a morte crua o persuade. 
 Ella com tristes e piedosas vozes, 
 Sahidas so de magoa e saudade 
 Do seu Principe e filhos que deixava, 
 Que mais que a propria morte a magoava. 
 
 Para o ceo cristalino levantando, 
 Com lagrimas os olhos piedosos, 
 Os olhos, porque as maos lhe estava atando 
 Hum dos duros ministros rigorosos : 
 E depois nos meninos atentando, 
 Que ta5 queridos tin ha, e tao mimosos, 
 Cuja orfandade como mai temia, 
 Para o avo cruel assim dizia. 
 
 Se ja nas brutas feras, cuja mente 
 Natura fez cruel de nascimento ; 
 E nas aves agrestes, que somente 
 Nas rapinas aerias tern o intento, 
 Compequenas criancas vio a gente, 
 Terem tao piedoso sentimento, 
 Como coa may de Nino ja mostrarao, 
 E cos Irmaos, que Roma edificarao : 
 
 O'tu que tens de humano o gesto, e o peito, 
 Se de humano he matar huma donzella 
 Fraca, e sem forca so por ter sugeito 
 O coracao, a quern soube venc^lla, 
 A estas criancinhas tern respeito 
 Pois o nao tens a morte escura della, 
 Movate a piedade sua, e minha, 
 Pois te nao move a culpa, que nao tlnha. 
 
 E se vencendo a Maura resistencia, 
 A morte sabes dar com fogo e ferro ? 
 
382 PORTUGUESE 
 
 Sabe tambem dar vida com clemencia, 
 A quern para perdella nao fez erro. 
 Mas se te assi merece esta innocencia, 
 P6e-me perpetuo e misero desterro, 
 Na Scythia fria, ou la na Libia ardente, 
 Onde em lagrimas viva eternamente. 
 
 P6e-me onde se use toda a feridade, 
 Entre leoens, e tigres ; e verei 
 Se nelles achar posso a piedade, 
 Que entre peitos humanos nao achei ; 
 Alii co' amor intrinseco, e vontade, 
 Naquelle por quern morro, criarei 
 Estas reliquias suas, que aqui viste, 
 Que refrigerio sejao da mai triste. ' 
 
 Queria perdoar-lhe o rey benino, 
 Movido das palavras, que o magoao, 
 Mas o pertinaz povo, e seu destino, 
 (Que desta sorte o quiz) lhe na5 perdoao 
 Arrancao das espadas de aeo fino, 
 Os que por bom tal feito alii pregoaS : 
 Contra huma dama, 6 peitos carniceiros, 
 Ferozes vos mostraes, e cavalleiros ? 
 
 Qual contra a linda moca Policena, 
 Consolacao extrema da may velha, 
 Porque a sombra de Achiles a condena, 
 C o ferro o duro Pirro se aparelha : 
 Mas ella os olhos, com que o ar serena 
 (Bern como paciente, e mansa ovelha) 
 Na misera may postos, que endoudece, 
 Ao duro sacrificio se ofFerece : 
 
 Taes contra Inez os brutos matadores, 
 No colo de alabastro, que sostinha 
 As obras, co que amor matou de amores 
 A'quelle, que depois a fez ralnha : 
 As espadas banhando, e as brancas flores, 
 \Que ella dos olhos seus regadas tinha, 
 
EXTRACTS. 383 
 
 Se incarnicavao fervidos, e irosos, 
 No futuro castigo nao cuidosos. 
 
 Bern pucleras, 6 sol, da vista destes, 
 Teus rayos apartar aquelle dia, 
 Como da seva mesa de Thyestes 
 Quando os filhos por mao de Atreu comia : 
 Vos 6 concavos valles que pud6stes, 
 A voz extrema ouvir da boca fria, 
 O nome do seu Pedro, que lhe ouvistes, 
 Por muito grande espaco repetistes. 
 
 Assi como a bonina, que cortada 
 Antes de tempo foi, Candida e bella, 
 S^ndo das maos lascivas mal tratada, 
 Da menina, que a trouxe na capella, 
 O cheiro traz perdido, e a cor murchada, 
 Tal esta morta a pallida donz611a, 
 S6cas do rosto as rosas, e perdida 
 A branca, e viva cor, co' a doce vida. 
 
 As filhas do Mondego a morte escura, 
 Longo tempo chorando memorarao, 
 E por memoria eterna em fonte pura, 
 As lagrimas choradas transfbrmarao, 
 O nome lhe puzerao, que inda dura, 
 Dos amores de Inez, que alii passarao ; 
 Vede, que fresca fonte rega as flores, 
 Que lagrimas' sao agoa, e o nome amores. 
 
 From the fifth Canto of the same. 
 
 Porem ja cincos soes ^rao passados, 
 Que dalli nos partiramos, cortando 
 Os mares nunca de outrem navegados, 
 Prosperamente os ventos assoprando ; 
 Quando huma noite estando descuidados, 
 Na cortadora proa vigiando, 
 
384 PORTUGUESE 
 
 Huma nuvem que os ares escurece, 
 Sobre nossas cab£cas apparece. 
 Tam temerosa vinha, e carregada, 
 
 Que poz nos coracoens hum grande rnedo, 
 Bramindo o negro mar de ldnge brada, 
 Como se desse em vao n'algum rochedo : 
 O' potestade, disse, sublimada, 
 Que ameaco divino, ou que segredo, 
 Este clima, e este mar nos apresenta, 
 Que mor cousa parece, que tormenta ? 
 
 Na5 acabava, quando huma figura, 
 Se nos mostra no ar, robusta, e valida, 
 De disforme, e grandissima estatura, 
 O rosto carregado, a barba esquallida : 
 Os olhos, encovados, e a postura 
 Medonha, e ma, e a cor terrena, e pallida, 
 O boca negra, os dentes amarellos. 
 
 Tam grande era de membros, que bem posso 
 Certificarte, que este era o segundo, 
 De Rhodes estranhissimo Colosso, 
 Que hum dos sete milagres foi do mundo : 
 Co' hum torn de voz nos fallahorrendoe grosso, 
 Que pareceo sahir do mar profundo, 
 Arrepiaose as carnes, e o cabello, 
 A mi, e a todos, so de ouvilo, e velo. 
 
 E disse, o'gente ousada mais que quantas 
 No mundo cometterao grandes cousas ; 
 Tu, que por guerras cruas, taes, e tantas, 
 E por trabalhos vaos nunca repousas, 
 Pois vedados terminos quebrantas, 
 E nave^ar meus longos mares ousas, 
 Que eu tan to tempo ha que guardo, e ten no 
 Nunca arados de estranho ou proprio lenho ; 
 
 Pois vens ver os segredos escondidos 
 Da natureza, e do humido elemento, 
 A nenhum grande huma.no concedidos 
 De nobre ou de immortal merecimento : 
 
EXTRACTS. 385 
 
 Ouve os damnos de mi, que apercebidos 
 Estao a teu sobejo atrevimento, 
 Por todo o largo mar, e pela terra, 
 Que inda has-de subjugar com dura gu6rra. 
 
 Sabe que quantas naos esta viagem, 
 Que tu fazes, fizerem de atrevidas, 
 Inimiga terao esta paragem 
 Com ventos, e tormentas desmedidas. 
 E da primeira armada, que passagem 
 Fize> por estas ondas insoffridas, 
 Eu farei de improviso tal castigo, 
 Que seja mor o damno que o perigo. 
 
 Aqui esp6ro tomar, se na5 me engano, 
 De quem me descubrio alta vinganca ; 
 E nao se acabara so nisto o damno 
 De vossa pertinace confianca ; 
 Antes em vossas n&os vereis cada anno 
 (Se h6 verdade o que meu juizo alcanca) 
 Naufragios, perdicoes de toda sorte, 
 Que o menor mal de todos seja a morte. 
 
 E do primeiro illustre que a ventura 
 Com fama alta fizer tocar os Ceos, 
 Serei eterna e nova sepultura, 
 Por juizos incognitos de Deos : 
 Aqui pora da Turca armada dura 
 Os soberbos e prosperos tropheos 
 Comigo de seus damnos o ameaca 
 A destruida Quiloa, com Mombaca, 
 
 Outro tambem vira de honrada fama, 
 Liberal, Cavalleiro, e namorado, 
 E comsigo trara a formosa Dama, 
 Que Amor por gram merce lhe tera dado : 
 Triste ventura e negro fado os chama 
 Neste terreno meu, que duro, e irado, 
 2C 
 
3SG PORTUGUESE 
 
 Os deixara de hum cru naufragio vivos, 
 Para verem trabalhos excessivos. 
 
 Verao morrer com tome os filhos charos, 
 Em tanto amor gerados, e nascidos : 
 VeraS os Cafres asperos, e avaros, 
 Tirar a linda Dama os seus vestidos : 
 Os crystallinos membros, e preclaros, 
 A* calma, ao frio, ao ar verao despidos ; 
 Despois de ter pizado longamente 
 Co* os delicados pes a area ardente. 
 
 E veraS mais os olhos que escaparem 
 De tanto mal, de tanta desventura, 
 Os dous amantes miseros ficarem 
 Na f6rvida e implacabil espessura. 
 Alii, despois que as pedras abrandarem 
 Com lagrimas de dor, de magoa pura, 
 Abracados, as almas soltarao 
 Da formosa e miserrima prisa5. 
 
 Mais hia por diante o monstro horrendo 
 Dizendo nossos fados, quando akado 
 Lhe dice eu : quern es tu que esse estupendo 
 Corpo, certo me tern maravilhado ? 
 A boca, e os olhos negros retorcendo, 
 E dando hum espantoso e grande brado, 
 Me respondeo com vos pesada e amara, 
 Como quern da pergunta lhe pezara : 
 
 Eu sou aquelle occulto e grande Cabo 
 
 A quern chamais vos outros Tcrmentorio ; 
 Que nunca a Ptolemeo, Pomponio, Estrabo, 
 Plinio, e quantos passarao fui notorio. 
 Aqui toda a Africana costa acabo 
 Neste meu nunca visto Promontorio, 
 Que para o Polo Antarctico se estend 
 A quern vossa ousadia tanto offende. 
 
EXTRACTS. 387 
 
 Fui dos filhos asperrimos da Terra, 
 Qual Encelado, Egeo, e o Centimano ; 
 Chameime Adamastor, e fui na guerra 
 Contra o que vibra os raios de Vulcano : 
 Nao que puzesse serra sobre serra, 
 Mas conquistando as ondas do Occeano 
 Fui Capitao do mar, por onde andava 
 A armada de Neptuno, que eu buscava. 
 
 Amores da alta Esposa de Peleo 
 
 Me fizeram tomar tamanha empreza, 
 
 Todas as Deosas desprezei do C6o, 
 
 So por amar das aguas a Princeza : 
 
 Hum dia a vi, co' as filhas de Nereo, 
 
 Sahir nua na praia ; e logo pr&za 
 
 A vontade senti, de tall maneira 
 
 Que inda nao sinto cousa que mais queira. 
 
 Como fosse impossivel alcancalla 
 Pela grand6za fea de meu g^sto, 
 Determinei por armas de tomalla, 
 E a Doris este caso manifesto : 
 De m&do a Deosa entao por mi lhe falla ; 
 Mas ella co* hum formoso riso honesto 
 Respondeo : Qual sera o amor bastante 
 De Nympha que sustente o de hum Gigante ? 
 
 Com tudo, por livrarmos o Oceano : 
 De tanta guerra, eu buscarei maneira, 
 Com que com minha honra escuse o damno : 
 Tal resposta me torna a mensageira. 
 Eu que cahir nao pude neste engano 
 (Que h6 grande dos amantes a cegueira) 
 Encheram-me com grandes abond^ncas 
 O peito de dezejos, e esperancas. 
 
 Ja nescio, ja da guerra desistindo, 
 Huma noite de Doris promettida, 
 Me appar^ce de longe o g^sto lindo, 
 Da branca Thetis, unicadespida : 
 
388 PORTUGUESE 
 
 Como doudo corrf, ne longe abrindo 
 Os bracos, para aquella que era vida 
 Deste corpo ; e comeco os olhos bellos 
 A Ihe beijar, as faces, e os cabellos. 
 
 Oh que nao sei de nojo como o conte ! 
 Que crendo ter nos bracos quetn amava, 
 Abracado me achei co' hum duro m6nte 
 De aspero mato, e de espessura brava : 
 Estando co' hum penedo fronte afronte, 
 Que eu pelo roslo angelico apertava, 
 Nao fiquei homem nao, mas mudo, e quedo, 
 E junto de hum pen6do outro penedo. 
 
 O' Nympha a mais formosa do Oce&no : 
 Ja que minha presenca nao te agrada, 
 Que te custava ter-me neste engano, 
 Ou fosse monte, nuvem, sonho, ou nada ? 
 De aqui me parto irado, e quasi insano, 
 Da magoa, e Ha deshonra alii passada, 
 A buscar outro mundo, onde nao visse 
 Quern de meu pranto, e de meu mal se risse. 
 
 Erao ja neste tempo meus irmaos 
 
 Vencidos, e em miseria extrema postos ; 
 E, por mais segurar-se os Deoses vaos, 
 Aguns a varios montes sotopostos : 
 E como contra o Ceo nao valem maos, 
 Eu que chorando andava meus desgostos 
 Comecei a sentir do fado imigo, 
 Por meus atrevimentos, o castigo. 
 
 Converte-se-me a came em terra dura, 
 Em penedos os ossos se flzeram : 
 Estes m£mbros que ves, e esta figura, 
 Por estas longas aguas se estenderam : 
 Emfim minha grandissima estatura 
 Neste remoto cabo converteram 
 Os Deoses ; e por mais dobradas magoas, 
 Me anda Thetis cercando destas agoas. 
 
 
EXTRACTS. 389 
 
 Assim contava, e co* hum medonho choro, 
 Subito dante os olhos se apartdu ; 
 Desfez-se a nuvem negra, e co' hum sonoro 
 Bramido muito longe o mar soou. 
 Eu, levantando as maos ao sancto c6ro 
 Dos Anjos, que ta5 longe nos guiou, 
 A Deos pedi, que removesse os duros 
 Casos que Adamastor, contou futuros. 
 
 From the second Canto of the same. 
 
 Ouvio-lhe 6stas palavras piedosas 
 A formosa Dione, e commovlda, 
 De entre as Nymphas se vai, que saudosas 
 Ficarao desta subita partida. 
 Ja pen^tra as estrellas luminosas ; 
 Ja na terceira Esfera recebida 
 Avante passa ; e la no sexto C^o 
 Para onde estava o Padre se moveo. 
 
 E como hia afFrontada do caminho, 
 Tao formosa no g6sto se mostrava, 
 Que as estreilas, o C6o, e o ar vizinho 
 E tudo quanto a via namorava. 
 Dos olhos onde faz seu filho o ninho 
 Huns espiritos vivos inspirava, 
 Com que os Polos gelados accendfa, 
 E tornava de fogo a Esf6ra fria. 
 
 E por mais namorar o Soberano 
 
 Padre, de quern foi sempre amada, e chara, 
 Se lhe apresenta assi como ao Troiano 
 Na selva Idea j4 se apresentara. 
 Se a vfra o cacador, que o vulto humano 
 Perdeo, vendo a Diana na agua cldra, 
 Nunca os famlntos galgos o mataram ; 
 Que primeiro desejos o acabaram, 
 
390 PORTUGUESE 
 
 Os crespos fios de ouro se espraziam 
 Pelo colo, que a neve escurecia : 
 Andando, as lacteas tetas lhe tremiam 
 Com quern Amor brincava, e na5 se via : 
 Da alva pretina chamas lhe sahiam, 
 Onde o menfno as almas accendia : 
 Pelas lisas columnas lhe trepavam. 
 Desejos, que como hira se enrolavam. 
 
 Co' hum delgado cendal as partes cobre, 
 De quern vergonha he natural reparo : 
 Porem nem tudo esconde, nem descobre 
 O v£o dos roxos lirios pouco avaro : 
 Mas para que o desejo accenda, e dobre, 
 Lhe poe diante aquelle objecto raro. 
 Ja se sentem no Ceo, por toda a parte, 
 Ci umes em Vulcano, amor em Marte. 
 
 E mostrando no angelico semblante 
 Co' o riso huma tristeza nnist«ra,da ; 
 Como dama que foi do incauto am^nte 
 Em brincos amorosos mal tratada ; 
 Que se queixa, e se ri n' hum mesmo instante, 
 E se mostra entfe alegre magoada ; 
 Desta arte a Deosa, a quern nenhuma igua!a, 
 Mais mimosa que triste a o Padre* fala. 
 
 From the first Idyl of Boccage. 
 
 A'foz do Tejo, em bron'ca penedia, 
 Minada pelas ondns salitrosas, 
 Prisioneiro de amor Tritao gemia. 
 
 Luziao lhe as espadoas escamosas, 
 Sustentava o maritimo instrumento, 
 O buzio atroador nas maos callosas : 
 
EXTRACTS. 391 
 
 Conchas da c^r do Uquido Elemento 
 Parte do corpo enorme lhe vestiao, 
 Igual na ligeireza ao proprio vento : 
 
 Da barba salsas gotas lhe cahia5, 
 E nos olhos, que Amor affogueava, 
 Em borbotoes as lagrimas ferviao 
 
 Lilia que hum Bosque proximo habitava, 
 Lilia a Napea, desdenhosa, e bella, 
 Amorosos clamores lhe arrancava : 
 
 Hum dia a vio na praia, e so de vella 
 Seu coracao feroz enfeiticado, 
 Voou, gemendo, para os olhos della. 
 
 Das entranhas do Pelago salgado, 
 
 Louco de Amores, louco de suadades. 
 O queixoso Amador tinha saltado : 
 
 Do Pai, que abafa as negras tempestades, 
 Ja, seu voraz tormento era sabido, 
 E das outras Equoreas Divindades. 
 
 De aereas esperancas illudido, 
 Grao tempo seu espirito saud6so, 
 Rastejando a cruel, vagou perdido ; 
 
 Grao tempo glorias vaas sonhou teimoso, 
 Antes que desse fructuosa entrada 
 A o acre desengano, o peito ancioso. &c. 
 
 FIM. 
 
 T. C. HANSARD, Paternoster- Row Press. 
 
4 
 
 lSja> 
 
 23 
 
 UBF»"06 
 
Deacidified using the Bookkeeper proceaj 
 Neutralizing agent: Magnesium Oxide 
 Treatment Date: Sept. 2006 
 
 PreservationTechnologieS 
 
 A WORLD LEADER IN PAPER PRESERVATI^ 
 
 1 1 1 Thomson Park Drive 
 Cranberry Township, PA 16066 
 (724)779-2111 
 
LIBRARY OF CONGRESS 
 
 
 III! 
 
 1111111111111111 
 
 
 00022&.A3111